GM 50 Flashcards

Question 1

Q

Procedure 303 – Disciplinary Procedures

When handling a call for service or interacting with a member of the public and a member of that public, including but not limited to a complainant, witness, suspect, reporting person, etc., requests to speak to a supervisor, officers _________________ contact and inform an on-duty supervisor of such request through the dispatcher.

Answer

A

shall immediately

The supervisor may initially communicate with the “requesting person” over the telephone to determine whether the supervisor’s presence is needed.
The supervisor will record his/her actions in a written report.

Question 2

Q

Procedure 303 – Disciplinary Procedures
.04 LINE COMPLAINTS C

Anything less than a _________________ is not considered discipline.

Answer

A

one (1) day suspension

Question 3

Q

.04 LINE COMPLAINTS

Line Supervisory “________” Complaint - The complainant requests contact by the sworn member’s supervisor;

Question 4

Q

.04 LINE COMPLAINTS

Line Supervisory “_______” Complaint - The complainant does not wish to be contacted by a supervisor but relates a potentially substantive problem or relates only nonspecific or general information.

Question 5

Q

Line complaints

The sworn member’s immediate supervisor initially addresses line complaints, generally resulting in complainant satisfaction from the supervisor’s initial contact.

When appropriate, the Section Commander, with concurrence from the Division Commander, addresses the sworn member’s behavior with counseling, a written reprimand, or a suspension of up to three calendar days.

The complainant should always be reminded that they may also contact the ___________________ if they are not satisfied with the immediate supervisor’s response.

Answer

A

Internal Affairs Unit

Question 6

Q

Line Complaints

Complaints investigated through the chain of command ______ the officer to have an attorney present during interviews with their commanding officer.

Answer

A

do not entitle

Question 7

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

The sanctity of human life and individual liberties are immeasurable elements of modern society which vests police officers with the responsibility for the preservation and protection of its paramount values.
In the vehicle pursuit of this responsibility, officers maintain the understanding that protection of property and apprehension of criminal offenders is ____________________________________.

Answer

A

subservient to the protection of life, including their own.

Question 8

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

The San Antonio Police Department requires its ___________ to exhibit a sense of prudent judgment derived from departmental training, acquired knowledge, skills, and ability in the operation of all emergency vehicles.

Question 9

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

Officers _______ attempt a traffic stop on all suspect vehicles fleeing the scene of or having involvement in a crime, absent exigent circumstances that require the officer’s immediate attention.

Question 10

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

Following a subject vehicle for more than ___________ requires supervisory approval.
However, once a subject vehicle speeds away or takes any evasive action in an effort to distance itself from police, regardless of whether emergency warning device have been activated, the officer shall immediately discontinue following the vehicle unless it meets the criteria for a vehicle pursuit as described in this policy;

__________: Means to drive behind a subject vehicle without using emergency warning devices or any other method of instruction to stop by the officer. The police vehicle must adhere to traffic laws and traffic control devices.

Answer

A

fifteen (15) minutes

Follow(ing)

However, once a subject vehicle speeds away or takes any evasive action in an effort to distance itself from police, regardless of whether emergency warning device have been activated, the officer shall immediately discontinue following the vehicle unless it meets the criteria for a vehicle pursuit as described in this policy;

Question 11

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

____________: Means the intentional movement of authorized vehicles in front of and behind the suspect vehicle when the vehicle is at or near a complete stop to prevent the suspect vehicle from fleeing. Incidental contact of the vehicles may occur if the suspect vehicle attempts to flee and ___________ be considered a chargeable accident.

Answer

A

Boxing-In

should not

Question 12

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

______________: Means the intentional contact between the front quarter panel of a moving police vehicle and the rear quarter panel of a moving suspect vehicle.
The intention is to cause a controlled spin of the suspect vehicle away from its forward direction, thus safely curtailing the flight of the vehicle.

This is _____ to be considered a chargeable accident.

Answer

A

Precision Immobilization Technique (PIT)

not

Question 13

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

_____________ are held accountable for the consequences of reckless disregard for the safety of others and violations of this procedure.

Answer

A

Officers

The San Antonio Police Department requires its officers to exhibit a sense of prudent judgment derived from departmental training, acquired knowledge, skills, and ability in the operation of all emergency vehicles.

Question 14

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

05 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

Officers operating emergency vehicles must exercise sound judgment, carefully consider the facts, and weigh the seriousness of the offense against the consequences of jeopardizing the safety of others by continually evaluating the following existing environmental factors when deciding to pursue:

Answer

A

Time of day and day of week;
Lighting conditions;
Volume of traffic, both pedestrian and vehicular;
Type of roadway;
Condition of the roadway (i.e., dry, wet, paved, or gravel);
Weather conditions (i.e., clear, overcast, rain, or fog);
Condition of the emergency vehicle and fleeing vehicle;
Speeds of the emergency vehicle and fleeing vehicle;
Length and duration of the vehicle pursuit;
Types of traffic control signals or devices; and
School zones or areas where large crowds gather.

Question 15

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

.06 EMERGENCY RESPONSE MANAGEMENT

A. General Rules: When necessary, officers should take appropriate actions to minimize opportunities for flight by a driver to include sound tactics (car placement), coordination with other units/officers in the area, and remain in constant communication with dispatch to ensure the availability of resources and oversight.

These General Rules include:

Answer

A

Only emergency vehicles will be utilized for vehicle pursuits and/or stop techniques. Use of Tactical Vehicle Intervention techniques by other than emergency vehicles, must by authorized by specific unit standard operating procedures (SOP).
Officers will not drive emergency vehicles the wrong way on an expressway, an expressway exit or entrance ramp, a divided highway, or any other street or highway designated for one-way traffic; however, officers may be momentarily facing the wrong way at the completion of a PIT or while performing a non-traditional high risk stop; and
Officers will not transport prisoners, witnesses, suspects, complainants, or any person who is not a member of the Department who has not signed SAPD Form #166-AR, Civilian Observer Authorization and Release, when driving emergency vehicles in emergency operations.

Question 16

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

Officers authorized to engage in vehicle pursuits may utilize emergency vehicles for emergency operations, provided:

Answer

A

The emergency lights and siren are activated;
Officers will reduce speed at all traffic control devices which require a stop under normal driving conditions and in consideration to vehicular and pedestrian traffic (i.e., stop signs, red lights, and flashing red lights) and proceed when it can be done safely;
Officers will reduce speed for vehicles and pedestrians at intersections marked by yield signs or yellow flashing lights and proceed when it can be done safely;
Officers will reduce speed and proceed when it can be done safely when driving emergency vehicles in vehicle pursuits through or into school zones during normal school hours or into areas where large crowds are known to congregate, such as city parks and outdoor public events; and
Officers will exercise due regard for the safety of all persons.

Question 17

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

B. Vehicle Pursuit Management:

A managing supervisor will determine the number of emergency vehicles engaged in a vehicle pursuit to a maximum of ________, inclusive of the primary and secondary vehicle.

Question 18

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
B. Vehicle Pursuit Management:

Vehicles not normally used for patrol and/or traffic enforcement (prisoner transport wagons, etc.) __________ engage in vehicle pursuits.

Answer

A

shall not

Question 19

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
B. Vehicle Pursuit Management:

Officers will not continue a vehicle pursuit or assist in a vehicle pursuit unless _______________________ to continue the vehicle pursuit or assist is received from the managing supervisor

Answer

A

immediate authorization

Question 20

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
B. Vehicle Pursuit Management:

Officers will not engage in _____________________ a pursued vehicle.

Answer

A

paralleling,
ramming,
caravanning,
or driving alongside

Question 21

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
B. Vehicle Pursuit Management:

Officers will NOT set up ____________.

Answer

A

Roadblocks

Question 22

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
B. Vehicle Pursuit Management:

Emergency vehicles without roof-mounted emergency lights and two (2) wheeled motorcycles __________ a vehicle pursuit when an emergency vehicle with roof-mounted emergency lights enters the vehicle pursuit.

Answer

A

must abandon

Question 23

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
B. Vehicle Pursuit Management:

If a vehicle pursuit is terminated by the officer in the primary vehicle, the managing supervisor, or the direction of a dispatcher, _____________.

Answer

A

all officers shall discontinue the vehicle pursuit

This does NOT conflict with
Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

B. Secondary Vehicle Driver Responsibilities:
5. Becomes the primary vehicle if the primary vehicle abandons the vehicle pursuit

“Termination Vs Abandoned”

Question 24

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
B. Vehicle Pursuit Management:

When any officer, supervisor, or dispatcher announces that a vehicle pursuit is terminated, all assigned officers _______ turn off all emergency warning lights and siren, slow down and adhere to all traffic laws and traffic control devices.

The officers in the vehicle pursuit ______ notify the dispatcher of their location.

Answer

A

shall

Question 25

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
B. Vehicle Pursuit Management:

Once a vehicle pursuit is terminated, officers must receive authorization from a supervisor to continue to follow the vehicle, and if authorization is granted, the vehicle may only be followed as a Code-One response, while adhering to _________________________.

Answer

A

all traffic laws and traffic control devices.

Question 26

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.09 OPERATION OF EMERGENCY VEHICLES IN VEHICLE PURSUITS

A. Vehicle pursuits involve hazardous circumstances and environmental factors which create a high risk for the officers involved, as well as citizens within the vicinity of the vehicle pursuit.

Officers must weigh the hazardous circumstances and environmental factors associated with a vehicle pursuit against the possibilities of serious bodily injury or death to other motorists, pedestrians, the pursuing officers, and the offender.

Officers must understand there is a point at which the ______________ of apprehending a suspect.

Answer

A

risks outweigh the benefits

Question 27

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.09 OPERATION OF EMERGENCY VEHICLES IN VEHICLE PURSUITS

B. The following situations determine when a vehicle pursuit will not be initiated and when a vehicle pursuit may be continued.

Situations where officers will not engage in a vehicle pursuit:

Answer

A

a. Vehicle pursuits are not authorized for traffic infractions, ordinance violations, non-violent misdemeanors (not involving the use of firearms), and non-violent felonies.
b. For the purpose of this procedure, fleeing from an officer is not considered a violent felony; therefore, vehicle pursuits are NOT authorized based on the fact that the vehicle is fleeing; and
c. The individuals fleeing are suspects only and the actual crime has not been determined.

Question 28

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.09 OPERATION OF EMERGENCY VEHICLES IN VEHICLE PURSUITS

B. The following situations determine when a vehicle pursuit will not be initiated and when a vehicle pursuit may be continued.

Situations where vehicle pursuits, if initiated, MAY be continued, depending on the hazardous circumstances and environmental factors:

Answer

A

a. The occupant(s) has committed, is committing, or is about to commit a violent felony offense (i.e. Aggravated Robbery or Aggravated Assault, and/or other crimes against a person in which VIOLENCE is an element to the FELONY offense);
b. The occupant(s) has committed or is committing a violent misdemeanor offense INVOLVING the use of a FIREARM; or
c. The occupant(s) is known to be wanted under an active warrant for a VIOLENT FELONY offense;

Question 29

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Primary Vehicle Driver Responsibilities:

Answer

A

Activates the vehicle emergency warning devices from the point at which the officer engages in the vehicle pursuit until its termination;
Immediately notifies the dispatcher of the location, direction of travel, speed, reason for the vehicle pursuit, the presence of other law enforcement agencies, the description of the vehicle being pursued, and the number of occupants;
Provides updated information regarding the direction of travel, speed, and other pertinent details. Radio transmissions are kept as short as possible to allow communication between the dispatcher, managing supervisor, and assisting officers;
Terminates the vehicle pursuit if authorization is not immediately received from the managing supervisor;
Terminates the vehicle pursuit if radio contact with the dispatcher is lost;
Terminates the vehicle pursuit if the hazardous circumstances or environmental factors present an unreasonable risk to public safety; and
Abandons the vehicle pursuit if any mechanical problems develop in the primary vehicle.

Question 30

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

B. Secondary Vehicle Driver Responsibilities:

Answer

A

5 Does NOT conflict with:

The first officer arriving to assist the primary vehicle driver notifies the dispatcher and becomes the secondary vehicle driver;
The officer must receive immediate authorization from the managing supervisor or dispatch supervisor to assist in the vehicle pursuit;
Activates the secondary vehicle’s emergency warning devices from the point at which the secondary vehicle enters the vehicle pursuit until its termination.
The secondary vehicle’s siren may be deactivated if it interferes with radio communications;
Follows the primary vehicle at a safe distance and assumes the radio communication responsibilities for the primary vehicle driver;
Becomes the primary vehicle if the primary vehicle abandons the vehicle pursuit; and
Abandons the vehicle pursuit if any mechanical problems develop in the secondary vehicle.

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
B. Vehicle Pursuit Management:

If a vehicle pursuit is terminated by the officer in the primary vehicle, the managing supervisor, or the direction of a dispatcher, all officers shall discontinue the vehicle pursuit

“Termination Vs Abandoned”

Question 31

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

C. Managing Supervisor Responsibilities:

If a Supervisor engages in a vehicle pursuit, then another supervisory officer (regardless of rank) must be identified as the managing supervisor and _____________________ the vehicle pursuit;

Answer

A

must approve and manage

Question 32

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

C. Managing Supervisor Responsibilities:

________________ authorizes continuation or orders termination of the vehicle pursuit depending on the hazardous circumstances and environmental factors present as stated by the primary vehicle driver;

Answer

A

Immediately

Question 33

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

C. Managing Supervisor Responsibilities:

Ensures not more than _______ emergency vehicles are engaged in a vehicle pursuit;

Question 34

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

C. Managing Supervisor Responsibilities:

Ensures the Helicopter Detail, if available, is notified.
Once a police helicopter has a pursued vehicle in sight, the managing supervisor may authorize the continuation of the vehicle pursuit based on the following circumstances:

Answer

A

a. The severity of the offense;
b. The number of occupants in the suspect vehicle;
c. The likelihood of the suspects being armed;
d. The preservation of physical evidence; or
e. Other justifications which can be articulated.

Question 35

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

C. Managing Supervisor Responsibilities:

Directs the tactics of the vehicle pursuit;
Constantly evaluates the vehicle pursuit;
Assigns additional officers to assist with traffic control, accident investigation, foot pursuit, and/or perimeter security if the termination ends with the apprehension of the vehicle or subjects; and
Orders the termination of a vehicle pursuit at any time hazardous circumstances or environmental factors present an ___________ to public safety;

Answer

A

unreasonable risk

Question 36

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

C. Managing Supervisor Responsibilities:

Supervisors WILL be held accountable for failing to respond when notified by the dispatcher and assuming the responsibilities of the managing supervisor.

When notified by the dispatcher, supervisors shall take the responsibility of the managing supervisor regardless of the unit of assignment of the primary or secondary vehicle in the vehicle pursuit.

Accountability extends for failing to terminate vehicle pursuits when hazardous circumstances or environmental factors would cause a __________________ in the same circumstances to reasonably believe an unreasonable risk to public safety exists;

Answer

A

reasonable and prudent person

Question 37

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

C. Managing Supervisor Responsibilities:

Accountability for ensuring the procedural guidelines governing vehicle pursuits are complied with shall rest with the __________________ monitoring or responding to the vehicle pursuit.

While the _________________ monitoring the vehicle pursuit oversees it, this does not relieve the managing supervisor of his/her assigned procedural tasks and responsibilities of the vehicle pursuit.

Answer

A

highest ranking officer

Question 38

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

D. Helicopter Detail Responsibilities:

The Helicopter Detail, when available and weather conditions permitting, responds to all vehicle pursuits.
The Helicopter Detail shall utilize its airborne video equipment to record all vehicle pursuits and entailing foot chases until ____________.

Answer

A

officers secure the actor(s).

Question 39

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

E. Dispatcher and Communications Supervisor Responsibilities:

Ensures the handling dispatcher assigns a managing supervisor and secondary vehicle to the vehicle pursuit, and records the identity of other officers assigned to the vehicle pursuit;
Affirms the dispatchers on other affected communication channels provide their officers with information relative to the vehicle pursuit;
Apprises the managing supervisor of any traffic problems relative to the vehicle pursuit; and
Assigns a radio frequency __________ for the use of the officers involved in a vehicle pursuit, if necessary;
Announces the termination of a vehicle pursuit at the direction of the managing supervisor or ___________ of a managing supervisor.

Answer

A

specifically (This NEVER has happened)

in the absence

Question 40

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

F. Vehicle Pursuit into another Jurisdiction:

The vehicle pursuit will terminate at the Bexar County line, except when continued vehicle pursuit is authorized by the managing supervisor;
When a vehicle pursuit enters into another jurisdiction, the secondary vehicle driver notifies the managing supervisor and dispatcher;
The dispatcher notifies the appropriate law enforcement agency of the vehicle description, circumstances of the vehicle pursuit, and if assistance is requested;
In all vehicle pursuits which end in the apprehension of the offender outside of Bexar County, the offender is taken, without unnecessary delay, before a magistrate of the county in which the arrest is made; and
The ranking on duty officer is notified of all vehicle pursuits which continue out of Bexar County.
If the offender is apprehended, the arresting officer waits for the arrival of the __________ and ____________ from that jurisdiction;

Answer

A

managing supervisor and an officer

Question 41

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.10 VEHICLE PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES

G. Vehicle pursuit into San Antonio from Other Jurisdictions:

Communications:
a. Maintains liaison with other law enforcement agencies involved in vehicle pursuits which enter into the City of San Antonio; and
b. Assigns a managing supervisor to supervise the Department’s officers in their assistance with the vehicle pursuit.
Managing Supervisor:
a. Determines the number of police vehicles from the outside agency involved in the vehicle pursuit;
b. Determines if assistance is specifically requested by the initiating jurisdiction;
c. Determines if assistance from the Department is required;
d. Notifies the Helicopter Detail, if available, to respond;
f. Assigns an officer as the secondary unit if there is only one (1) outside agency marked police vehicle involved in the vehicle pursuit;
g. Assigns officers to assist with traffic control, accident investigation, foot pursuit, and/or perimeter security at the scene of termination;
h. Terminates the SAPD officer’s involvement if the actions of officers from another agency present an unreasonable risk to public safety; and
i. Submits a written report, with SAPD case number, giving the details of the vehicle pursuit and the names of all SAPD officers involved in the vehicle pursuit.
e. The Managing Supervisor DOES NOT assign officers to engage in the vehicle pursuit if there are _______ marked police vehicles from outside agencies already engaged in the vehicle pursuit;

Answer

A

two (2) marked police vehicles from outside agencies

Question 42

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

A. Traffic Stop: A stop or an attempted stop by an officer, while driving an emergency vehicle with lights and sirens activated, to apprehend the occupant(s) of a vehicle who are not evading arrest or violating any traffic laws. (i.e., going off-road, disregarding traffic controls, turning off vehicle lights, and/or weaving in/out of traffic), or similar actions.

B. Boxing–In: Officers during their shift may encounter a vehicle that the driver is considered to be down and out (loss of mental and physical faculties) and may place their emergency vehicle in front of and or behind the suspect vehicle (if a cover officer is present) in an attempt to stop the suspect vehicle from fleeing, prior to the officer making contact with the driver.
This placement of the officer’s emergency or authorized vehicle may also be done when during a pursuit, the suspect vehicle comes to a stop and an opportunity presents itself to box-in the suspect vehicle from continuing its possible flight thus ending the pursuit.
Officers shall be aware that this technique could put them in a potentially disadvantageous tactical position and shall adhere to sound tactics to seek cover and prevent crossfires.
This intentional movement of authorized vehicles during this maneuver may incur incidental contact of the vehicles if the suspect vehicle attempts to flee and should not be considered a chargeable accident.

C. Use of Tire Deflation Device: Officers who have completed the SAPD Precision Driving Unit Tire Deflation Device (TDD) training, with approval from a supervisor, may deploy a Tire Deflation Device in accordance with appropriate SOP.

D. Precision Immobilization Technique (PIT): Officers who have successfully completed the SAPD Precision Driving Unit PIT training may deploy the PIT maneuver as per their training with supervisor approval.
An officer may employ the PIT maneuver without supervisory approval based on exigent circumstances.
The officer shall be required to justify the exigency that led to their actions.
The use of the PIT maneuver shall be accomplished in accordance with the appropriate unit SOP.

The above listed actions are:

Answer

A

.11 TACTICAL VEHICLE INTERVENTIONS (TVI)

Question 43

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.11 TACTICAL VEHICLE INTERVENTIONS (TVI)

B. Boxing–In: Officers during their shift may encounter a vehicle that the driver is considered to be down and out (loss of mental and physical faculties) and may place their emergency vehicle in front of and or behind the suspect vehicle (if a cover officer is present) in an attempt to stop the suspect vehicle from fleeing, prior to the officer making contact with the driver.

Officers shall be aware that this technique could put them in a potentially disadvantageous tactical position and shall adhere to sound tactics to seek cover and prevent crossfires.

This intentional movement of authorized vehicles during this maneuver may incur incidental contact of the vehicles if the suspect vehicle attempts to flee and * should not* be considered a chargeable accident.

This placement of the officer’s emergency or authorized vehicle may also be done when during a pursuit, the suspect vehicle comes to a stop and __________________ to box-in the suspect vehicle from continuing its possible flight thus ending the pursuit.

Answer

A

an opportunity presents itself

Another “PacMan” rule

Question 44

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

.12 REQUIRED REPORTS

A. All officers who are engaged in a vehicle pursuit, who are assigned to assist in a vehicle pursuit, or who participate in a vehicle pursuit, including officers who are near the location of where the vehicle pursuit concluded, will submit written reports to the ___________ regardless of whether the vehicle pursuit was abandoned, terminated, or the offender was apprehended.

Answer

A

managing supervisor

Question 45

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
C. Managing Supervisor Responsibilities:

Ensures the Helicopter Detail, if available, is notified. Once a police helicopter has a pursued vehicle in sight, the managing supervisor may authorize the continuation of the vehicle pursuit based on the following circumstances:

Answer

A

a. The severity of the offense;
b. The number of occupants in the suspect vehicle;
c. The likelihood of the suspects being armed;
d. The preservation of physical evidence; or
e. Other justifications which can be articulated.

Question 46

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
D. Helicopter Detail Responsibilities:

The Helicopter Detail, when available and weather conditions permitting, responds to all vehicle pursuits.
The Helicopter Detail shall utilize its airborne video equipment to record all vehicle pursuits and entailing foot chases until ________________.

Answer

A

until officers secure the actor(s).

Question 47

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

E. Dispatcher and Communications Supervisor Responsibilities:

Answer

A

Ensures the handling dispatcher assigns a managing supervisor and secondary vehicle to the vehicle pursuit, and records the identity of other officers assigned to the vehicle pursuit;
Affirms the dispatchers on other affected communication channels provide their officers with information relative to the vehicle pursuit;
Assigns a radio frequency specifically for the use of the officers involved in a vehicle pursuit, if necessary;
Apprises the managing supervisor of any traffic problems relative to the vehicle pursuit; and
Announces the termination of a vehicle pursuit at the direction of the managing supervisor or in the absence of a managing supervisor.

Question 48

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

F. Vehicle Pursuit into another Jurisdiction:

The vehicle pursuit will terminate at the Bexar County line, except when continued vehicle pursuit is authorized by the managing supervisor;
When a vehicle pursuit enters into another jurisdiction, the secondary vehicle driver notifies the managing supervisor and dispatcher;
The dispatcher notifies the appropriate law enforcement agency of the vehicle description, circumstances of the vehicle pursuit, and if assistance is requested;
If the offender is apprehended, the arresting officer waits for the arrival of the managing supervisor and an officer from that jurisdiction;
In all vehicle pursuits which end in the apprehension of the offender outside of Bexar County, the offender is taken, without unnecessary delay, before a magistrate of the county in which the arrest is made; and
The _________________ is notified of all vehicle pursuits which continue out of Bexar County.

Answer

A

ranking on duty officer (Night-Commander)

Question 49

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

G. Vehicle pursuit into San Antonio from Other Jurisdictions:

Communications:
a. Maintains liaison with other law enforcement agencies involved in vehicle pursuits which enter into the City of San Antonio; and
b. Assigns a managing supervisor to supervise the Department’s officers in their assistance with the vehicle pursuit.
Managing Supervisor:
a. Determines the number of police vehicles from the outside agency involved in the vehicle pursuit;
b. Determines if assistance is specifically requested by the initiating jurisdiction;
c. Determines if assistance from the Department is required;
d. Notifies the Helicopter Detail, if available, to respond.
f. Assigns an officer as the secondary unit if there is only one (1) outside agency marked police vehicle involved in the vehicle pursuit;
g. Assigns officers to assist with traffic control, accident investigation, foot pursuit, and/or perimeter security at the scene of termination;
h. Terminates the SAPD officer’s involvement if the actions of officers from another agency present an unreasonable risk to public safety; and
i. Submits a written report, with SAPD case number, giving the details of the vehicle pursuit and the names of all SAPD officers involved in the vehicle pursuit.
e. The managing supervisor DOES NOT assign officers to engage in the vehicle pursuit if there are _______ from outside agencies already engaged in the vehicle pursuit;

Answer

A

two (2) marked police vehicles

Question 50

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques.
.11 TACTICAL VEHICLE INTERVENTIONS (TVI)

B. Boxing–In: Officers during their shift may encounter a vehicle that the driver is considered to be down and out (loss of mental and physical faculties) and may place their emergency vehicle in front of and or behind the suspect vehicle (if a cover officer is present) in an attempt to stop the suspect vehicle from fleeing, prior to the officer making contact with the driver.

This placement of the officer’s emergency or authorized vehicle MAY also be done when during a pursuit, the suspect vehicle comes to a stop and an opportunity presents itself to box-in the suspect vehicle from continuing its possible flight thus ending the pursuit.

Officers shall be aware that this technique could put them in a potentially disadvantageous tactical position and shall adhere to sound tactics to seek cover and prevent crossfires.

This intentional movement of authorized vehicles during this maneuver may incur incidental contact of the vehicles if the suspect vehicle attempts to flee and ___________ be considered a chargeable accident.

Answer

A

should not

Question 51

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.11 TACTICAL VEHICLE INTERVENTIONS (TVI)

A supervisor must authorize the use of a TVI technique unless _____________________ dictate immediate action without prior approval.

Answer

A

exigent circumstances

Officers employing such TVI techniques without supervisory approval shall be required to justify the exigency that led to their actions.

Question 52

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.11 TACTICAL VEHICLE INTERVENTIONS (TVI)

TACTICAL VEHICLE INTERVENTIONS (TVI) includes:

Answer

A

A. Traffic Stop:

B. Boxing–In:

C. Use of Tire Deflation Device:

D. Precision Immobilization Technique (PIT):

Question 53

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.11 TACTICAL VEHICLE INTERVENTIONS (TVI)

D. Precision Immobilization Technique (PIT):

An officer may employ the PIT maneuver without supervisory approval based on exigent circumstances.

The officer shall be required to justify the exigency that led to their actions.

The use of the PIT maneuver shall be accomplished in accordance with the appropriate unit SOP.

Officers who have successfully completed the _______________ may deploy the PIT maneuver as per their training with supervisor approval.

Answer

A

SAPD Precision Driving Unit PIT training

Question 54

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.12 REQUIRED REPORTS

A. All officers who are engaged in a vehicle pursuit, who are assigned to assist in a vehicle pursuit, or who participate in a vehicle pursuit, including officers who are near the location of where the vehicle pursuit concluded, will submit written reports to ________________ regardless of whether the vehicle pursuit was abandoned, terminated, or the offender was apprehended.

Answer

A

the managing supervisor

Question 55

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.12 REQUIRED REPORTS

B. Primary vehicle driver’s report will include:

The reason or probable cause for engaging in the vehicle pursuit;
A description of the pursued vehicle and occupants;
The location where the officer engaged in the vehicle pursuit;
The route of the vehicle pursuit;
A summary of the tactics employed to apprehend the offender;
The point of abandonment or termination of the vehicle pursuit; and
If the offender is apprehended, an account of his involvement in the arrest.
An account of the violations committed by _____________ during the vehicle pursuit;

Answer

A

the offender

Question 56

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.12 REQUIRED REPORTS

C. Secondary vehicle driver’s report will include:

Answer

A

The location where the officer engaged in the vehicle pursuit;
A summary of the tactics employed to apprehend the offender;
The point of abandonment or termination of the vehicle pursuit; and
If the offender is apprehended, an account of his involvement in the arrest.

Question 57

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.12 REQUIRED REPORTS

D. Other officers’ reports will include:

Answer

A

Assigned duties in relation to the vehicle pursuit;
A summary of the tactics he utilized relative to his assigned duties; and
If the offender is apprehended, an account of his involvement in the arrest.

Question 58

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.12 REQUIRED REPORTS

E. Helicopter Detail officers’ reports will include:

Assigned duties in relation to the vehicle pursuit;
A summary indicating if the vehicle pursuit was videotaped and the location of the videotape;
The report is forwarded to his/her chain of command with a copy submitted to the appropriate Division Commander of the officer initiating the vehicle pursuit.
Evaluation of the vehicle pursuit to include ________________;

Answer

A

procedural violations, recommendations for training, and other pertinent concerns in relation to the vehicle pursuit

Question 59

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.12 REQUIRED REPORTS

F. Dispatcher’s report will include:

Answer

A

Time, date, duration, and route of the vehicle pursuit;
Units assigned to include the names and badge numbers of the officers involved;
Managing supervisor assigned;
Vehicle pursuit details to include any difficulties encountered during the vehicle pursuit; and
The report is forwarded to the Communications Supervisor.

Question 60

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.12 REQUIRED REPORTS

G. Managing supervisor’s report will include:

Answer

A

The identity of all officers involved and their assignments relative to the vehicle pursuit;
A summary of any accidents or other incidents arising from or related to the vehicle pursuit;
If he terminates the vehicle pursuit, the time and location the vehicle pursuit was ordered terminated;
Recommendations for any needed corrective or disciplinary actions to include training recommendations.
Pertinent AVL and/or video records to document the need for any corrective or disciplinary actions should be included;
A summary of information obtained from reviewing all available in-car video and the GPS (AVL) records of all officers assigned to the vehicle pursuit, whether they were assigned as the Primary, Secondary, or other duties;
Printouts of pertinent AVL records showing the speed, path and direction of the vehicle pursuit from the Primary, Secondary or any other officers authorized in the vehicle pursuit; and
A summary of pertinent information gathered from reviewing the Audio records from dispatch concerning the vehicle pursuit.

Question 61

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques

.13 FOLLOW-UP RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Managing Supervisor:

Answer

A

As soon as practical after the conclusion of the vehicle pursuit, prepares SAPD Form #103-NEN, Newsworthy Event Notification, and route the form through electronic mail to the following offices:

**a. Office of the Chief;
**b. Applicable Assistant Chief;
**c. Applicable Division Commander:
(1) Patrol Division;
(2) Tactical Support Division; and
**d. Police Media Services Detail.

Collects copies of reports from all officers involved in the vehicle pursuit;
Reviews each report to ensure the required information is in the report;
Conducts an analysis of the vehicle pursuit using the AVL system, video evidence and audio recordings from dispatch as well as the reports submitted by all officers and completes the appropriate section of the SAPD Form #103, Pursuit Evaluation Report; and
Attaches copies of the officers’ reports, including his report, any pertinent AVL records, and a copy of SAPD Form #103-NEN, to the vehicle pursuit evaluation report, and forwards the packet to his shift/unit director.

Question 62

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.13 FOLLOW-UP RESPONSIBILITIES

B. Shift/Unit Director:

Answer

A

Reviews all submitted reports;
Conducts an evaluation of the vehicle pursuit, directing any questions to the managing supervisor.
This evaluation is directed towards identifying violations of policies and procedures and any needed corrective or disciplinary action; and
Completes the appropriate section of the vehicle pursuit evaluation report and forwards it, along with the attached reports, to his section commander.

Question 63

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.13 FOLLOW-UP RESPONSIBILITIES

C. Communications Supervisor:

Answer

A

Reviews the vehicle pursuit report submitted by the handling dispatcher;
Conducts an evaluation of the vehicle pursuit as it relates to dispatch procedures and directs any inquiries back to the dispatcher; and
Completes the appropriate portion of the vehicle pursuit report form noting any additional information on the vehicle pursuit to include procedural violations, training recommendations, and other pertinent information and faxes a copy of the report to the managing supervisor.
The original copy of the report is forwarded to the Communications Director.

Question 64

Q

Procedure 620 – Vehicle Pursuits and Stop Techniques
.13 FOLLOW-UP RESPONSIBILITIES

D. Communications Director:

Answer

A

Completes the appropriate portion of the dispatcher’s vehicle pursuit report and directs any questions back to the Communications Supervisor; and
Forwards a copy of the report to the appropriate Division Commander of the officer initiating the vehicle pursuit.

Answer 59

A

Reviews all submitted reports and shall also be responsible for reviewing all available data (including but not limited to vehicle GPS data, video evidence, and audio tapes maintained by Communications) for the noted vehicle pursuit prior to completing the vehicle pursuit evaluation report;
Conducts an evaluation of the vehicle pursuit, directing any questions to the shift/unit director.
This evaluation is directed towards identifying violations of policies and procedures and any needed corrective or disciplinary action; and
Completes the appropriate section of the vehicle pursuit evaluation report and forwards it, along with the attached reports, to his Division Commander.

Answer 60

A

Reviews all submitted reports;
Shall be responsible for reviewing all available data, including but not limited to vehicle GPS data, video evidence, and audio tapes maintained by the Communications, for the noted vehicle pursuit prior to completing the vehicle pursuit evaluation report;
Conducts an evaluation of the vehicle pursuit, directing any questions to the Section Commander. This evaluation is directed towards identifying violations of policies and procedures and any needed corrective or disciplinary action;
Completes the appropriate section of the vehicle pursuit evaluation report and forwards the vehicle pursuit packet to a Patrol Division Commander for entry into the Pursuit Information Database; and
Forwards a copy of the vehicle pursuit packet to the Internal Affairs Unit, if disciplinary action is recommended.

Answer 61

A

Reason for vehicle pursuit initiation
Number of vehicle pursuits initiated
Number of vehicle pursuits terminated
Number of vehicle pursuits abandoned
Miles covered
Time duration of vehicle pursuit
Speeds involved
Other jurisdictions involved
Arrests/Apprehensions
Hazardous circumstances
Environmental factors as per .05
Risks identified
Policy/Procedure violations
Training Issues identified
Technical difficulties
Crashes
Propertydamage
Injuries

Answer 62

A

two (2) calendar years

one (1) calendar year

After these respective time frames, the entries will no longer show up as return information when checking a license plate.

The following pertinent incident data will be entered into the COMMENTS section of the BOLO notice:

a. Location;
b. Circumstances;
c. CFS number (with Case number, if applicable); and
d. Other data of investigative value.

B. Any Officer involved in a vehicle pursuit where the suspect evades apprehension or where a vehicle pursuit is terminated will ensure the following is done as soon as possible:

The officer will contact the Communications Office and ensure that a BOLO is generated;
The officer will generate a report for the offense of EVADING ARREST OR DETENTION (Penal Code 38.04); and
The officer will forward a copy of the report to the Traffic Investigation Detail (TID).

C. The Traffic Investigations Detail (TID) will be consulted and they will coordinate with Patrol and/or follow-up units handling the primary offense, to ensure timely and accurate handling of any evidence collection and execution of warrants that may be generated.

The follow-up unit assigned to investigate the case is the unit assigned the primary offense of offense that initiated the case, in accordance with Procedure 708, Follow-Up Units.
Vehicles may be impounded as evidence of Evading Arrest or for some other charge, in accordance with Procedure 607, Impounding Vehicles and Procedure 504, Execution of Search Warrants.
TID or the follow-up unit assigned to investigate the case will ensure that the BOLO system is updated, via the Communications Office, when changes to the status of the vehicle pursuit category (Suspect or Arrested) are needed.

Answer 63

A

Law Enforcement Code of Ethics

Answer 64

A

Guiding Principles

Answer 65

A

guidance, regulation, and control of the conduct

These rules are designed to promote efficiency, discipline, and good public relations by setting forth policies governing the conduct and demeanor of every member of the police department, both on- and off-duty.

Answer 66

A

City Manager

Answer 67

A

establish, rescind, or modify

Answer 68

A

disciplinary action or suspend indefinitely

In addition, the Chief of Police shall be empowered to take disciplinary action or suspend indefinitely any other police employee for violation of these rules and regulations.

Answer 69

A

September 25, 1984

November 1, 1984.

Answer 70

A

all employees, both sworn and non-sworn

These rules and regulations, as revised and adopted on July 20, 2015, became effective on August 20, 2015.

Answer 71

A

sworn and non-sworn members

A signed receipt acknowledging acceptance of the rules and regulations shall be deemed sufficient notice of the existence and effect of the Rules and Regulations of the San Antonio Police Department.

Any recommendations for revision should be directed to the Office of the Chief of Police.

Answer 72

A

personal responsibility for enforcing

Answer 73

A

ASSIGNMENT

Answer 74

A

CHAIN-OF-COMMAND

Answer 75

A

DEPARTMENT

Answer 76

A

DEPARTMENTAL ORDERS

DIRECTIVES may be used synonymously with departmental orders.

Answer 77

A

IMMEDIATELY

Answer 78

A

MUST
SHALL
WILL

Answer 79

A

INTOXICANT

I. “INTOXICATION” means any level of mental or physical incapacitation resulting from the voluntary introduction of any alcoholic beverage or controlled substance into the body.

Answer 80

A

MEMBERS

(all employees, both sworn and non-sworn)

Answer 81

A

PROCEDURES

i.e. Standard Operating PROCEDURES

Answer 82

A

SEXUAL CONDUCT

Answer 83

A

SIGNIFICANT BEHAVIORAL INFRACTION

Answer 84

A

SUBORDINATE

SUPERVISORY OFFICERS = sworn personnel of this department who have attained the rank of sergeant or above.

Answer 85

A

TOUR OF DUTY

Answer 86

A

common usage

Answer 87

A

books, records, and reports

Answer 88

A

uniform and impartial

the insurance of conformity on the part of command officers to all orders, directives, and other instructions issued to the members of the department.

Answer 89

A

frequently testing the knowledge of subordinates

Answer 90

A

inspections and briefings

Answer 91

A

keep advised

coordinate

Answer 92

A

residence

Answer 93

A

A. MAINTAIN BOOKS AND RECORDS

B. ENFORCE RULES

C. KEEP INFORMED OF ACTIVITY UNDER
COMMAND

D. DOCUMENT BRIEFINGS AND INSPECTIONS

E. COORDINATE ACTIVITIES WITH OTHER UNITS

F. HAVE UPDATED EMPLOYEE LOCATOR LIST

Answer 94

A

shall

2.03 DIRECTIVE SYSTEM:

All departmental personnel ______ familiarize themselves with the formal means of communications within the
department.

shall

Answer 95

A

shall

Vice, Narcotics other covert operations?

Answer 96

A

police dispatcher

Answer 97

A

supervisory officer

Answer 98

A

clear, understandable language, civil in tone, and issued in pursuit of departmental business

Answer 99

A

knowingly or willfully

Answer 100

A

shall respectfully

If the supervisory officer giving the conflicting order does not change the same, so as to eliminate the conflict, his order shall stand and the responsibility shall rest with the supervisor.

Answer 101

A

orders, rules, regulations, and procedures of the San Antonio Police Department.

E. CONFLICT OF ORDERS (conflict of GM procedures)

Answer 102

A

obey the order to the best of their ability

and ** may** then proceed to appeal as provided herein.

This again conflicts with:
F. OBEDIENCE TO UNLAWFUL ORDERS NOT REQUIRED:
E. CONFLICT OF ORDERS

Answer 103

A

shall

This conflicts with:
G. OBEDIENCE TO UNJUST OR IMPROPER ORDERS:
** may**. then proceed to appeal as provided herein.

Answer 104

A

shall

This conflicts with:
G. OBEDIENCE TO UNJUST OR IMPROPER ORDERS:
** may**. then proceed to appeal as provided herein.

The only explanation is if you decide to appeal, you must do it this way and not contact the FBI or another outside agency.
(Keep their bullshit “in-house”)

But it doesn’t read that way due to:
H. REPORTING UNLAWFUL ORDERS:
This entire group of orders/procedures are conflicting.

Did they read what they wrote?

Answer 105

A

direction, counseling, assistance, and protection of life and property

Answer 106

A

A. IMPARTIAL ATTITUDE
B. COURTESY
C. CONDUCT AND BEHAVIOR
D. DUTY TO IDENTIFY
E. POLICE ACTION WHEN NOT IN UNIFORM
F. NEUTRALITY IN CIVIL ACTIONS
G. MAINTENANCE OF COMPETENCY

Answer 107

A

A. GOOD PHYSICAL HYGIENE
B. MAINTENANCE OF PHYSICAL STANDARDS
C. CHEMICAL DEPENDENCE
D. CONTROLLED SUBSTANCES
E. EMOTIONAL AND PHYSICAL WELL-BEING

Answer 108

A

A. MUTUAL RESPECT
B. COURTESY
C. RESPECT TO SUPERVISORY OFFICERS
D. SUPPORTING FELLOW MEMBERS
E. SUPPORT IN TIME OF DANGER
F. WORKING RELATIONSHIPS

Members: all employees, both sworn and non-sworn!!!

Answer 109

A

A. DEFAMATORY
B. UNDERMINES EFFECTIVENESS OF DEPARTMENT
C. INTERFERES WITH DISCIPLINE
D. AFFECTS PUBLIC CONFIDENCE
E. DAMAGES REPUTATION OF DEPARTMENT
F. DISREGARDS THE TRUTH

Answer 110

A

A. PROGRESS OF INVESTIGATION

B. RELEASE OF PUBLIC STATEMENT

C. PUBLIC ADDRESS OR WRITING FOR PUBLICATION

D. STATEMENTS OF POLICY, ORGANIZATION, AND DISCIPLINARY ACTION

E. RELATIONSHIP WITH ATTORNEY, BONDSMAN, OR AGENT

F. RECOMMENDATION OF ATTORNEY OR AGENT

Answer 111

A

the beginning

and are strongly encouraged to check their departmental email at the end of their tour of duty.

Answer 112

A

two working days

Answer 113

A

for a member to accomplish a specific police assignment or mission, when approved by a supervisor.

Answer 114

A

C) in direct contact with the public

Answer 115

A

subordinate

Answer 116

A

3.15 GRATUITIES, LOANS, AND SOLICITATIONS:
A. ACCEPTING GIFTS: Members shall not receive from prisoners, persons recently released from custody, persons suspected of criminal activity, nor their representatives, either directly or indirectly, any tangible or intangible property, whether it is a gift or the result of a purchase or trade.

B. BORROWING: Members shall not borrow anything of value from any person or persons known or suspected to be engaged in criminal activity.

C. SOLICITATIONS: Members will not solicit funds for the benefit of any member, the Department, or any other public or private agency without the written authority of the Chief of Police.

Answer 117

A

service rendered

Answer 118

A

Chief of Police

whether in uniform or civilian clothes

as though they were on-duty and shall be subject to these rules and regulations

Answer 119

A

plain view

Answer 120

A

person responsible for said equipment or vehicle

Answer 121

A

A. Chief of Police

Answer 122

A

immediate supervisor.

Answer 123

A

supervisor

Answer 124

A

doctor, hospital, or pharmacy

one regular tour of duty

Answer 125

A

continuance or dismissal

Answer 126

A

shall not

division commander

emergency light prominently displayed
and a siren

uniformed officer in a marked vehicle

Answer 127

A

unnecessary

Answer 128

A

The report is for departmental purposes only;
The report will not be used against them in any subsequent criminal investigation or prosecution;
Should they fail to give a written report, a lawful order to do so will be given, and failure to follow such an order will result in disciplinary action.

Answer 129

A

learn and thoroughly understand (LAWS AND ORDINANCES)

familiarize themselves (WRITTEN DIRECTIVES)

general or special order, directive, or other amendment to the rules.

D. LACK OF KNOWLEDGE: Lack of knowledge of such rules or regulations shall never be a defense to any disciplinary action, if said rules or regulations have been disseminated or posted as set forth in the regulations and if the employee has had a reasonable opportunity to become familiar with the rules and regulations.

Answer 130

A

official position

citizen

Answer 131

A

beyond reproach.

furtherance of a member’s duties

Answer 132

A

At target practice;
To destroy an animal in conformance with departmental procedures;
In defense of one’s life or the life of another; or
To hunt wild game, while properly licensed and in conformance with state law.

D. REPORT REQUIRED:
Any officer discharging a weapon accidentally or intentionally, except on the target range or while lawfully hunting wild game, shall immediately report the incident, in writing, to their immediate supervisor.

Answer 133

A

Wear the San Antonio Police Department uniform or any part of the uniform;
Represent themselves as members of the San Antonio Police Department;
Carry or display their San Antonio Police Department badge or identification;
Engage in outside employment which requires an extension of police services; nor any form of outside employment prohibited by existing SAPD General Manual procedures governing outside employment;
Exercise the power or authority of a police officer of the City of San Antonio, Texas.

B. RIGHTS AND PRIVILEGES:
Officers, while under suspension, have only the rights and privileges afforded a private citizen regarding the carrying of any weapon.

Answer 134

A

3.33 ARRESTS IN PERSONAL QUARRELS:
Members, while off-duty, shall not make arrests in quarrels in which they are personally involved or those in which their families are involved, except when immediately necessary to prevent bodily injury or death.

Each officer shall maintain minimum standards for retention of their license issued by the Texas Commission on Law Enforcement.

Answer 135

A

3.35 REPORT AN ARREST, CRIMINAL CHARGE, OR INDICTMENT:
Any member arrested, charged with, or indicted for a state criminal offense, in any state, which is above the level of a *class C misdemeanor or which is a class C misdemeanor and the class C misdemeanor involves the duties and responsibilities of office,* or for a federal criminal offense, must immediately provide the Office of the Chief of Police with written notification of such incident. The member must provide the Office of the Chief of Police with the name of the arresting agency, a description of the nature of the charges, and the style, court and cause number of the charge or indictment, if any.

Each officer shall maintain minimum standards for retention of their license issued by the Texas Commission on Law Enforcement.

Answer 136

A

On-duty;
In uniform;
Working off-duty (extension of police services);
Officially representing the San Antonio Police Department;
In a mentoring capacity (Including, but is not limited to:
(direct supervision, F.T.O., Academy Instructor or Explorer Advisor, etc.)
Using their position with the San Antonio Police Department in any capacity;

Answer 137

A

requested to do so by the officer(s) assigned to handle the incident.

Answer 138

A

immediately and readily available

Answer 139

A

any one place

Answer 140

A

completion of the call

Answer 141

A

assist the public.

🖕 🖕🏿🖕🏽🖕🏾🖕🏼🖕🏻

Answer 142

A

conceal, ignore, distort, or retain

Answer 143

A

A. TRAFFIC CRASH INVOLVING MEMBER: Members, while in a city vehicle, shall immediately report any traffic crashes in which they are involved.

B. ON-DUTY INJURY: Members shall immediately report any personal injuries received in the line-of-duty.

C. OFF-DUTY INJURY: Members shall immediately report any off-duty injuries which are apt to interfere with the performance of duties.

D. INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE CAUSED BY MEMBER: Members shall immediately report all property damage or injuries caused to other persons while in the performance of their duty.

E. INCIDENTS WHERE THE CITY MAY BE LIABLE: Members shall immediately report all incidents in which it appears the City of San Antonio may be liable for damages.

F. DANGER TO PUBLIC HEALTH OR SAFETY: Members shall immediately report any conditions which might endanger the public health or safety.

G. SUIT OR LEGAL PROCESS AGAINST MEMBER: Members shall immediately report any suits or legal processes filed against them by reasons of acts performed by them in the line-of-duty.
Personnel are to bring the original citation to the Office of the Chief and sign a form requesting Legal Representation, which will be forwarded to the City Attorney’s Office.
In the event personnel receive or are served with a suit or legal process after normal business hours, (0745-1630 hours, Monday – Friday), they shall report to the Office of the Chief the next business day with the original citation.

H. DAMAGE TO CITY PROPERTY: Members shall immediately report damage to any city property.

Answer 144

A

notebooks or notepads

Answer 145

A

Matters relating to investigative techniques or procedures;
Opinions or judgments of the officer;
Facts tending to identify suspects or informants;
Information which should be confidential and which relates to a continuing investigation.

Answer 146

A

all persons and 🖕🏻property 🖕🏻from imminent harm

Answer 147

A

stand at attention and place right hand over heart.

Answer 148

A

stand at attention

Answer 149

A

stand at attention and executes a military salute

Answer 150

A

Only to the extent necessary to determine the validity of a complaint or to provide justification for an investigation;
If a violation is occurring and the offender may escape detection if an investigation is delayed.

Answer 151

A

supervisor

“beats” Really are we in the 60’s or the 70’s?

🖕🏽

Answer 152

A

Division Commander

Answer 153

A

Community or external concerns
Departmental or internal concerns
Employee concerns
Community or external concerns:
An open and positive relationship with the citizens of this community must be preserved. Consequently, the Department accepts all complaints, regardless of form, source, or substance, and initiates investigative action appropriate to the seriousness of the complaint.
Departmental or internal concerns:
A consistent and fair disciplinary system supports an effective operational environment. The Department provides corrective action for a member who demonstrates a need for behavioral correction and commends proper conduct and judgment.
Employee concerns:
Members should have a reasonable expectation they may exercise prudent judgment in a fair, lawful, and impartial manner while in the proper discharge of their duties and an expeditious and equitable process of disciplinary review will evaluate their actions.

Answer 154

A

officers shall immediately contact and inform an on-duty supervisor of such request through the dispatcher.

The supervisor may initially communicate with the requesting person over the telephone

Answer 155

A

(Anything less than a one (1) day suspension is not considered discipline.)

Line complaints = minor variance

Answer 156

A

significant variance

Activities that deal with significant behavioral infractions;
Any conduct that if proven would constitute a crime;
Any conduct that exhibits the potential to require stringent disciplinary action in the form of a suspension that exceeds three (3) calendar days;
Any allegation of harassment/discrimination;
Any allegation of racial profiling;
Any allegation of unnecessary or excessive force;
Any other incident that may require formal disciplinary proceedings in order to be properly resolved.

Answer 157

A

The request must be made in writing to the Office of Chief with a copy of the formal complaint notification attached.
Both the sworn member and the Chief must agree to submit the matter to the expedited disciplinary track for an expedited disciplinary finding.
Any disciplinary action must be agreed upon by the sworn member and the Chief, and must be enacted within thirty (30) calendar days of the agreement.
* sixty (60)* calendar days of the expiration of the complaint’s one-hundred and eighty (180) calendar day timeline

Answer 158

A

Call response times – Not due to an officer’s negligence;
Handling of a civil matter – Due to Department policy or civil law;
Discretionary call screening;
Unavailability or delay of other police services;
Any other complaint that does not involve officer misconduct.

Answer 159

A

Administration

Blue Team

Answer 160

A

Blue Team

Answer 161

A

line supervisory “Type A or B”

a. Type A - Contact and interview the complainant in accordance with Section .10;
b. Type B – Although the complainant does not wish to be contacted, the supervisor shall attempt to contact and encourage feedback regarding the Departmental action taken by utilizing the following standardized statement and question:
(1) Statement: it is the policy of our Department to contact you regarding your complaint to let you know how your complaint was resolved,
(2) Question: How would you like to be contacted?

Answer 162

A

a. Immediately notify the Section Commanders or Unit Directors of any cases where an officer is involved in allegations of suspected criminal activity
* specific rule, regulation, policy, or procedure violated*, nor will they make recommendations as to punishment.

either no disciplinary action is necessary or the complaint should be forwarded to the Internal Affairs Unit for further investigation.

Answer 163

A

three (3) day suspension (with concurrence of the division commander)

Answer 164

A

temporarily relieve from duty

Answer 165

A

line complaint

formal complaint

Answer 166

A

division commanders

Complaint and Administrative Review Board (CARB).

forty-eight (48) hours prior to being interrogated

attorney or representative

Answer 167

A

** F. Homicide Unit **

Answer 168

A

Complaint and Administrative Review Board

Answer 169

A

ultimate discretion

Basically, Does whatever they want.
still answers to City manager/mayor/etc… the peeps…

Answer 170

A

The interviews shall occur at a time and place reasonable under the circumstances;
Complainants shall be advised the Department may not implement formal disciplinary actions against sworn members without signed, sworn complaints, although oral complaints may receive supervisory review appropriate to the nature or severity of the allegations;
Written statements shall be taken only by supervisory officers assigned to the Internal Affairs Unit.?

Answer 171

A

The interviews shall occur at a time and place reasonable under the circumstances;
Obtain written documentation from subordinates who witnessed, or are the subject of a complaint, utilizing Form#200-OR, Officer’s Response to a Complaint, to include details regarding all relevant issues such as how, when, where, and why the alleged conduct took place.
A sworn member may, at his option, request a supervisory officer accompany him to a complaint interview, if the interview is conducted by the Internal Affairs Unit. This request is not binding on the supervisory officer;
A sworn member who is subjected to an interview by a supervisory officer in the course of a non-criminal complaint investigation shall submit a report immediately upon request.
The report shall be written on SAPD Form #200-OR, Officer’s Response to a Complaint, and submitted to the supervisory officer.

Answer 172

A

Submit a written or audio/video report;
Answer interrogatories;
Provide physical evidence;
Otherwise cooperate in any manner with Internal Affairs Unit personnel during an investigation.

Answer 173

A

administrative tool

complainant if the complainant agrees

in uniform or in direct sight

Answer 174

A

may

personally prepared

Answer 175

A

subordinates

Internal Affairs Unit

Answer 176

A

Field Counseling

is issued to an officer by a immediate supervisor using SAPD Form 6-CR with the approval of his/her supervisor. (i.e., A Lieutenant would approve a Sergeant’s issuance of a field counseling.)

Answer 177

A

Written Counseling/Reprimand

++ but a Lieutenant or higher must sign the Written Counseling and a Captain or higher must sign the Written Reprimand. ++

Answer 178

A

use of force, bodily injury, and unlawful search and seizure

Answer 179

A

his initial probationary period

twelve months

Answer 180

A

Tex. Code of Crim. Pro. - Art. 14.06

Texas Code of Criminal Procedure

Answer 181

A

least intrusive/severe method

Answer 182

A

States in the offense report the reasons why physical arrest was appropriate.

Does NOT have to get authorization from Supervisor/Sgt

Answer 183

A

only one (1) charge per Misdemeanor Citation.

a. For San Antonio Municipal Court Misdemeanor Citations:
1) 17 and older – count 50 calendar days and then assign on a Monday through Friday
2) 16 and younger – count 50 calendar days and then assign on a Monday through Thursday.
b. For Bexar County Courts:
1) Set Date of Appearance 10 calendar days from Issue Date of citation.

Answer 184

A

any evidentiary photographs

Answer 185

A

The violator has been previously convicted of theft;
A situation listed in Subsection .05A is apparent.

.05 RESTRICTIONS FOR USE

A. The Misdemeanor/Cite and Release Citation release is not authorized in any of the following cases:

misdemeanor thefts, other than thefts from businesses;
The person arrested demands an immediate appearance before a magistrate;
The person is arrested on a warrant or has outstanding warrants against him;
The safety of the person arrested or the safety of others may be jeopardized by his release;
The arrested person fails or refuses to give Sufficient identification;
The person arrested is intoxicated to a degree which renders him unable to care for himself;
The person arrested is injured and has not received the required medical attention;
Any time when physical force is used to affect the arrest;
Class “B” offense of racing, exhibition of speed or acceleration, and reckless driving (exceed Municipal Court jurisdiction);
The violator refuses to sign the Misdemeanor/Cite and Release Citation.

Answer 186

A

Notifies the owner, arresting agent, and witnesses a Misdemeanor Citation will be issued;
Advises the owner, arresting agent, and witnesses they may be subpoenaed to be present for trial;
Lists the names of the owner, arresting agent, and witnesses on the offense report;
Escorts the violator out of the place of business and off of the property after the Misdemeanor Citation is issued;
Typically, a criminal trespass warning is issued and should be documented in the report.

Answer 187

A

A. The Misdemeanor/Cite and Release Citation release is not authorized in any of the following cases:

misdemeanor thefts, other than thefts from businesses;
The person arrested demands an immediate appearance before a magistrate;
The person is arrested on a warrant or has outstanding warrants against him;
The safety of the person arrested or the safety of others may be jeopardized by his release;
The arrested person fails or refuses to give Sufficient identification;
The person arrested is intoxicated to a degree which renders him unable to care for himself;
The person arrested is injured and has not received the required medical attention;
Any time when physical force is used to affect the arrest;
Class “B” offense of racing, exhibition of speed or acceleration, and reckless driving (exceed Municipal Court jurisdiction);
The violator refuses to sign the Misdemeanor/Cite and Release Citation.

Answer 188

A

B. Eligible Offenses for Cite and Release (no other offenses are eligible for Cite and Release)

Possession of Marijuana 4 ounces or less….. to include - Possession of Marijuana “2 ounces or less” (MA/MB) HSC 481.121 (b)(1)(2)

Possession of Substance in Penalty Group 2-A 4 ounces or less….. to include - Possession of Substance in Penalty Group 2-A “2 ounces or less”(MA/MB) HSC 481.1161 (b) (1) (2)

Criminal Mischief $100 < $750 (MB) =28.03b2

Theft $100 < $750 (MB) = PC31.03 e2A

Theft of Service $100 < $750 (MB) = PC 31.04e2

Contraband in a CORRECTIONAL FACILITY (MB)
PC 38.114

Driving while license invalid (MB) TTC 521.457

Answer 189

A

Texas Family Code

Answer 190

A

District Attorney’s Office

Answer 191

A

Outright release;
Issuance of citations or summonses;
Referral to juvenile court.

Answer 192

A

Pursuant to an order of the Juvenile Court under the provisions of the Family Code;
Pursuant to the laws of arrest in state or federal statute;
Conduct that violates either the penal laws of the State of Texas or the penal ordinances of any political subdivision of this state.

Answer 193

A

To determine whether the juvenile is alleged to have been harmed or is in danger of being harmed;
As status offenders as defined in the Family Code, Section 51.02(15).

Answer 194

A

GM Procedure 601, Prisoners

Answer 195

A

SAPD Form #66-E, Rights Warnings

Answer 196

A

ten (10) years of age

Answer 197

A

Juvenile Processing Office

the arresting officer is able

Answer 198

A

A certificate of birth or a certified copy is presented;
A baptismal certificate is presented, with two (2) sworn affidavits certifying the date of birth;
The juvenile’s age has been previously certified.

Answer 199

A

* Bexar County Juvenile Detention Center*

Answer 200

A

upper right-hand corner

Answer 201

A

For care and protection of the child taken in custody;
The child is asking for assistance, aid, help, or guidance in criminal or civil matters the agency can provide;
Another law enforcement agency has jurisdiction over the child, as provided by the Texas Family Code;
The Bexar County Juvenile Detention Center for processing through the Juvenile Court.

Answer 202

A

Released at the scene if safe to do so and they have a valid driver’s license in their possession;
Released to the custody of a parent, custodian, or guardian;
Returned to the Juvenile Processing Office if unable to locate a parent, custodian, or guardian.

B. The release of a juvenile, at the officer’s discretion, to the custody of a parent, custodian, guardian, adult relative, or other responsible adult is documented in a written report.

Answer 203

A

Juvenile Processing Office

A member of the Homicide Unit or Night CID Unit is dispatched to the scene of the traffic accident;
The juvenile suspect is taken into custody for the offense of Intoxication Manslaughter, Intoxication Assault, or D.W.I.;
The juvenile suspect, if not injured, is transported to the Juvenile Processing Office for processing after any chemical or associated tests have been administered;
The juvenile suspect, if injured, is transported to a medical facility in accordance with GM Procedure 601, Prisoners.
Depending on the result of the investigation, the member of the Homicide Unit or Night CID Unit will determine the charge, if any, to be filed against the juvenile.

Answer 204

A

formal and informal field identifications as Eyewitness Identification, defined in GM 702,

field identifications

Answer 205

A

Transports children twelve (12) years of age or under to the Children’s Shelter located at 2939 W. Woodlawn Avenue.

a. The telephone number to the Children’s Shelter is (210) 212-2500.
b. The Children’s Shelter will accommodate all children, provided there is room.

Transports juveniles thirteen (13) years of age or older to The Bridge located at 3103 West Ave.

a. The daytime telephone number to the Bridge is (210) 340-8077.
The emergency/after-hours telephone number is (210) 340-7933.

b. The Bridge accepts children in crisis and runaways.
The Bridge will accommodate all children, provided there is room.
However, the Bridge will scrutinize children who are suicidal, homicidal, and children who do not want to stay at the Bridge.

If the above options have failed, contact the Juvenile Processing Office.

Answer 206

A

legal process,
the individual’s rights,
the prisoner’s safety,
and the safeguarding of personal property

Answer 207

A

A. Bexar County Jail prisoners

B. City of San Antonio Detention Center prisoners

C. Bexar County Juvenile Detention Center prisoners

D. Field custody prisoners.

Answer 208

A

Prisoners to be charged with felony offenses;
Prisoners who were involved in violent incidents;
Prisoners who appear to be capable of violent physical resistance;
Prisoners who have not been searched;
Prisoners who are intoxicated;
Multiple prisoners;
Prisoners transported in police vehicles;
Any prisoner being taken inside a detention facility or processing room.

Answer 209

A

Prisoners are handcuffed with their hands behind them;
Handcuffs are double-locked to protect both the officer and the prisoner;
Prisoners are not handcuffed to a fixed object.

Answer 210

A

Prisoners will not have their hands and legs secured together in any form or position commonly known as “hog- tying.”
If violent prisoners cannot be properly restrained, additional officers will be used to help physically restrain the prisoners.

Answer 211

A

wire cutters

Other types of cutting instruments are not used to remove plastic handcuffs.

Answer 212

A

may

(The reaching inside of clothing to immediately retrieve a weapon, contraband, or evidence discovered during a search incident to arrest is not considered a strip search).

Answer 213

A

H. Absent exigent circumstances, officers needing to search or frisk a Transgender, Intersex, or Gender Non- Conforming (TIGN) individual should first verify the person’s gender identity.
This may be accomplished by the officer’s prior knowledge, by the officer inquiring about the person’s gender identity (for example, an officer could ask the individual their preferred form of address or how they identify), or if the individual self-identifies to the officer.
Officers conducting a search or frisk of a TIGN individual should generally (absent exigent circumstances) conduct the search or frisk based on the gender with which the individual identifies.
(For example, an individual whose gender identity is male should be searched by a male officer and an individual whose gender identity is female should be searched by a female officer).
If a TIGN suspect or prisoner expresses a preference concerning the gender of the searching officer or objects to the gender of the searching officer (absent of exigent circumstances), consideration should be made to honor the preference when reasonable.
Officers should document the details of the search or frisk in their report and seek guidance from a supervisor if needed.
When an individual to be searched is identified as TIGN, officers shall not question this identity absent articulable, compelling reasons, nor will an officer inquire about intimate details of an individual’s anatomy to determine gender.

I. A search or frisk shall not be conducted under any circumstance for the sole purpose of viewing an individual’s anatomy or genitalia, assigning gender, or in any manner that could be perceived as demeaning or harassing in nature.
In addition, an officer shall not perform a more invasive search or frisk than would be conducted for a non-TIGN person under the same or similar circumstances.

J. TIGN persons shall not be asked to remove appearance-related items
(such as prosthetics, bras, clothes, undergarments, wigs, cosmetic items, etc.)
if non-TIGN individuals of the same gender identity are not also required to do so under similar circumstances.

Answer 214

A

The person is under arrest and at the detention center or ready to be transported to a detention center.
The prisoner must voluntarily consent to the strip search in writing or a warrant to conduct a strip search must be obtained prior to the search.
The searching officer and any others present must be the same sex as the prisoner.
Officers conducting a search of a TIGN individual should conduct the search based on the gender with which the individual identifies.
(For example, an individual whose gender identity is male should be searched by a male officer and an individual whose gender identity is female should be searched by a female officer).
If a TIGN suspect or prisoner expresses a preference concerning the gender of the searching officer or objects to the gender of the searching officer, consideration should be made to honor the preference when reasonable.
The search must be conducted in a private and secure room at the jail or Detention Center. Strip searches will not be conducted in public places.
Only the minimum number of personnel necessary to ensure the safety of the persons involved will be present, to include a supervisor, during the strip search. A minimum of two officers are required to be present (searching officer and witness).
The search must be done discreetly and with the utmost respect for the prisoner’s privacy and dignity
The requesting officer’s report must contain:

a. The name of the supervisor present during the search;
b. The names of everyone present during the search;
c. The exact location where the search took place; and
d. The results of the search

A copy of the search warrant or written consent must accompany the written report.

Answer 215

A

Notify Detention Center personnel of their suspicion during the booking process;
The name(s) of the Detention Center personnel notified must be included in the details of the report.

Answer 216

A

Under the authority of a search warrant; OR

2. The prisoner must voluntarily consent to a body cavity search in writing prior to the search.

Answer 217

A

obtain a search warrant, transport the prisoner to a qualified medical facility, and request a body cavity search of the prisoner for those items within the body by qualified medical personnel.

Answer 218

A

Prisoners are secured as soon as practical in police vehicles with safety belts.
Prisoners are not placed in a prone position or any other position which could cause positional asphyxia.
Unruly and combative prisoners are transported in a prisoner transport wagon whenever possible.
* *If no prisoner transport wagon is available, a second officer accompanies the transporting officer to a detention facility.**

Answer 219

A

may be moved: after receiving approval from a supervisor.

exigent circumstances: immediately notify the dispatcher of the relocation.

most direct route to a detention facility, and be in an *open, well-lighted area. *

There will be no exchange of handcuffs on the prisoners during this transfer process.

Answer 220

A

The prisoners shall be handcuffed with his hands behind him;
The officer in possession of a prisoner shall be responsible for the safety and security of the prisoner, and for the prisoner’s actions; and
If the officer in possession of a prisoner relinquishes custody of the prisoner to another officer, he shall remain with the prisoner until the accepting officer takes physical custody of the prisoner.

The officer shall document in his written report the name of the officer who accepted custody of the prisoner.

Answer 221

A

Retain responsibility for the security of the prisoner during questioning and processing;
Ensure the prisoner is not left unattended; and
After processing, take the adult prisoner to the Detention Center to be magistrated, or take the juvenile prisoner to the Bexar County Juvenile Detention Center,

in accordance with GM Procedure 602, Juveniles.

Answer 222

A

minimal and the escape of unattended prisoners is probable.

Answer 223

A

The involved officer shall complete an offense report and place any property belonging to the escaped prisoner in the Property Room.
The officer’s supervisor shall make a determination as to the cause of the escape.
If the cause of the escape is determined by the supervisor to be a procedural violation on the part of the officer, the supervisor shall immediately forward a written report on the escape, through the chain of command, to the Internal Affairs Unit, requesting a full investigation.

Answer 224

A

The law enforcement agency in the other jurisdiction will handle the escape.
The officer will immediately notify his supervisor as to the circumstances surrounding the escape.
The officer’s supervisor (with input from the other jurisdiction) shall make a determination as to the cause of the escape.
If the cause of the escape is determined by the supervisor to be a procedural violation on the part of the officer, the supervisor shall immediately forward a written report on the escape, through the chain of command, to the Internal Affairs Unit, requesting a full investigation.

Answer 225

A

A. beginning of each shift and before and after transporting prisoners.

B. when transporting the prisoners to a law-enforcement or medical facility

C. when processing the juvenile for DWI or when transporting the juvenile to a medical facility

D. any types of disabilities

E. will not be transported with other prisoners

Answer 226

A

Officers shall attempt to positively identify all prisoners being transported.
Positive identification may be made through a driver’s license or other written forms of identification.
The identification used to identify prisoners should accompany all other necessary documentation needed to process the prisoners at the detention facility.
Any information regarding a prisoner’s
attempt to escape,
mental illness (Refer to GM Procedure 611, Persons with Mental Illness),
suicide potential,
or any other personal traits of a security nature shall be recorded on the documentation that accompanies the prisoner to the detention facility and will be verbally related to the detention facility personnel or processing room personnel.

Answer 227

A

If the arresting officer is not assigned a marked patrol vehicle, a marked patrol vehicle will be used to transport the prisoner exposed to OC or an electrical charge from an ECD.
If the prisoner is so violent that damage would be caused to the marked patrol vehicle, a prisoner transport wagon may be utilized, with the approval of a supervisory officer.
Prisoners exposed to an electrical charge from an ECD who are to be transported by prisoner wagon, will be transported without other prisoners in the prisoner wagon.
The transporting officer will ask the dispatcher to notify the appropriate detention facility or processing room personnel that a prisoner exposed to oleoresin capsicum (OC) spray or an electrical charge from an ECD is being transported to their location.

Answer 228

A

arrested

(1) State issued ID card;
(2) United States Passport;
(3) United States Military ID;
(4) Foreign Passport;
(5) Foreign Military ID; or
(6) Consular ID.

Answer 229

A

(1) If there is a passenger in the vehicle with a valid driver’s license, the person with the valid driver’s license will be allowed to remove the vehicle;
(2) The driver will be allowed thirty (30) minutes (from the time the traffic stop initiated) to arrange for another driver with a valid driver’s license to remove the vehicle;
(3) If a licensed driver is not available within the allotted thirty(30)minute time frame, the vehicle will be impounded;
(4) Failure to provide evidence of financial responsibility provides the officer authority to impound the vehicle. (TTC 601.051 – 601.124)

Answer 230

A

leaving the scene of the arrest,
upon incurring any delays along the route, and
upon arrival at the destination.

Answer 231

A

Police vehicles used primarily for transporting prisoners have physical barriers between the front and rear seats and may be used to transport a maximum of two (2) prisoners if there is only one officer. Both prisoners are secured in the rear seat with safety belts.
When a second officer is available to help with the transportation of multiple prisoners, a maximum of three (3) prisoners may be transported.

All three (3) prisoners are secured in the rear seat with safety belts. The second officer occupies the front passenger seat.

Answer 232

A

Police vehicles not primarily used for transporting prisoners do not have physical barriers between the front and rear seats, but may be used to transport only one (1) prisoner.
The prisoner is secured in the front passenger seat with a safety belt.
When a second officer is available to help with the transportation of multiple prisoners, a maximum of two (2) prisoners may be transported. One (1) prisoner is secured in the front passenger seat with a safety belt; the second prisoner is secured in the rear seat with a safety belt directly behind the first prisoner.
The second officer is seated behind the driving officer.

Answer 233

A

Prisoner transport vans (wagons) are assigned to the North Patrol and South Patrol Divisions for use by officers assigned to those divisions.
Prisoner transport wagons may be used to pick up additional prisoners, if approved by a supervisor and the pick-up point is near the return route to a detention facility.
Female prisoners are not transported in the same prisoner transport wagon with male prisoners,

unless they have a husband/wife, parent/child, or brother/sister relationship.

Common-law marriages do not satisfy a husband/wife relationship.

Juvenile prisoners are not transported in the same prisoner transport wagon as adult prisoners, unless they have a husband/wife, parent/child, or brother/sister relationship.

Common-law marriages do not satisfy a husband/wife relationship.

Prisoners involved with each other in a disturbance are not transported in the same prisoner transport wagon.
Female prisoners are transported in a prisoner transport wagon only if a female officer has searched them.

Answer 234

A

Q. warrant check and takes the necessary action if a warrant is found.

R. at least 24 hours prior to the flight

Answer 235

A

Military Police should be notified of all Class C misdemeanor citations (except traffic) and all custodial arrests.
The Military Police may come and take custody of the prisoner where the arrest is made.
The Officer may drop the prisoner off at the nearest Military Police Office.
The Officer may release them on the citation or book them into the Detention Facility.

Answer 236

A

Arrested by an off-duty SAPD officer or an off-duty SAPD officer who is engaged in outside employment in compliance with GM Procedure 905, Off-Duty and Outside Employment, provided the arrest occurs within the City of San Antonio.
Arrested by a peace officer employed by an outside agency who is out of his jurisdiction.

a. Peace Officers, who work for another law enforcement agency
(except BCSO Deputies and State Agencies),
who make an arrest within the City of San Antonio, are considered to be outside their jurisdiction.

b. If an officer who is outside his jurisdiction calls SAPD requesting transport of a prisoner
(within the City of San Antonio),
an SAPD officer will be dispatched to transport the prisoner to the appropriate facility, in accordance with Article 14.03 of the Code of Criminal Procedure.

Answer 237

A

If the arrest was made by an officer who is not engaged in outside employment, that officer shall be responsible for the appropriate report (Incident or Supplemental).
The transporting/handling officer assumes full responsibility for the prisoner’s property and evidence not collected by the UEDI/CSU (or follow-up unit), and writes the appropriate report (Offense or Incident) required for booking the prisoner.
If the arrest was made by an SAPD officer who is engaged in outside employment, the arresting officer writes the appropriate report (Incident or Offense).
The transporting officer prepares the necessary paperwork needed for booking the prisoner and assumes custody of any evidence not collected by UEDI/CSU (or follow-up unit) and the prisoner’s property.
If the arrest was made by an officer from an outside agency who is engaged in outside employment, the arresting officer writes the appropriate report (Incident or Offense) and follows the transporting officer to the appropriate facility to prepare the required paperwork for booking the prisoner.
The arresting officer is responsible for the custody of any evidence not collected by the UEDI/CSU (or follow-up unit) and the prisoner’s property.
If a custodial arrest is made by an SAPD officer working outside the San Antonio city limits, the officer shall coordinate handling of the prisoner and evidence with the agency having original jurisdiction in accordance with GM Proc. 905 – Off-Duty and Outside Employment. The officer will complete all appropriate reports and forms, and follow the transporting officer to the appropriate facility where the arrested individual will be booked.

Answer 238

A

Arrested by a peace officer employed by an outside agency who is within his jurisdiction, whether the officer is on or off duty.
a. All peace officers who work for the Bexar County Sheriff’s and Constable’s Offices, and officers who work for the Texas Department of Public Safety (or other state agencies such as Parks and Wildlife, etc.), are considered to be within their jurisdiction, and are responsible for transportation and handling of their own prisoners.

b. If an officer from the Bexar County Sheriff’s or Constable’s Office, or an officer from the Texas Department of Public Safety or another state police agency calls SAPD requesting transport or requesting SAPD handle an incident they initiated, our Communications Unit shall transfer the call to the respective agency of the officer so they can handle the incident.
In cases of emergency, SAPD officers will be dispatched to assist immediately.
Crime scene security and any other assistance may be provided with the approval of a supervisor.

Answer 239

A

When an officer assumes custody of an injured/sick prisoner from an off-duty officer or an officer from another law enforcement agency working in an off-duty capacity; or
When an officer assumes custody of a prisoner and there is a question concerning the validity of the arrest

Answer 240

A

MS-DC Form #17, Registration/Property Form

The officer writes ECD in large block letters at the top of the MS- DC Form#17.
After Detention Center personnel have completed their portion of the MS-DC Form #17, the officer shall review the form to verify correctness and the signature of the Detention Center personnel completing the form. The form is kept on file in the Detention Center.

Answer 241

A

BCHD Form #60-1, E. R. Encounter - Admitting Form

Answer 242

A

B. personal property which will fit into an 8 1/2” X 11” envelope is accepted.
Money in excess of one thousand ($1,000) dollars must be placed into the Property Room.

C. MS-DC Form #17, Registration/Property Form

Answer 243

A

the prisoner’s ID,
Keys,
medication and
money (up to $1,000.00)

Officers are reminded money in excess of five thousand ($5,000) dollars may be placed into the safe

Answer 244

A

SAPD Form #91, Temporary Record of Arrest (Booking Slip);
Appropriate offense report for the offense committed; and
DWI, crash, and any supplemental reports and forms.

Answer 245

A

Have you ever been diagnosed as having a mental illness by a doctor or by a mental health professional?
Have you ever or are you currently taking any medications for mental illness?
Have you ever tried to kill yourself?
Do you currently have thoughts of killing yourself?
* make a copy of both sides of the booking slip, and place the copy in the box marked Center for Healthcare Services.*

Answer 246

A

Prisoners who are unconscious, visibly injured, sick, or claiming an injury or illness which requires immediate medical attention are taken directly to a medical facility for treatment by an EMS.
EMS personnel select the medical facility.
In felony cases or violent situations, an officer should accompany EMS to a medical facility on request and with approval from a supervisor.
Officers should conform to the requirements of the medical facility on handcuffing of prisoners.
Prisoners exhibiting or complaining of minor injury or sickness not requiring immediate medical attention are transported by the arresting officer to the Downtown University Health Care Building located at 527 North Leona or University Hospital, 4502 Medical Drive.
Should the arresting officer be involved with other duties, another officer is assigned to transport the prisoner.
Note: Based on the proximity of the Detention Center to the Downtown University Health Care Building, this is the primary facility for all minor injuries.
If possible, have the dispatcher call 225-5481 ahead of time to confirm patient load.
Prisoners who are under arrest for public intoxication will be handled in accordance with GM Procedure 605, Miscellaneous Offenses and Complaint Calls.
Prisoners transported to the Downtown University Health Care Building are taken into the building through the North Leona St. entrance and to the second floor to either the Acute Care Clinic or the Crisis Care Center.
During the hours of 0800 to 2000, officers shall utilize the medical services of the Acute Care Clinic.
During all other hours, officers shall take their prisoner to the Crisis Care Center.
For those prisoners being treated at the Downtown University Health Care Building who require additional treatment not available at either the Acute Care Clinic or the Crisis Care Center and for those who need to be admitted into University Hospital, the officer shall transport the prisoner to University Hospital as directed by medical personnel.
If medical personnel request the prisoner be transported by EMS, the officer shall request EMS to transport the prisoner.
When transporting prisoners to University Hospital, prisoners are taken into the medical facility through the emergency room entrance.
If prisoners require only additional medical treatment they are not always booked by proxy.
Officers are responsible for their prisoners while at a medical facility.
All prisoners exposed to an electrical charge from an ECD will be handled in accordance with GM Procedure 512, Electronic Control Devices.

Answer 247

A

a. Arrange for the primary officer to be relieved by an officer from the next shift only if the primary officer is going to be at the medical facility more than two (2) hours past his normal duty hours.
b. Ensure the primary officer has all necessary paperwork completed on the case prior to the relief officer taking custody of the prisoner.

Answer 248

A

a. Send another officer to pick up all documents necessary for the booking of the prisoner by proxy.
This officer writes the word “Proxy” on all documents submitted to the Detention Center and magistrate;

b. Review all documents to be submitted to the Detention Center and magistrate;
c. After booking by proxy, advise Bexar County Jail personnel of the need for a guard to be sent to the medical facility; and

d. Hospitalized felony prisoners are guarded until they become the responsibility of the Bexar County Sheriff’s Department or
issued a felony 52-X with approval from a supervisor.

Answer 249

A

a. Class A or B misdemeanor prisoners, not exhibiting the potential for violence and whose injuries are not the result of an officer’s use of force, are issued SAPD Form #52-X, and released.
(1) Prisoners are released only with the approval of a supervisor.
(2) The prisoner is listed as a suspect on the officer’s report since the prisoner was released and not booked.
(3) A copy of SAPDForm#52-X is routed to the follow-up unit.
b. Class C misdemeanor prisoners (except public intoxication prisoners), not exhibiting the potential for violence and whose injuries are not the result of a officer’s use of force, are released from police custody after being issued a misdemeanor citation, with supervisor approval.

Answer 250

A

Felony prisoners not charged with a felony charges listed below or not exhibiting the potential for violence in other felonies and whose injuries are not the result of the officer’s use of force, can be issued SAPD Form #52- X, Notice to Hospitalized Suspects, and released.
Prisoners are released only with the approval of a supervisor.
Injured/sick prisoners released are listed as suspects on the offense report.
The officer writes “🖕🏽FELONY 52-X🖕👈🏿” on the top of the offense report.
Officers note in the details of their offense report the suspect was released at the hospital, and a copy of SAPD Form #52-X is attached to a copy of SAPD Form #62, Injured Prisoner Report, and routed to the appropriate follow-up unit.

Answer 251

A

a. P. C. 19.02, Murder
b. P. C. 19.03, Capital Murder
c. P. C. 20.03, Kidnapping
d. P. C. 20.04, Aggravated Kidnapping
e. P. C. 21.11, Indecency with a Child
f. P. C. 22.01(a)(1), Assault (If exhibiting the potential for violence)
g. P. C. 22.011, Sexual Assault
h. P. C. 22.02, Aggravated Assault
i. P. C. 22.021, Aggravated Sexual Assault
j. P. C. 22.04, Injury to a Child, Elderly Individual, or Disabled Individual
k. P. C. 29.02, Robbery
l. P. C. 29.03, Aggravated Robbery
m. P. C. 30.02, Burglary with Intent to Commit a Felony or Assault
n. P. C. 49.04, DWI (Felony)
o. P. C. 49.07, Intoxication Assault
p. P. C. 49.08, Intoxication Manslaughter

q. Any felony charge where totality of circumstances outweigh prisoner release

NOTE: When drivers involved in a fatality crash are admitted to the hospital, Officers/Detectives will apply for a warrant for the arrest of the driver, who is to be arrested as soon as he is released from the hospital.

Answer 252

A

the review of the arresting officer’s report, preparation of a supplement report, and a determination if the criteria are within the requirements listed; can be issued SAPD Form #52-X, Notice to Hospitalized Suspects, and released.

Final responsibility will rest with the deciding supervisor.

Answer 253

A

A warrant check is conducted on all injured/sick prisoners.
If any type of warrant is found for a prisoner who only requires treatment at a medical facility, the prisoner, after treatment, is returned to a detention facility.
If a felony, Class A, or Class B misdemeanor warrant is found for a prisoner arrested for a felony offense and he is to be admitted to a medical facility, the prisoner is guarded until he is booked by proxy and in the custody of the Bexar County Sheriff’s Department.
If a felony, Class A, or Class B misdemeanor warrant is found for a prisoner arrested for a Class A or Class B misdemeanor offense, and treatment will take more than two (2) hours or the prisoner is to be admitted to a medical facility, the Bexar County Sheriff’s Department is notified and a county warrant officer is requested.
The prisoner is issued SAPD Form #52-X and released to the custody of the Bexar County Sheriff warrant officer.
If a Class C misdemeanor warrant is found for a prisoner arrested for a A or Class B misdemeanor offense, and treatment will take more than two (2) hours or the prisoner is to be admitted to a medical facility, the prisoner is released from custody after being issued SAPD Form #52-X.
If a Class C misdemeanor warrant(s) is found for a prisoner arrested for a Class C offense, and treatment will take more than two (2) hours or the prisoner is to be admitted to a medical facility, the prisoner is released from custody after supervisor approval is given.

Additionally, the officer shall contact the Municipal Court Warrants Section at 210-207-7718 to reactivate the warrant(s).

Answer 254

A

A. parent, legal guardian, or custodian

B. capital felony, or a violent felony,

Answer 255

A

C. The disposition of the prisoner is determined by the following circumstances:

The handling officer contacts a supervisor and advises him of the situation.
The officer relays such information as the offense committed, *involvement in any family violence, *whether the prisoner is wanted on any warrants, and *the nature of the injury/sickness.
If the juvenile is arrested for a felony offense and treatment of the juvenile can be completed within two (2) hours, the juvenile prisoner is guarded by the arresting officer and transported to the Juvenile Processing Office after treatment.
If the juvenile is arrested for any offense other than a capital felony, or any violent felony, and treatment is going to take more than two (2) hours or if the juvenile is going to be admitted into the hospital, the supervisor will advise the officer to release the juvenile prisoner.
If the decision is made by the supervisor to release a juvenile prisoner, officers will:
a. Before releasing the injured or sick juvenile, officers must notify staff within the Juvenile Processing Office and the appropriate follow-up unit or Night CID Unit;

b. Positively identify the prisoner.
In situations involving felony offenses, the follow-up unit or Night CID Unit may request a Crime Scene Unit Investigator to photograph and fingerprint the juvenile prior to being released from the officer’s custody.
All film, photograph’s and fingerprint cards will be forwarded to the staff within the Juvenile Processing Office by the Crime Scene Unit Investigator;

c. Document in their report the name of the supervisory officer who advised them to release the prisoner, including the name of the follow-up detective or Night CID Unit personnel who the officer contacted;

d. Guard the prisoner until the arrival of a parent, legal guardian, or custodian who is going to take custody of the juvenile prisoner.
Officers positively identify and document in their report the name of the parent, legal guardian, or custodian who took custody of the prisoner;

e. Issue SAPD Form #52-X to the parent, legal guardian, or custodian who took custody of the juvenile prisoner and route a copy of the notice to the follow-up unit: and
f. Route a copy of the offense/incident report, including a copy of all other applicable reports to the appropriate follow-up unit.

Answer 256

A

a. Before releasing the injured or sick juvenile, officers must notify staff within the Juvenile Processing Office and the appropriate follow-up unit or Night CID Unit;

b. Positively identify the prisoner. In situations involving felony offenses, the follow-up unit or Night CID Unit may request a Crime Scene Unit Investigator to photograph and fingerprint the juvenile prior to being released from the officer’s custody.
All film, photograph’s and fingerprint cards will be forwarded to the staff within the Juvenile Processing Office by the Crime Scene Unit Investigator;

c. Document in their report the name of the supervisory officer who advised them to release the prisoner, including the name of the follow-up detective or Night CID Unit personnel who the officer contacted;

d. Guard the prisoner until the arrival of a parent, legal guardian, or custodian who is going to take custody of the juvenile prisoner.
Officers positively identify and document in their report the name of the parent, legal guardian, or custodian who took custody of the prisoner;

e. Issue SAPD Form #52-X to the parent, legal guardian, or custodian who took custody of the juvenile prisoner and route a copy of the notice to the follow-up unit: and
f. Route a copy of the offense/incident report, including a copy of all other applicable reports to the appropriate follow-up unit.

Answer 257

A

A warrant check is conducted on all injured/sick juvenile prisoners.
Injured or sick juvenile prisoners charged with any offense and are wanted on capital felony warrants or felony of the first degree warrants are guarded at a medical facility until treatment is completed and are then transported to the Juvenile Processing Office for processing.
If the juvenile is arrested for any offense other than a capital felony or any violent felony and the juvenile is wanted for warrants other than capital felony warrants or felony of the first degree warrants the juvenile is released in accordance with this procedure.

Answer 258

A

Prisoners are not moved for the convenience of the officer.
Prisoners are not left unattended.
When relief is necessary, the officer requests the Communications Unit to send another officer.
When necessary to prevent escape, prisoners are secured with handcuffs and, if necessary, leg irons.
Prisoners are not secured to any stationary objects.
Adult prisoners are not allowed to have visitors. Only medical personnel and the prisoner’s attorney are allowed to see the prisoner.
If medical authorities advise the prisoner is in danger of expiring, the officer, with approval of the attending physician, allows family members and the clergy to visit.
Injured or sick juvenile prisoners being guarded at a hospital or medical facility may be allowed to have visits by a parent, legal guardian, custodian, or their attorney if such visits are approved by the attending physician.
Prisoners are not allowed to leave the room/ward without permission of hospital staff personnel.

Answer 259

A

.04 REASONABLE SUSPICION DRUG TESTS

A. During normal business hours
(0745-1630, Mon-Fri)
any command or supervisory officer who has reasonable suspicion to believe an officer is under the influence of drugs or controlled substances shall, with the concurrence from the ranking on duty commander, place the officer on administrative duty, write a detailed report requesting a Mandatory Drug Test be conducted on said officer, and contact the Department’s Mandatory Drug Testing Program Coordinator in the Office of the Chief.
The detailed report must include a summary of the specific, observable facts that the officer may be under the influence of drugs or a controlled substance.
The report shall be submitted to the Mandatory Drug Testing Program Coordinator, at the first available opportunity.
B. Notification during weekends, holidays, and between the hours of 1630 and 0745:
a. When the supervisor requesting the Reasonable Suspicion Drug Test is a Sergeant, he notifies his on-duty Lieutenant, writes a detailed report requesting a Mandatory Drug Test be conducted on said officer, and requests that the Communications Unit notify the Mandatory Drug Testing Program Coordinator.

Note: In the absence of the Lieutenant assigned to the affected office, the requesting supervisor notifies another on-duty Lieutenant.

b. When the supervisor requesting the Reasonable Suspicion Drug Test is a Lieutenant or above, or a Lieutenant responds to the scene at the request of a Sergeant, after assessing the situation, he shall, with the concurrence from the officer’s Division Commander:

) Place the officer an administrative duty;
) Write a detailed report requesting a Mandatory Drug Test be conducted on said officer;
) Request the Communications Unit to notify the Mandatory Drug Testing Program Coordinator.
A detailed verbal report shall be given to the Mandatory Drug Testing Program Coordinator by the requesting supervisor at the first available opportunity and must include a summary of the specific, observable facts that the officer may be under the influence of drugs, alcohol, or inhalants.

(A written report should be hand-carried to the Mandatory Drug Testing Program Coordinator, at the first available opportunity.)

C. The Mandatory Drug Testing Program Coordinator will then brief the Chief of Police as soon as practically possible and a decision will be made whether or not to order the requested drug test.
The reasonable suspicion must be based on specific, observable facts that an officer may be under the influence of drugs, alcohol, or inhalants.

D. The Chief of Police shall have the discretionary authority, based on reasonable suspicion, to order an officer to submit to a Mandatory Drug Test.

(Command notification will begin after the
Chief
has given the order for a Reasonable Suspicion Mandatory Drug Test.)

Answer 260

A

safe work environment

Answer 261

A

reasonable suspicion

Answer 262

A

.06 SELECTION OF OFFICERS

A. A computerized program certified and operated as non-discriminatory by an independent firm hired by the City shall be used to randomly select officers to be tested.

B. Based on authorized manpower levels as of January 1st of each year, twenty-five percent (25%) of all active sworn officers will be randomly selected and tested during each calendar year.

C. The identification numbers (SAP numbers) of the officers selected on a monthly basis by the independent firm
(hereafter referred to as the “Company”)
will be provided to the Mandatory Drug Testing Program Coordinator.

D. The Mandatory Drug Testing Program Coordinator will be responsible for notifying the Company of the identity of the officers selected for Mandatory Drug Testing.

Answer 263

A

.08 MANDATORY DRUG TESTS

A. Mandatory Drug Tests shall be conducted to detect the presence in urine specimens of those classes of drugs identified by the DOT that require laboratory testing (49 CFR Part 40 Subpart F).

B. Mandatory Drug Tests shall consist of a two-step procedure:

An initial drug screening test and, when applicable;
A confirmatory test.

C. Both the initial drug screen and the confirmatory test will be performed at a
Substance Abuse Mental Health Services Administration (SAMHSA)
College of American Pathologist (CAP)
Forensic Urine Drug Testing Program (FUDTP)
certified laboratory.

Answer 264

A

E. Failure of officers to provide urine samples or an attempt to alter, taint, or impair the validity of a urine sample for the initial drug screening test may be considered a refusal to submit to a mandatory drug test.

A refusal would be a violation of Rule and Regulation 3.03A, Insubordination, and may lead to a recommendation for an officer’s termination.

F. The Chief of Police maintains the right to determine the duty status of officers who refuse to provide a urine specimen.

G. The urine sample will be tested for the presence of those classes of drugs identified by the DOT that require laboratory testing (49 CFR Part 40 Subpart F)

An initial non-negative test result will not be considered conclusive; rather, it will be classified as “pending confirmation.”
A non-negative test result on the initial drug-screening test will automatically require a confirmation drug test be performed.

H. Officers may, at their own expense, request to have the drug test administered at an approved physician’s office, provided the test is administered within five (5) hours after notification by the Chief.

The Company representative will accompany the officer.

Answer 265

A

non-discriminatory

* The Drug Testing Coordinator will be responsible for notifying the Company of the identity of the officers selected for mandatory drug testing.*

Answer 266

A

.11 MANDATORY DRUG TEST RESULTS
A. All original copies of Mandatory Drug Test results and records shall be submitted to the Chief of Police in a sealed
envelope by the Company.
B. Any officer having a confirmed positive drug test result will be processed for disciplinary action in accordance with GM Procedure 303, Disciplinary Procedures. Disciplinary action could include a recommendation for an officer’s termination.
C. The Chief of Police maintains the right to determine the duty status, pending disciplinary action, of any officer refusing to provide a specimen or of any officer having a confirmed positive drug test result.

Answer 267

A

marijuana, 
cocaine, 
opiates, 
amphetamine, and/or 
phencyclidines

Answer 268

A

C. Any employee disclosing any information regarding:

the identity of an officer selected for
Mandatory Drug Testing
that the drug testing is scheduled
the date on which the urine specimen is to be collected

is subject to disciplinary action.

Answer 269

A

An initial drug screening test

and, when applicable;

A confirmatory test.

Answer 270

A

The officer shall be provided a restroom that is private and secure.
The officer shall be permitted no more than four (4) hours to provide the sample.
During this maximum four (4) hour period, officers will remain in the testing area under observation by the Company representative.
Reasonable amounts of fluids may be given to officers to encourage urination.

Answer 271

A

five- (5) panel drug screen test

the confirmatory test procedure will be technologically different and more sensitive
than the initial drug screening test.

A five- (5) panel drug- screening test will be conducted on each drug test

Answer 272

A

Chief of Police

Answer 273

A

.06 SELECTION OF OFFICERS

B. Based on authorized manpower levels as of January 1st of each year, twenty-five percent (25%) of all active sworn officers will be randomly selected and tested during each calendar year.

Answer 274

A

B. Officers will be required to provide a minimum of 45 milliliters (ml) of urine to be tested.

The urine will be separated into two (2) samples,

one 30 ml sample (“A” bottle)

and

one 15 ml sample (“B” bottle).

Answer 275

A

sustain a serious traumatic injury, or

who witness a violent, traumatic incident involving death or serious bodily injury,

Answer 276

A

A serious traumatic injury (whether on or off duty);
A serious bodily injury (whether on or off duty);
Witnessing a violent, traumatic incident involving death or serious bodily injury;
Sick leave in excess of ninety (90) consecutive calendar days;
Military leave in excess of ninety (90) consecutive calendar days;
Any other circumstances where the officer has missed more than ninety (90) consecutive calendar days; or
At the discretion of the Chief of Police.

Answer 277

A

FTO Program Coordinator

Answer 278

A

Return to full duty,
Additional training,
Additional counseling,
Removal from Department.

1 = (In accordance with GM Procedure 904, Limited Duty Assignments)

4 = (In accordance with Rules and Regulations and the Collective Bargaining Agreement)

Answer 279

A

Psychological Services Office

Psychological services may also be conducted in conformance with GM Procedure 921.

Answer 280

A

criminal offenses and significant behavioral infractions

Answer 281

A

may inquire

(And your fucking point here is?) 🤔

It does not prevent members …… but what about…… 🤔
deter? Discourage? Instill doubt and fear of the consequences?

Answer 282

A

shall report the criminal offense in writing using SAPD Form #62-RCO, Reporting of Criminal Offenses By Department Members, and hand carry the form to one of the following units.

The Office of the Chief; or
The Integrity Detail. (Within the SARIC unit)

Or….
C. If the member receiving the information about suspected criminal activity is uncertain as to the credibility of the person and/or the information provided, the member may write the information on an interoffice correspondence form without a case number and deliver the information in person to either the Office of the Chief or SARIC.

This procedure does not prevent members from reporting criminal offenses committed by Department members to outside agencies but, the conditions of the reporting procedure DOES allow for consequences if you don’t report it to the department FIRST.

Answer 283

A

The Integrity Detail will conduct a preliminary investigation of the criminal offense and report the results to the Chief of Police.
The Chief’s designee shall meet with the reporting member and advise that member of the preliminary investigation results. The reporting member will be given a completed SAPD Form #62-PIR, Receipt of Preliminary Investigation Results, and be asked to sign the form.
The form will include a list of outside agencies that may be contacted if the reporting member wants an outside agency to investigate the complaint.
The Chief of Police, when necessary, will assign the appropriate follow-up unit to conduct a full investigation of the criminal offense.
If a full investigation is necessary, the Chief’s designee shall meet again with the reporting member after the investigation is completed and advise that member of the results of the investigation.

Answer 284

A

disciplinary actions.

Integrity Detail or the Office of the Chief.

Answer 285

A

evaluation, counseling, and consultation.

Answer 286

A

Voluntary* evaluations include, but are not limited to, assessments of the following:

a. An officer’s stress level;
b. An officer’s or family member’s non-job related emotional, cognitive, or behavioral functioning issue; and
c. An officer’s neuropsychological integrity following a head injury.

Non-mandatory evaluations may be requested by an officer’s supervisor, some of the factors that may be taken into consideration are as follows:

a. An increase in the use of sick leave;
b. An increase in the number of citizen complaints;
c. Frequently reporting late for work;
d. An increase in sarcastic or abusive remarks toward fellow officers;
e. Withdrawal from other officers;
f. A decline in personal appearance;
g. A decrease in impulse control;
h. A decrease in productivity; or
i. A decrease in the quality of an officer’s written reports.

Answer 287

A

a. Any loss of life or serious bodily injury as a result of an officer’s actions;
b. Police involved shootings;
c. Fatality incidents;
d. Fatality crashes involving officers;
e. The death of an officer;
f. Officers involved in critical incidents;
g. Officers involved in family disturbance/violence incidents;
h. Substance abuse, or
i. Report/complaints of criminal wrongdoing; or
j. Report/complaints of significant behavioral infractions.

Answer 288

A

a. Substance abuse;
b. Depression;
c. Suicidal thoughts;
d. Physical problems related to stress;
e. Panic attacks;
f. Temper control problems;
g. Family conflicts;
h. Eating disorders; or
i. Smoking habits.

Answer 289

A

a. Validation of the assessment and selection process of personnel; and
b. The application of psychology in the investigative process.

Answer 290

A

the staff psychologist determines an immediate threat exists to an officer or other party (in such cases, the staff psychologist has a duty to intervene to save lives), or if required by law or subpoenaed by a Judge’s order.

Answer 291

A

healthy working environment

What is a healthy working environment to you?

Answer 292

A

Members (both sworn and civilian)

1.06 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS: (General Manual Procedures – Section 200 Rules and Regulations Page 2 of 16)
👇🏻
👉🏽🖕🏼 “MEMBERS” 🖕🏼👈🏿 mean all employees of the San Antonio Police Department. 🤔

Answer 293

A

Refraining from participating in or encouraging any actions or statements that could be perceived as discrimination, harassment, retaliation, inappropriate behavior, and/or sexual harassment;
(Members, both sworn and civilian, must HAVE E.S.P. / See into the future and read minds “that could be perceived,” — best to just avoid everyone who you think might do stupid)
Reporting acts of discrimination, harassment, retaliation, inappropriate behavior, sexual harassment; and
Encouraging any member (both sworn and civilian) who confides that he/she is being discriminated against, harassed, retaliated against, or subjected to inappropriate behavior or sexual harassment to report these acts.

Answer 294

A

twenty-four (24) hours

Internal Affairs Unit

Answer 295

A

Immediately report the prohibited conduct to your immediate supervisor, unless the supervisor is a participant in the prohibited conduct.
If the supervisor is a participant in the prohibited conduct, or if for any reason, you feel uncomfortable reporting the complaint to the immediate supervisor, the report should be made to the next level of supervision.

Answer 296

A

immediately

(If your not getting what you want or scared of a potential discipline action USE THIS PROCEDURE. You’re protected and THEY cannot stop your stupidity from happening!)
If this statement offended you, think 🤔 on it, why are YOU offended?
Have you done this? OR. 👉🏽 Do you know someone who has? 👈🏿

“prohibits any retaliation against”
THEY see any form of a complaint that the individual is lying as retaliation, EVEN if it is on VIDEO.

THEY will never find an accusation as “UNFOUNDED” (means the allegations reported did not occur.)

It will at least be found as “Inconclusive” (means the allegations could not be proved or disproved.)

Answer 297

A

“Unfounded” means the allegations reported did not occur.
“Inconclusive” means the allegations could not be proved or disproved.
“Sustained” means the allegations reported are found to have occurred.
“Justified” means the conduct complained of did occur, but was necessary and appropriate to accomplish a valid law enforcement objective.

Answer 298

A

discipline such as discharge.

Officers accused may appeal in accordance with Department procedures when they disagree with the final disposition of a complaint.

{no one will take a lawsuit against the accuser(s)}

Answer 299

A

thirty (30) days

Answer 300

A

Supervisors

Answer 301

A

incident report with assignment number

Answer 302

A

supervisor

Answer 303

A

Within forty-eight (48) hours of the time the injured member started losing time from work due to an occupational injury/disease, the form must be received in the Accounting and Personnel Office.
If the initial State Form #DWC01 submitted for the injured member did not note loss of time from duty and time was subsequently lost due to the same occurrence, DWC06 is required for the member. This form must be submitted within forty-eight (48) hours of the time the injured member began losing time from work.
Within forty-eight (48) hours of a member’s return to work from an occupational injury/disease, whether returning to limited duty or regular assignment, the State Form #DWC06 must be completed and received in the Accounting and Personnel Office. Members to be assigned to a limited duty assignment or returning to regular duty following a limited duty assignment must report to the Office of the Chief in accordance with GM Procedure 904, Limited Duty Assignment.

Answer 304

A

the incident report

Answer 305

A

active duty officers

retiree

Answer 306

A

Office of the Chief

Answer 307

A

Notification of next of kin, if death occurs on-duty;
Transportation to hospital for family members;
Notification of the SAPD chaplain;
Assistance in making funeral arrangements;
Assistance in arranging immediate financial aid;
Assistance in preparing necessary paperwork to apply for all eligible benefits; and
Counseling for family members of officers killed in the line of duty.

Answer 308

A

the Office of the Chief.

Answer 309

A

Both officers involved are of the same rank;
Both officers involved are engaged in the same type of activity or unit and on the same shift (i.e., Patrol, UEDI, Traffic, Narcotics, etc.); and
Notification is given to the Unit/Shift Director of the unit involved at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance.

Answer 310

A

non-sworn members

Answer 311

A

career employees

Answer 312

A

A regulation or authorized uniform in accordance with Section .05.G, authorized weapon(s), radio, and handcuffs.
A means of communicating with the dispatcher, such as a department-issued radio or cell phone.
a. Officers are highly encouraged to check-in/out via radio with the dispatcher appropriate to their physical location.
b. This will ensure proper identification by dispatchers should there be a need for additional police response.
Documents necessary to handle arrests, such as use of force forms, property receipts, and misdemeanor citations.
For those cases where an arrest is made while off-duty, the officer(s) shall immediately submit the report(s) to their supervisor.

Answer 313

A

All officers are eligible to participate in the Off-Duty Employment program, except:
a. Probationary officers who have not completed the riding phase of their probationary period;
b. Officers who are on suspension, sick leave, injured leave, or limited-duty assignments;
c. Officers who are on administrative leave or assigned to administrative duty in accordance with GM Proc. 908, Mandatory Reassignment; and
d. Officers who have separated and are on active military duty.
Officers who are currently on suspension, sick leave, injured leave, limited-duty assignment or have separated and are active military, if offered an assignment, must advise the Off-Duty Employment Coordinator that they are not currently eligible for employment.

Answer 314

A

The personnel assigned to work off-duty in city facilities are drawn from a data base of officers who have submitted SAPD Form #93.
The number of officers assigned to any event at a designated city facility is an exclusive prerogative of the Chief of Police.
Supervisors are assigned to events “as needed” taking into consideration span of control and the physical design of the city facility.

Answer 315

A

Officers are not permitted to park vehicles at the designated city facilities unless parking has been opened to the general public.

Officers do not get to park for free at City Facilities unless free parking is available to the general public.

Officers are to remain on post or assignment until properly relieved and/or until the Officer is authorized by the Off-Duty Employment Detail Coordinator to leave their assigned post.
Officers are not permitted to purchase any item that may be for sale during any event while on assignment.
Officers are not permitted to accept any form of gratuity while working or as a result of working at city facilities.
This includes items that may be given free to the public.
Officers are not permitted to bring any person to an event where the officer is assigned in order to gain free admission for that person.
Officers will refrain from utilizing cell phones, laptops, and other electronic devices except for emergency circumstances and/or in accordance with the assignment or event they are assigned.

Answer 316

A

final authority

Answer 317

A

a. Shall take and document corrective action(s), should they find an officer in violation of this procedure;
b. Shall submit a report to the Off-Duty Employment Detail should they encounter any personnel issues or if officers under their supervision are absent or tardy for their assignment;
c. Shall submit written reports in accordance with GM Proc. 303, Disciplinary Procedures, with copies to the Off-Duty Employment Detail when an incident occurs which may require disciplinary action.

Answer 318

A

a. fifteen (15) minutes

b. thirty (30) minutes

Answer 319

A

a. Failure to report for an assignment;
b. Tardiness - Second offense in a one (1) year period;
c. Recurring complaints for failure to remain on a post or for rudeness;
d. Failure to obey instruction or leaving a post without being properly relieved;
e. Continuous cancellations of assignments; and
f. Violation of any other procedure, policy, rule, or regulation while on assignment through the Off-Duty Employment Detail.

Answer 320

A

All officers are eligible to participate in outside employment, except:
a. Officers who have not completed their one (1) year probationary period;
b. Officers who are on suspension, sick leave, injury leave or limited-duty assignment;
c. Officers who are on administrative leave or assigned to administrative duty in accordance with GM Proc. 908, Mandatory Reassignment, will not be authorized to engage in off-duty or outside employment which requires the wearing of a police uniform or an extension of police service.
d. Officers who have separated and are on active military duty.
Officers having been on suspension, sick leave, injured leave or limited-duty assignment must complete one (1) regular tour of duty before being eligible to participate in outside employment.

Answer 321

A

When an SAPD Off-Duty employment permit is not approved, the officer may appeal by filing a typewritten statement detailing the reason for appeal through the chain-of-command to the Chief of Staff within seven (7) calendar days from the date of denial.
All SAPD Off-Duty employment permits expire on **December 31st ** of each calendar year.

Officers must submit new employment permits each year prior to engaging in outside employment. The SAPD Work Permit System will allow Officers to renew permits without having to totally re-enter all of the information.
**The SAPD Work Permit System will allow Officers to re-new permits already entered into the system on December 1st.of each year. **
(Example: The SAPD Work Permit system is new and no permits have yet been entered; therefore, Officers cannot renew permits for 2015 until December 1st of 2014)

Officers must submit new SAPD Off-Duty employment permits when any of the following occur:
a. A change in the officer’s outside employment, including, but not limited to:

a change in the employer, 
location, 
job category, 
duties, 
pay, 
dates, or 
hours;

b. A change in the officer’s departmental status, including, but not limited to, a change in position, assignment, division, section, unit, or duty hours; or
c. A change which makes the information on the previously approved permit incorrect, misleading or obsolete.

All SAPD Off-Duty employment permits marked “Extension of Police Service” are valid within Bexar County only with the exception of the limitation imposed by Section .05.G.1.e.(5) of this procedure in reference to bars/clubs, in most cases.
No officer is permitted to engage in employment outside Bexar County with the exception of
“Non-Extension of Police Service.”
Exceptions will be handled on a case-by-case basis through the Office of the Chief of Police.

Answer 322

A

a. An officer takes action only if a violation of the law has been or is about to be committed and the action is consistent with departmental policy;

b. The officer does not enforce private policies also known as “house rules.”
Private policies or “house rules”. refer to ; and internal rules and policies that govern consumers and patrons of the business or event as they concern the management and activities of consumers and patrons while at said businesses or event

c. Officers shall wear a regulation uniform for all outside employment.

Officers may be permitted to work in plain or soft/tactical clothes in limited circumstances provided sufficient written justification is provided in the drop-down text box explaining the plain or soft/tactical clothes duties.

Exceptions will be handled on a case-by-case basis through the Office of the Chief of Police.

Answer 323

A

a. The officer’s actions should enhance motorist’s safety and not overly restrict the normal traffic flow;
b. The officer wears an issued safety vest or regulation reflective rainwear;
c. The officer uses traffic cones and/or flares to properly direct vehicle and pedestrian traffic; and
d. The officer, at night, uses a traffic wand or flashlight with wand attachment of sufficient brightness, so as to be highly visible.

Answer 324

A

a. The officer possesses a valid Texas driver’s license permitting the officer to drive a motorcycle if the escort is performed on a motorcycle;
b. The motorcycle/vehicle is properly registered, insured, inspected and in proper condition to allow the officer to perform the escort safely;
c. The officer obeys all state traffic laws and all city traffic ordinances;
d. The officer’s actions should enhance motorist’s safety and not overly restrict the normal traffic flow; and
e. The escort is confined to the limitations authorized in the SAPD Off-Duty employment permit.

Exceptions will be handled on a case-by-case basis through the Office of the Chief of Police.

Answer 325

A

a. The employment does not require the officer to perform any function which would not be expected of an on-duty officer.

Answer 326

A

a. The officer’s activity is in the best interest of the Department;
b. The citizen to whom the service is provided is not suspected of, connected with or involved in any activity that may bring discredit upon the officer or the Department;
c. The officer’s police powers or official position is not used to advance private interests nor does the officer’s involvement suggest departmental endorsement of any activity; and
d. An officer takes action only if a violation of the law has been, or is about to be committed, and the action is consistent with departmental policy.

Exceptions will be handled on a case-by-case basis through the Office of the Chief of Police.

The examples listed in this subsection are not the only acceptable forms of outside employment - extension of police services, but serve *only as a guide for officers.

Answer 327

A

does not wear a regulation uniform, use police credentials, or represent himself as an officer of the Department.

👉🏽👍👌👈🏿
🖕🏾🖕🏽🖕🖕🏼🖕🏻
👌

Answer 328

A

a. Work in any capacity which does not directly or indirectly involve the handling, selling or serving of alcoholic beverages in restaurants, hotels, motels or facilities which are specifically designed for the presentation of participant or spectator sports, concerts, theatrical productions, or similar activities where the sale of alcoholic beverages are incidental to such activities.
The Office of the Chief shall be the final authority in determining if the sale of alcoholic beverages is incidental and whether or not it is a substantial part of a business.

b. Work in any capacity which does not directly or indirectly involve the handling, selling, or serving of alcoholic beverages in publicly owned facilities.
c. Work in any capacity which does not directly or indirectly involve the handling, selling, or serving of alcoholic beverages for which the officer donates their time and services to a bona fide charitable organization.
d. Work in any capacity which does not directly or indirectly involve the handling, selling, or serving of alcoholic beverages at an event where, because of its size, location, or other considerations. The Chief of Police determines that the work promotes the Department’s interest in public safety, enhances the collective welfare for public order, and the officer’s duties are substantially the same as those which would be performed if the officer was assigned on-duty.
e. Work in any capacity which does not directly or indirectly involve the handling, selling, or serving of alcoholic beverages at a privately-owned establishment, the primary business of which is the sale of alcoholic beverages. Restaurants whose kitchens close prior to their bars are considered such an establishment during the period when only their bars are open.

Answer 329

A

(1) Employment is limited to security functions outside the establishment
(example, in parking lots and at entrances).

Officers are authorized to provide a legitimate police function only and are not authorized to work the door of any establishment for the purpose of checking identification or enforcing house rules of any kind.

Officer(s) will not enter the establishment, except for emergency purposes.

(2) Officer(s) will take action only if a violation of the law has been or is about to be committed and the action is consistent with departmental policy.

(3) Officer(s) must provide written proof that the employer is insuring the officer against liability for their actions in furtherance of their employment at the establishment.
Officers must submit proof of insurance to the Office of the Chief in conjunction with their employment permit along with contact information for the insurer.

Officers must resubmit current proof of insurance prior to the expiration of the policy.

Officers are not permitted to work the establishment until the Office of the Chief has verified that the officer is insured and the permit has been approved by the Chief of Staff in the SAPD Off-Duty Work Permit System.
Section .05.D4 of this procedure does not apply to this section involving privately owned establishments.

“Proof of insurance” for this purpose means a Certificate of Insurance evidencing Commercial General Liability coverage, extending to actions of Independent Contractors, with a minimum limit of $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate and a copy of an endorsement to the policy listing “The City of San Antonio” as an additional insured.

(4) An officer may not work at the establishment unless at least one other authorized officer is also working at the establishment.
(5) Officers electing to work a privately owned establishment (bar/club) are limited to working within the corporate limits of the City of San Antonio.

No officer will be permitted to work a bar/club outside the City limits.

Answer 330

A

Employment in any job category, the subject of which the Chief of Police or the officer’s Division Commander determines, constitutes a conflict of interest;
Employment in any job category under conditions where an officer confers a special advantage to a private interest at the expense of a public interest;
Employment which may expose an officer of the Department to a substantial and unnecessary risk of injury as determined by the Chief of Police;
Employment in any category of job or job location which requires an officer to wear a regulation uniform or represent themselves as an officer of the Department outside of Bexar County. Exceptions will be handled on a case-by-case basis through the Office of the Chief of Police;
Employment that appears to physically or mentally exhaust the officer to the point that on-duty performance appears to be impaired;
Employment that would require any special consideration is given to the scheduling of the officer’s regular duty hours;
Employment in any other category of job or job location which may bring the Department or the officer into disrepute or for any event of a potentially compromising nature that could bring discredit upon the officer or Department, or impair the operation or efficiency of the Department; and
Employment of any kind at an establishment that may be construed as sexually oriented/human display in nature or one that may bring reproach upon or impair the reputation of the Department or officer, as determined by the Chief of Police.

Answer 331

A

a. In any seven (7) day period in which the officer performs forty (40) hours of regular duty, outside employment does not exceed twenty-four (24) hours;
b. In any seven (7) day period in which the officer does not perform any tour of regular duty, outside employment does not exceed sixty-four (64) hours;
c. In any twenty-four (24) hour period in which the officer works a regular tour of duty, outside employment does not exceed eight (8) hours; and
d. In any twenty-four (24) hour period in which the officer does not work a regular tour of duty, outside employment does not exceed fifteen (15) hours.
2. An officer engaged in outside employment, in uniform, does not perform any function which is not police related and not expected or required of an on-duty officer.
3. An officer engaged in outside employment does not perform any act which may bring the Department or officer into disrepute or impair the operation of the Department.
4. An officer engaged in outside employment with a company or organization that appears likely to be involved in a labor dispute such as a strike, picket or lockout, does not perform any act which infringes upon or interferes with the Department’s role of neutrality. The officer notifies the Office of the Chief in writing, through the chain of command, of any labor dispute.
5. An officer who enters into contract with an attorney or any person for the use of a department learned skill, such as expert testimony, does not use knowledge of police incident files or knowledge of a police incident gained from police employment in areas of civil litigation, nor suggest by their presence or otherwise that the officer, the Department or the City are party to or may appear to support one litigant over another in any civil proceedings.

8+8=16. 10+8=18. 24hr period without a tour of duty = 15 hours…..
who’s the genius fucking mathematician that figured this out?

But, city overtime hours doesn’t matter, you can get drunk fucking stupid tired and still work…. brilliant just fucking brilliant

Answer 332

A

a GOOD supervisor would send you home and carry you as unable to work due to not being given an opportunity to get the required amount of sleep. Fuck THEM)

Answer 333

A

impaired performance

Answer 334

A

(1) Turns-in any reports and citations that they generate within 72 hours of the incident or when they return to their regular duty assignment, whichever occurs first.
The report shall be prepared in the AFR system.
Officers can either request the case number through information or create one using the CAD Mobile on site activity feature.
Once complete the Officer will submit the report through the AFR process so that it may be reviewed by their supervisor.

(2) Issues a Misdemeanor Citation in compliance with GM Proc. 505, Misdemeanor Citation Release, unless the officer is working outside of the San Antonio city limits.

d. If an officer engaged in outside employment has a matter come to their attention that requires a response from an on-duty officer or officers, the officer engaged in outside employment handles the situation according to departmental rules, regulations, policies and procedures until relieved by an on-duty officer.
e. If an officer engaged in outside employment makes a custodial arrest for an offense higher than a Class C misdemeanor, or a Class C misdemeanor that cannot be handled with a Misdemeanor Citation, and the arrest is made within the San Antonio city limits, the officer:
(1) Contacts the Communications Unit and requests the appropriate on-duty response.
(2) Completes the appropriate report(s), and form(s), as required, and any other necessary documentation. The report(s) shall be prepared in the AFR system by utilizing the computer of the on-duty officer. The officer can either request the case number through the Information Channel or create one using the CAD Mobile On-Site activity feature. Once the report is complete, the officer will submit the report to their assigned queue for approval by a supervisor, which will automatically occur based on their sign on.
(3) Should the AFR system not be working at the time of the arrest, the on-duty officer will hand write an offense or supplement report using an x-ray number; a CFS number, and an offense case number. The CFS number and the offense case number will be created when the on-duty officer presses the On-Site activity feature on the CAD. The CFS and offense number need to be placed above the x-ray number on the report.
(4) In all reports, the officer describes the actions they took and completes the ID verification form along with the arrest booking sheet. He also describes in their report the elements of the crime and the actions they took. The officer will then email a copy of their report, and any other electronic documents, to the on-duty officer so that they have them for any processing at the City Detention Center or County Jail. It is recommended that the officer also email a copy of the report to themselves so that it can later be saved to this thumb drive or network folder.

(5) The officer engaged in outside employment turns over any evidence or property seized to the on-duty officer, who places the evidence or property into the Property Room pursuant to GM Proc. 606, Impounding Property.
(6) The officer engaged in outside employment is responsible for notifying the appropriate follow-up unit pursuant to GM Proc. 708, Follow-Up Units.
f. If an officer makes an arrest outside of the San Antonio city limits, but within Bexar County, the officer:
(1) Contacts the Bexar County Sheriff’s Department or the municipal agency that has original jurisdiction, pursuant to Texas Code of Criminal Procedure section 14.03.
(2) Requests that the Bexar County Sheriff’s Department or the municipal agency that has original jurisdiction take custody of the prisoner, pursuant to Texas Code of Criminal Procedure section 14.03.
(3) In situations dealing with the arrest and transportation of prisoners and/or the handling of physical evidence, the officer will complete all appropriate reports and forms. An On-Duty officer will be requested to transport any prisoner(s) and/or evidence, in accordance with GM Proc. 601, Prisoners.
(4) Cooperates with any procedures and answers any questions that the Bexar County Sheriff’s Department or the municipal agency that has original jurisdiction may require in order to complete their investigation.
(5) Utilizing the AFR system, the officer will complete the appropriate report(s) and submit it when they return to their regular duty assignment, or within 24 hours (whichever occurs first), for review by their supervisor. Officers can either request the case number through the Information channel or create one using the CAD Mobile On-Site activity feature.
g. If the Bexar County Sheriff’s Department or the municipal agency that has original jurisdiction is unable or unwilling to transport the prisoner, the officer documents their attempt to obtain transportation from the Bexar County Sheriff’s Department or the municipal agency that has original jurisdiction and he requests an on-duty San Antonio Police officer to transport the prisoner. The prisoner is then processed pursuant to Subsection .05.I.2.e. of this section.
h. The officer engaged in outside employment submits any reports and citations generated within 72 hours of the incident (or within 24 hours if an arrest is made) or when they return to their regular duty assignment, whichever occurs first.
i. Supervisors will review all off-duty reports submitted for Report Reconciliation Accountability and for prosecution by the appropriate court.
j. If the officer engaged in outside employment believes that any compensation is necessary as a result of any action taken or losses suffered pursuant to their responsibilities under this procedure, they must only seek any compensation from their off-duty employer.
k. If statute requires a license(s), certificate(s), and/or permit(s) in order to engage in an occupation, business, or profession, the officer is required to obtain and maintain the necessary license(s), certificate(s) or permit(s) prior to engaging in the occupation, business, or profession.

Answer 335

A

SAPD Form #172

Answer 336

A

An appropriate light duty assignment combined with reasonable conditions contributes to an officer’s recovery by keeping an officer productive, socially involved, and in some instances offer an opportunity to learn a new skill.

Answer 337

A

F. Limited duty assignments are made as available, subject to the following requirements:

SAPD Form #172 or DWC Form-73 is required.
It is the responsibility of the officer to inform a physician that the completion of this form is necessary, and that the form be submitted within the required time frame.
If the officer’s personal physician is unwilling to complete SAPD Form #172 or DWC Form-73, a supervisor may order the officer to be evaluated by the City’s Occupational Health office or other qualified healthcare practitioner to determine the officer’s duty status.
The form must indicate that the disabled officer is unable to perform his regularly assigned duties, but is able to perform in a limited duty assignment.
The officer’s physical or mental condition is such as to allow for a satisfactory performance in a limited duty position.
While on limited duty status, officers must follow and adhere to any conditions set forth or prescribed by their treating physician or a designated doctor which are documented in medical records or on SAPD Form #172/DWC Form-73.
While on limited duty status, officers shall not participate in any physical exertion or activities, whether on or off duty, which may have the potential to aggravate or prolong the original injury or cause a new injury.
a. Officers assigned to limited duty status because of occupational injury, an occupational disease, or a non- occupational condition, may not engage in any physical exercise or activity commonly known as “working out” which includes, but is not limited to: running, jogging, walking, lifting weights, using gym equipment, yoga, cross-fit, etc., at or away from a City facility while on duty; or any physical activity that would require an officer to “dress-out”.
The exception is therapy that is ordered by an officer’s health care provider and when this therapy is conducted at a facility specially equipped and licensed in directing and/or supervising prescribed therapy.
Once assigned to a limited duty position, duty hours and relief days are assigned by the unit director or detail supervisor.
Night and weekend duty may be required.
There is no guarantee that an officer will assume his regularly assigned shift or hours while on limited duty status.
An officer who is assigned to a limited duty assignment is responsible for keeping scheduled medical appointments and submitting the necessary forms to the Office of the Chief.
An officer on limited duty status is prohibited from engaging in any off-duty or outside employment, if such outside employment is an extension of providing a police service.
If the outside employment is for non- extension of police services, the officer may not engage in off-duty employment if such employment activities have the potential to aggravate or prolong the original injury or caused the original injury.

a. The officer placed on limited duty will forward a copy of an officer’s SAPD Form #172 or
DWC Form-73 to the Off Duty Employment Office so that this office temporarily suspends the applicable off-duty employment permits while an officer is on a limited duty assignment.
Upon being released for full duty, the officer must ensure the permits are re-activated, unless they have expired.

Officers on limited duty status must report for duty in approved civilian attire and are prohibited from wearing any regulation police uniform; or from operating or riding as a passenger in a marked police vehicle.
Officers may not make the scene of a police incident while on limited duty status. Officers on limited duty status must remain in compliance with GM Procedure 309, Weapons.
Officers on a limited duty assignment are subject to attendance requirements of the detail, unit, or section they are assigned to during their light duty assignment.
There is no guarantee that previously scheduled leave will be honored, but will be considered by the detail, unit, or section commander.
Officers on limited duty status are responsible for ensuring that they remain in compliance with necessary training and licensure requirements.

Answer 338

A

.07 EXTENDED LIMITED DUTY ASSIGNMENTS

A. A limited duty assignment is for a maximum of twelve (12) months from the date of the occupational injury, occupational disease, non-occupational condition, or the date the first distinct manifestation of the injury or disease occurred. The Chief of Police may extend this period if recovery appears imminent.
B. Any officer with a non-occupational injury/condition, upon being absent from their permanent assignment as a result of such injury/condition for a total of 18 work weeks which need not be consecutive, may be required by the Chief of Police to submit to a medical examination by a physician as designated by the City for confirmation of the reported injury/condition and to determine if the officer is permanently disabled to the point where the officer is unable to perform a bona fide occupational requirement. When it is determined that an officer is permanently disabled, the Chief shall be entitled to seek termination or initiate a medical retirement of the officer, whichever is applicable, in accordance with the Current Collective Bargaining Agreement (CBA), Article 22, Section 12, Subsection H.)

.08 RETURN TO REGULAR DUTY

A. An officer on limited duty assignment who has recovered from his occupational injury, occupational disease, or non- occupational condition and is released for full duty by a physician shall present SAPD Form #172 or DWC Form-73 to the Office of the Chief immediately during normal business hours, 0745 – 1630 hours (Monday – Friday), or if after normal business hours, shall do so immediately the next following business day. The form must be completed by a treating physician or designated doctor stating the officer may return to regular duty. The officer must submit the form to the Office of the Chief, electronically (SAPDInjuryNotification@sanantonio.gov), by fax, or by hand delivery. Officers shall not bin mail originals of completed SAPD Form #172 or DWC Form-73.
1. When a physician releases an officer to return to regular duty after normal business hours or during an extended City holiday period, the officer shall report to his regular duty assignment as scheduled, present a completed SAPD Form #172 or DWC Form-73 to a supervisor indicating he/she has been released to full duty. The officer shall be assigned to regular duties by any supervisor until such time the Office of the Chief can formally receive and process SAPD Form #172 or DWC Form-73.
a. The officer is responsible for immediately submitting SAPD Form #172 or DWC Form-73 to the Office of the Chief.
B. The Office of the Chief shall process the form and have the officer returned to his regularly assigned duties without loss of relief days or seniority.

Answer 339

A

The officer who is displaced is the officer with the non-occupational condition who has been most recently assigned to a limited duty position.
The displaced officer is assigned the next available limited duty position, but again may be subject to displacement by an officer with an occupational injury or disease.

Answer 340

A

When a physician releases an officer to return to regular duty after normal business hours or during an extended City holiday period, the officer shall report to his regular duty assignment as scheduled, present a completed SAPD Form #172 or DWC Form-73 to a supervisor indicating he/she has been released to full duty.

The officer shall be assigned to regular duties by any supervisor until such time the Office of the Chief can formally receive and process SAPD Form #172 or DWC Form-73.

 a.   The officer is responsible for immediately submitting SAPD Form #172 or DWC Form-73 to the Office of the Chief.

B. The Office of the Chief shall process the form and have the officer returned to his regularly assigned duties without loss of relief days or seniority.

Answer 341

A

non-punitive

Answer 342

A

Officer Concern Program Board

Answer 343

A

Internal Affairs Unit

Answer 344

A

(1) Complaints of rudeness (internal and external complaints);
(2) Deterioration of work quality or quantity;
(3) Tardiness;
(4) Reasonable suspicion of substance abuse;
(5) Vehicle crashes;
(6) Poor performance evaluations;
(7) EEO complaints; and
(8) Tort cases against the City due to officer’s actions

Answer 345

A

a. One (1) sustained formal complaint involving:

(1) Physical mistreatment of prisoners;
(2) Force;
(3) Family violence;
(4) Alcohol or drug abuse;
(5) An act resulting in the complainant being seriously injured;
(6) Racial/Biased Profiling;
(7) Insubordination; or
(8) Significant Behavioral Infraction

b. Three (3) complaints in any combination of the following:

(1) Formal complaints;
(2) Administrative reviews;
(3) Deactivated cases, based solely on complainant waiver.

c. One (1) criminal activity complaint supported by credible evidence or which results in an arrest, or formal charges by “indictment,” “information,” “complaint,” or other charging instrument.

d. Four (4) complaints comprised of any combination of formal or line complaints.
Complaints which are addressed through the chain of command are considered line complaints for the purpose of this procedure.

e. Three (3) chargeable city vehicle crashes within a eighteen (18) month period.

f. Any combination of four (4) driving-related complaints and/or chargeable city vehicle crashes within a eighteen (18) month period.
For example:

2 chargeable city vehicle crashes and 2 driving-related complaints or
1 chargeable city vehicle crashes and 3 driving-related complaints

Three (3) chargeable city vehicle crashes within a eighteen (18) month period is a REFERRAL TO OFFICER CONCERN PROGRAM

Answer 346

A

B. Board members must have a minimum of five (5) years seniority with the Department and must not have incurred a suspension during the previous twelve (12) months.

C. Board members serve six (6) month terms.

D. All Board members shall sign a pledge of confidentiality.

E. Five (5) Board members must be present to conduct a hearing.

F. A non-voting Staff Psychologist will be appointed to the Board.

G. A non-voting specialist may also be appointed to the Board by the Board Chairperson.

Answer 347

A

F. The Preliminary Review Panel will determine by majority vote whether or not to send the officer’s case study to the entire Board for review.

The Preliminary Review Panel will notify the Board Chairperson of its decision in writing.
Case studies not forwarded to the entire Board for review are returned to the Officer Concern Program Coordinator and will remain on file in that office.
In cases not forwarded to the Board, an officer will again become a candidate for the program if an additional complaint is received within eighteen (18) months of the original complaint which caused the referral.

Answer 348

A

B. Board Hearing

The Officer Concern Program Coordinator briefs the Board on the officer case study.
The officer candidate is allowed to participate in the Board hearing to provide additional information and to explain the behavior in question.
The officer is then excused while the Board members deliberate.
The Board members discuss the case and, by written secret ballot, make recommendations whether or not to enter the officer into the Officer Concern Program.
a. If the majority vote is to enter the officer into the Officer Concern Program, the Board develops a “Plan of Action” to be recommended to the Chief of Police for his review and consideration.
b. If the majority vote is not to enter the officer into the Officer Concern Program, any additional complaints within the eighteen (18) month cycle will cause the officer to become a candidate again. The eighteen (18) month cycle begins from the date of the complaint which caused the referral to the Officer Concern Program.
If the officer is entered into the Officer Concern Program, the Board Chairperson meets with the Chief of Police to review the Board’s recommendation and Plan of Action.
The Chief of Police may approve, modify, or reject the Plan of Action.
a. If the Chief of Police approves or modifies the Plan of Action, a written order is issued to the officer.
b. If the Chief of Police rejects the Board’s recommendation or Plan of Action, the officer’s status changes to potential candidate.
If the Chief of Police approves the Plan of Action, a meeting is called by the Officer Concern Program Board Chairperson and includes the following persons:

a. Chairperson;
b. Officer (candidate);
c. The officer’s immediate supervisor;
d. The officer’s Division Commander;
e. A Board member holding the same rank as the officer; and
f. If temporary reassignment is part of the Plan of Action, the supervisor responsible for supervision of the officer during the temporary reassignment.

At the meeting, the Board Chairperson explains the Plan of Action (written order) to all attendees.
The Plan of Action is then signed by the officer and the Board Chairperson.

Answer 349

A

.09 OFFICER CONCERN PROGRAM ANNUAL EVALUATION

A. The Officer Concern Program Coordinator will complete an annual written evaluation of the Officer Concern Program to determine the Program’s effectiveness and to recommend any modifications which need to be made.
The annual evaluation will be presented to the Chief of Police, and at a minimum, will include the following:

Number of officers referred to the Officer Concern Program during the calendar year;
Most common method of referral;
Most common remedial action taken; and
The effectiveness of the Officer Concern Program.

Answer 350

A

.03 POLICY

It is the policy of the San Antonio Police Department to establish and maintain an open and cooperative environment in which members of the media and public may obtain timely and accurate information on all matters of community interest in a manner which does not jeopardize police operations or the rights of citizens, complainants, witnesses, and persons in custody.

Answer 351

A

Limiting media personnel to those areas which will not interfere with operational functions and access to the location;
Establishing and marking an information dissemination point or press area;
Arranging interviews with appropriate personnel if and when feasible; and
Preparing a written news release, if necessary.

Answer 352

A

.06 INFORMATION NOT RELEASED
A. Police Incidents

The following information in connection with police incidents is not released:
a. The name of a complainant or victim who is deceased or seriously injured, until a surviving relative has been notified;
b. The name of a complainant who has been involved in any type of sexual offense;
c. The name of a suspect, until the suspect has been booked in a jail facility or formal charges have been filed;
d. Identification and description of witnesses;
e. The existence or contents of statements, oral admissions, or oral confessions made by a suspect or apprehended person;
f. Personal opinions about the suspect and/or information on evidence;
g. Statements concerning the testimony or the truthfulness of witnesses; and
h. Photographs of any person who is a suspect or arrested person which are taken for purposes of investigatory or criminal history record information in an ongoing investigation.
Any officer encountering a citizen or media representative who is not satisfied with the officer’s response to a request for non-releasable information should refer the citizen or media representative to the officer’s immediate supervisor.

B. Internal Information

Requests from the public or media for release of the home address or phone number of any member of the Department are referred to the Police Media Services Detail.
Any requests from outside the Department for release of information from departmental administrative or field files are referred to the Accounting and Personnel Office.

Answer 353

A

I. All officers having been issued a shoulder weapon shall carry it when on duty.

J. Officers must have their handguns, shoulder weapons and intermediate weapons registered with the Firearms Proficiency Control Officer (FPCO).

K. Officers seeking authorization to carry an intermediate weapon which they have not completed training with at the SAPD Training Academy must present a certificate of training from a department-approved organization which provided the training and demonstrate proficiency in the use of the intermediate weapon to the Training Academy Commander or his designee.

L. Department-issued rifles and shotguns are assigned to the duty station the officer works. Whenever an officer is promoted or transfers from their duty station, the City rifle or shotgun shall be returned to the Department armorer for an inventory check and inspection.
This does not include transfers when an officer stays at the same shift/assignment, but gets different relief days.
After the weapon is inventoried and inspected, the appropriate duty station will be contacted and advised the firearm is ready for re-issuance.

M. Suppressors (also called silencers) or any type of device attached to or part of the barrel of a firearm, which reduces the amount of noise generated by a firearm are 🚫 prohibited 🚫 from being used on all Department issued and personally-owned firearms, authorized to be carried, on or off duty by officers.
Any Unit needing to make use of a suppressor (as described above) must seek permission through their chain of command and have written approval from the Chief of Police or his designee prior to making use of such type of device.

Answer 354

A

I. Officers, both on-duty and off-duty, must carry handguns in an approved holster while carrying the handguns on their person:

Officers working in casual dress code or covert/undercover assignments, as well as off-duty officers, may carry handguns in a container such as a purse, briefcase, fanny pack, carrying bag, etc.
Handguns carried in containers are not required to be in a holster when such containers are designed to secure the handgun in a manner which would prevent:
a. The handgun from becoming readily accessible to unauthorized persons;
b. Accidental discharges; and
c. Exposure of the handgun to the public.

J. Officers working covert/undercover assignments may carry their handguns one primary handgun, either concealed on their person, or in such a manner which makes the handgun readily available and which is under the officer’s immediate control.

K. While in a police vehicle, a shoulder weapon is carried in the vehicle transport mode:

A shotgun will be transported with chamber empty, action closed, safety on; magazine tube loaded and stored in an approved shoulder weapon case inside the trunk of the police vehicle or in the vehicle mounted weapon rack. The additional rounds will be stored on the stock pouch, side saddle, or in a “GO” bag.
An AR-15 will be transported with chamber empty, bolt closed, safety on, magazine inserted and stored in an approved shoulder weapon case inside the trunk of the police vehicle, along with one additional 30 round magazine loaded with 28 rounds; or secured in a vehicle mounted weapon rack.
Exigent circumstances involving officer and public safety may necessitate the need for an officer to have the shoulder weapon in the vehicle in other than the vehicle transport mode.

L. Shoulder weapons, when carried to and from a police facility, are carried in vehicle transport mode, in an approved shoulder weapons case.

Answer 355

A

Upon successful completion of an approved handgun mounted weaponlight course, officers may utilize the light-bearing version of the approved duty holster along with an approved handgun-mounted weaponlight in accordance with Section .08 of this procedure.
If approved, one concealed/secondary handgun may also be carried in accordance Sections .05 and .08 of this procedure.
If approved, the officer may carry one (1) patrol rifle and/or one (1) patrol shotgun in accordance with Sections .05 and .08 of this procedure.
Officers assigned to the Special Operations Unit may receive approval from their Division Commander to carry another approved handgun as their primary handgun.
Officers of the rank of Captain or above while wearing a garrison belt will carry in an approved holster either the City issued Smith and Wesson M and P40 handgun or an optional primary handgun, in accordance with Section .08 of this procedure.

Answer 356

A

C. Casual Dress:
On-duty officers wearing casual dress apparel shall conform to the following:

Officers shall carry one primary handgun concealed on their person;
Officers are encouraged to carry their Department issued Smith and Wesson M and P40 handgun.
Officers carrying the Department issued Smith and Wesson M and P40 handgun shall carry the handgun concealed on their person in an approved holster in accordance with Section .05 of this procedure.
Officers carrying the Department issued Smith and Wesson M and P40 handgun shall also carry a sufficient amount of reserve ammunition to allow for the complete reloadingof their primary handgun.
If approved, officers may carry a handgun other than the Department issued Smith and Wesson M and P40 handgun as a primary handgun in accordance with Sections .05 and .08 of this procedure.
Additionally, officers approved to carry a handgun other than the Smith and Wesson M and P40 handgun, as a primary handgun, shall carry it in an approved holster in accordance with Section .08 of this procedure.
Officers under this section may carry their primary weapon either *on their person *or in a container such as a *purse, briefcase, fanny pack, carrying bag, etc. in accordance with Section .05 of this procedure.
If approved, one concealed/secondary handgun may also be carried in accordance with Sections .05 and .08 of this procedure.

Answer 357

A

E. Off-Duty Officers:
Off-duty officers may carry approved handguns and are subject to the following requirements:

The handgun(s) should be carried concealed in a safe and secure manner by officers while off-duty.

Additionally, the handgun shall be carried in accordance with Section .05 of this procedure.

Officers who carry firearms while off-duty will be subject to the same policies, procedures, rules and regulations pertaining to officers while on-duty.
Having a Handgun License (HL) does not relieve officers from complying with this procedure.
Should officers choose to open carry while
* off-duty*; they must also display their badge and use an approved weapon and holster in accordance with Subsection .02 of this procedure.

Answer 358

A

B. In accordance with COSA Administrative Directive 4.80, Violence in the Workplace,
non-sworn members are not prohibited from handling weapons during the course and scope of their duties, when authorized by appropriate authority and in a work related capacity.

Answer 359

A

E. HANDGUNS FOR CONCEALED/SECONDARY OR COVERT/UNDERCOVER CARRY:

For a handgun to be considered for approval under this section, it must be either:

A double-action revolver with a caliber designation not less than .38 caliber, nor more than .45 caliber, that holds at least five (5) rounds of ammunition; or
A semi-automatic handgun with a caliber designation not less than .380 caliber, nor more than .45 caliber, with a minimum magazine capacity of five (5) rounds of ammunition.
Officers approved to carry a handgun under this section must carry the handgun in a holster that is designed for the make and model of the firearm that provides at least one mechanical, retention device and makes the firearm readily available.
Shoulder holsters must be a vertical carry configuration.
Concealed holsters may consider the garment providing concealment as the retention device.
Officers approved to carry a concealed/secondary weapon under this section shall carry the weapon in accordance with Section .05 of this procedure.

F. SHOULDER WEAPONS:
For a shoulder weapon to be considered for approval it must be, or have, as part of its associated equipment:

A 12-gauge pump shotgun with a barrel length of 18 to 20 inches with a minimum five (5) round magazine tube and a manual-of-arms matching to the department-issued patrol shotgun. The weapon must have been produced and assembled by a reputable manufacturer.

a. The shotgun shall have a 1, 2, or 3 point sling.
b. The shotgun may have bead, rifle, or “Ghost Ring” sights permanently affixed to the weapon.
c. The shotgun may also have a non-magnifying optical sight in addition to the iron sights.
d. The shotgun may have a retractable stock, and/or pistol grip.
e. The officer must provide either a side-saddle, stock-pouch or like designed device affixed to the weapon that has the capability to hold any additional rounds issued for duty carry.
f. Any personally-owned shotgun shall conform to all specifications required by the Training Academy and must be inspected and approved by the FPCO and/or the Armorer prior to use.

An AR-15 style rifle in 5.56 mm/.223 caliber only, with a barrel length of 16 to 20 inches (with or without flash suppressor), and manufactured by a reputable major manufacturer.
This means the continuous barrel length (portion measured from the bolt face, with bolt closed, to the muzzle) must be a minimum of 16 inches.
The barrel length excludes any device which is either permanently or temporarily affixed to the barrel, and:

a. Must have a metal receiver.
b. Must have a minimum of two-30 round magazines, each magazine shall be loaded with 28 rounds.
Each magazine shall have that number (28) marked with an indelible marker on the outside of each magazine.

c. May have a 1, 2, or 3 point sling.
d. Must have adjustable iron sights affixed to the receiver.
e. Optics –May have a non-magnifying optical sight in addition to the adjustable iron sights.

Upon completion of an 8 hour proficiency course officers may utilize:

i. Magnifier – a magnifier is a magnification device that can be affixed to the patrol rifle behind the officer’s existing non-magnified red dot sight.
The magnifier cannot exceed five power (5x) of magnification.
The magnifier must be attached to the patrol rifle with a side flip mounting system. The patrol rifle must have functional iron sights affixed to the rifle at all times.

ii. Variable powered optic 1-4 – A variable powered optic is defined as: an optic that the power of magnification can be changed from no power, or non-magnified up to a higher power of magnification not to exceed four power (4x).
The tube body of the optic must measure at least 30mm in diameter.
It must be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer, designed for Law Enforcement use.
It must have an illuminated sight reference (ie Dot, chevron, crosshair).
It must have a reticle that remains visible with or without battery power.
The Officer should use a cover or flip up lens protection for his/her optic while in transport.
It must have a quick detach mounting system to attach the optic to the patrol rifle to allow for removal if necessary.
The patrol rifle must have functional iron sights affixed to the rifle at all times.

f. A quick detachable mount for the non-magnifying optical sight is optional, but preferable for electric powered optical sights.
g. Must have a factory unaltered trigger press weight of not less than 4 pounds.
h. May have a fixed or adjustable stock.
i. The officer must provide a magazine pouch, coupler, drop pouch, or like designed device that can hold at least one (1) 30 round magazine loaded with 28 rounds.
j. Shoulder weapons shall conform to all specifications required by the Training Academy and must be inspected and approved by the FPCO and/or the Armorer prior to use.
k. Officers must provide a shoulder weapon case that conforms to Section .08 of this procedure.

Answer 360

A

H. HOLSTERS:
Holsters and cases shall be inspected and approved by the FPCO prior to being carried by officers.
For a holster to be considered for approval, it must be a holster that is designed for the make and model of the firearm that provides at least one mechanical, retention device, and makes the firearm readily available.
Shoulder holsters must be a vertical carry configuration.
Concealed holsters may consider the garment providing concealment as the retention device.

Uniformed officers shall utilize the Safariland Model 6360 ALS Duty Holster to carry the S and W M and P40.
Upon successful completion of an approved handgun mounted weaponlight course uniformed officers may utilize the light bearing version of the Safariland Model 6360 ALS Duty Holster to carry the Smith and Wesson M and P40 handgun.

I. SHOULDER WEAPONS CASES:
Cases shall be inspected and approved by the FPCO prior to being carried by officers.
For a case to be considered for approval, it must be a case that is designed for the make and model of the shoulder weapon that provides the ability to carry extra magazines and associated equipment, and makes the weapon readily available.

Answer 361

A

.10 OBTAINING APPROVALS TO CARRY SHOULDER WEAPONS

A. Officers shall receive written approval on SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, from their division commander prior to attending shoulder weapon training and carrying a shoulder weapon.

B. A Patrol Division Commander shall request officers for the Shoulder Weapon Program (Department-issued weapons) based on availability within a specific district or section.

C.   Upon written approval on Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, from the FPCO, an officer may be approved to carry one (1) personally owned rifle and/or one (1) personally owned shotgun with the approval and registration by the Department for police use. 
Only one (1) shoulder weapon will be Department-issued.

D. Officers will be allowed to carry only approved shoulder weapons (Department-issued or personally-owned), while on-duty.

E. Officers shall carry shoulder weapons in accordance with the guidelines listed in their SOP, as well as this procedure.

Answer 362

A

.12 LESS LETHAL MUNITIONS

A. Less lethal munitions are extended range impact projectiles designed to safely incapacitate potentially dangerous person(s) from a distance that minimizes the danger to agents and citizens.
Projectiles are fired or launched for the purpose of causing blunt trauma, which is used to encourage compliance and overcome resistance with a reduced likelihood of causing death. The department authorizes the use of approved 12-gauge, 40 mm, and 37 mm less lethal devices

B. Prior to firing less lethal rounds from either a 12-gauge shotgun or 37mm launcher, officers shall:

Unload all ammunition from the weapon;
Visually and manually inspect the breech and magazine or cylinder of the weapon to ensure that all ammunition has been removed from the weapon;
Load the less lethal munitions into the weapon, visually inspecting each round prior to insertion, ensuring that the ammunition which is being loaded is the correct less lethal munitions; and
Whenever possible, a second officer shall observe and verify all stages of the unloading of the weapon and the loading of all less lethal munitions.

C. When deploying less lethal munitions, the preferred target areas are the arms, shoulders, thighs, knees, or shins of the subject.
The operator should not intentionally target the head/neck, thorax, heart, groin, or spine of the subject.

Answer 363

A

C. Failure to Qualify with a Department Issued Handgun:
1. In addition to not scoring a minimum of seventy percent (70%) on the established course of fire, unsafe behavior or failure to demonstrate the proper functioning or handling of a handgun are also grounds for failure to qualify.

Officers who fail to qualify during their scheduled departmental in-service qualification period or who do not qualify during a calendar year with a Department issued S and W M and P40 handgun will:a. Surrender their Department issued handgun to the FPCO;
b. Surrender their Department issued shoulder weapon to the FPCO, if assigned to a Department Shoulder Weapon Program. The officer will be removed from the Department Shoulder Weapon Program until further notice by a Patrol Division commander;
c. Not be allowed to qualify with any other firearm until they have qualified with their Department issued handgun; and
d. Not be allowed to carry any firearm, on- or off-duty.
The FPCO shall immediately notify the Training Academy Commander when an officer fails to qualify after two attempts with his Department issued handgun
Officers failing to qualify are prohibited from wearing the police uniform or working off-duty employment in city facilities or outside employment, which requires an extension of police services, until they qualify.
When scheduled, the officer will be given two (2) new attempts to qualify and must score a minimum of seventy percent (70%) on the Department’s established course of fire as administered and scored by the FPCO. The FPCO shall immediately notify the Training Academy Commander when an officer fails to qualify after the fourth attempt.
In the event an officer fails to qualify after the fourth attempt, the Training Academy Commander contacts the Office of the Chief of Police to place the officer on special assignment to the Training Academy. The officer will attend a sixteen (16) hour firearm remediation course at the Training Academy.
Upon completion of the firearms remediation course, officers are given two (2) final attempts to qualify and must score a minimum of seventy percent (70%) on the Department’s established course of fire as administered and scored by the FPCO.
Officers who qualify on one of their two (2) final attempts are released from special assignment and returned to their assigned units. The officer will resume his police duties and may resume working off-duty employment in city facilities and outside employment. All officers who are assigned to the remediation course shall be required to attend quarterly remedial firearms training.
Officers who fail to qualify on their final attempts are retained on special assignment, with a recommendation for termination sent to the Chief of Police.

D. Failure to Qualify with Personally-Owned Handguns

Officers who fail to qualify after the second attempt on a given day will not be approved to carry the handgun.
Additional attempts to qualify may be scheduled with the officer by the FPCO or his designee.

Answer 364

A

F. Failure to Qualify with a Shoulder Weapon

Officers failing to qualify on any Departmental qualification courses with a shoulder weapon after two (2) attempts shall not be authorized to carry a shoulder weapon. The FPCO will issue the officer and their supervisor a written notification on SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, advising the officer he is not authorized to carry a shoulder weapon.
The officer’s division commander will be notified by the FPCO when an officer fails to qualify after two (2) attempts with a shoulder weapon.
Officers failing to qualify with a shoulder weapon shall surrender their Department issued shoulder weapon to the FPCO. The officer will be removed from the Department Shoulder Weapon Program until further notice by a Patrol Division commander.
With approval from the officer’s division commander, the FPCO may reschedule a final qualification attempt for officers who have failed shoulder weapon qualification.

G. Approval/ Denial and Registration of Firearms

Upon successful completion of the Department’s established Firearms Qualification Courses with a handgun or shoulder weapon, the FPCO will register the firearm(s) with the Department in the following manner:
a. Complete SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, indicating approval or denial for the officer to carry the handgun(s) and/or shoulder weapon. The FPCO or his designee and the officer requesting approval, shall sign SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, indicating knowledge of approval or denial of the request;
b. The FPCO or his designee will give the officer a completed copy of SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm;
c. The officer will route a copy of the completed SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, through his chain of command to his division commander. The officer’s unit/shift director shall file a copy of the form in the officer’s field file; and
d. The FPCO shall maintain and file the original SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, and shall register the information on the firearm(s) in the police firearms computer program.
Officers who no longer choose to have a personally-owned weapon registered with the Department will submit a written report to the FPCO requesting the handgun, rifle, or shotgun be removed from the officers’ approval list. Officers will also route a copy of the report through their chain of command.

Answer 365

A

D. In the event a personally-owned firearm becomes damaged or inoperative, the officer may opt to have a non- department armorer repair the firearm at his own expense. This repair must be reported to the FPCO in writing. The FPCO or his designee will inspect the firearm after the repair and prior to the officer carrying the firearm.

E. Upon discovering unauthorized repairs, modifications, or parts to any Department-issued firearm, the FPCO notifies another Firearms Range staff member in order to verify the unauthorized repairs, modifications or parts, and;

If the firearm is a Department-issued firearm, the Armorer, the FPCO, or his designee makes the required repairs or changes so the firearm meets Departmental specifications; or
If the firearm is a personally-owned firearm, the Academy assigned FPCO or Academy assigned range staff shall document the incident on SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, and advise the officer the firearm is not approved to be carried by the officer for police use; and
The FPCO will submit a written report to the Training Academy Commander detailing the unauthorized repairs, modifications, or parts. The Training Academy Commander shall notify the officer’s division commander for possible disciplinary action against the officer. All disciplinary action shall be handled in accordance with GM Proc. 303, Disciplinary Procedures.

Answer 366

A

B. Firearms Proficiency Control Officer:

 1. Is in charge of the departmental weapon ranges during firearm exercises;
 2. Ensures all persons on the weapon ranges adhere to the range safety rules;
 3. Inspects, approves, and documents all firearms, holsters, ammunition, and shoulder weapon cases officers are authorized to carry, both on- and off-duty, for police use;
 4. Makes repairs, modifications, and changes parts on Department-issued firearms.
 5. Establishes and maintains all firearms training, and records officers’ training and the information on officers’ weapons into the Police Firearms computer program;
 6. The FPCO or his designee administers and scores the firearms qualification process for all officers; and
 7. Notifies the Training Academy Commander in writing when;    a. An officer fails to qualify with their Department-issued handgun;    b. An officer’s qualification is about to expire or has expired due to a lapse of time; and    c. An officer has made unauthorized repairs, modifications, or has changed parts on an authorized weapon.

C. Armorer

 1. Maintains the Armory and Supply Office and issues authorized supplies when needed.
 2. Makes repairs, modifications, and changes parts on Department issued firearms.
 3. When OC spray/gel canisters, or an ECD or related equipment are returned to the Armory by officers, the Armorer replaces the equipment and completes the appropriate section of SAPD Form 62-RFI, Receipt for Issue/Replacement OC Spray/Gel and/or ECD. The Armorer forwards a copy of the form to the Internal Affairs Unit.

Answer 367

A

F. All Officers

1. Carry only authorized weapons, ammunition, and holsters, on-duty or off-duty, in accordance with this procedure.
2. Maintain qualifications on all authorized weapons they carry, and ensure the weapons function properly at all times.
3. Allow only the Department Armorer, the Academy assigned FPCO or the Academy Range Staff to make repairs, modifications, or changes of parts to any Department-issued
4. Officers carrying any Department-issued approved firearm or ECD which is damaged or inoperative shall immediately return the firearm or ECD to the Amory for inspection and/or repair. If the Armory is closed, a supervisor shall accompany the officer to the Ready Room to obtain a spare firearm or ECD to replace the damaged or inoperative department-issued firearm or ECD. A written report listing the malfunction or damage shall be attached to the firearm or ECD and a copy of the report is routed through the officer’s chain of command to his Division Commander.
5. The loss or theft of a Department-issued or personally-owned approved firearm shall immediately be reported to the FPCO or his designee, Department Armorer, and a supervisory officer. a. If the loss or theft occurred inside the city limits, the supervisory officer will ensure an offense report is written. b. If the loss or theft occurs in another jurisdiction, the officer shall immediately notify the appropriate law enforcement agency and ensure a report is written by the agency. c. The officer shall write an incident report under an SAPD case number detailing the loss or theft. d. The officer routes a copy of his report documenting the loss or theft through his chain of command and to the Armorer.
6. Any officer who transfers from one duty station to another shall return their Department-issued rifle or shotgun to the armory, in a clean condition. The Armorer shall conduct an inventory of the equipment and inspect the firearm.
7. Any officer discharging a firearm accidentally or intentionally, except while training on a shooting range or while lawfully hunting wild game, shall immediately notify an on-duty supervisor and report the incident in writing, through his chain of command, to the Division Commander in accordance with Rule and Regulation 3.31, Subsection D. a. The supervisor notified will review all the circumstances surrounding the firearm discharge to ensure all policy, training, weapon/equipment, and discipline issues are addressed. b. Upon completion of his initial review, the supervisor will handle in accordance with GM Proc. 303, Disciplinary Procedures. c. The officer’s initial report and the supervisor’s written review and recommendations are then forwarded through the chain of command for final review and disposition. d. The Division Commander shall review the reports and recommendations, and based on the merits, substance, and gravity of the incident, will request further investigation, implement discipline in accordance with the current Collective Bargaining Agreement, or recommend no disciplinary action. e. Regardless of the outcome, all reports with recommendations will be routed to the Internal Affairs Unit and will be maintained on file in accordance with the Department’s retention schedule.

Any officer discharging an intermediate weapon accidentally or intentionally shall immediately notify an on- duty supervisor and report the incident in writing, through his chain of command, to his Division Commander; all requirements of Subsection .06 (a-e) will apply.
Any officer who uses oleoresin capsicum (OC) spray/gel shall return the OC spray/gel canister, even if partially used, to the Armory or Ready Room to obtain replacement equipment prior to the end of his tour of duty. Fired ECD cartridges are replaced prior to the end of the officer’s tour of duty.
a. If the Armory is closed, a Supervisor shall accompany the officer to the Ready Room to replace the used OC spray/gel canister or fired ECD cartridges.
b. SAPD Form #62-RFI, Receipt for Issue/Replacement OC Spray/Gel and/or ECD, shall be completed by the officer (and the supervisor when applicable).
(1) It is attached to the used OC spray/gel canister.
(2) For an ECD and/or cartridge, one copy of the replacement receipt shall be left in a designated receptacle in the Ready Room

Answer 368

A

a. The name of the court or hearing attended;
b. The dates and times the officer appeared;
c. The reason for the officers attendance in the court or hearing; and
d. The name and phone number of a contact person from the court or hearing who can verify the officer’s attendance.

Answer 369

A

F. When a member is required to attend two different courts at the same time,
he attends the higher court and notifies the lower court and/or Court Liaison Detail of his whereabouts.
When a member is required to attend a court and a pre-trial conference at the same time,
he attends court and notifies the Court Liaison Detail so the pre-trial conference can be rescheduled.

G. Members do not testify in a civil proceeding unless they are properly subpoenaed by either the plaintiff or the defendant in the case.
Immediately upon receiving a civil subpoena, members shall notify their chain of command and contact the Legal Advisor’s Office to see if an attorney needs to review the civil case.

Answer 370

A

.04 SUBPOENA PROCESS -
DISTRICT and COUNTY COURTS

A. Most subpoenas for members are issued by District and Bexar County Courts are received in the Court Liaison Detail, where they are directed to the respective member’s unit of assignment.

B. All units maintain a subpoena log, which members check upon reporting for duty to determine if they have any subpoenas.
Members shall accept and sign for their subpoenas in the subpoena log and make the necessary return immediately upon receipt of a subpoena.

C. Subpoenas issued less than six (6) days prior to the court date may be delivered by Bexar County deputy sheriffs, Bexar County District Attorney’s Office investigators, or Court Liaison Detail personnel.
Members shall cooperate with the deputies, investigators, and Court Liaison Detail personnel serving subpoenas for the District and County Courts.

D. When a subpoena is issued for a date on which a member will be on vacation, the subpoena is immediately returned to the Court Liaison Office with notification the member is on vacation, with the beginning and ending dates of vacation.

E. Once a member has received a subpoena, he shall not schedule any type of leave for the date and time of the stand-by period.
If Court Liaison personnel or a judge verbally contacts a member and places them on stand-by or advises them they are to appear in a court on a specific date and time, the member may not schedule leave for the specified date and time.
A supervisor reviews the subpoena log prior to authorizing leave for members to ensure the member has no subpoenas during the period of the requested leave.

Answer 371

A

.06 DISTRICT and COUNTY COURT
STAND-BY PROCEDURES

A. Officers may be placed on stand-by only through a subpoena issued by the State, an order from a judge, notification from the District Attorney’s Office, or by notification from the Court Liaison Detail.

When a judge places an officer on stand-by, the officer shall contact the Court Liaison Detail so the stand-by can be recorded, the stand-by hours verified, and the stand-by coordinated.
When a prosecutor or defense attorney attempts to place a member on stand-by, the member shall notify the Court Liaison Detail and refer the prosecutor or defense attorney to do the same.

B. Members receiving criminal subpoenas for district or county courts are automatically placed on stand-by unless the subpoena or notice is stamped or states
“No Stand-by” or the criminal subpoena is issued for the defense.
If a member receives a reset notice, this only advises the member the case is being reset.
A reset notice is not a subpoena and does not require the member to be on stand-by.

C. The stand-by hour for all district and county courts is 1000 to 1100 hours, unless otherwise stated on the subpoena or when notified by the Court Liaison Detail.

If the member will be on-duty when the stand-by is scheduled, he lists the proper telephone number of the Department and the extension where he may be reached on the “return.”

2. If the member will be off-duty when the stand-by is scheduled, he shall be available by the telephone. 
Recording devices (answering machines, voicemail, pagers, etc.) are *not* permitted during the stand-by hour.

Answer 372

A

C. When a subpoena is issued for a date on which a member will be on vacation, the subpoena is immediately returned to Municipal Court.
Before returning the subpoena, the back of the subpoena is completed by the member and signed by the member’s supervisor.

D. Once a member has received a subpoena, he shall not schedule any type of leave for the date and time of his scheduled court appearance.
A supervisor reviews the subpoena log prior to authorizing leave for a member to ensure the member has no subpoenas during the period of the requested leave.

E. Officers who sign the bottom of a Traffic subpoena, stating they are unable to recall the details of the citation in which the officer issued to the violator, will not appear for court or submit overtime for their court appearance.

Answer 373

A

.09 SUBPOENAS ISSUED OUTSIDE OF BEXAR COUNTY

A. A member who receives a subpoena from an agency outside Bexar County shall immediately notify his immediate
supervisor and unit director of the subpoena in a written report.

B. Members scheduled to be on-duty during the time of the out-of-county court date are placed on administrative leave.

C. Members not scheduled to be on-duty during the time of the out-of-county court date are responsible for contacting the agency who issued the subpoena and securing the necessary travel arrangements, as well as compensation, for responding to the subpoena.

Answer 374

A

District Courts;
County Courts-at-Law;
Grand Juries;
Justice of the Peace Courts;
San Antonio Municipal Courts;
Civil Service Commission or Arbitration Hearing;
Texas Alcoholic Beverage Commission Hearings;
Federal Courts;
Administrative License Revocation Hearings;
Pretrial Conferences.

Answer 375

A

C. Off-duty officers subpoenaed to testify in Federal Court or in a jurisdiction outside of Bexar County as a result of the officer’s employment as a San Antonio police officer or as a result of the officer having taken some official law enforcement action pertaining to the proceeding apply for compensation or reimbursement from the jurisdiction in which they testify, in the event compensation is available. Any compensation received may be:

Retained by the officer; or
Surrendered to the Chief’s Office or the Accounting and Personnel Office in return for overtime or compensatory time at a rate specified by the current contract between the City of San Antonio and the
San Antonio Police Officers’ Association.

D. An officer who refuses or neglects to apply for compensation from Federal Court, or from an out-of-town jurisdiction which secured his attendance, provided compensation from the jurisdiction is available, receives no overtime or compensatory time from the San Antonio Police Department.

Answer 376

A

I. An off-duty officer who attends court or a pre-trial conference in the morning and is dismissed before three (3) hours time has elapsed and is ordered to return after lunch receives the three (3) hour minimum or the actual time spent in court (whichever is greater) for the morning and afternoon appearances combined.

J. To receive compensation, an officer submits verification of attendance in a court or hearing as outlined in Section .02 C2 and 3 of this procedure.

K. In order for an officer to receive the proper compensation for his off-duty stand-by status for court, he attaches the subpoena or the written notification received from the Court Liaison Detail to the court attendance card and forwards it through his normal chain of command.

L. When an officer on off-duty stand-by status is called to appear, he receives stand-by compensation in addition to the regular court appearance compensation if his appearance is after the regular stand-by hours.

M. Civilian members receive compensation according to City administrative directives and Department policies and procedures.

Answer 377

A

.12 COURT DRESS CODES

A. Members attending court or hearings for judicial proceedings or civil proceedings where their testimony is the result of the member having taken some official law enforcement action pertaining to the proceeding shall appear in a regulation uniform, assigned duty uniform or in appropriate business/relaxed apparel, in accordance with
GM Procedure 310, Uniforms and Dress Codes.

B. Officers in undercover assignments need not shave their beards or cut their hair, but shall conform to other personal grooming requirements.

C. Members shall NOT wear the regulation uniform or any other authorized uniform in any proceedings to which they are subpoenaed or requested to testify on behalf of the defense in a criminal case; against the City of San Antonio, Texas, in a civil case; or against the interest of the Department in any civil service hearing, arbitration, or administrative hearing.

D. Members attending court or hearings for judicial proceedings or civil proceedings where their testimony is NOT the result of the officer having taken some official law enforcement action pertaining to the proceeding shall NOT wear the regulation uniform or any other authorized uniform, unless the officer is subpoenaed by the State of Texas, the City of San Antonio, or the San Antonio Police Department.

E. Members subject to Mandatory Reassignment shall comply with Procedure 908, Mandatory Reassignment.

Answer 378

A

D. Members who have a regular tour of duty starting after 1700 hours on the date immediately prior to the date they are to report for jury duty may be relieved from regular duty early to return home to rest before reporting for jury duty.
This subsection also covers members who report for jury duty on a relief day.

E. Members selected to serve on a jury whose duration is more than one (1) day, excluding relief days, must contact their unit/shift director each day to advise them they are still on jury duty.

F. Upon completion of jury duty and the return to regular duty, members shall submit a COSA Notice of Leave Form for all administrative leave used for jury duty.
The Jury Duty Certification Card is attached to the pink slip.

G. Any compensation received for jury duty while an officer is on administrative leave is turned into the Accounting and Personnel Office.
Any compensation received for jury duty on a member’s relief day is retained by the member.

Answer 379

A

.04 AUTHORIZED USE

A. Members operate only those city vehicles assigned to them and only for the accomplishment of assigned duties.

B. Members transport only authorized persons in a city vehicle.

Authorized persons include on-duty members, prisoners, complainants, and witnesses; immediate family members may be transported if the city vehicle is being used in accordance with Section .07 of this procedure.
Approval to transport off-duty members or non-members must be received from the unit supervisor.
Approval for any person(s) to ride as an observer must be arranged in advance in accordance with GM
Procedure 319, Civilian Observer Program.

C. Division commanders ensure all units under their command maintain a daily record of the assignment and use of all city vehicles assigned to their respective commands.

Such record shall reflect:

The member’s name and unit of assignment;
The vehicle number; and
The date, day, and time of use.

Answer 380

A

.08 INSPECTIONS, REPAIRS,
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, AND VEHICLE CARE

A. Prior to operating a city vehicle, members inspect the vehicle for damage or mechanical impairment.

Members discovering damage to the city vehicle or equipment shall immediately notify their supervisor and complete SAPD Form #162, Found Damage Report.
Members discovering mechanical impairment, which may affect the safe operation of the vehicle, immediately report the condition to the vehicle repair shop and their immediate supervisor.
The supervisor determines whether the member shall wait for repairs on the malfunctioning vehicle or whether another vehicle will be assigned.
Members encountering mechanical problems with their assigned vehicle which would not ordinarily impair the safe operation of the vehicle, immediately notify their supervisor.
The supervisor determines whether the vehicle is immediately repaired or kept in service and the repair made later.

B. Members remove all portable items from vehicles placed in the repair shop if the repairs cause the vehicle to remain out of service beyond the end of the officer’s tour of duty.

C. Members do not alter, modify, deface, or change any part or accessory of any city vehicle without proper authorization.

D. Members shall ensure proper preventive maintenance is performed on their assigned vehicle on a regular basis or when notified by the vehicle repair shop.

E. Members shall be responsible for the appearance and cleanliness of their assigned vehicle, both interior and exterior.

Answer 381

A

F. Upon receiving written authorization from the Chief of Police, members assigned a take-home vehicle while on stand-by and/or subject to immediate call-out may use the vehicle as their primary means of transportation. Assistant Chiefs and Deputy Chiefs are on permanent stand-by and/or subject to immediate call-out based on their position.

Members shall be prepared to respond directly to a crime scene or other specified location when called.
Members may transport immediate family members in their take-home vehicle only when subject to immediate call-out and when using the vehicle as their primary means of transportation.
If the member is called to a crime scene or other work-related location while immediate family members are in the take-home vehicle, the family members should be dropped off at the nearest substation or other safe location.
Members should be aware the safety of their immediate family is the sole responsibility of the members and as such, family members are not to be taken to crime scenes.
Members subject to immediate call-out and using a take-home vehicle are reminded of Rules and Regulations regarding member’s responsibilities for Reporting for Duty.

G. If a take-home vehicle is to be used outside of Bexar County, except for officers traveling to and from work, GM Procedure 909, Travel, must be adhered to.

H. The Chief of Police may revoke the assignment of a take-home vehicle to any member if the member is not insurable as per state minimum requirements.
Also, any violations of this policy may result in the loss of a take- home vehicle assignment.

I. Members requiring a temporary replacement for a take-home vehicle will use a vehicle from their assigned units.
Members assigned to units, which have no vehicles assigned, will make arrangements through the Police Fleet Services Management Office.

Answer 382

A

.10 OUT OF CITY TRAVEL

A. Members authorized to operate a city vehicle outside of Bexar County should present the Accounting and Personnel Office with an approved SAPD Form #106, Travel Request, *at least
fourteen (14) calendar days prior to departure.

B. The Accounting and Personnel Office issues the member a city motor fuel credit card, if required.

C. Members must retain original receipts for all travel expenses including, but not limited to, motor fuel charge receipts.
Reimbursements are not made without the original receipts.

D. Members receiving authorization for out of town travel will use a vehicle from their assigned unit.

Members assigned to units which have no vehicles assigned will make arrangements for a vehicle through the Police Fleet Services Management Office.

E. Members return the assigned city vehicle to the issuing unit on their return to the City or on the first business day following their return to the City.

F. Members involved in a motor vehicle crash while operating a city vehicle outside the city:

Immediately report the crash to the appropriate law enforcement agency;
Advise the investigating officer the City is
self-insured;
Obtain the report number
(case or assignment number) assigned to the report;
Record any and all pertinent details of the crash;
and
Complete SAPD Form #602-6,
Vehicle Accident Report or Loss Notice,
upon returning from out of city travel.

Answer 383

A

E. Command Notification During Weekends, Holidays, and Between the Hours of 1630 and 0745:

When the Supervisor-In-Charge of the scene is a Sergeant, he notifies the on-duty
Lieutenant assigned to the patrol section.

Note: In the absence of the Lieutenant assigned to the patrol section, he notifies another on-duty Lieutenant assigned to another patrol section.

When the Supervisor-In-Charge of the scene is a Lieutenant or a Lieutenant responds to the scene at the request of a Sergeant, after assessing the situation, he requests the Communications Unit
to notify the Night Commander (when available) or the Deputy Chief responsible for resolution of the incident.
The Evening/Night Commander or Deputy Chief (Duty Officer) notified of an unusual occurrence, critical incident, or police incident responds to the scene, if necessary, and after assessing the situation:

a. Directs the Communications Unit to notify Internal Affairs Unit personnel
if the situation involves a complaint of serious allegations or misconduct;

b. Decides whether to notify other command personnel;

c. Decides whether to notify the Chief of Police;
and

d. Prepares a report covering the event, which is forwarded to the Office of the Chief,
prior to the beginning of the next business day.

Answer 384

A

.05 SUPERVISORY NOTIFICATION IF AN
OFFICER IS INVOLVED IN A DISTURBANCE

A. An officer responding to any disturbance call involving a San Antonio police officer:

Requests a Sergeant to respond to the scene,

and

Notes in his report the name and badge number
of the Sergeant notified.

B. The Sergeant notified to respond to the scene:

Documents the actions taken in a
supplemental report,

and

Forwards copies of all reports through his chain of command utilizing Blue Team

in accordance with Proc. 303.

Answer 385

A

.03 LINE INSPECTIONS PROCEDURE

A. Unit/Shift Directors

Conduct formal line inspections of all subordinates at least once each month.
A supervisory officer may be assigned to conduct the formal line inspection in the absence of a shift/unit director.
Document all inspections and deficiencies,
* if any*, utilizing SAPD ACTIVITY and
Notify the Section Commander that formal line inspections and individual officer deficiencies
have been entered into SAPD ACTIVITY
for the current period:

B. Supervisory Officers

Assist the Shift/Unit Director with conducting the formal line inspection;

and

Record all inspections and deficiencies, if any, and the Shift/Unit Director’s comments in
SAPD ACTIVITY.

C. Section Commanders

Monitor the formal line inspection process by occasional participating in a formal line inspection;

and

Review all inspection reports and roll call inspection report forms submitted by unit/shift directors.

D. SAPD ACTIVITY

SAPD ACTIVITY is used to document formal line inspections on all officers and to document deficiencies of individual officers who fail to meet departmental standards for personal grooming, uniform, and equipment during
formal line inspections.

This form may also be used to document deficiencies noted during informal line inspections.

Shift/unit directors complete and document formal Line Inspections utilizing SAPD ACTIVITY:

a. Check the appropriate deficiency space(s),
if any deficiencies are found;

b. Briefly explain the deficiency in the
comments section;

c. Set an appropriate date, dependent upon the nature and severity of the deficiency,
for the officer to come into compliance;

d. Notify the officer’s immediate supervisor.

Supervisory officers meet with the officers who have deficiencies noted SAPD ACTIVITY and
take the following actions:

a. Clarify in the noted deficiency, the prescribed standard, and the date for compliance;

b. Conduct a follow-up inspection on the compliance date;
and

c. Update SAPD ACTIVITY to reflect the date the deficiency was corrected.

4.    In the event the officer has failed to correct the deficiency prior to the specified compliance date, 
the officer's immediate supervisor documents the failure in accordance with 
Procedure 303 (Disciplinary Procedures) and enters it into BLUE TEAM.

Answer 386

A

non-punitive

Answer 387

A

Officer Concern Program Board

Answer 388

A

Internal Affairs Unit

Answer 389

A

(1) Complaints of rudeness (internal and external complaints);
(2) Deterioration of work quality or quantity;
(3) Tardiness;
(4) Reasonable suspicion of substance abuse;
(5) Vehicle crashes;
(6) Poor performance evaluations;
(7) EEO complaints; and
(8) Tort cases against the City due to officer’s actions

Answer 390

A

a. One (1) sustained formal complaint involving:

(1) Physical mistreatment of prisoners;
(2) Force;
(3) Family violence;
(4) Alcohol or drug abuse;
(5) An act resulting in the complainant being seriously injured;
(6) Racial/Biased Profiling;
(7) Insubordination; or
(8) Significant Behavioral Infraction

b. Three (3) complaints in any combination of the following:

(1) Formal complaints;
(2) Administrative reviews;
(3) Deactivated cases, based solely on complainant waiver.

c. One (1) criminal activity complaint supported by credible evidence or which results in an arrest, or formal charges by “indictment,” “information,” “complaint,” or other charging instrument.

d. Four (4) complaints comprised of any combination of formal or line complaints.
Complaints which are addressed through the chain of command are considered line complaints for the purpose of this procedure.

e. Three (3) chargeable city vehicle crashes within a eighteen (18) month period.

f. Any combination of four (4) driving-related complaints and/or chargeable city vehicle crashes within a eighteen (18) month period.
(For example: 2 accidents and 2 complaints or
1 accident and 3 complaints)

Answer 391

A

B. Board members must have a minimum of five (5) years seniority with the Department and must not have incurred a suspension during the previous twelve (12) months.

C. Board members serve six (6) month terms.

D. All Board members shall sign a pledge of confidentiality.

E. Five (5) Board members must be present to conduct a hearing.

F. A non-voting Staff Psychologist will be appointed to the Board.

G. A non-voting specialist may also be appointed to the Board by the Board Chairperson.

Answer 392

A

F. The Preliminary Review Panel will determine by majority vote whether or not to send the officer’s case study to the entire Board for review.

The Preliminary Review Panel will notify the Board Chairperson of its decision in writing.
Case studies not forwarded to the entire Board for review are returned to the Officer Concern Program Coordinator and will remain on file in that office.
In cases not forwarded to the Board, an officer will again become a candidate for the program if an additional complaint is received within eighteen (18) months of the original complaint which caused the referral.

Answer 393

A

B. Board Hearing

The Officer Concern Program Coordinator briefs the Board on the officer case study.
The officer candidate is allowed to participate in the Board hearing to provide additional information and to explain the behavior in question.
The officer is then excused while the Board members deliberate.
The Board members discuss the case and, by written secret ballot, make recommendations whether or not to enter the officer into the Officer Concern Program.
a. If the majority vote is to enter the officer into the Officer Concern Program, the Board develops a “Plan of Action” to be recommended to the Chief of Police for his review and consideration.
b. If the majority vote is not to enter the officer into the Officer Concern Program, any additional complaints within the eighteen (18) month cycle will cause the officer to become a candidate again. The eighteen (18) month cycle begins from the date of the complaint which caused the referral to the Officer Concern Program.
If the officer is entered into the Officer Concern Program, the Board Chairperson meets with the Chief of Police to review the Board’s recommendation and Plan of Action.
The Chief of Police may approve, modify, or reject the Plan of Action.
a. If the Chief of Police approves or modifies the Plan of Action, a written order is issued to the officer.
b. If the Chief of Police rejects the Board’s recommendation or Plan of Action, the officer’s status changes to potential candidate.
If the Chief of Police approves the Plan of Action, a meeting is called by the Officer Concern Program Board Chairperson and includes the following persons:

a. Chairperson;
b. Officer (candidate);
c. The officer’s immediate supervisor;
d. The officer’s Division Commander;
e. A Board member holding the same rank as the officer; and
f. If temporary reassignment is part of the Plan of Action, the supervisor responsible for supervision of the officer during the temporary reassignment.

At the meeting, the Board Chairperson explains the Plan of Action (written order) to all attendees.
The Plan of Action is then signed by the officer and the Board Chairperson.

Answer 394

A

.09 OFFICER CONCERN PROGRAM ANNUAL EVALUATION

A. The Officer Concern Program Coordinator will complete an annual written evaluation of the Officer Concern Program to determine the Program’s effectiveness and to recommend any modifications which need to be made.
The annual evaluation will be presented to the Chief of Police, and at a minimum, will include the following:

Number of officers referred to the Officer Concern Program during the calendar year;
Most common method of referral;
Most common remedial action taken; and
The effectiveness of the Officer Concern Program.

Answer 395

A

.03 POLICY

It is the policy of the San Antonio Police Department to establish and maintain an open and cooperative environment in which members of the media and public may obtain timely and accurate information on all matters of community interest in a manner which does not jeopardize police operations or the rights of citizens, complainants, witnesses, and persons in custody.

Answer 396

A

Limiting media personnel to those areas which will not interfere with operational functions and access to the location;
Establishing and marking an information dissemination point or press area;
Arranging interviews with appropriate personnel if and when feasible; and
Preparing a written news release, if necessary.

Answer 397

A

.06 INFORMATION NOT RELEASED
A. Police Incidents

The following information in connection with police incidents is not released:
a. The name of a complainant or victim who is deceased or seriously injured, until a surviving relative has been notified;
b. The name of a complainant who has been involved in any type of sexual offense;
c. The name of a suspect, until the suspect has been booked in a jail facility or formal charges have been filed;
d. Identification and description of witnesses;
e. The existence or contents of statements, oral admissions, or oral confessions made by a suspect or apprehended person;
f. Personal opinions about the suspect and/or information on evidence;
g. Statements concerning the testimony or the truthfulness of witnesses; and
h. Photographs of any person who is a suspect or arrested person which are taken for purposes of investigatory or criminal history record information in an ongoing investigation.
Any officer encountering a citizen or media representative who is not satisfied with the officer’s response to a request for non-releasable information should refer the citizen or media representative to the officer’s immediate supervisor.

B. Internal Information

Requests from the public or media for release of the home address or phone number of any member of the Department are referred to the Police Media Services Detail.
Any requests from outside the Department for release of information from departmental administrative or field files are referred to the Accounting and Personnel Office.

Answer 398

A

I. All officers having been issued a shoulder weapon shall carry it when on duty.

J. Officers must have their handguns, shoulder weapons and intermediate weapons registered with the Firearms Proficiency Control Officer (FPCO).

K. Officers seeking authorization to carry an intermediate weapon which they have not completed training with at the SAPD Training Academy must present a certificate of training from a department-approved organization which provided the training and demonstrate proficiency in the use of the intermediate weapon to the Training Academy Commander or his designee.

L. Department-issued rifles and shotguns are assigned to the duty station the officer works. Whenever an officer is promoted or transfers from their duty station, the City rifle or shotgun shall be returned to the Department armorer for an inventory check and inspection.
This does not include transfers when an officer stays at the same shift/assignment, but gets different relief days.
After the weapon is inventoried and inspected, the appropriate duty station will be contacted and advised the firearm is ready for re-issuance.

M. Suppressors (also called silencers) or any type of device attached to or part of the barrel of a firearm, which reduces the amount of noise generated by a firearm are 🚫 prohibited 🚫 from being used on all Department issued and personally-owned firearms, authorized to be carried, on or off duty by officers.
Any Unit needing to make use of a suppressor (as described above) must seek permission through their chain of command and have written approval from the Chief of Police or his designee prior to making use of such type of device.

Answer 399

A

I. Officers, both on-duty and off-duty, must carry handguns in an approved holster while carrying the handguns on their person:

Officers working in casual dress code or covert/undercover assignments, as well as off-duty officers, may carry handguns in a container such as a purse, briefcase, fanny pack, carrying bag, etc.
Handguns carried in containers are not required to be in a holster when such containers are designed to secure the handgun in a manner which would prevent:
a. The handgun from becoming readily accessible to unauthorized persons;
b. Accidental discharges; and
c. Exposure of the handgun to the public.

J. Officers working covert/undercover assignments may carry their handguns one primary handgun, either concealed on their person, or in such a manner which makes the handgun readily available and which is under the officer’s immediate control.

K. While in a police vehicle, a shoulder weapon is carried in the vehicle transport mode:

A shotgun will be transported with chamber empty, action closed, safety on; magazine tube loaded and stored in an approved shoulder weapon case inside the trunk of the police vehicle or in the vehicle mounted weapon rack. The additional rounds will be stored on the stock pouch, side saddle, or in a “GO” bag.
An AR-15 will be transported with chamber empty, bolt closed, safety on, magazine inserted and stored in an approved shoulder weapon case inside the trunk of the police vehicle, along with one additional 30 round magazine loaded with 28 rounds; or secured in a vehicle mounted weapon rack.
Exigent circumstances involving officer and public safety may necessitate the need for an officer to have the shoulder weapon in the vehicle in other than the vehicle transport mode.

L. Shoulder weapons, when carried to and from a police facility, are carried in vehicle transport mode, in an approved shoulder weapons case.

Answer 400

A

Upon successful completion of an approved handgun mounted weaponlight course, officers may utilize the light-bearing version of the approved duty holster along with an approved handgun-mounted weaponlight in accordance with Section .08 of this procedure.
If approved, one concealed/secondary handgun may also be carried in accordance Sections .05 and .08 of this procedure.
If approved, the officer may carry one (1) patrol rifle and/or one (1) patrol shotgun in accordance with Sections .05 and .08 of this procedure.
Officers assigned to the Special Operations Unit may receive approval from their Division Commander to carry another approved handgun as their primary handgun.
Officers of the rank of Captain or above while wearing a garrison belt will carry in an approved holster either the City issued S&W M&P40 or an optional primary handgun, in accordance with Section .08 of this procedure.

Answer 401

A

C. Casual Dress:
On-duty officers wearing casual dress apparel shall conform to the following:

Officers shall carry one primary handgun concealed on their person;
Officers are encouraged to carry their Department issued S&W M&P40 handgun.
Officers carrying the Department issued S&W M&P40 shall carry the handgun concealed on their person in an approved holster in accordance with Section .05 of this procedure.
Officers carrying the Department issued S&W M&P40 shall also carry a sufficient amount of reserve ammunition to allow for the complete reloadingof their primary handgun.
If approved, officers may carry a handgun other than the Department issued S&W M&P40 as a primary handgun in accordance with Sections .05 and .08 of this procedure.
Additionally, officers approved to carry a handgun other than the S&W M&P40, as a primary handgun, shall carry it in an approved holster in accordance with Section .08 of this procedure.
Officers under this section may carry their primary weapon either *on their person *or in a container such as a *purse, briefcase, fanny pack, carrying bag, etc. in accordance with Section .05 of this procedure.
If approved, one concealed/secondary handgun may also be carried in accordance with Sections .05 and .08 of this procedure.

Answer 402

A

E. Off-Duty Officers:
Off-duty officers may carry approved handguns and are subject to the following requirements:

The handgun(s) should be carried concealed in a safe and secure manner by officers while off-duty.

Additionally, the handgun shall be carried in accordance with Section .05 of this procedure.

Officers who carry firearms while off-duty will be subject to the same policies, procedures, rules and regulations pertaining to officers while on-duty.
Having a Handgun License (HL) does not relieve officers from complying with this procedure.
Should officers choose to open carry while
* off-duty*; they must also display their badge and use an approved weapon and holster in accordance with Subsection .02 of this procedure.

Answer 403

A

B. In accordance with COSA Administrative Directive 4.80, Violence in the Workplace,
non-sworn members are not prohibited from handling weapons during the course and scope of their duties, when authorized by appropriate authority and in a work related capacity.

Answer 404

A

E. HANDGUNS FOR CONCEALED/SECONDARY OR COVERT/UNDERCOVER CARRY:

For a handgun to be considered for approval under this section, it must be either:

A double-action revolver with a caliber designation not less than .38 caliber, nor more than .45 caliber, that holds at least five (5) rounds of ammunition; or
A semi-automatic handgun with a caliber designation not less than .380 caliber, nor more than .45 caliber, with a minimum magazine capacity of five (5) rounds of ammunition.
Officers approved to carry a handgun under this section must carry the handgun in a holster that is designed for the make and model of the firearm that provides at least one mechanical, retention device and makes the firearm readily available. Shoulder holsters must be a vertical carry configuration.
Concealed holsters may consider the garment providing concealment as the retention device.
Officers approved to carry a concealed/secondary weapon under this section shall carry the weapon in accordance with Section .05 of this procedure.

F. SHOULDER WEAPONS:
For a shoulder weapon to be considered for approval it must be, or have, as part of its associated equipment:

A 12-gauge pump shotgun with a barrel length of 18 to 20 inches with a minimum five (5) round magazine tube and a manual-of-arms matching to the department-issued patrol shotgun. The weapon must have been produced and assembled by a reputable manufacturer.

a. The shotgun shall have a 1, 2, or 3 point sling.
b. The shotgun may have bead, rifle, or “Ghost Ring” sights permanently affixed to the weapon.
c. The shotgun may also have a non-magnifying optical sight in addition to the iron sights.
d. The shotgun may have a retractable stock, and/or pistol grip.
e. The officer must provide either a side-saddle, stock-pouch or like designed device affixed to the weapon that has the capability to hold any additional rounds issued for duty carry.
f. Any personally-owned shotgun shall conform to all specifications required by the Training Academy and must be inspected and approved by the FPCO and/or the Armorer prior to use.

An AR-15 style rifle in 5.56 mm/.223 caliber only, with a barrel length of 16 to 20 inches (with or without flash suppressor), and manufactured by a reputable major manufacturer.
This means the continuous barrel length (portion measured from the bolt face, with bolt closed, to the muzzle) must be a minimum of 16 inches.
The barrel length excludes any device which is either permanently or temporarily affixed to the barrel, and:

a. Must have a metal receiver.
b. Must have a minimum of two-30 round magazines, each magazine shall be loaded with 28 rounds.
Each magazine shall have that number (28) marked with an indelible marker on the outside of each magazine.

c. May have a 1, 2, or 3 point sling.
d. Must have adjustable iron sights affixed to the receiver.
e. Optics –May have a non-magnifying optical sight in addition to the adjustable iron sights.

Upon completion of an 8 hour proficiency course officers may utilize:

i. Magnifier – a magnifier is a magnification device that can be affixed to the patrol rifle behind the officer’s existing non-magnified red dot sight.
The magnifier cannot exceed five power (5x) of magnification.
The magnifier must be attached to the patrol rifle with a side flip mounting system. The patrol rifle must have functional iron sights affixed to the rifle at all times.

ii. Variable powered optic 1-4 – A variable powered optic is defined as: an optic that the power of magnification can be changed from no power, or non-magnified up to a higher power of magnification not to exceed four power (4x).
The tube body of the optic must measure at least 30mm in diameter.
It must be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer, designed for Law Enforcement use.
It must have an illuminated sight reference (ie Dot, chevron, crosshair).
It must have a reticle that remains visible with or without battery power.
The Officer should use a cover or flip up lens protection for his/her optic while in transport.
It must have a quick detach mounting system to attach the optic to the patrol rifle to allow for removal if necessary.
The patrol rifle must have functional iron sights affixed to the rifle at all times.

f. A quick detachable mount for the non-magnifying optical sight is optional, but preferable for electric powered optical sights.
g. Must have a factory unaltered trigger press weight of not less than 4 pounds.
h. May have a fixed or adjustable stock.
i. The officer must provide a magazine pouch, coupler, drop pouch, or like designed device that can hold at least one (1) 30 round magazine loaded with 28 rounds.
j. Shoulder weapons shall conform to all specifications required by the Training Academy and must be inspected and approved by the FPCO and/or the Armorer prior to use.
k. Officers must provide a shoulder weapon case that conforms to Section .08 of this procedure.

Answer 405

A

H. HOLSTERS:
Holsters and cases shall be inspected and approved by the FPCO prior to being carried by officers.
For a holster to be considered for approval, it must be a holster that is designed for the make and model of the firearm that provides at least one mechanical, retention device, and makes the firearm readily available.
Shoulder holsters must be a vertical carry configuration.
Concealed holsters may consider the garment providing concealment as the retention device.

Uniformed officers shall utilize the Safariland Model 6360 ALS Duty Holster to carry the S&W M&P40.
Upon successful completion of an approved handgun mounted weaponlight course uniformed officers may utilize the light bearing version of the Safariland Model 6360 ALS Duty Holster to carry the S&W M&P40.

I. SHOULDER WEAPONS CASES:
Cases shall be inspected and approved by the FPCO prior to being carried by officers.
For a case to be considered for approval, it must be a case that is designed for the make and model of the shoulder weapon that provides the ability to carry extra magazines and associated equipment, and makes the weapon readily available.

Answer 406

A

.10 OBTAINING APPROVALS TO CARRY SHOULDER WEAPONS

A. Officers shall receive written approval on SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, from their division commander prior to attending shoulder weapon training and carrying a shoulder weapon.

B. A Patrol Division Commander shall request officers for the Shoulder Weapon Program (Department-issued weapons) based on availability within a specific district or section.

C.   Upon written approval on Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, from the FPCO, an officer may be approved to carry one (1) personally owned rifle and/or one (1) personally owned shotgun with the approval and registration by the Department for police use. 
Only one (1) shoulder weapon will be Department-issued.

D. Officers will be allowed to carry only approved shoulder weapons (Department-issued or personally-owned), while on-duty.

E. Officers shall carry shoulder weapons in accordance with the guidelines listed in their SOP, as well as this procedure.

Answer 407

A

.12 LESS LETHAL MUNITIONS

A. Less lethal munitions are extended range impact projectiles designed to safely incapacitate potentially dangerous person(s) from a distance that minimizes the danger to agents and citizens. Projectiles are fired or launched for the purpose of causing blunt trauma, which is used to encourage compliance and overcome resistance with a reduced likelihood of causing death. The department authorizes the use of approved 12-gauge, 40 mm, and 37 mm less lethal devices

B. Prior to firing less lethal rounds from either a 12-gauge shotgun or 37mm launcher, officers shall:

Unload all ammunition from the weapon;
Visually and manually inspect the breech and magazine or cylinder of the weapon to ensure that all ammunition has been removed from the weapon;
Load the less lethal munitions into the weapon, visually inspecting each round prior to insertion, ensuring that the ammunition which is being loaded is the correct less lethal munitions; and
Whenever possible, a second officer shall observe and verify all stages of the unloading of the weapon and the loading of all less lethal munitions.

C. When deploying less lethal munitions, the preferred target areas are the arms, shoulders, thighs, knees, or shins of the subject. The operator should not intentionally target the head/neck, thorax, heart, groin, or spine of the subject.

Answer 408

A

C. Failure to Qualify with a Department Issued Handgun:
1. In addition to not scoring a minimum of seventy percent (70%) on the established course of fire, unsafe behavior or failure to demonstrate the proper functioning or handling of a handgun are also grounds for failure to qualify.

Officers who fail to qualify during their scheduled departmental in-service qualification period or who do not qualify during a calendar year with a Department issued handgun will:a. Surrender their Department issued handgun to the FPCO;
b. Surrender their Department issued shoulder weapon to the FPCO, if assigned to a Department Shoulder Weapon Program. The officer will be removed from the Department Shoulder Weapon Program until further notice by a Patrol Division commander;
c. Not be allowed to qualify with any other firearm until they have qualified with their Department issued handgun; and
d. Not be allowed to carry any firearm, on- or off-duty.
The FPCO shall immediately notify the Training Academy Commander when an officer fails to qualify after two attempts with his Department issued handgun
Officers failing to qualify are prohibited from wearing the police uniform or working off-duty employment in city facilities or outside employment, which requires an extension of police services, until they qualify.
When scheduled, the officer will be given two (2) new attempts to qualify and must score a minimum of seventy percent (70%) on the Department’s established course of fire as administered and scored by the FPCO. The FPCO shall immediately notify the Training Academy Commander when an officer fails to qualify after the fourth attempt.
In the event an officer fails to qualify after the fourth attempt, the Training Academy Commander contacts the Office of the Chief of Police to place the officer on special assignment to the Training Academy. The officer will attend a sixteen (16) hour firearm remediation course at the Training Academy.
Upon completion of the firearms remediation course, officers are given two (2) final attempts to qualify and must score a minimum of seventy percent (70%) on the Department’s established course of fire as administered and scored by the FPCO.
Officers who qualify on one of their two (2) final attempts are released from special assignment and returned to their assigned units. The officer will resume his police duties and may resume working off-duty employment in city facilities and outside employment. All officers who are assigned to the remediation course shall be required to attend quarterly remedial firearms training.
Officers who fail to qualify on their final attempts are retained on special assignment, with a recommendation for termination sent to the Chief of Police.

D. Failure to Qualify with Personally-Owned Handguns

Officers who fail to qualify after the second attempt on a given day will not be approved to carry the handgun.
Additional attempts to qualify may be scheduled with the officer by the FPCO or his designee.

Answer 409

A

F. Failure to Qualify with a Shoulder Weapon

Officers failing to qualify on any Departmental qualification courses with a shoulder weapon after two (2) attempts shall not be authorized to carry a shoulder weapon. The FPCO will issue the officer and their supervisor a written notification on SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, advising the officer he is not authorized to carry a shoulder weapon.
The officer’s division commander will be notified by the FPCO when an officer fails to qualify after two (2) attempts with a shoulder weapon.
Officers failing to qualify with a shoulder weapon shall surrender their Department issued shoulder weapon to the FPCO. The officer will be removed from the Department Shoulder Weapon Program until further notice by a Patrol Division commander.
With approval from the officer’s division commander, the FPCO may reschedule a final qualification attempt for officers who have failed shoulder weapon qualification.

G. Approval/ Denial and Registration of Firearms

Upon successful completion of the Department’s established Firearms Qualification Courses with a handgun or shoulder weapon, the FPCO will register the firearm(s) with the Department in the following manner:
a. Complete SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, indicating approval or denial for the officer to carry the handgun(s) and/or shoulder weapon. The FPCO or his designee and the officer requesting approval, shall sign SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, indicating knowledge of approval or denial of the request;
b. The FPCO or his designee will give the officer a completed copy of SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm;
c. The officer will route a copy of the completed SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, through his chain of command to his division commander. The officer’s unit/shift director shall file a copy of the form in the officer’s field file; and
d. The FPCO shall maintain and file the original SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, and shall register the information on the firearm(s) in the police firearms computer program.
Officers who no longer choose to have a personally-owned weapon registered with the Department will submit a written report to the FPCO requesting the handgun, rifle, or shotgun be removed from the officers’ approval list. Officers will also route a copy of the report through their chain of command.

Answer 410

A

D. In the event a personally-owned firearm becomes damaged or inoperative, the officer may opt to have a non- department armorer repair the firearm at his own expense. This repair must be reported to the FPCO in writing. The FPCO or his designee will inspect the firearm after the repair and prior to the officer carrying the firearm.

E. Upon discovering unauthorized repairs, modifications, or parts to any Department-issued firearm, the FPCO notifies another Firearms Range staff member in order to verify the unauthorized repairs, modifications or parts, and;

If the firearm is a Department-issued firearm, the Armorer, the FPCO, or his designee makes the required repairs or changes so the firearm meets Departmental specifications; or
If the firearm is a personally-owned firearm, the Academy assigned FPCO or Academy assigned range staff shall document the incident on SAPD Form #60-RCF, Request to Carry Firearm, and advise the officer the firearm is not approved to be carried by the officer for police use; and
The FPCO will submit a written report to the Training Academy Commander detailing the unauthorized repairs, modifications, or parts. The Training Academy Commander shall notify the officer’s division commander for possible disciplinary action against the officer. All disciplinary action shall be handled in accordance with GM Proc. 303, Disciplinary Procedures.

Answer 411

A

B. Firearms Proficiency Control Officer:

 1. Is in charge of the departmental weapon ranges during firearm exercises;
 2. Ensures all persons on the weapon ranges adhere to the range safety rules;
 3. Inspects, approves, and documents all firearms, holsters, ammunition, and shoulder weapon cases officers are authorized to carry, both on- and off-duty, for police use;
 4. Makes repairs, modifications, and changes parts on Department-issued firearms.
 5. Establishes and maintains all firearms training, and records officers’ training and the information on officers’ weapons into the Police Firearms computer program;
 6. The FPCO or his designee administers and scores the firearms qualification process for all officers; and
 7. Notifies the Training Academy Commander in writing when;    a. An officer fails to qualify with their Department-issued handgun;    b. An officer’s qualification is about to expire or has expired due to a lapse of time; and    c. An officer has made unauthorized repairs, modifications, or has changed parts on an authorized weapon.

C. Armorer

 1. Maintains the Armory and Supply Office and issues authorized supplies when needed.
 2. Makes repairs, modifications, and changes parts on Department issued firearms.
 3. When OC spray/gel canisters, or an ECD or related equipment are returned to the Armory by officers, the Armorer replaces the equipment and completes the appropriate section of SAPD Form 62-RFI, Receipt for Issue/Replacement OC Spray/Gel and/or ECD. The Armorer forwards a copy of the form to the Internal Affairs Unit.

Answer 412

A

F. All Officers

1. Carry only authorized weapons, ammunition, and holsters, on-duty or off-duty, in accordance with this procedure.
2. Maintain qualifications on all authorized weapons they carry, and ensure the weapons function properly at all times.
3. Allow only the Department Armorer, the Academy assigned FPCO or the Academy Range Staff to make repairs, modifications, or changes of parts to any Department-issued
4. Officers carrying any Department-issued approved firearm or ECD which is damaged or inoperative shall immediately return the firearm or ECD to the Amory for inspection and/or repair. If the Armory is closed, a supervisor shall accompany the officer to the Ready Room to obtain a spare firearm or ECD to replace the damaged or inoperative department-issued firearm or ECD. A written report listing the malfunction or damage shall be attached to the firearm or ECD and a copy of the report is routed through the officer’s chain of command to his Division Commander.
5. The loss or theft of a Department-issued or personally-owned approved firearm shall immediately be reported to the FPCO or his designee, Department Armorer, and a supervisory officer. a. If the loss or theft occurred inside the city limits, the supervisory officer will ensure an offense report is written. b. If the loss or theft occurs in another jurisdiction, the officer shall immediately notify the appropriate law enforcement agency and ensure a report is written by the agency. c. The officer shall write an incident report under an SAPD case number detailing the loss or theft. d. The officer routes a copy of his report documenting the loss or theft through his chain of command and to the Armorer.
6. Any officer who transfers from one duty station to another shall return their Department-issued rifle or shotgun to the armory, in a clean condition. The Armorer shall conduct an inventory of the equipment and inspect the firearm.
7. Any officer discharging a firearm accidentally or intentionally, except while training on a shooting range or while lawfully hunting wild game, shall immediately notify an on-duty supervisor and report the incident in writing, through his chain of command, to the Division Commander in accordance with Rule and Regulation 3.31, Subsection D. a. The supervisor notified will review all the circumstances surrounding the firearm discharge to ensure all policy, training, weapon/equipment, and discipline issues are addressed. b. Upon completion of his initial review, the supervisor will handle in accordance with GM Proc. 303, Disciplinary Procedures. c. The officer’s initial report and the supervisor’s written review and recommendations are then forwarded through the chain of command for final review and disposition. d. The Division Commander shall review the reports and recommendations, and based on the merits, substance, and gravity of the incident, will request further investigation, implement discipline in accordance with the current Collective Bargaining Agreement, or recommend no disciplinary action. e. Regardless of the outcome, all reports with recommendations will be routed to the Internal Affairs Unit and will be maintained on file in accordance with the Department’s retention schedule.

Any officer discharging an intermediate weapon accidentally or intentionally shall immediately notify an on- duty supervisor and report the incident in writing, through his chain of command, to his Division Commander; all requirements of Subsection .06 (a-e) will apply.
Any officer who uses oleoresin capsicum (OC) spray/gel shall return the OC spray/gel canister, even if partially used, to the Armory or Ready Room to obtain replacement equipment prior to the end of his tour of duty. Fired ECD cartridges are replaced prior to the end of the officer’s tour of duty.
a. If the Armory is closed, a Supervisor shall accompany the officer to the Ready Room to replace the used OC spray/gel canister or fired ECD cartridges.
b. SAPD Form #62-RFI, Receipt for Issue/Replacement OC Spray/Gel and/or ECD, shall be completed by the officer (and the supervisor when applicable).
(1) It is attached to the used OC spray/gel canister.
(2) For an ECD and/or cartridge, one copy of the replacement receipt shall be left in a designated receptacle in the Ready Room

Answer 413

A

a. The name of the court or hearing attended;
b. The dates and times the officer appeared;
c. The reason for the officers attendance in the court or hearing; and
d. The name and phone number of a contact person from the court or hearing who can verify the officer’s attendance.

Answer 414

A

F. When a member is required to attend two different courts at the same time,
he attends the higher court and notifies the lower court and/or Court Liaison Detail of his whereabouts.
When a member is required to attend a court and a pre-trial conference at the same time,
he attends court and notifies the Court Liaison Detail so the pre-trial conference can be rescheduled.

G. Members do not testify in a civil proceeding unless they are properly subpoenaed by either the plaintiff or the defendant in the case.
Immediately upon receiving a civil subpoena, members shall notify their chain of command and contact the Legal Advisor’s Office to see if an attorney needs to review the civil case.

Answer 415

A

.04 SUBPOENA PROCESS -
DISTRICT and COUNTY COURTS

A. Most subpoenas for members are issued by District and Bexar County Courts are received in the Court Liaison Detail, where they are directed to the respective member’s unit of assignment.

B. All units maintain a subpoena log, which members check upon reporting for duty to determine if they have any subpoenas.
Members shall accept and sign for their subpoenas in the subpoena log and make the necessary return immediately upon receipt of a subpoena.

C. Subpoenas issued less than six (6) days prior to the court date may be delivered by Bexar County deputy sheriffs, Bexar County District Attorney’s Office investigators, or Court Liaison Detail personnel.
Members shall cooperate with the deputies, investigators, and Court Liaison Detail personnel serving subpoenas for the District and County Courts.

D. When a subpoena is issued for a date on which a member will be on vacation, the subpoena is immediately returned to the Court Liaison Office with notification the member is on vacation, with the beginning and ending dates of vacation.

E. Once a member has received a subpoena, he shall not schedule any type of leave for the date and time of the stand-by period.
If Court Liaison personnel or a judge verbally contacts a member and places them on stand-by or advises them they are to appear in a court on a specific date and time, the member may not schedule leave for the specified date and time.
A supervisor reviews the subpoena log prior to authorizing leave for members to ensure the member has no subpoenas during the period of the requested leave.

Answer 416

A

.06 DISTRICT and COUNTY COURT
STAND-BY PROCEDURES

A. Officers may be placed on stand-by only through a subpoena issued by the State, an order from a judge, notification from the District Attorney’s Office, or by notification from the Court Liaison Detail.

When a judge places an officer on stand-by, the officer shall contact the Court Liaison Detail so the stand-by can be recorded, the stand-by hours verified, and the stand-by coordinated.
When a prosecutor or defense attorney attempts to place a member on stand-by, the member shall notify the Court Liaison Detail and refer the prosecutor or defense attorney to do the same.

B. Members receiving criminal subpoenas for district or county courts are automatically placed on stand-by unless the subpoena or notice is stamped or states
“No Stand-by” or the criminal subpoena is issued for the defense.
If a member receives a reset notice, this only advises the member the case is being reset.
A reset notice is not a subpoena and does not require the member to be on stand-by.

C. The stand-by hour for all district and county courts is 1000 to 1100 hours, unless otherwise stated on the subpoena or when notified by the Court Liaison Detail.

If the member will be on-duty when the stand-by is scheduled, he lists the proper telephone number of the Department and the extension where he may be reached on the “return.”

2. If the member will be off-duty when the stand-by is scheduled, he shall be available by the telephone. 
Recording devices (answering machines, voicemail, pagers, etc.) are *not* permitted during the stand-by hour.

Answer 417

A

C. When a subpoena is issued for a date on which a member will be on vacation, the subpoena is immediately returned to Municipal Court.
Before returning the subpoena, the back of the subpoena is completed by the member and signed by the member’s supervisor.

D. Once a member has received a subpoena, he shall not schedule any type of leave for the date and time of his scheduled court appearance.
A supervisor reviews the subpoena log prior to authorizing leave for a member to ensure the member has no subpoenas during the period of the requested leave.

E. Officers who sign the bottom of a Traffic subpoena, stating they are unable to recall the details of the citation in which the officer issued to the violator, will not appear for court or submit overtime for their court appearance.

Answer 418

A

.09 SUBPOENAS ISSUED OUTSIDE OF BEXAR COUNTY

A. A member who receives a subpoena from an agency outside Bexar County shall immediately notify his immediate
supervisor and unit director of the subpoena in a written report.

B. Members scheduled to be on-duty during the time of the out-of-county court date are placed on administrative leave.

C. Members not scheduled to be on-duty during the time of the out-of-county court date are responsible for contacting the agency who issued the subpoena and securing the necessary travel arrangements, as well as compensation, for responding to the subpoena.

Answer 419

A

District Courts;
County Courts-at-Law;
Grand Juries;
Justice of the Peace Courts;
San Antonio Municipal Courts;
Civil Service Commission or Arbitration Hearing;
Texas Alcoholic Beverage Commission Hearings;
Federal Courts;
Administrative License Revocation Hearings;
Pretrial Conferences.

Answer 420

A

C. Off-duty officers subpoenaed to testify in Federal Court or in a jurisdiction outside of Bexar County as a result of the officer’s employment as a San Antonio police officer or as a result of the officer having taken some official law enforcement action pertaining to the proceeding apply for compensation or reimbursement from the jurisdiction in which they testify, in the event compensation is available. Any compensation received may be:

Retained by the officer; or
Surrendered to the Chief’s Office or the Accounting and Personnel Office in return for overtime or compensatory time at a rate specified by the current contract between the City of San Antonio and the
San Antonio Police Officers’ Association.

D. An officer who refuses or neglects to apply for compensation from Federal Court, or from an out-of-town jurisdiction which secured his attendance, provided compensation from the jurisdiction is available, receives no overtime or compensatory time from the San Antonio Police Department.

Answer 421

A

I. An off-duty officer who attends court or a pre-trial conference in the morning and is dismissed before three (3) hours time has elapsed and is ordered to return after lunch receives the three (3) hour minimum or the actual time spent in court (whichever is greater) for the morning and afternoon appearances combined.

J. To receive compensation, an officer submits verification of attendance in a court or hearing as outlined in Section .02 C2 and 3 of this procedure.

K. In order for an officer to receive the proper compensation for his off-duty stand-by status for court, he attaches the subpoena or the written notification received from the Court Liaison Detail to the court attendance card and forwards it through his normal chain of command.

L. When an officer on off-duty stand-by status is called to appear, he receives stand-by compensation in addition to the regular court appearance compensation if his appearance is after the regular stand-by hours.

M. Civilian members receive compensation according to City administrative directives and Department policies and procedures.

Answer 422

A

.12 COURT DRESS CODES

A. Members attending court or hearings for judicial proceedings or civil proceedings where their testimony is the result of the member having taken some official law enforcement action pertaining to the proceeding shall appear in a regulation uniform, assigned duty uniform or in appropriate business/relaxed apparel, in accordance with
GM Procedure 310, Uniforms and Dress Codes.

B. Officers in undercover assignments need not shave their beards or cut their hair, but shall conform to other personal grooming requirements.

C. Members shall NOT wear the regulation uniform or any other authorized uniform in any proceedings to which they are subpoenaed or requested to testify on behalf of the defense in a criminal case; against the City of San Antonio, Texas, in a civil case; or against the interest of the Department in any civil service hearing, arbitration, or administrative hearing.

D. Members attending court or hearings for judicial proceedings or civil proceedings where their testimony is NOT the result of the officer having taken some official law enforcement action pertaining to the proceeding shall NOT wear the regulation uniform or any other authorized uniform, unless the officer is subpoenaed by the State of Texas, the City of San Antonio, or the San Antonio Police Department.

E. Members subject to Mandatory Reassignment shall comply with Procedure 908, Mandatory Reassignment.

Answer 423

A

D. Members who have a regular tour of duty starting after 1700 hours on the date immediately prior to the date they are to report for jury duty may be relieved from regular duty early to return home to rest before reporting for jury duty.
This subsection also covers members who report for jury duty on a relief day.

E. Members selected to serve on a jury whose duration is more than one (1) day, excluding relief days, must contact their unit/shift director each day to advise them they are still on jury duty.

F. Upon completion of jury duty and the return to regular duty, members shall submit a COSA Notice of Leave Form for all administrative leave used for jury duty.
The Jury Duty Certification Card is attached to the pink slip.

G. Any compensation received for jury duty while an officer is on administrative leave is turned into the Accounting and Personnel Office.
Any compensation received for jury duty on a member’s relief day is retained by the member.

Answer 424

A

.04 AUTHORIZED USE

A. Members operate only those city vehicles assigned to them and only for the accomplishment of assigned duties.

B. Members transport only authorized persons in a city vehicle.

Authorized persons include on-duty members, prisoners, complainants, and witnesses; immediate family members may be transported if the city vehicle is being used in accordance with Section .07 of this procedure.
Approval to transport off-duty members or non-members must be received from the unit supervisor.
Approval for any person(s) to ride as an observer must be arranged in advance in accordance with GM
Procedure 319, Civilian Observer Program.

C. Division commanders ensure all units under their command maintain a daily record of the assignment and use of all city vehicles assigned to their respective commands.

Such record shall reflect:

The member’s name and unit of assignment;
The vehicle number; and
The date, day, and time of use.

Answer 425

A

.08 INSPECTIONS, REPAIRS,
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, AND VEHICLE CARE

A. Prior to operating a city vehicle, members inspect the vehicle for damage or mechanical impairment.

Members discovering damage to the city vehicle or equipment shall immediately notify their supervisor and complete SAPD Form #162, Found Damage Report.
Members discovering mechanical impairment, which may affect the safe operation of the vehicle, immediately report the condition to the vehicle repair shop and their immediate supervisor.
The supervisor determines whether the member shall wait for repairs on the malfunctioning vehicle or whether another vehicle will be assigned.
Members encountering mechanical problems with their assigned vehicle which would not ordinarily impair the safe operation of the vehicle, immediately notify their supervisor.
The supervisor determines whether the vehicle is immediately repaired or kept in service and the repair made later.

B. Members remove all portable items from vehicles placed in the repair shop if the repairs cause the vehicle to remain out of service beyond the end of the officer’s tour of duty.

C. Members do not alter, modify, deface, or change any part or accessory of any city vehicle without proper authorization.

D. Members shall ensure proper preventive maintenance is performed on their assigned vehicle on a regular basis or when notified by the vehicle repair shop.

E. Members shall be responsible for the appearance and cleanliness of their assigned vehicle, both interior and exterior.

Answer 426

A

F. Upon receiving written authorization from the Chief of Police, members assigned a take-home vehicle while on stand-by and/or subject to immediate call-out may use the vehicle as their primary means of transportation. Assistant Chiefs and Deputy Chiefs are on permanent stand-by and/or subject to immediate call-out based on their position.

Members shall be prepared to respond directly to a crime scene or other specified location when called.
Members may transport immediate family members in their take-home vehicle only when subject to immediate call-out and when using the vehicle as their primary means of transportation.
If the member is called to a crime scene or other work-related location while immediate family members are in the take-home vehicle, the family members should be dropped off at the nearest substation or other safe location.
Members should be aware the safety of their immediate family is the sole responsibility of the members and as such, family members are not to be taken to crime scenes.
Members subject to immediate call-out and using a take-home vehicle are reminded of Rules and Regulations regarding member’s responsibilities for Reporting for Duty.

G. If a take-home vehicle is to be used outside of Bexar County, except for officers traveling to and from work, GM Procedure 909, Travel, must be adhered to.

H. The Chief of Police may revoke the assignment of a take-home vehicle to any member if the member is not insurable as per state minimum requirements.
Also, any violations of this policy may result in the loss of a take- home vehicle assignment.

I. Members requiring a temporary replacement for a take-home vehicle will use a vehicle from their assigned units.
Members assigned to units, which have no vehicles assigned, will make arrangements through the Police Fleet Services Management Office.

Answer 427

A

.10 OUT OF CITY TRAVEL

A. Members authorized to operate a city vehicle outside of Bexar County should present the Accounting and Personnel Office with an approved SAPD Form #106, Travel Request, *at least
fourteen (14) calendar days prior to departure.

B. The Accounting and Personnel Office issues the member a city motor fuel credit card, if required.

C. Members must retain original receipts for all travel expenses including, but not limited to, motor fuel charge receipts.
Reimbursements are not made without the original receipts.

D. Members receiving authorization for out of town travel will use a vehicle from their assigned unit.

Members assigned to units which have no vehicles assigned will make arrangements for a vehicle through the Police Fleet Services Management Office.

E. Members return the assigned city vehicle to the issuing unit on their return to the City or on the first business day following their return to the City.

F. Members involved in a motor vehicle crash while operating a city vehicle outside the city:

Immediately report the crash to the appropriate law enforcement agency;
Advise the investigating officer the City is
self-insured;
Obtain the report number
(case or assignment number) assigned to the report;
Record any and all pertinent details of the crash;
and
Complete SAPD Form #602-6,
Vehicle Accident Report or Loss Notice,
upon returning from out of city travel.

Answer 428

A

E. Command Notification During Weekends, Holidays, and Between the Hours of 1630 and 0745:

When the Supervisor-In-Charge of the scene is a Sergeant, he notifies the on-duty
Lieutenant assigned to the patrol section.

Note: In the absence of the Lieutenant assigned to the patrol section, he notifies another on-duty Lieutenant assigned to another patrol section.

When the Supervisor-In-Charge of the scene is a Lieutenant or a Lieutenant responds to the scene at the request of a Sergeant, after assessing the situation, he requests the Communications Unit
to notify the Night Commander (when available) or the Deputy Chief designated as the Duty Officer.
The Evening/Night Commander or Deputy Chief (Duty Officer) notified of an unusual occurrence, critical incident, or police incident responds to the scene, if necessary, and after assessing the situation:

a. Directs the Communications Unit to notify Internal Affairs Unit personnel
if the situation involves a complaint of serious allegations or misconduct;

b. Decides whether to notify other command personnel;

c. Decides whether to notify the Chief of Police;
and

d. Prepares a report covering the event, which is forwarded to the Office of the Chief,
prior to the beginning of the next business day.

Answer 429

A

.05 SUPERVISORY NOTIFICATION IF AN
OFFICER IS INVOLVED IN A DISTURBANCE

A. An officer responding to any disturbance call involving a San Antonio police officer:

Requests a Sergeant to respond to the scene,

and

Notes in his report the name and badge number
of the Sergeant notified.

B. The Sergeant notified to respond to the scene:

Documents the actions taken in a
supplemental report,

and

Forwards copies of all reports through his chain of command utilizing Blue Team

in accordance with Proc. 303.

Answer 430

A

.03 LINE INSPECTIONS PROCEDURE

A. Unit/Shift Directors

Conduct formal line inspections of all subordinates at least once each month.
A supervisory officer may be assigned to conduct the formal line inspection in the absence of a shift/unit director.
Document all inspections and deficiencies,
* if any*, utilizing SAPD ACTIVITY and
Notify the Section Commander that formal line inspections and individual officer deficiencies
have been entered into SAPD ACTIVITY
for the current period:

B. Supervisory Officers

Assist the Shift/Unit Director with conducting the formal line inspection;

and

Record all inspections and deficiencies, if any, and the Shift/Unit Director’s comments in
SAPD ACTIVITY.

C. Section Commanders

Monitor the formal line inspection process by occasional participating in a formal line inspection;

and

Review all inspection reports and roll call inspection report forms submitted by unit/shift directors.

D. SAPD ACTIVITY

SAPD ACTIVITY is used to document formal line inspections on all officers and to document deficiencies of individual officers who fail to meet departmental standards for personal grooming, uniform, and equipment during
formal line inspections.

This form may also be used to document deficiencies noted during informal line inspections.

Shift/unit directors complete and document formal Line Inspections utilizing SAPD ACTIVITY:

a. Check the appropriate deficiency space(s),
if any deficiencies are found;

b. Briefly explain the deficiency in the
comments section;

c. Set an appropriate date, dependent upon the nature and severity of the deficiency,
for the officer to come into compliance;

d. Notify the officer’s immediate supervisor.

Supervisory officers meet with the officers who have deficiencies noted SAPD ACTIVITY and
take the following actions:

a. Clarify in the noted deficiency, the prescribed standard, and the date for compliance;

b. Conduct a follow-up inspection on the compliance date;
and

c. Update SAPD ACTIVITY to reflect the date the deficiency was corrected.

4.    In the event the officer has failed to correct the deficiency prior to the specified compliance date, 
the officer's immediate supervisor documents the failure in accordance with 
Procedure 303 (Disciplinary Procedures) and enters it into BLUE TEAM.

Answer 431

A

.03 SUBMITTING REPORTS ON ISSUES TO THE COMMITTEE

A. Any member desiring to have the Committee review an issue or coordinate testing & evaluation of equipment submits a written report to one (1) of the following offices:

The Office of the Chief; or
The Office of the President of the San Antonio Police Officer’s Association.

B. Copies of written reports from members received in the Office of the Chief shall be forwarded to the Office of the President of the San Antonio Police Officer’s Association within five (5) working days.

C. The Office of the Chief shall forward reports received directly from members or received from the San Antonio Police Officer’s Association to the Chairman of the Committee.

.04 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Labor Relations Committee

Receives and discusses issues submitted by members;
Investigates incidents of lost, stolen, or damaged equipment;
Presents written recommendations on issues and incidents of lost, stolen, or damaged equipment to the Office of the Chief; and
Routes copies of recommendations to the San Antonio Police Officer’s Association and the Office of the City Manager, via the Office of the Chief.

B. Chief of Police

Responds to the Committee’s recommendations in writing within fourteen (14) calendar days;
Routes copies of the Chief’s responses to the San Antonio Police Officer’s Association and the Office of the City Manager; and
Forwards findings relating to lost, stolen, or damaged equipment to the division commander in charge of the division where the officer reporting the lost, stolen, or damaged equipment is assigned.

C. Division Commanders

Review findings relating to lost, stolen, or damaged equipment; and
Determine whether cases involving lost, stolen, or damaged equipment should be sent to the Internal Affairs Unit for investigation of officer misconduct.

Answer 432

A

.04 ANNUAL PLANNING SESSIONS AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS

A. Planning Sessions and Performance Evaluations are conducted annually on all sworn members to provide structure and guidance in developing their performance capabilities and career opportunities.

B. Planning Sessions and Performance Evaluation are specific to the assignment or rank of the sworn member being evaluated. Both the Planning Session and the Performance Evaluation are documented on SAPD Form #6-PE, Police (Sworn) Employee Annual Performance Appraisal. Check the applicable box at the top of the form titled, Planning Session or Annual Evaluation.

C. The SAPD Form #6-PE used for the annual Planning Session from the prior January will be the form used for the annual performance evaluation conducted in January of the following year. Planning Session forms shall remain in the sworn member’s departmental field file. Should the officer transfer to another assignment, the Planning Session form will accompany the officer to the new assignment.

D. During the rating period, rating officers shall conduct Performance Evaluations on subordinates utilizing the same SAPD Form #6-PE which was completed during the Planning Session from the previous January and can be retrieved from the E. Performance Evaluations for sworn members who are transferred during a Performance Evaluation period are is conducted by the last Supervisor to whom a member is assigned during the Performance Evaluation period. Previous Supervisors should be contacted for input. The Performance Evaluation will be submitted to the reviewing officer by February 15th of each year.

F. Probationary Police Officer Performance Evaluations

Probationary police officers are evaluated weekly in accordance with Field Training Officer (FTO) Program SOP 207, Evaluation Process for Probationary Police Officers, through their riding phase.
Probationary officers who have completed their riding phase are evaluated monthly for the remainder of their probationary period in accordance with Patrol Section SOP 213, Probationary Police Officer Monitoring Program. officer’s departmental field file.

Answer 433

A

.07 END OF EVALUATION PERIOD RATINGS

A. At the end of the performance evaluation period all sworn members are rated on each category applicable to their assignment or rank listed on SAPD Form #6-PE. Explanations of the ratings are as follows:

 N/A
 Below Expectations
 Meets Expectations
 Exceeds Expectations
 Not Applicable
 Unsatisfactory
 Acceptable/Competent
 Superior/Exceptional

B. All sworn members are considered to have a rating value of “Meets Expectations” in all listed categories at the start of a performance evaluation period.
Movement up and down the rating scale is based on a Supervisor’s expectations, observations, documentation, coaching, and counseling of a sworn member.

C. Category ratings are based on the overall performance of a sworn member.
While single incidents may provide an indication of performance, Supervisors are encouraged to consider the totality of a sworn member’s performance in light of a single or isolated incident.

D. Supervisors who give a rating other than “Meets Expectations” in any section of the performance evaluation form must state the reason for the rating in writing in the “comments” section.
Written documentation for instances of “Below Expectations” must be included with the original SAPD Form #6-PE for the performance evaluation period being rated.

E. Members may document, in Part IV of SAPD Form 6-PE, any comments they might have regarding their annual performance evaluation. If additional space is necessary, SAPD Form 65, Interoffice Correspondence is used and becomes part of the evaluation form.

.08 SUPERVISORY REVIEW OF EVALUATION RATINGS

A. Upon completion of an annual performance evaluation, the member’s Supervisor conducting the evaluation signs the performance evaluation form and delivers the form to a reviewing officer.

B. The reviewing officer reviews the performance evaluation form for accuracy, completeness, fairness and impartiality on the part of the rater.
Reviewing officers shall discuss with the rater any identified or perceived problem found during the review of the evaluation.

C. A reviewing officer in disagreement with a rater’s rating value in any category may require the rater to justify the rating value in writing.

If the reviewing officer still disagrees with the rater’s assessment of the rating value, he states the reason for his disagreement and records his assessment of the rating value in red ink next to the rater’s assessment.
Under no circumstances is the reviewing officer to change the rating value given by the rater.

D. Upon completion of the reviewing officer’s assessment of the rater’s responsibilities, the reviewing officer shall sign the performance evaluation form in the appropriate box on the second page.

E. The reviewing officer shall evaluate the rater regarding the fairness and impartiality of ratings given employees, the rater’s participation in counseling rated employees, and the rater’s ability to carry out the rater’s role in the performance evaluation system.

Answer 434

A

.11 ROUTING AND RETENTION OF ANNUAL PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS

A. Supervisors shall make copies of all completed annual performance evaluation forms and new planning session forms, with any attachments, and place the copies in the sworn members’ departmental field files.

B. Reviewing officer shall route all completed original annual performance evaluations forms, with any attachments to the Manpower Allocations Detail by February 28 of each year for processing.
All completed annual performance evaluation forms routed within the Department are placed in sealed envelopes prior to being routed.

C. The Manpower Allocations Detail shall verify there is an accurate accounting of all sworn members’ annual performance evaluation forms.

D. The Manpower Allocations Detail shall forward a copy of any performance evaluation which has a “Below Expectations” rating in any category to the Training Advisory Board for review.

E. The Manpower Allocations Detail shall forward all original annual performance evaluation forms to the Accounting and Personnel Office.

F. All annual performance evaluation forms shall remain on file in Accounting and Personnel Office for a period of three (3) years.

.12 CONFIDENTIALITY OF ANNUAL PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS

A. All annual performance evaluations are confidential. Only persons who have a job related interest in reviewing the annual performance evaluations shall have access to the performance evaluations.

B. A sworn member’s performance evaluation is discussed only with the sworn member; their appropriate Supervisor or potential Supervisor, and the reviewing officer.

C. The only units or personnel who should have access to annual performance evaluation forms are:

The sworn member being evaluated;
The Supervisor conducting the annual performance evaluation;
The reviewing officer;
The Manpower Allocations Detail;
The Training Advisory Board; and
The Accounting and Personnel Office.

Answer 435

A

F. Selection of Board Members

A notice for the selection of both sworn and non-sworn Board members will be announced in the Daily Bulletin.
All members wishing to be considered for appointment to the Board shall submit a written report to the Commander of the Training Academy.
The report should contain information relevant to professional experience, assignment diversity, education, and training.
A notice for the selection of public members will be sent to each non-department group listed in Subsection .04 E4 of this procedure.
Public members wishing to be considered for appointment to the Board shall submitting an abbreviated resume to the Commander of the Training Academy.
The resume should contain information relevant to professional experience, education, and previous performance in public service-related activities.
The Chief of Police makes all appointments to the Board.
Board members are replaced utilizing this procedure on a rotating basis, or as required to fill unscheduled vacancies, from requests for appointment retained on file.

G. The Board shall meet at least once each year to review any new proposed training developments.

.05 TRAINING PROVIDED TO MEMBERS
A. Initial Licensing Training:

Training of police cadets (cadet curriculum) to include all TCOLE required courses.
Examples include Penal Code, Code of Criminal Procedures, tactics, physical training, firearms proficiency, driving and dispute resolution.

B. In-service Training:

Annual block of continuing training (minimum block of forty hours), to include TCOLE mandated training, legal updates, and firearms re-qualification.

C. Roll-Call Training:

Training provided to officers at roll-call, generally prior to the start of the officer’s tour of duty.
This training includes policy and procedure changes, as well as legal updates.

D. Specialized Training:

Training provided for members whose assignment requires greater skills and knowledge than that received in cadet or in-service training.
This training is designed to develop and enhance the skills, knowledge, and abilities particular to the specialization.

E. Career Development:
1. Training provided during a member’s tenure and/or in conjunction with a promotion.
This training may include areas of specialization designed to provide insight into a subsequent rank, which will assist an individual in preparation for promotional opportunities.

F. Non-Sworn Member Training:
1. Newly hired non-sworn members shall be provided training, to include, the Department’s goals, policies, procedures, and regulations.
Non-sworn members shall also receive information regarding their working conditions and their responsibilities and rights as employees.

G. Remedial Training:

Training provided to members who are referred by the Officer Concern Program, a supervisory officer, the Chief of Police, or who are deficient in driving, tactics, firearms, or other areas as identified.

Answer 436

A

.08 ATTENDANCE REQUIREMENTS AND DOCUMENTATION

A. All members, sworn and civilian, shall attend authorized Department and outside training programs and/or classes when scheduled to attend.
Members shall document their attendance by signing an attendance sheet that is provided by the unit or instructor conducting the training.

B. Members who are unable to attend a scheduled training program or class should contact the unit or person conducting the training program or class to re-schedule. 
Excusable reasons for not being able to attend a training program or class are:

Court attendance;
Illness;
Department business when pre-approved by a supervisory officer; and
Any emergency situation that can be documented.

C. The members in the members’ personnel training files.
Training Academy shall document successful completion of Departmental training programs and classes for sworn members 👉🏽👌

D. The Accounting and Personnel Office shall document successful completion of departmental training programs and classes, for non-sworn members, in the members’ personnel training files.

E. Officers successfully completing training programs and classes held outside of the Department should present certificates of completion to the Training Academy for entry into their personnel training files.

.09 CAREER DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM

A. The Career Development Program is designed to provide sworn and non-sworn members with the opportunity for individual growth and development at all levels in the Department.

B. The mission of the Career Development Program is to provide all members the opportunity to enhance their personal and professional need for growth, development and knowledge to foster job satisfaction and promote strong leadership.
The program is designed to train and educate members in areas specific to law enforcement to enhance the delivery of police services that benefits both the Department and the community.

C. The Career Development Program will enable the Training Academy staff to integrate a web-based system and streamline current processes that are required by TCOLE.
The web-based system, Training Academy On-Line, is located in the SAM Resources Section of the SAPD WEB intranet.
Members will have the opportunity to view scheduled courses and enroll in a course, as availability permits.

Answer 437

A

.04 POLICY

It is the policy of the San Antonio Police Department that all existing laws, rules, regulations, policies, procedures, and directives that govern on and off duty conduct are applicable to conduct associated with a member’s use or participation with social media and networking.
When engaging in social networking, to include but not limited to YouTube, Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, etc., members will strictly adhere to any and all directives listed within this policy.
The San Antonio Police Department recognizes two general categories of social media usage among members.
These categories include departmental use of social media and personal use of social media.

A. Department-Authorized Use of Social Media:

The use of social media for the specific purpose of assisting the Department and its personnel in community outreach, problem solving, investigation, crime prevention, and/or other
Department related objectives may be done
only with prior written authorization by the
Chief of Police or his designee.

Members seeking to represent the Department via social media outlets shall obtain written permission from the Chief of Police, or his/her designee, prior to engaging in such activity.
In addition to the General Manual, SOPs, and rules and regulations set forth in the
City of San Antonio-Social Media Directive
(AD 6.15), the following provisions shall apply to department-authorized use of social media upon obtaining authorization:

Properly identify themselves as a member of the Department except in instances whereby proper identification poses a risk to officer safety or may impede the progress of a criminal investigation.

Members with permission from the Chief of Police or his/her designee may exclude Department membership from their profiles.

At all times, conduct themselves as representatives of the Department and, accordingly, adhere to all policies procedures, standards of conduct, and observe conventionally accepted protocols and proper decorum.
Observe and abide by all copyright, trademark, and service mark restrictions in posting materials to electronic media.
Department members shall not under any circumstances make statements about the guilt or innocence of any suspect or arrestee, or comments concerning pending prosecutions in accordance with GM Section 200, Rules and Regulations and Procedure 307, Public and Media Information.

B. Personal Use of Social Media:

There is no reasonable expectation of privacy when engaging in social networking online while using City assets or during a member’s working hours.
As such, the content of social networking websites may be obtained for use in criminal trials, civil proceedings, and administrative investigations.
Members are prohibited from posting, transmitting, and/or disseminating any pictures, recordings, or videos of official Department training, activities, or work-related assignments without written permission of the Chief of Police or designee, through the Public Information Office (PIO).
Furthermore, members are prohibited from posting, transmitting, and/or disseminating any pictures, recordings, information, or videos that are in violation of any provisions of the General Manual, and/or information that is not deemed as a
“concerted activity” (Activity that is protected under federal labor law.) as defined by the National Labor Relations Board.
Any member becoming aware of or having knowledge of a posting or of any website or web page in violation of the provisions of this policy shall immediately notify his/her supervisor,
* in writing*; for follow-up action.
Sites deemed inappropriate, whether an employment association or not, bringing discredit to this Department or to a member, or promoting or encouraging misconduct, whether on or off duty, may be investigated in accordance with
GM Proc. 303, Disciplinary Procedures.
All members shall treat the official business of the Department as confidential and will comply with
GM Section 200, Rules and Regulations and
Proc. 307, Public and Media Information.
Members shall state that the views and opinions expressed on a social media site are the member’s personal views and not those of the San Antonio Police Department by incorporating a disclaimer indicating this on their personal page.
Members are prohibited from using ethnic slurs, profanity, personal insults, and material harassing in nature, defamatory, fraudulent, or discriminatory, or other content or communications that would not be acceptable in a City workplace under City or agency policy or practice.
Members are prohibited from displaying or posting sexually explicit images, videos, cartoons, jokes, messages or other material that would be considered violations of the City policy preventing sexual harassment in the work place and/or
GM Proc. 918, Harassment / Discrimination in the Workplace.
Members shall not post, share, text, “tweet,” photos; comments; videos; or other representations of police related calls, incidents, scenes or training without the prior approval of the
* Chief of Police or Police Media Services*;
* *unless such posting or sharing is for a legitimate police or investigative purpose.**

Answer 438

A

C. Supplemental Report

The Supplemental Report is completed within AFR by all officers who respond to a call and may have additional information such as; Dispatched to scene, Took some action, Witnessed some action, or had direct contact with the crowd, suspect, witnesses, etc. and this information is related to an offense/incident and the officer is not assigned the Report Responsibility.
a. All officers that make the scene of a felony call with an apprehension SHALL write a Supplemental Report within AFR, detailing what actions they took or what they witnessed at the scene.
All officers assigned to a call shall provide detailed comments by utilizing the ADD COMMENTS button on their Call For Service screen (CFS), whether they write an AFR report or not.
a. For those officers that did not make the scene and their actions were not material to the call , they shall add the appropriate comments to the CFS screen and then use the COVER AVAIL button to return to service. The following examples illustrate typical entries/actions;
Assigned to a quadrant, Cherry and Commerce, took no action. No AFR Report written;
Shut down traffic at Houston and North Walters, did not make scene. No AFR Report written;
Canceled en-route by dispatcher/supervisor, did not make scene. No AFR Report written;
Assigned to call by accident, did not make scene. No AFR Report written; or
Searched the area for suspect, did not find, and took no further action. No AFR Report written.
b. For those officers that did make the scene or took some sort of action beyond those listed in section C.2.a. above, the following comments shall be added to the CFS screen, regardless whether or not a report was also written within AFR;
Provided assistance at the scene for crowd control. Supplemental report written in AFR;
Made the scene but was not needed and returned to service. Supplemental Report written in AFR;
Assisted at the scene, transported witnesses to Homicide. Supplemental Report written; or
Handling officer. Offense report written. 1 adult male, 1 felony charge (Agg Robbery).
The officer will mark the box “SUPPLEMENTAL REPORT” on SAPD Form #2-2.

D. Supplement Report

The Supplement Report, SAPD Form #2-2S, is used for adding additional information to box (43) Details of the Offense/Event, section of SAPD Form #2-2;
When making changes or corrections to reports which have already been submitted into the system;

.04 THE PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION

The Offense Report is prepared and submitted when the preliminary investigation reveals any of the following:

A. An offense classified as a Class B misdemeanor or higher (refer to the Texas Penal Code or GM Procedure 708,
Follow-Up Units);
B. A drug/narcotic violation:
1. Possession of Narcotic Paraphernalia; and
2. Inhalant Abuse (City Ordinance Violation).
C. A sex offense (i.e., Sexual Abuse, Indecent Exposure, Public Lewdness, or Disorderly Conduct by Exposure);
D. All thefts (to include confidence operations such as home improvement swindles, Pigeon Drop, Goldbar Swindle, or Three-card Monte);
E. Apparent Sudden Deaths (except deaths resulting from traffic accidents, refer to GM Procedure 707, Crash Investigation). It should be noted the word “Apparent” shall be used in the title, except in criminal homicide cases;
F. Any assault offense, regardless of punishment classification; and
G. Other incidents including:
1. Found Property;
2. Lost property;
3. Attempted Suicide;
4. Accidental shooting (with injury);
5. Criminal Mischief;
6. Missing Persons;
7. Warrantless Emergency Detentions; and 8. Federal Violations.

Answer 439

A

.11 REPORTS TAKEN BY SERVICE AGENTS AT THE SECURITY DESK OR SERVICE AREA SUBSTATIONS

A. When a complainant either calls or arrives at any service area substation in person to make a police report, the Service Agent assigned to the substation Security Systems Desk receives the information and completes the guidelines established in their SOP Manual;

B. Missing person reports will be handled in accordance with GM Procedure 610, Missing Persons;

C. When a complainant arrives at the Service and Security Agents Desk at Police Headquarters requesting to make a police report, Service and Security Agents Desk personnel will:

Direct the complainant to the appropriate follow-up unit if located in the Police Headquarters building;
Contact the dispatcher and request an officer to prepare the report if the follow-up unit is not located at the Police Headquarters building;

.12 HANDWRITTEN OFFENSE AND PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION REPORTS

Completed handwritten offense reports are reviewed by the unit supervisor, who updates the status of the case record in the appropriate PRTS System.

A. Incomplete or unacceptable offense reports are directed to a supervisor in the reporting member’s chain of command for timely correction.

B. Acceptable reports are routed to Records Office personnel. The information from Offense Reports is then entered into the computer system, assigned an offense code, and finalized by data entry clerks.

C. The offense reports are then physically filed in the Records Office. In order to conform to the court decisions affecting the Privacy Act and the Open Records Act, two (2) separate reports are created by Records Office personnel from the offense report.

Offense Report - This is the computer-generated report available to the public and the press in accordance with GM Procedure 307.
Preliminary Investigation Report - This is the computer-generated report routed by Records Office personnel to the follow-up investigation unit.
This report is not available to the public and press.
It contains all information concerning the offense submitted by the member with report responsibility.

D. Members shall not include the names of individuals in the details section of reports, with the exception of officers’ names.

.13 MAKING CHANGES ON POLICE REPORTS

A. All police reports which have already been submitted and entered into the system needing additions, changes, or corrections must be accomplished by submitting a supplement report.

B. Supplement reports can be bin mailed or delivered to the Records Office.

C. If an error is made when writing a police report, simply draw a line through the error and initial the error, make the appropriate change.
Do not use liquid paper or whiteout agent of any sort on reports.

D. If an officer needs to be contacted to make any changes to reports per the request of any section/unit/office, they will be contacted through their chain of command.

Answer 440

A

D. Dispositions, N-Code Numbers and Statements:

C-CLR AFR/CRASH REPORT:
This status is used to clear any incident where the officer has obtained a case number and is writing any type of report
(accident, offense, supplement, etc.).

CO1 = CLR ONSITE ACTIVTY-NO RPT:
This disposition is used to clear the officer of any onsite activity where they have NOT obtained a case number to write a report.
This status will be used to clear from a field contact

CO2 = CLR TRAFFIC STOP-NO RPT:
This disposition is used to clear the officer after he has completed a traffic stop and has NOT obtained a case number to write a report.
Officer shall add comments to either the Call Screen or within the disposition comments box,
to include actions taken and citations issued.

N-Code 1: No Such Address -
Found no such address or location – Effort was made to locate complainant – Call back by dispatcher unsuccessful.
Comment notes shall include what actions the officer took to verify no such address existed.

N-Code 2: Occupant Did Not Call -
Arrived at location, occupant stated he did not call – Ascertained no problem or incident occurred – Call back by dispatcher unsuccessful.
Comment notes shall include name of person contacted and actions taken to verify the lack of a necessity for a police response.

N-Code 3: No Complainant -
Arrived at location, unable to locate a complainant – No evidence present which indicates an incident had taken place – Call back by dispatcher unsuccessful.
Comment notes shall include the measures the officer took to locate a complainant or ascertain an offense did not take place.
Not to be used on any self-generated On-Site Activity calls that are created by the handling officer.

NO4BC: Commercial Burglar Alarm - To be used for any commercial location, other than a panic alarm.

NO4BR: Residential Burglar Alarm - To be used on any residential location, other than a panic alarm.

NO4G: Government Alarm - To be used on any location that is designated as a government location.

NO4PC: Commercial Panic Alarm - To be used for a panic alarm that occurs at a commercial location.

NO4PR: Residential Panic Alarm - To be used for a panic alarm that occurs at a residential location.

These codes are to be used on False Alarms - Burglary, robbery, panic alarms etc.
Officers shall add notes to the Calls for Service Screen indicating actions taken at scene.
Example: Building/habitation physically secure, no apparent evidence of criminal activity for alarm notification, large dog inside the home, etc.
When these N-Codes are used for on-site activity, the reporting officer notifies the dispatcher of the type of alarm and the precise address of the alarm site.
These N-Codes may be used even though the officer is physically unable to check the building/habitation because of an obstacle
(i.e., fence, locked gate, dogs, etc.),
but there does not appear to be any evidence of criminal activity.
The comment “False Alarm” alone is not adequate.
Should the officer make contact with the complainant or alarm company agent and be informed the location is secure; the call is given the appropriate N-Code.
On a residential or commercial panic alarm officers shall indicate in the comments if it was a false alarm and what actions they took at the location.

N-Code 5: Return Call - Added return call to previously written report.
Note: Only the officer who handled the original call can use this N-Code number.
Comment section shall contain the original case number that was used.

N-Code 6: Outside Agency Case - No action taken –
Proper jurisdiction notified or advised complainant to notify proper jurisdiction.
Comment section shall contain the agency that will handle the call and what actions the officer took at the scene.
For example: Theft of money occurred in Leon Valley. Leon Valley follow-up Detective provided copy of supplement report and will handle investigation.
Note: A report is written whenever any action is taken, such as complainant/witness interviewed, evidence handled, etc.

N-Code 7: Canceled by the dispatcher -
This N-Code number is used solely by the dispatcher when the call is canceled by the complainant or when an officer receives an internal assignment such as transporting witnesses or prisoners, making notifications for the Investigations Division, or a special assignment or traffic assignment.
Comment section shall contain officer’s actions taken for this particular service.

N-Code 8: Patrol-by given to officer by dispatcher or Field Supervisor.
A. If assigned by dispatcher:
1. Officers acknowledge the call and advise the dispatcher he will be 10-08 (in service).

B. If assigned by Field Supervisor:
1. Field Supervisor’s will assign themselves (self assign icon) to the pending call that the Supervisor wishes to make a patrol by.
2. The Supervisor will then add comments assigning a particular officer to Patrol-by
(e.g. 4250A, Officer Smith #1234, was assigned to Patrol-by due to drug activity).
3. Once the comments are added the Supervisor will send a CAD Message to the assigned officer informing them of the Patrol-by.
At the minimum the message will contain the CFS#, location of Patrol-by, and reason for the Patrol-by.
4. The Field Supervisor will then clear from the call using the Primary 10-08 icon, placing an N08 on the call.
5. The responsibility of the Patrol-by lies with the officer receiving the CAD message from the Field Supervisor.
The officer will acknowledge the Patrol-by with a return CAD message to the Field Supervisor.
C. Absent exigent circumstances, officers will patrol by the location during their tour of duty and upon completion get a time check from the dispatcher.
D. If action is taken on the patrol-by, the officer will request to be re-assigned under the original CFS#.
Comments shall then be entered by the officer, either in the disposition box or by adding comments to the call screen, and then the dispatcher will put the appropriate n-code on the call.

N-Code 9: Bad Weather False Alarm -
False burglary, robbery, or other type of alarm when caused by severe weather conditions. No further action is required. Comments shall be put either in the disposition box or by adding comments to the call screen.

N-Code 10: Rec STL Veh or Add Info -
Found missing person, recovered stolen vehicle, recovered property, or any other miscellaneous call where the incident has been previously handled under an original SAPD case number.
Note: The officer assigned to the call must write a supplemental report under the original SAPD case number and list the ORIGINAL CFS number on the supplement report.
The supplemental report will then flow into the RMS and cancel the stolen or missing notification.
The officer then places an N-code 10 on the new CFS number.

N-Code 11: Call canceled by a Communications Unit supervisor -
This N-Code is used solely by the dispatcher.

N-Code 12: Canceled by Field Sgt -
This N-Code is used only at the discretion of a field supervisor based on sufficient information about the call in question (i.e., chronic caller).

N-Code 13: Disturbance/Miscellaneous -
This N-code may be used for a variety of disturbances that are non-violent and where no criminal offense has occurred.
Examples of these types of disputes would be civil disagreements, non-violent disturbances
(i.e., family, neighbor, etc.)
and other types of disturbance calls.
When writing the CFS report, officers shall include the required information as listed in section .02c and include any other pertinent data.
Comments can be written as presented below:
Contacted the parties and determined it is a civil matter (No legal jurisdiction in civil matters) – There was no breach of the peace or any criminal incident – No police action was taken beyond referral to civil resources like an attorney or small claims court
(i.e., peaceful picking up of belongings).
Contacted the parties who are husband and wife - There was no breach of the peace or no criminal incident – No police action was taken beyond counseling the two parties and referrals to additional counseling services if needed in future disputes.
C-James Smith WM 05-12-63, O1-Susan Doe WF 04-18-53.
Contacted C who stated that he had purchased a motorcycle from O1 who failed to tell him that the engine would need to be overhauled in order to it continue to operate.
C now wants O1 to refund his money and take back the motorcycle.
O1 stated that he sold the motorcycle to C, “as is”, and was not aware of any mechanical issues with the motorcycle when he sold it.
Both parties were advised to contact attorneys and seek remedies in civil court.

N-Code 14: No show-Exchg of Children -
Complainant was not given child(ren) back because the other party did not show up as agreed – (visitation violation).
Comment section shall detail the names of the parties and who did not show up as agreed.
Parent’s names will suffice.

N-Code 15: Stand-by -
For all stand-bys.
Comment section shall detail at a minimum the names of the parties involved and state that the exchange was peaceful.

N-Code 16: Assist the public -
The officer provided some kind of minor assistance to the complainant for a non-criminal matter
(i.e., changing a tire, giving directions, educating the public, etc.).
Comments shall be added either in the disposition box or by adding comments to the call screen.
Officer was flagged down by motorist who needed assistance with their vehicle. The battery on vehicle had died. Motorist had jumper cables which were attached to patrol vehicle which allowed for their vehicle to be started. Motorist was able to leave location. No further action.

N-Code 17: Animal Call -
Miscellaneous animal calls where no police action has to be taken
(i.e., loose pets, grass snake in the yard, etc.)
Comments shall be put either in the disposition box or by adding comments to the call screen.
NOTE: This is not utilized for Noise Complaints
(i.e., barking dogs, roosters crowing, etc.).
Refer to GM Procedure 605,
Miscellaneous Offenses and Complaint Calls,
for the handling of Noise Complaints.

N-Code 18: Repeated Call -
Repeated call where no further information is given and it has been verified the call is already assigned to another officer – either the dispatcher or the officer who is aware of this situation may N- Code the repeated call.
Comments shall be put either in the disposition box or by adding comments to the call screen.

N-Code 19: No Insurance, Not Towed - Decision not to tow based on:
—Condition of driver (elderly, sick, etc.).
—Weather conditions.
—Call load.
—The driver is from out of state.
—Small children in the vehicle and/or the number of children.
—If the driver or other occupants are disabled.
—There were animals in the vehicle.
—The nature and quantity of contents in the vehicle (potential financial loss, perishable items, etc.).
—Exigent circumstances (health care crisis, etc.).
—Time of day.
—Location (desolate areas, open fields/safety issues, etc.)

NOTE: No Insurance, Not Towed - This is used for incidents involving uninsured drivers failing to provide “Proof of Financial Responsibility.” Please note in your Calls for Service screen one
or more of the reasons listed below as to why the vehicle was not towed and what actions were taken.
This is in conformance with GM Procedure 607, Impounding Vehicles

N-Code 20: No Insurance, Towed -
Used when the vehicle is towed for no insurance.
Officers shall make notes within the Calls for Service screen as to why the vehicle was towed and what actions were taken.

The CFS number will be used on the Towing Service Report (TSR) in lieu of a case number

Answer 441

A

N-Code 22: Abn Veh-Pub St/St Cty Prop -
(Green Sticker) Vehicle abandoned on any public street (this includes the interstates) or any dedicated street on city property.
If the vehicle is impounded the officer shall add notes to the Calls for Service Screen to document his actions.
An AFR information report is not necessary for an impounded abandoned vehicle unless the situation is of such magnitude the officer determines an AFR information report will be prepared.

The following is a CFS report example of a LMDT entry for an N-Code 22:
“Vehicle was legally parked, but appeared to be sitting in same location for some time, unmoved. Officer shall list the license plate, color, and a description of the vehicle.
Vehicle green stickered as required.”

N-Code 23: Officers responding to mental health calls will have three N-Codes available to use as the disposition of the Call for Service, if a report is not required to be written.
They are as follows:
1. N23MH – Mental Health No Complainant –
This N-Code is used when officers are dispatched to a location for someone who may be having a mental health issue and upon arrival they do not find anyone.
2. N23MHN – Mental Health No Criteria for Emergency Detention –
This N-Code is used when Officers arrive at the call and after talking to the consumer, it is determined the consumer has mental health issues but the consumer is not homicidal, suicidal, or in a state of mental decompensation. The consumer and family if present, is given resources they can use.
3. N23MHR – Mental Health – Refused Services –
This N-Code is used when Officers arrive at the call and after talking to the consumer, it is determined the consumer has mental health issues but the consumer is not homicidal, suicidal, or in a state of mental decompensation.
The consumer also REFUSES any assistance and does not want any information on resources available to them.

N-Code 99: Administrative Reports -
Supervisor handling a complaint administratively.
This N-Code is used only by a supervisor when a CFS number has been generated for a complaint which is going to be handled administratively in accordance with
GM Procedure 303, Disciplinary Procedures.

Answer 442

A

.04 N-CODE REPORTING PROCEDURES FOR DISPATCHER

A. Dispatchers will update the status of a call with an N-Code number when requested by a field officer only under the following conditions:

The appropriate N-Code number is one the dispatcher is authorized to use.
The Mobile system or the officer’s LMDT is not operational; or
The CAD system is down and manual keycards are being used by the dispatcher.

.05 DIFFERENTIAL POLICE RESPONSE (DPR)

A. This section provides all members with an overview of the handling of non-emergency Calls for Services received by the San Antonio Police Department.
DPR specifically details which calls are to be expedited or self-reported, and which calls the Department will not respond to.
Additionally, DPR outlines the holding of certain calls during patrol shift changes.
Applicable reports will be taken in accordance with this procedure.

B. DPR is a set of alternative methods to the traditional field response to non-emergency
requests for police services designed to:

*1. Reduce response time;
*2. Increase volume of expedited calls;
*3. Increase officer safety and patrol availability;
and
*4. Reduce cost.

C. DPR Criteria –
In order to determine the appropriate police response relative to Calls for Service received,
Communications Unit personnel have been trained to use the following five criteria in assigning call priority:

 1. Urgent - The call will be dispatched as soon as possible and officers will arrive as soon as they safely can.
 2. Standard - The call will be handled by the next available officer, who should arrive within  * fourteen (14) minutes*.
 3. Delayed - The officer working the area should be contacting the caller within *one hour* or if the caller prefers, the caller can be immediately transferred to an expediter.

 4. Expediter - Calls handled by phone.

The following types of calls may be expedited:

a. Burglary of Coin-Operated or Coin Collection Machines;
b. Criminal Mischief;
c. Graffiti;
d. Additional information;
e. Lost property;
f. Obscene, harassing or threatening phone calls;
g. Thefts/Gas drive offs;
h. Theft of Service;
i. Threats, unless direct imminent danger;
j. Burglary of Vehicle;
k. Credit/Debit Card abuse;
and
l. Identity Theft.

Self-Reported - Calls which may be self-reported by filling out the appropriate forms via SAPD Website or going to nearest substation to fill out the appropriate forms.

D. Cold Case Calls to be Expedited

Cold Cases are defined as cases where there is no potential risk of personal injury or property damage and have been reported by the complainant as not currently ongoing
(i.e., Gas drive off at HEB, fled SB on WW White RD 10 minutes ago).
Calls determined to be cold cases shall not be considered “in progress” and shall not require an officer at the scene.
Information received by call-takers which is determined to be relevant will be forwarded to affected patrol sections
(i.e., stolen vehicle, suspect descriptions, etc.)
in the form of a BOLO.
Expedited calls requiring evidence collection/processing will have an applicable officer/detective assigned to retrieve/process item(s) under the expediter’s case number.
If, while expediting a Call for Service, it is determined it cannot be properly handled via telephone, the call will be updated and sent to dispatch for assignment to a field officer.

E. Cold Case Calls to be Expedited by Field Officers

Calls that are determined by the field officer as meeting the criteria for a cold case may be expedited as well as those that are sent to the appropriate dispatch channel from the call-taker for those calls that are unable to be expedited due to call volume.
The field officer has the option of handling the call in two ways:
a. Make the location and handle the report;
or
b. Expedite the call from the field.

(1) Using a personal cell phone.
(i) Use of personal cell phones is strictly voluntary.
(ii) There will be no reimbursement for use of personal cell phones.
(iii) Use of call block (*67 on most cell phones) is highly encouraged.
or
(2) using a landline phone.

If the field officer chooses to expedite the call, the officer will initiate the following:

a. Inform the dispatcher they will expedite the call.
b. Inform the dispatcher of the location (by address) where they will expedite the call from and the method that will be used.

(1) From a cell phone from their patrol vehicle.
(2) A landline phone, if using this method, officers will identify the actual address they are making the call from to the dispatcher.

c. The officer will note in the call screen to reflect the officer is expediting the call from the field and will log the location where the call will be made from.

If the call is being expedited by the officer, the dispatcher will ensure that the method used and location is annotated in the call screen
a. Patrol car (if a cell phone is used).
b. A landline phone. If using this method, officers will identify the actual address they are making the call from to the dispatcher.
In the event a field officer expedites a cold case call and the officer determines the call is in progress or the suspects are still in the area:
a. The field officer will immediately notify the dispatcher the call cannot be expedited and proceed to the location of the call and handle it in accordance with the applicable GM procedure.

b. The dispatcher will annotate reasons why this call can’t be expedited and promptly change the unit status of the officer, reflecting the officer will make the location of the call.
6. Field officers will also utilize other guidelines in Subsections .05D2 and 3 of this procedure as applicable.

.06 SELF-REPORTING SYSTEM REPORTS

A. Under DPR, several different types of calls can be self-reported.
B. Complainants will be able to make these reports by going to the San Antonio Police Department Web Page at ( www.sanantonio.gov/SAPD ) or
going to any substation to fill out the appropriate forms.
The following types of calls may be self-reported:

Burglary of coin operated machines without identifiable suspect
(i. e., name, address, license plate, TDL, SSN);
Criminal Mischief up to $500.00 in damages or Class B misdemeanor without identifiable suspect;
Graffiti up to $500.00 in damages or Class B misdemeanor without identifiable suspect;
Lost Property (except firearms);
Thefts/Gas drive off up to $500.00 in loss (except if weapons/threats of violence are involved) without identifiable;
Theft of Service up to $500.00 in loss without identifiable suspect; and
Burglary of Vehicle
(except when a firearm is stolen)
without identifiable suspect
(i.e., name, address, license plate, TDL, SSN).

.07 NON-DISPATCHED CALLS

A. Under DPR, the following types of calls normally will not be dispatched or responded to.
Currently, these calls could either be better remedied by another agency or certain criteria or conditions do not exist for a police response
(i.e. no breach of peace or criminal intent is present).

Animal calls which do not pose an imminent threat to public safety
(some barking dog calls may be dispatched due to the noise nuisance);
Calls to apartment complexes for the purpose of enforcing house rules
(i. e., people in the pool after hours, parking in the wrong slot, etc.);
Code compliance calls.
These are calls where the City codes have been violated on private property
(i.e., neglected lawns, abandoned vehicles on private property, etc.);
Calls for misbehaving children, to include children refusing to go to school;
Civil matters where there is no breach of the peace;
and
Private property crashes (non-intoxicated related) without injury.

B. Although the calls listed above normally will not be dispatched, officers shall make all calls assigned by the dispatcher and they shall not dispute these calls or argue with the dispatcher.
If an officer feels the call should not have been dispatched, it can be brought to the attention of a supervisor after the call has been made.

.08 CALL HOLDING AT SHIFT CHANGES

A. Dispatchers will hold certain calls during the following shift change hours:
0550-0630 & 1320-1400.

B. During the above call hold periods, for
non-emergency calls, callers will be given the option of calling back during any of the following time periods: 0800-1200, 1600-2000, and 0100-0500.

C. Non-emergency calls and crimes which are not in progress should be held at shift change.

D. DPR eliminates a great number of late calls by providing for call expediting and the holding of calls for the oncoming shift.

Officers shall no longer request late calls from dispatchers.

Answer 443

A

.04 CALL ASSIGNMENT
A. The Department has a responsibility to respond with a degree of promptness appropriate to the situation. While the priority spectrum and degree of urgency is wide, each call is extremely important to the individual placing it. For this reason, dispatchers are not restricted to district or section boundaries, or even rank (under exceptional circumstances) when assigning calls.
B. A call, including a cover call, is assigned to uniformed personnel under a dual concept, which is:
1. Calls are held in accordance with GM Procedure 402, Differential Police Response; and
2. Assigning the officer who is available for service (normally the officer nearest the location) provides the most prompt response.
C. The call is dispatched to an officer/UEDI in the following order, if practical:
1. Officer/UEDI assigned to the district (or section, in the case of a Crime Scene Unit Investigator) where the call is located;

Officer/UEDI completing a call in the district
(or section, in the case of a Crime Scene Unit Investigator) where the call is located;
Officer/UEDI assigned to an adjacent or nearest district (or section, in the case of a Crime Scene Unit Investigator) to the location where the call is located; and
Officer of any rank, available for service, who may be in close proximity to the call.

D. A cover officer(s) is dispatched to any situation that presents a potential for physical threat to the officer responding.

Assignment of a cover call is at the discretion of the dispatcher, although an officer with primary report responsibility may elect to request cover based on direct knowledge of the situation.
Once a cover officer has been dispatched to a call involving weapons, multiple actors, or a crime in progress, the cover officer will not be canceled until the first officer arrives at the scene and assesses the situation.
An officer, not on assignment, who is in close proximity to a call which requires a cover officer, may elect to respond, although he will remain available for service unless authorized and marked out by the dispatcher.

E. An officer arriving at the scene of a call prior to the officer with assigned report responsibility shall request the dispatcher’s permission to handle the call.

F. An officer encountering an on-site call prior to its dispatch is expected to handle it,
except at the dispatcher’s discretion when the officer is on another assignment.

G. An officer/UEDI or Crime Scene Investigator is subject to cancellation from a call or assignment by the dispatcher and placed back in service under the following conditions:

When information is received eliminating the need for further response;
A supervisor determines the officer is not needed;
or
A complainant refuses police services (i.e., fingerprinting stolen vehicles or burglary scenes).

H. A call involving potential or reported threats of violence is not canceled under any circumstance.

I. Investigative personnel are sent when required by established procedure or requested by field personnel.

—> Dispatchers will not wait for confirmation from the responding officer/UEDI before dispatching a Crime Scene Unit Investigator to a reported
shooting or cutting..

J. A supervisor is sent when required by established procedure or requested by field personnel.

K. The Communications Unit supervisor is notified when a call to a major incident is dispatched, or any other call requiring a number of officers to respond.
For example:

Officers in trouble;
Pursuits;
Large disturbances;

L. The Communications Unit supervisor shall monitor major incidents (examples listed above), coordinate the allocation of uniform resources with the uniform supervisor, and maintain effective uniform strength.
The Communications Unit supervisor will prepare and forward an all-route electronic advisory as necessary.

Answer 444

A

I. Code-One Call Transmission Sequence

The dispatcher calls the entire call number of both the officer and cover officer, if applicable, dispatches the call, and waits a reasonable time for response.
The officer answers promptly with full call number and acknowledges the call.
a. The officer checks his computer for dispatch information.
The dispatcher gives the officer concise details about the call, repeating any numbers in the address twice. (Cross street information is given only for code-two or code-three emergency calls);
a. The dispatcher asks the officer if he understood the call which should be registering on the computer and if he requires any further information.
The officer acknowledges receipt of the call by responding with his entire call number and will state in clear language “I copy - enroute”;
Officers will identify using full call sign and state in clear language “on-scene” upon arrival at the scene and will identify using full call sign and state in clear language “in-service” upon completing the call.

J. Code-Two Emergency Call Transmission Sequence

A code-two emergency call, normally preceded by an emergency alert tone, is broadcast over the affected primary channel(s) at the dispatcher’s discretion.
Information concerning the code-two emergency call is broadcast over each working channel at the individual dispatcher’s discretion;
The dispatcher calls the entire call number of the officer to be assigned report responsibility and the cover officer (if applicable), and gives concise details about the call, repeating any numbers in the address twice and giving any cross street information.
The dispatcher shall verbally specify the call is to be run “code-two.”
The officer acknowledges receipt of the call by responding with his entire call number and state in clear language “I copy – enroute”;
A supervisory officer is notified;
Officers will identify using full call sign and state in clear language “on-scene” upon arrival at scene;
and
All routine or non-emergency radio transmissions are suspended from the time of the first unit’s arrival until initial radio transmission is received from the scene;

K. Code-Three Emergency Call Transmission Sequence

A code-three emergency call, preceded by an emergency alert tone, is immediately broadcast simultaneously over all primary police frequencies upon reception by the dispatcher.
The dispatcher calls the entire call number of the officer to be assigned report responsibility and the cover officer, if applicable, and gives concise details about the call, repeating any numbers in the address twice and giving any cross street information.
The dispatcher shall verbally specify the call is to be run “code-three.”
The officer acknowledges receipt of the call by responding with his entire call number and in clear language “ I copy – enroute”;
A supervisory officer is notified to make the scene;
All radio communications not directly related to the emergency call are suspended until information is received from the first unit arriving at the scene;
Officers will identify using full call sign and state in clear language “on-scene” upon arrival at scene;
The first officer arriving on the scene will advise the dispatcher and give preliminary details regarding the call;
All non-emergency radio communications are suspended until the situation at the scene is stabilized.

L. Dispatchers will only use clear language when upgrading / downgrading the response level of any call via an on-air announcement of “now code-one” or “now code-two” or “now code-three.”

Answer 445

A

.08 INFORMATION CHANNEL PROCEDURES

A. The Communications Unit operates an Information Channel on a twenty-four (24) hour basis to service the needs of all units.

B. The Information Channel provides the following services:

Local, TCIC, and NCIC checks of the following provided the subject or item is in their custody, possession, presence, or immediate access.
(A log is maintained for the purpose of validating and confirming “hits” within the system.)

a. Persons (missing and wanted);
b. Vehicles (land, water, and air); and
c. Property (real or tangible).

Validation of warrant checks (municipal, county, state, federal);
Complainant callbacks prior to n-coding calls;
Case number and assignment generation;
Individual or company notifications (alarms, stranded motorists, etc.);
Other department notifications (public works, law enforcement entities, dog pound, etc.);
Directions to new locations or addresses not found in the street guide;
Updates of severe weather reports;
Canceling of stolen vehicles;
and
Other services appropriately intended to expedite the officer’s handling of police matters.

Answer 446

A

.10 PHONETICALPHABET
The Standard Phonetic Alphabet, listed below, is utilized in spelling or using letters in messages:
A – Alpha B – Bravo C – Charlie D–Delta E – Echo
F – Foxtrot G - Golf H – Hotel I-India J – Juliet
K – Kilo L - Lima M – Mike N–November O - Oscar
P – Papa Q – Quebec R – Romeo S–Sierra T – Tango
U – Uniform V - Victor W - Whiskey X-X-Ray
Y - Yankee Z - Zulu

.11 RADIO TEN-SERIES CODES

A. In compliance with National Incident Management System (NIMS) and to be better able to communicate with other first responders, the use of Radio Ten Codes is limited to only twelve codes:

10-4 Acknowledged
10-11 Cover Officer Requested
10-12 Wanted Person / Active Stolen
10-13 Sex Offenses/Medical Concerns
10-14 Mentally Ill Person;
10-15 Officer or Firefighter in Trouble
10–16 Patient Expired
10-21 15 Minute Break
10-22 30 Minute Break
10-40A Subject Wanted on Felony Warrant
10-40B Subject Wanted on Class A or B Misdemeanor warrant
10-40C Subject Wanted on Class C Misdemeanor Warrant.

.12 RADIO CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS
A. The following are permanent operational radio channel assignments.
Asterisks () indicate dispatch channels:
Section, Unit, Detail, or Function
1. North Patrol Section 1–A
2. West Patrol Section 1–C*
3. South Patrol Section. 1–E*

Central Patrol Section, Downtown Bike Patrol Unit, Special Victims Unit,
and Park Police 1–G*
East Patrol Section 1–I*
Northwest Patrol Section. 1–K* (Prue rd)
Information Channel 1–M
Tactical Response Unit 1–N *
Traffic Channel. 2–A *
Downtown Bike Patrol Unit. 2–C
Fleet Services. 2–N
Intelligence Unit. 3–A
Covert Operations Units
a. Vice 3–B
b. Narcotics 3–C
Crime Scene Unit 3-D
Repeat Offenders Program 3-E*
Special Operations Unit 3-G
Homicide Unit 3-H
Vehicle Crimes Unit 3-I
Executive Protection 3-J
Night Detectives Unit 3-K
Asset Seizure Detail 3-M
Shooting Team 3-N
Internal Affairs 3-O

B. Requests for temporary assignment of service channels for special functions or operations are made in writing to the Communications Unit Director.
The requests include the reason(s) for requiring the channel, the date(s) and time(s) needed, and necessity of dispatch personnel.

Answer 447

A

.14 TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
A. Requests For Service
1. Members receiving telephone requests for service:
a. Obtain the nature of the request; and
b. Determine if the request may be dealt with by the member receiving the call or another member present within the unit, or must be handled by a member of another unit or be dispatched to a field unit.

If the request must be dealt with by a member of another unit, the member transfers the caller and announces the call to the appropriate unit.
If the request must be dispatched, the member transfers the caller and announces the call to the Communications Unit.
Members receiving telephonic complaints against another member comply with the process prescribed in Procedure 303, Disciplinary Procedures.

B. Requests For Information

1. Members receiving telephone requests for information may confer information in accordance with Procedure 307, Public and Media Information.    2. Any requests from outside the Department for release of information from departmental administrative or field files are referred to the Accounting and Personnel Office.

C. Long-Distance Communication
1. Members needing to make a long-distance telephone call in conjunction with their assigned duties place the call through the Communication Unit.

 2.   The Communication Unit maintains a complete log of all long-distance calls charged to the Department.

.15 ACCEPTING / DELIVERING EMERGENCY MESSAGES
A. Accepting and delivering emergency messages is a legitimate law enforcement function.
Therefore, members of the Department shall adhere to the following criteria when accepting and delivering emergency messages.

B. Emergency messages include, but are not limited to the following types of messages:

Death messages (both local and out of area);
Serious illness or injury messages (both local and out of area);
Any other types of messages which, if not delivered in a timely manner, could have adverse effects on members of an immediate family.

C. Accepting Emergency Messages

All incoming messages of an emergency nature shall be transferred to the appropriate unit without delay.
If the unit is not open or the unit with follow-up responsibility for the emergency message cannot be determined, the emergency message will be transferred to the Communications Unit supervisor’s office.

D. Delivering Emergency Messages

The Communications Unit supervisor shall determine the nature of the emergency messages and attempt to contact the unit or member with follow-up responsibility by telephone.
If the unit with follow-up responsibility cannot be determined, the Communications Unit will be the unit responsible for delivering emergency messages.
If the unit or member with follow-up responsibility can not be contacted, a patrol officer will be dispatched to deliver the emergency message.
The member delivering an emergency message shall attempt to deliver the message with the understanding the message may cause some mental anguish for the receiving party.
a. If the emergency message has a telephone number or name of a party to contact, ”the member should just give the receiving party the telephone number and name of the party to contact for an emergency message.”
b. If there is no one to receive the emergency message, the member attempting to deliver the message should leave a telephone number and name of a party to contact on a note in an easily seen location.
When an emergency message must be delivered to a party out of the jurisdiction of the Department, the Communications Unit or the Security Desk will deliver the emergency message by teletype to the appropriate law enforcement agency.

Answer 448

A

H. Non-Patrol Responsibilities

Members who do not have access to laptop computers in their vehicles will enter the data for their reports by using city-issued workstations that are located in their respective police facilities.
a. If a member does not have access to or cannot access a computer, the member will obtain authorization from a supervisor before handwriting his report(s).
b. The member will include the name and the badge number of the supervisor who authorized him to handwrite his report(s).
c. After obtaining authorization to handwrite his report(s), the member will immediately complete his report(s) and deposit them in the designated report collection receptacle or route the original to his supervisor for approval and routing to records so that it can be entered into the Records Management System.

Answer 449

A

D. Supplemental Report:

The AFR Supplement Report is completed by the officer who reports additional information related to an offense/incident and/or those who do not write an offense or incident report.
When making changes or corrections to reports which have already been submitted into the system.
To recover stolen vehicles, the officer will mark the box “SUPPLEMENT REPORT” at the top of the AFR police report.
The officer will place the original case number and original CFS number on the report, but will list the current CFS (master incident number) currently dispatched on, in the details.
Officers need to describe, in the details of the report, what efforts were made to contact the owner and what the final disposition of the vehicle was.
Once completed, the officer will N-Code-10 the new CFS number that they are currently out on.
Make sure the service agent/dispatcher cancels the BOLO.
The case number is listed in the “hit” confirmation on the CAD return.
Both the original and supplement report will be under the same case and CFS numbers.

FOR VEHICLES STOLEN OUT OF ANOTHER JURISDICTION – the officer will request that a new case be generated.
He will place the new case number and cfs number in the appropriate boxes at the beginning of the report.
The officer will place the other jurisdiction’s case number in the details of the report.
Please refer to the SAPD WEB, STOLEN VEHICLES, for additional scenarios and how they should be documented.

Answer 450

A

F. Adding Review Comments to a
Report - Supervisor’s & Officer’s

“Review comments” by supervisors during the workflow process.
(Comments will be removed during the import into RMS.)

a. Supervisor
(1) Once a report has been loaded, begin your review. Click review for any comments the officers may have put in the report. If there are no corrections to be made, click Save, Close and in Draft click Approve and then Send.
(2) If you find an error click in the field to be corrected in the report & hold, “SHIFT+ CNTRL +R” to bring up the review edit window
(3) You have two options for entering the comments:
i. Select the reason from the “Enter” or select a reason for the “review” from the drop down; or

ii. Enter your comment in the “Review Notes” text field.
Please add your name and assignment to let the individual know who sent the message.

4) Select the OK button on the Review Edit Window.
You will now see the bubble with the comment inserted and from whom.

(5) Save the report and reject back to the officer. b. Officer
(1) Once you receive the report move it to the drafts and load it. Press “review” to see what corrections are needed. By clicking in the “review box” you will be taken straight to where the bubbles are located.

(2) Once you make the correction, you can return your corrected report with a comment. Click “EDIT” and enter the message.
(3) Once complete, Click Save, Close, and then select resubmit from the drop down & send.

(4) Officers may also place comments in a report before sending it. Just use the same process as listed above in the supervisor section, “SHIFT+ CNTRL +R.”

Answer 451

A

EXAMPLES:

A car burglar burglarizes five cars on one street may be handled under one case number even though there are five different owners.
However, if the same burglar were to burglarize four more cars five blocks away from the original burglary, a new case would be generated to handle the four new burglaries.

This is for UCR purposes only.

When a car dealership has 30 cars stolen from the same lot, one report will be written and all 30 vehicles will be reported stolen under the same case number.
There will be 30 vehicle sections opened in the AFR report and all 30 sections will have a new NIC number for that vehicle.
The NIC number is what cancels the vehicle as stolen with NCIC/TCIC.

F. The AFR Offense Report is prepared and submitted when the preliminary investigation reveals any of the following:

An offense classified as a Class B misdemeanor or higher (refer to the Texas Penal Code or GM Procedure 708, Follow-Up Unit);
A sex offense (i.e., Sexual Abuse, Indecent Exposure, Public Lewdness, or Disorderly Conduct by Exposure).
Officers still follow the same reporting procedures with regard to the use of pseudonyms as listed in General Manual procedure 703, Handling of Sexual Assault Complaints;
All thefts (to include confidence operations such as home improvement swindles, Pigeon Drop, Goldbar Swindle, or Three-card Monte).
Officers will check ‘Arrest Report’ anytime they have a physical body in handcuffs that is being booked into the city or county jail with one exception.
This report will also be filled out when there is a technical arrest where a city ordinance violation is being issued.
The exception is when an officer has a person under arrest for auto theft and the officer is required to cancel the stolen vehicle.
In this case, the officer will simply do a supplement report and will only check the arrest box in the suspect section.
If there are additional charges to be filed against this arrested person, then a second report with a new case number and CFS number will need to be generated and all the additional charges will be entered into this report.
The officer will put the original case number for the stolen report into the ‘Related Case Number’ box.
Stolen property will be listed in the Property Section of the AFR report.

Like items such as clothing, which do not have serial numbers may be put in one property section.
However, items such as electronics, which have serial numbers, or other identifiers, must have their own property section.
This will be completed this way even if the owner does not have the serial number on hand.
The “value” section must have the total amount of ALL the property types that were stolen.

G. Apparent Sudden Deaths
(except deaths resulting from traffic accidents, refer to GM Procedure 707, Crash Investigation).
Use “DOA” in the drop down box in the AFR for “situation found” and then select
“APPARENT SUDDEN DEATH,”
except in criminal homicide cases;

H. Any assault offense, regardless of punishment classification; and

I. Other occurrences, documented in the narrative section of the AFR report, including:

Found Property
Lost property
3 Attempted Suicide
Accidental shooting (with injury)
Criminal Mischief
Missing Persons
Warrantless Emergency Detentions
Federal Violations

Answer 452

A

.10 REPORTS TAKEN BY POLICE SERVICE AGENTS AT THE SECURITY DESK OR SERVICE AREA SUBSTATIONS

A. When a complainant either calls or arrives at any service area substation in person to make a police report, the Police Service Agent assigned to the substation Security Systems Desk receives the information and shall complete the AFR report;

B. When a complainant arrives at the Service and Security Agents Desk at Police Headquarters requesting to make a police report, Service and Security Agents Desk personnel will:

Direct the complainant to the appropriate follow-up unit if located in the Police Headquarters building.
Contact the dispatcher and request an officer to prepare the report if the follow-up unit is not located at the Police Headquarters building.

C. The offense reports are filed electronically in the Records Management System.
In order to conform to the court decisions affecting the Privacy Act and the Open Records Act, two (2) separate reports are created by Records Office personnel from the offense report.

PUBLIC REPORT - This is the computer-generated report available to the public and the press in accordance with GM Procedure 307, Public and Media Information.
POLICE OFFENSE REPORT - This is the computer-generated report routed by Records Office personnel to the follow-up investigation unit. This report is not available to the public and press. It contains all information concerning the offense submitted by the member with report responsibility.

D. Members shall not include the names of individuals in the details section of reports, with the exception of officers’ names.

.11 MAKING CHANGES ON POLICE REPORTS
A. Finalized reports (Offense and Incident) may only be amended through the use of a Supplemental Report. Additionally, reports filed in connection with an arrest (custodial and non-custodial) must also have corrections made through the use of a Supplemental Report.
The Supplemental Report can be generated through the Automated Field Report System (AFR) and sent electronically to the RMS.
Any reports not yet finalized by a field supervisor may be corrected and resubmitted.

B. If an officer needs to be contacted to make any changes to reports per the request of any section/unit/office, they will be contacted through their chain of command.

.12 PRINTING AND EMAILING REPORTS

A. Officers may, when necessary, provide copies of reports to agencies that require a copy in order to handle a particular police incident.
For example, hospitals frequently require a copy of the police report when handling an emergency detention.

Officers may take their thumb drive into the facility and print a copy of the saved report.
Officers may also access their email from the laptop in their police vehicle and email the report to a designated individual.

.13 COMPLETING REPORTS WHEN WORKING OFF-DUTY EMPLOYMENT

A. Report responsibilities when working off-duty employment are addressed in General Manual
Procedure 905, Off-Duty and Outside Employment.

B. For other major city events, FIESTA, NIOSA, and Folklife Festival, computers will be made available at the command posts for each event that will have the AFR program so that officers can complete reports as required. In the event that computers are not available reports will be handwritten.

.14 ANALYZING PROBLEMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

A. Operational Issues With AFR System
If officers experience AFR System malfunctions, the following resources should be consulted:

The user’s guide provides help with most problems concerning the operation of the AFR software;
AFR Trainers are able to provide additional assistance with operating details and minor troubleshooting guidance; and
Technical support is provided by Information Systems personnel during normal business hours
(Monday – Friday, 0745 – 1630 hours).
Officers should email either PD AFR SUPPORT or PD RMS SUPPORT with questions or if they are having technical issues with a report.
Officers shall include the following in the email: SAP number CASE and CFS NUMBER
Synopsis of problem
Attached PDF copy of the report

B. Functional Issues With AFR System Application
If officers experience trouble using the AFR program, accessing forms, printing reports, etc., they should adhere to the following guidelines to resolve the situation:

Refer to the AFR System User’s Guide;
Confer with AFR Trainers on the shift;
Confer with a FTO Sgt. on the shift;
During normal business hours, request that the dispatcher notify Information Systems; and
Outside of normal business hours, notify his supervisor and return to the substation to get another patrol car.

C. Technical Issues With AFR System Equipment And Software

If an officer experiences trouble with the AFR System equipment or software, such as the system will not respond, or AFR System will not come up, etc., he should adhere to the following guidelines to resolve the situation:

Reboot the laptop by holding the power button for more than 7 seconds. This properly shuts down the laptop. Then, restart the laptop.
If reboot fails, immediately notify the shift supervisor about equipment failure.
In the event of laptop damage, immediately fill out a SAPD Form 162, Found Damage Report, and submit it to the shift supervisor.
Immediately notify ITSD personnel about equipment failure by email noting the vehicle and laptop number.
The email should specify the exact nature of any problems occurring on the laptop as ITSD may have to review the software.
Obtain another vehicle.
Patrol Officers shall notify their dispatcher of laptop related problems; and
Desktop users shall call the
Helpdesk (207-8888) to report any problems.
The Helpdesk personnel will either provide appropriate assistance or generate a work order specifying the problem to ensure a timely follow-up.

Answer 453

A

B. Undocking

Members may undock and utilize the laptop in a portable fashion for investigative purposes.
The security of the laptop remains the responsibility of the assigned member.
Wi-fi should connect automatically.
The mobility icon should engage showing that it is connecting, this may take a moment.
After connection is achieved the laptop should function as when in the patrol vehicle.
When returning the laptop to its assigned vehicle, special care must be exercised to ensure the sliding docking panel door on the back side of the laptop is open and the laptop is properly aligned in the dock.
The effort exerted to dock and lock the laptop should be minimal. If resistance is encountered, members are advised to check the alignment of the laptop to avoid damaging the connectors.
Again do not force the “redocking” as this could damage the pins that secure the laptop and result in the vehicle docking station to have to be repaired.

16 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Only select officer when that individual is performing a police - related task and becomes a victim.

B. Officers will not list themselves as “other, reporting person, or unknown” on any AFR police reports. List any member’s name and badge number as necessary in the narrative of the report.

C. X-Ray Numbers
1. In the event that the CAD system goes down and dispatchers begin to issue X-ray numbers, officers should follow the below process for completing their reports:

a. If the officer handwrote a report using the X-ray number, the officer should create an incident number (CFS) on the CAD using ON SITE ACTIVTY, then create an offense case number.
The officer shall write both of these numbers above the X-ray number on the green sheet.
Then route the green sheet to records.
This way records has the proper numbers to input these into the RMS with AFR.
Please advise your officers that any handwritten reports that arrive to records with X-ray numbers only will be returned to them. The X-ray number should be in this format: X-123456

b. If the officer waits until the CAD comes back up to write their report in AFR, the officer will generate an incident number (CFS) using “ON SITE ACTIVTY” and then generate a case number so that they can put it in AFR.
Then put the X-ray number in the “RELATED CASE NUMBER” field in this format X-123456

Answer 454

A

.04 OPERATIONAL (GENERAL)

A. Each officer that has been trained in the use of the recording device will operate the vehicle with the device in the. “operation mode.”

B. Officers assigned mobile video recording equipment are responsible for ensuring the equipment remains in the operating condition it was issued.
Officers shall not attempt to repair mobile video recording equipment except for facilitating Department-directed specific software updates and manufacturer’s required maintenance.
Officers shall notify their immediate supervisor of damaged or malfunctioning mobile video recording equipment immediately and complete SAPD Form #162, Found Damage Report and/or SAPD Form #161, Mobile Video Recorder Service Request. Officers that have been issued Body Worn Cameras (BWC) are not required to use the Coban Microphone unless the BWC malfunctions during their tour of duty.
Officers who have been issued a BWC will report any malfunctions of the BWC to their immediate supervisor prior to returning to duty.

C. The use of the digital camera system for the clandestine recording of the voice or image of a member of the Department is prohibited unless specifically authorized by the Office of the Chief.

D. Officers may use the recording to gather pertinent information for composing reports, training, or investigatory purposes.

E. Officers are not required to advise citizens they are being recorded or show any citizen a video which they recorded.

F. Officers will not make private recordings and/or release any copies to any person not authorized to receive it.

.05 START UP

A. Officers inspect and functionally test mobile video recording equipment in their assigned vehicle at the beginning of
every shift by:
1. Ensuring proper alignment and positioning of the camera.

Ensuring the date and time is correct.
Performing a functional test by activating the camera, synchronizing their mobile microphone, and stating their name, badge number and the date. The officer will then play back the recording to ensure the system recorded correctly and that the mobile microphone is synchronized to their system and recording.

B. Officers shall not place any objects in front of any camera that may interfere with recording of video.

Answer 455

A

F. All stoppage and/or muting, other than administrative functions testing or accidental activation, of the mobile video must be

verbally documented—stating a specific reason—in the Officer’s video, and
report or *CFS comment entry field.

G. When responding to a call or initiating any activity in which an explosive device, or suspected explosive device or Hazardous Material is present the officer will, prior to exiting their vehicle, ensure that their in-car system is recording and remove their microphone and/or BWC (Body Worn Camera) and leave it in their vehicle.
The removing of the microphone and/or BWC, and leaving it in the vehicle, must be clearly documented in the officer’s report or CFS comment entry field.

H. Recording Suspected DWI Violators

When an officer makes a decision to start an investigation of a violator, the officer shall activate the mobile video recorder but shall not verbally articulate the initial traffic violation observed or any observations of the SFST.
When stopping the violator, the officer positions the police vehicle approximately two car lengths behind the suspect’s vehicle in order to create a proper arena of performance.
If two car lengths are not possible, the officer adjusts the camera angle before leaving the police vehicle to ensure a safe and effective arena of performance.
Optimum lighting should be used at night whenever possible:

a. Low beam headlights and takedown lights should be used during mobile video recording.
High beam and spotlights should be used only when needed for the safety of the suspect and officer.

b. When Standardized Field Sobriety Tests (SFSTs) are being performed, no spotlights should be directed at the offender’s vehicle, and should only be pointed at the ground.
Also, wigwag headlights shall not be used, and the front strobe lights, if so equipped, shall be turned off.
The rear strobes may be activated for suspect and officer safety.

The officer should not articulate reasonable suspicion or probable cause as it develops.
As needed, the officer removes the suspect from the suspect’s vehicle and escorts him to the right rear of the suspect vehicle, with the suspect facing the police vehicle.
The officer should stand so as to observe the suspect as well as any other occupants in the vehicle and to monitor vehicle traffic.
Any intoxicants found in the suspect vehicle, as well as any evidence seized, shall be brought in view of the camera and the officer shall articulate the description of the evidence in order to record such information.

Answer 456

A

.09 SUPERVISORRESPONSIBILITIES

A. Supervisors shall ensure officers are using the recording equipment according to established guidelines, policies, and
procedures.
1. Supervisors, on a quarterly basis, will review at least one recording for all officers under their command to ensure proper usage of recording equipment and adherence to established policy and procedures.
2. Supervisors will only use recordings from Type 1–5 category of events, in accordance with Section .13 of this procedure.
3. Supervisors will take corrective action for any procedural violation they observe and document the findings on the proper form.

B. When responding to a citizen complaint made against an officer and the encounter is captured on video, the supervisor shall view the recording to determine if the video evidence supports or refutes the complaint.
Existence and content of the recording shall be annotated in the supervisor’s investigation report.

C. Supervisors shall record all incidents
(i.e. use of force, officer involved accidents, and complaints on officers)
when requested or required to respond, in addition to those listed under Section .06A of this procedure.

D. Supervisors shall view the recordings of all use of force incidents, police vehicle crashes, and police pursuits prior to completing their evaluations.

E. Supervisors may view the recordings of their subordinates in the field at any time during the shift.

F. Minor infractions (non-criminal) discovered during the routine reviews of recorded material should be addressed by the reviewing supervisor, including retraining when appropriate.
Disciplinary actions will be addressed in accordance with GM Proc. 303, Disciplinary Procedures.

G. Any supervisor made aware of damaged or malfunctioning recording equipment shall arrange for repair of the equipment. Damage shall be inspected by the supervisor and he/she will make every attempt to locate and assign a vehicle with a working in-car video system.

.10 TRAINING VIDEOS

A. Officers/Supervisors aware of recorded files containing material that may be deemed beneficial as training material shall direct notification up the chain-of-command.

B. The Training Academy Commander may, with the approval of the Chief of Police, use such recording for training purposes, taking into consideration pending judicial and/or administrative investigations.

.11 OPEN RECORDS REQUEST

A. Requests for audio/video files will be handled under the Public Information Act.

B. Requests for audio/video files from other criminal justice agencies are to be submitted in writing on agency letterhead and signed by the agency’s chief executive officer to the Video Evidence Custodian.

C. All copies of audio/video files will be produced by the Video Evidence Custodian.
A copy is defined as a reproduction of the primary recording of the event.

D. Requests for files for prosecutorial purposes may be submitted directly to the Video Evidence Custodian.

E. Requests for files from defense attorneys in county, district, or federal courts must be made through the appropriate prosecutor, or subpoenas.

F. The cost for producing the audio/video files for Open Records Requests will be determined by the Records Unit.

G. All other requests for audio/video files should be referred to the Office of the Chief.

Answer 457

A

.14 VIDEO UPLOADS

A. Video File Uploading (Automatic Mode):
Video files may be uploaded through an automated wireless process at any Wi-Fi enabled location (listed below).
The video upload process will continue after logoff, until all files have been uploaded to the central server.
Officers can power down the vehicle, but shall not interfere with the file transfer process or attempt to power down the system.
The system is designed to automatically shut down after the transfer process has been completed.

B. Video File Uploading (Manual mode):
Video files may be uploaded through a manual wireless process at any Wi-Fi enabled location (listed below) by following the routine system shutdown process.
Officers will select the option “Upload and Shutdown.”
The upload process will continue after logoff, until all files have been uploaded to the central server.
Officers can power down the vehicle, but shall not interfere with the file transfer process or attempt to power down the system.
The system is designed to automatically shut down after the transfer process has been completed.

The following Units/Sections are authorized to, and will remove the Hard Drives from their vehicles and will conduct manual uploading of videos:

a. DWI Units;
b. Commercial Motor Vehicle (DOT) Units;
c. Motorcycle Units; and
d. Any Unit of Section designated by the Chief of Police or his designee, or assigned to vehicles which are not Wi-Fi enabled.

Manual Uploads due to Remaining storage

a. Upon logging into the in-car video system, an officer will note the number of hours of storage remaining on the hard drive.
This is indicated on the middle right side of the login screen titled “Storage left for video: XX.XX Hours”.
If the system indicates that the remaining hours for video is 15 hours or less (which will require a manual procedure for uploading video files), the officer shall notify their supervisor.

.14 VIDEO UPLOADS

A. Video File Uploading (Automatic Mode):
Video files may be uploaded through an automated wireless process at any Wi-Fi enabled location (listed below).
The video upload process will continue after logoff, until all files have been uploaded to the central server. Officers can power down the vehicle, but shall not interfere with the file transfer process or attempt to power down the system.
The system is designed to automatically shut down after the transfer process has been completed.

B. Video File Uploading (Manual mode):
Video files may be uploaded through a manual wireless process at any Wi-Fi enabled location (listed below) by following the routine system shutdown process.
Officers will select the option “Upload and Shutdown.”
The upload process will continue after logoff, until all files have been uploaded to the central server.
Officers can power down the vehicle, but shall not interfere with the file transfer process or attempt to power down the system.
The system is designed to automatically shut down after the transfer process has been completed.

The following Units/Sections are authorized to, and will remove the Hard Drives from their vehicles and will conduct manual uploading of videos:

a. DWI Units;
b. Commercial Motor Vehicle (DOT) Units;
c. Motorcycle Units; and
d. Any Unit of Section designated by the Chief of Police or his designee, or assigned to vehicles which are not Wi-Fi enabled.

Manual Uploads due to Remaining storage
a. Upon logging into the in-car video system, an officer will note the number of hours of storage remaining on the hard drive. This is indicated on the middle right side of the login screen titled “Storage left for video: XX.XX Hours”. If the system indicates that the remaining hours for video is 15 hours or less (which will require a manual procedure for uploading video files), the officer shall notify their supervisor.
b. Once notified, the supervisor shall pull the hard drive and manually upload video as outlined in the “Sergeants field guide” pages 9 through 11.
c. It is the supervisor’s responsibility to replace the hard drive back into vehicle once video is successfully offloaded.

C. Special/Exigent Circumstance Video File Uploading:

Officers shall not remove the hard drive under any circumstances.
Authorization for removal of HD can only be made by a Sergeant or above.
Keys for unlocking and removing HD’s will be issued to the following personnel only:

a. CSI Supervisor;
b. Traffic Investigations Detail;
c. Substation commanders;
d. Internal Affairs;
e. Traffic Captain;
f. Officers assigned to Motorcycle Detail;
g. DOT Enforcement Officers;
h. DWI Unit Officers;
i. Patrol Supervisors; and
j. Supervisors and/or Officers assigned to Units or Sections designated in accordance with section .14B1d.

Vehicles involved in collisions and/or otherwise not able to be driven to the substation shall adhere to the following:
a. The notified supervisor or Patrol Supervisor shall coordinate the retrieval and upload of the hard drive (locked in the video recording unit component located in the trunk of the vehicle).
b. The Crime Scene Investigator Supervisor, Detective, or technician will then upload the video manually via a cradle station. In minor police vehicle crashes where TID is not required to make the scene and a Crime Scene Technician is not available, the field supervisor will then upload the video manually via a cradle station.
c. Upon completion of the video upload the hard drive must be returned to Fleet Management
Critical Incidents
a. Upon the conclusion of a critical incident, all units will return to the appropriate facility in order to have all video manually uploaded. A unit will NOT be returned to service until all video evidence has been removed from the unit and confirmed for release by CSI.
Failsafe Video Data includes all recordings initiated by the officer as well as all video (no audio) captured throughout the entire shift, as long as the MVR program is running. Failsafe video may contain pertinent evidentiary data related to an event, but is only available for 48 hours from the time of the incident.

a. A supervisor may request an upload of a systems Failsafe data by submitting a request to a CSI Sergeant.
D. Wireless Hotspot Locations for Video Upload:
NOTE: Hotspot upload locations will be identified at each facility through signage and/or parking lot striping at:
   Bldg Site
       Physical Address
    Central Service Area
   515 S. Frio
    North Service Area
  13030 Jones Maltsberger
  South Service Area
      711 W. Mayfield
    Northwest Service Area
   5020 Prue Rd
    West Service Area
  7000 Culebra Rd
  East Service Area
      3635 E. Houston
    Academic Court
   555 Academic Ct 78204

.15 REVIEWING IN-CAR VIDEO

A. The viewing of videos is restricted for official use only. Videos may be viewed for the following purposes:

Criminal investigations;
Internal Affairs or complaint reviews in accordance with Section
.12, COMPLAINTS RECEIVED / VIDEO REVIEW;
Pursuits;
Use of force reviews;
Open Record Request (ORRs) in accordance with
.11, “OPEN RECORD REQUEST”;
Officer involved crashes; or
Other – any purpose not listed in this procedure shall have prior approval by a supervisor and documented in the Notes section.

B. Personnel requiring access to locked videos will send a request for access/viewing of the specific video through their chain of command.

C. Personnel reviewing videos shall manually document name, badge number and the purpose of their viewing in the Notes field in the Coban viewer application.

D. The making of unauthorized copies and/or copies for personal use is prohibited.

.16 RETURN TO DUTY

A. Officers that have been absent for an extended period and/or not received training, must complete the in-car video training prior to being authorized to use the system.

Answer 458

A

.05 START UP

A. Officers shall ensure that the BWC is operational by powering the unit on and confirming the status of the indicator LED’s.
B. Officers shall ensure proper alignment and positioning of the BWC on the front of the Officer’s outer most garments (nothing shall be placed in front of the camera in such a manner that it interferes with or obstructs the recording of VIDEO at any time during the course of the Officer’s duties this includes any object that prevents the camera from recording both video and audio).
C. Officers shall keep their Body Worn Camera in buffering mode (ON) throughout their shift. Officers shall not change the operation of their Body Worn Camera that prevents the camera from capturing the buffering video, the video and audio of their calls.

.06 RECORDING

A. Officers are not required to advise citizens they are being recorded and are prohibited from showing any citizen a video which they recorded; furthermore, Officers should not start/stopthe BWC solely upon the request of a citizen.

B. Officers shall create a Call for Service (CFS) for any self-initiated video at the time of recording.
Officers shall stop recording at the end of each
CFS number and start a separate recording for each new CFS number assigned or initiated.

C. Officers shall use the recording to gather pertinent information for composing reports, training, and investigatory purposes.

D. Officers shall begin recording the following events and continue recording until the event is concluded;
(Any deviations will require a supervisor’s approval and must be documented in the Officer’s video, report, or CFS comment entry field in accordance with Section .07 of this procedure):

 1. Upon observation of suspicious or criminal behavior;

2. Officer-initiated contacts: a. Arrest, b. Field Contacts, c. Traffic/Pedestrian Stops, d. Vehicle/Foot Pursuits;

3. During all prisoner or witness transports.  If an officer arrives at a facility that is recorded, such as Public Safety Head Quarters (PSHQ) or the Magistrate’s Office, the Officer may stop recording upon entering the facility or transferring custody of the prisoner/witness;

4. In instances where the Officer reasonably believes that the recording may provide evidence in criminal investigations;
5. Service of any search or arrest warrants on the premises of a residence, business or building, if the Officer is assisting in such service of search or arrest warrants;
6. Citizen-initiated contacts or flagged down requests for public safety services.

E. Officers should begin recording upon reception of or response to CFS, whether dispatched or not; to include assisting outside agencies (Federal, State, County, or Municipal). However, officers SHALL begin recording prior to arriving at the scene.

F. Subsequent arrest, handcuffing and search of violators should take place in view of the camera when practical and in accordance with Departmental policies. All arrests, handcuffing, and searches occurring out of view of the camera must be documented in the Officer’s video, report, or CFS comment entry field in accordance with Section .06 of this procedure.

F. Officers shall not stop or mute a recording during a public encounter or assigned CFS, **except for the following reasons:

1. Officers may stop and/or mute: a. While conferring with undercover/covert officers from investigative divisions, or confidential informants or with federal officers/agents.  However, officers SHALL “un-mute” prior to continuing or taking ANY law enforcement action;

b. Personal relief or break
2. Officers may momentarily mute only:
a. Conversations that involve police and/or case tactics or strategy
b. Personal emergency matters of a sensitive nature (i.e. family emergency, medical emergency, catastrophic event).

3. Officers may mute, with Supervisors approval only, where Officers duties are *unlikely*to lead to information relevant to a case,  (i.e. directing traffic, preserving a crime scene).  The BWC audio shall be reactivated immediately if the circumstances change or any police action is to be taken.

G. All stoppages and/or muting, other than accidental activation, of the BWC must be verbally documented—stating a specific reason—in the Officer’s video, and in writing in the officer’s report or CFS comment entry field in accordance with Section .07 of this procedure.

H. When an Officer makes the decision to start an investigation, or at the start of the initial CFS, the Officer may verbally articulate facts or observations that may be noteworthy.
This articulation may continue throughout the entire recording.
(Note: This does not apply to DWI investigations, Procedure 507, Sec .04.)

I. Officers shall not:

Mute/Stop BWC DME Recordings where other members of the department are off-duty and a subject of the call in which the member was not acting under the color of his OR her authority.
Intentionally create DME recordings of themselves or other employees in areas where a reasonable expectation of privacy exists such as locker rooms, restrooms, etc.
Be assigned to a new call before the end of their current call, due to video recording restrictions. Officers will not request a dispatcher to “put a call on hold” to briefly make the scene of another call then return to the original call on the same recording.
Use the BWC for the clandestine recording of the voice or image of a member of the Department unless specifically authorized by the Office of the Chief.
Knowingly record undercover officers or confidential informants.
Use Departmentally-owned BWC equipment to record any type of personal activities.
Allow non-sworn personnel to view the DME video without permission from the Officer’s immediate supervisor.
Governmental employees who are directly involved in the investigation and/or prosecution of a criminal case related to the DME video or who work in Internal Affairs or IT Services supporting BWC are exempt from this provision.
Create recordings in patient care areas of any medical or mental health facilities UNLESS the recording is for official police business such as a criminal investigation, dying declaration, Horizontal Gaze Nystagmus (HGN) on injured drivers, or a specific call for police service, in compliance with Federal HIPAA regulations.
Record any court facility, legal proceeding
(i.e. deposition, city council meetings)
or, secured governmental facility. (Why?)
Upload or convert DME for use on any type of social media.
Connect BWC equipment to any unauthorized computers, phones, tablets or similar devices, either wirelessly or by use of a cable.

J. Officers shall notify a Supervisor immediately if he/she accidently records, or is aware of any of the listed incidents:

An Officer, SAPD employee, COSA employee, or authorized person in a designated private area
(i.e. restroom, locker room),
accessible to the Officer, shall notify a supervisor immediately of the recording;
An individual in a designated private area
(i.e. restroom, locker room)
where the video is non-evidentiary;
A Personal conversation among Officers or other employees, where the video is non-evidentiary
Supervisors shall make notifications as listed in this procedure section 12.E.

K. When responding to a call or initiating any activity in which an explosive device, suspected explosive device or Hazardous Materials Environment is present, the officer will, prior to exiting their vehicle, ensure that their in-car system is recording and remove their microphone and/or BWC and leave it in their vehicle.
The removing of the microphone and/or BWC and leaving it in the vehicle must be clearly documented in the officer’s report or CFS comment entry field.

Answer 459

A

.10 VIDEO COPIES/RECORDS REQUEST

A. Requests by non criminal justice agencies/individuals for DME will be handled under the Open Records Act in accordance with GM Procedure 323, Release of Police Records.

B. A copy (for internal use only) of DME file may be requested through the Video Evidence Custodian or their designee. If such copy is provided, the file shall not be further copied except by the Video Evidence Custodian or their designee.

C. Requests for DME from other criminal justice agencies are to be submitted in writing on agency letterhead and signed by the agency’s Chief Executive Officer to the Video Evidence Custodian or their designee. Request letters may be emailed PDCobanVideoRequest@SanAntonio.gov.

Requests for DME for prosecutorial purposes may be submitted directly to the Video Evidence Custodian or their designee.
Requests for DME from defense attorneys in county, district, or federal courts must be made through the appropriate prosecutor.

D. All copies of DME will be produced by the Video Evidence Custodian or their designee. A copy is defined as a reproduction of the primary recording of the event.

E. The cost for producing the DME will be determined by the Records Unit.

F. All other requests for DME should be referred to the Office of the Chief of Police.

G. An automated internal electronic data access log (chain-of-custody) will be generated and kept for every DME file produced via BWC to document the authenticity of the DME. Members shall be prepared to justify the reason for accessing/viewing DME.

H. The release of all digital evidence created/generated through the use of BWC will only be conducted under the statutes and limitations outlined in the Texas Occupation Code, Title 10. Occupations Related to Law Enforcement and Security, Chapter 1701. Law Enforcement Officers

.11 COMPLAINTS RECEIVED/VIDEO REVIEW

A. When a complaint is received alleging misconduct involving an Officer who is assigned a BWC, the following procedures shall be followed:

The Officer’s immediate supervisor or Internal Affairs Unit shall determine if any police originated DME exists.
The supervisor or Internal Affairs Unit shall view the video(s) of the incident in question and determine if there is any cause for the allegations in the complaint.
If no cause is determined, the supervisor or Internal Affairs Unit shall contact the complainant and advise them police originated DME exists for the incident and that no misconduct was observed.
The supervisor or Internal Affairs Unit shall advise the complaining party that they may make an open records request for copy/copies of the police originated DME.
The supervisor or Internal Affairs Unit shall proceed with their established protocols if misconduct is determined.

B. An Officer who is the respondent to a citizen or administrative complaint shall have the ability to review any police originated DME and/or any police originated DME audit trail of the incident in question.

C. The Internal Affairs Investigator may, for the purposes of an investigation or complaint, export or copy any and all police originated DME as needed.

Answer 460

A

.13 SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Supervisors shall ensure Officers are using the recording equipment according to established guidelines, policies, and procedures.

Supervisors, on a quarterly basis, will review at least one recording for all Officers under their command to ensure proper usage of recording equipment and adherence to established policy and procedures.
Supervisors will review any category of recordings EXCEPT ADMIN/DEFAULT.
Supervisors will take corrective action for any procedural violation they observe and document the findings on the proper form.
Supervisors will identify and document the video they reviewed on the appropriate departmental form. (As per micromanaging) All reviews shall be done no later than the 15th day after the quarter has ended. Supervisors shall provide an explanation in the “notes” section for any officer who did not have any videos reviewed during the quarter.
Reviewing timelines are as follows:
Quarter 1 = Jan 1st - Mar 31st = DL - Apr 15th
Quarter 2 = Apr 1st - Jun 30th = DL - Jul 15th
Quarter 3 = Jul 1st - Sep 30th = DL - Oct 15th
Quarter 4 = Oct 1st - Dec 31st = DL - Jan 15th

B. Supervisors shall record all incidents (i.e. use of force, Officer-involved accidents, and complaints against Officers) when requested or required to respond, in addition to those listed under Section .06D of this procedure.

C. Supervisors shall view the recordings of all use of force incidents, police vehicle crashes, and police pursuits prior to completing their evaluations.

D. Supervisors may view the recordings of their subordinates in the field at any time during the shift.

E. Minor infractions (non-criminal) discovered during the routine reviews of recorded material should be addressed by the reviewing supervisor, including retraining when appropriate. Disciplinary actions will be addressed in accordance with GM Proc. 303, Disciplinary Procedures.

F. Any supervisor made aware of damaged or malfunctioning recording equipment shall arrange for replacement of the body worn camera.
Supervisors shall replace the damaged/malfunctioning BWC in accordance with Section .09E of this procedure.

.14 REVIEWING DME

A. The viewing of videos is restricted for official use only. Videos may be viewed for the following purposes:

Criminal investigations;
Internal Affairs or complaint reviews in accordance with Section .11 of this procedure;
Pursuits;
Use of force reviews;
Open Record Requests (ORRs) in accordance with Section .10 of this procedure;
Officer involved crashes; or
Other – any purpose not listed in this procedure shall have prior documented approval by a supervisor.

B. Personnel requiring access to locked videos will send a request for access/viewing of the specific DME through their chain-of-command.

C. Personnel reviewing DME shall manually document name, badge number, and the purpose of their viewing in the “notes” field in the BWC application.

D. An Officer is entitled to access any police originated DME recording of an incident involving the Officer before the Officer is required to make a statement about the incident.

E. The making of unauthorized copies is prohibited.

.15 USE OF BWC OFF-DUTY

A. Officers working Off-Duty Employment or Outside Employment, with an approved off-duty employment permit as an extension of police services, shall utilize their BWCs in accordance with this procedure. However, Officers shall not utilize their BWC equipment while working NSA assignments.

B. Off-duty Officers involved in an incident, where the BWC is used to collect DME, shall notify dispatch for a CFS or Case number to be assigned, so that proper tagging of the DME can occur.

C. Officers requiring the use of BWC for off duty employment are allowed to utilize the BWC with video not yet uploaded.

D. Officers shall dock and upload their BWC on their next regularly scheduled tour of duty or within 72 hours of their last regular duty assignment (in an effort to prevent loss or tampering of evidence). An Officer may request to go beyond the 72 hour period with the approval of a Sergeant or above, as per Section .13C of this procedure.

E. Officers working Extended Off-Duty hours (i.e. Courtesy Officer or Rodeo, etc.) shall not work more than fourteen (14) consecutive days without docking their BWC for a “rest period” of twenty-four (24) hours to allow it to upload all video content, charge the battery and transmit / receive firmware updates and system maintenance.

E. If, while off-duty, the officer’s BWC is lost / damaged, the officer shall refer to Section .09E of this procedure to obtain a replacement.

.16 TRAINING VIDEOS

A. Officers/Supervisors aware of recorded files containing material that may be deemed beneficial as training material shall direct notification up the chain-of-command.

B. The Training Academy Commander may, with the approval of the Chief of Police, use such recording for training purposes, taking into consideration pending judicial and/or administrative investigations.

Answer 461

A

A. State Statutes

Alcohol Beverage Code -a. Chapter 101, Article 101.02 - Any Violation of Alcohol Beverage Code
Code of Criminal Procedure
a. Chapter 8, Article 8.04 - Dispersing Riot
b. Chapter 14

(1) Article 14.01 - Offense within View
(2) Article 14.02 - Within View of Magistrate
(3) Article 14.03(a)(1) - Suspicious Places and Circumstances;
(4) Article 14.03(a)(2) - Assault - Bodily Injury;
(5) Article 14.03(a)(3) - Violation of Protective Order - May Arrest;
(6) Article 14.03(a)(4) - Family Violence - Bodily Injury;
(7) Article 14.03(a)(5) - Interference with an emergency call;
(8) Article 14.03(a)(6) - Confession of a felony
(9) Article 14.03(b) - Violation of Protective Order - Shall Arrest
(10) Article 14.04 - Fleeing Felon

c. Chapter 18, Article 18.16 - Preventing Consequences of Theft
d. Chapter 51, Article 51.13 3. - Uniform Criminal Extradition Act

Health and Safety Code
a. Chapter 462, Section 462.041 4. - Chemically Dependent Person

Parks and Wildlife Code
a. Chapter 11, Article 11.0191 5. - Any Violation of Parks and Wildlife Code

Transportation Code
a. Chapter 543, Section 543.001 - Any Violation of Transportation Code

B. Rights of Officers

Where an arrest may be lawfully made without a warrant, an officer making an arrest is justified in adopting all the measures which he might adopt in cases of an arrest under a warrant, except the officer making the arrest without a warrant may not enter a residence to make the arrest unless.

a. A person who resides in the residence consents to the entry;
b. Exigent circumstances require the officer making the arrest enter the residence without the consent of a resident or without a warrant.

Answer 462

A

.06 SELECTIVE ENFORCEMENT

A. Under certain circumstances in misdemeanor cases, for good cause consistent with public interest, an officer may decide not to arrest even though probable cause exists.

Factors which the officer may properly consider in determining not to arrest are as follows.
1. The victim must positively state he is not interested in prosecuting the offender because:

a. He desires restitution only;
b. He is in a continuing relationship with the offender (i.e., employer-employee);
c. He is in a family-type relationship with the offender; or
d. The actual injury done to persons or damage done to property is minimal.

The offender can be released to the custody of another agency which specializes in handling the type of case in-which he is involved.
(i. e., Armed Forces Police).
The arrest would result in greater harm to the victim than would non-arrest.

B. When the offense is a felony and circumstances outlined in Subsection .06A of this procedure exist, the officer has the victim and the offender accompany him to Headquarters to contact the investigative unit normally assigned to investigate the particular offense.
(Note: If this occurs from 1900 - 0500 hours, the Night CID Unit is contacted.)
The investigative unit supervisor determines whether the offender is booked or released.
If the offender is released, SAPD Form #29, Complaint Waiver, is signed by the victim and approved by the investigative unit supervisor.

.07 DELAY IN MAKING AN ARREST

A. An officer may, in order to avoid the use of force, delay making an arrest until a more appropriate time if by so doing he does not jeopardize the eventual arrest.

B. An officer obtains a warrant if a misdemeanor is committed in his presence or view and he does not arrest at the time the offense is committed.

C. An officer obtains a warrant if a felony is committed in his presence or view and he does not arrest the offender as quickly as is reasonably possible under the circumstances.
Delay is reasonable when it avoids the necessity of overcoming resistance by the offender and when it is necessary for the safety of the officer or others.

D. An officer who has reasonable time and opportunity to obtain an arrest warrant should always do so in accordance with GM Procedure 503, Obtaining and Executing Arrest Warrants.

E. An officer obtains an arrest warrant when the offender is committing a continuing offense and the facts establishing probable cause are known to the officer over a period of time.
In all cases where an officer has knowledge of a continuing offense, a warrant of arrest is obtained.

F. An officer obtains a warrant for a felony or breach of the peace committed out of his presence or view whenever he has reasonable time and opportunity to procure one.
Such action is unnecessary when obtaining a warrant would result in:

The loss or destruction of evidence;
The escape of the offender; or
Bodily injury to the officer or others.

Answer 463

A

.09 WARRANTLESS SEARCH AUTHORITIES/GUIDELINES

A. Search by Consent

A consent search is a warrantless search and occurs when a person voluntarily allows a peace officer to search his body, premises, or belongings.
Consent is not voluntary if it is obtained by threat, force, or by falsely claiming the search can be conducted without consent.
Upon giving consent to search, the consenting person relinquishes any right to object to the search on constitutional grounds.
Officers, prior to conducting a search by consent, will complete and have the consenting person sign SAPD Form #2091-A, Consent for Search of Private Premises.

B. Frisk
1. An officer may frisk a person for weapons at any time without a warrant if the officer has reason to fear for his safety.
2. The officer must be able to explain why the person was frisked.
The officer need not point to any one thing that would justify the frisk, but should refer to several things, each of which, when taken alone may seem harmless, but when considered together by an officer who is trained or experienced in dealing with criminal suspects, raises a reasonable suspicion the person poses a threat to the officer’s safety.

C. Search of a Vehicle Under a Movable Vehicle Exception

A vehicle stopped on public property by a peace officer may be searched without a warrant if the peace officer has probable cause to believe the vehicle contains items subject to seizure.
The items subject to seizure must be items connected with criminal activity.
The officer’s determination of probable cause must be based on objective facts that could justify the issuance of a search warrant by a judge or magistrate.

D. Crime Scene Search

While at a crime scene, officers may seize any evidence, fruits of the crime, or contraband that falls within the scope of the Plain View Doctrine.
Officers may conduct a quick and limited “protective sweep” search for the safety of officers and persons in the area.
a. The protective sweep search may be made when an officer reasonably believes the area harbors an individual posing a danger to those at the scene.
b. Officers may conduct a limited frisk search of a person for weapons at a crime scene if there are articulable facts indicating a person may be armed.
c. Officers may also make a limited search of persons at a crime scene if there are articulable facts a person may be about to destroy evidence.
In the absence of the Plain View Doctrine or exigent circumstances, officers shall obtain a warrant to search a crime scene.
A search warrant is not necessary if a crime scene is located in a public place.

E. Exigent Circumstances - Where the Public Safety is Endangered

If exigent circumstances exist, the search warrant requirement is dispensed.
Under exigent circumstances officers may search persons, property, or containers they believe possess or contain some immediately dangerous weapon or instrument.
In situations where the public is in danger, officers may conduct a search of persons, places, or things without a warrant if there would not be a reasonable amount of time to obtain a warrant.

F. Inventory Searches

An inventory search of an impounded or seized vehicle may be conducted without a warrant in accordance with GM Procedure 607, Impounding Vehicles. The inventory search is an administrative procedure intended to inventory and secures the contents in a vehicle. The inventory procedure is intended to protect the following:
a. The owner’s property while it remains in police custody;
b. The police against claims or disputes over lost, stolen, or vandalized property; and
c. The police and others from potential danger.
If criminal evidence, contraband, or other property subject to seizure is discovered during the inventory of a vehicle, there must be a valid administrative reason for the inventory for the property to be admissible in court.

G. Other Search Situations Authorized by Constitutional Provisions

Any property or items listed in the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure, Article 18.02, that could be seized with a search warrant may be seized without a search warrant under the Plain View Doctrine if an officer:
a. Recognizes the property or items as seizable property or items;
b. Has a legal right to be in a position to view the property or items; and
c. Does not intrude on any person’s reasonable expectation of privacy to seize the property or items.
If the property or items are in a place the officer cannot legally enter without a warrant or consent, the property or items cannot be seized without a warrant unless there is danger of imminent destruction or removal of the property.

Answer 464

A

.04 WARRANTS ORIGINATING IN THE STATE

A. An officer may execute a misdemeanor or felony arrest warrant issued by any court within the State of Texas any place within the corporate limits of the City of San Antonio providing:

The place is a public place;
The officer is in a place he has a lawful right to be;
The place is the residence of the person named in a felony warrant or is where the officer has probable cause to believe the person is presently living;
The place is a private place or residence named in a search warrant, provided the officer has the search warrant in his possession; and
If the warrant is issued by a mayor of an incorporated city or town in a county other than Bexar County, the warrant is properly endorsed, according to Chapter 15, Article 15.07, of the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure.

B. Officers do not execute arrest warrants outside the corporate limits of the City of San Antonio, unless:
1. The officer is in “hot pursuit” of the person to be arrested, in which case he proceeds according to GM
Procedure 609, Emergency Vehicle Operation, or
2. The officer is acting in conjunction with an officer of the jurisdiction where the warrant is to be executed.

.05 OUT OF STATE WARRANTS

A. Officers may execute a felony arrest warrant issued by a court outside the State of Texas, providing the provisions of Section .04 of this procedure are followed.

B. Officers do not execute out of state misdemeanor arrest warrants.

.06 VERIFICATION OF WARRANT INFORMATION

A. Class B Misdemeanor through Felony Arrest Warrants

Even though a computer check reveals an outstanding class B misdemeanor through felony arrest warrant for a person and justifies the detention of the person, officers must obtain certain information to verify the warrant is active.
The following information is required prior to booking persons arrested for a class B misdemeanor through felony arrest warrant:
a. The name, date of birth, and other identifiers of the person named in the warrant;
b. The warrant number;
c. The offense charged;
d. The name of the court issuing the warrant; and
e. The fingerprint classification of the person named in the warrant, if the warrant is issued by a court outside of Bexar County.

2.  Should there be probable cause to believe there is an outstanding class B misdemeanor through felony parole violation warrant, remand without bond warrant, or a bond increase, and there are no additional charges, the person detained for verification of the warrant is taken to the Bexar County Jail and held until the warrant is confirmed active, an abstract of the warrant is obtained, and the person is identified as the same person named in the warrant. 
If the warrant is verified the arrestee is released into the custody of the Bexar County Jail.

3.  Should there be probable cause to believe there is an outstanding class B misdemeanor through felony parole violation warrant, remand without bond warrant, or a bond increase, and there are new additional charges, or the warrant is a post indictment warrant, the person detained for verification of the warrant is taken to the Bexar County Identification Section at the Magistrates Office and held until the warrant is confirmed active, an abstract of the warrant is obtained, and the person is identified as the same person named in the warrant. 
If the warrant is verified, the arrestee is released into the custody of the Magistrates Office.

Should a person who has been detained and transported to the Bexar County Jail or City Magistrates office for verification of a class B misdemeanor through felony arrest warrant be found not wanted on any charge, he is then transported:

a. To the scene of initial contact; or
b. If more practical, to another location of his choosing with approval of the officer’s supervisor.

B.   Class C Misdemeanor Arrest Warrants
1.   Even though a computer check reveals an outstanding class C misdemeanor arrest warrant for a person and justifies the detention of the person, officers must obtain certain information to verify the warrant is active. 
The following information is required prior to booking persons arrested for a class C misdemeanor arrest warrant.

a. The officer can verify the warrant is active by sending a message in Visinet Mobile to “MWAR.”

The message must contain:

  1.   The name, date of birth, and other identifiers of the person named in the warrant, and 2. The warrant number (traffic citation number or misdemeanor citation number).

If officers do not receive a response within 5 to 10 minutes, the officer or the Communication Unit may call 207-7718 to verify the warrant.

2.   Should there be probable cause to believe there is an outstanding class C misdemeanor arrest warrant; the person detained for verification of the warrant is held at the place of contact until the warrant is confirmed active either by MDT message from the issuing agency or verbally by the Communications Unit dispatcher. 
If the class C misdemeanor arrest warrant is confirmed, the person is then returned to the City of San Antonio Detention Center.

a. If the person who has been detained for verification of a class C misdemeanor arrest warrant is found not to be wanted on any charge, he is released.
b. After thirty (30) minutes, if verification of the arrest warrant has not been confirmed, the person is released at the place of contact, unless extenuating circumstances exist to detain the person longer.

c. If the person who has been detained shows to have active JP warrants only, the officer will contact the respective Justice of the Peace’s office for notification, between the hours of 0800 – 1700.
The office notified will determine if a Constable will be dispatched.
There is no expectation that SAPD officers will transport persons active solely on Justice of the Peace Warrants.
JP 1 (210) 335-2805; JP 2 (210) 335-4850
JP 3 (210) 335-4750; JP 4 (210) 335-4950

Answer 465

A

.09 PLANNED “EFFECTIVE cunt SERVICE” RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Warrant Execution Supervisor:

Assigns a “Verification Officer” when applicable in accordance with this procedure;
Reviews and approves all arrest warrants and Form GR.1000-04 Tactical Operations Plan (TOP) prior to execution of the arrest warrant.
Ensures location has been properly identified, adequate manpower and equipment are available, and all provisions of this procedure are being followed for the proper and safe execution of the warrant;
Ensures adequate steps are taken to provide for the safety and security of the officers involved, items being sought, and any persons who may be at the scene of the execution of the warrant;
Ensure uniformed officer(s) are present at the location named in the arrest warrant;
SHALL accompany officers in the “service” of the warrant; and
Ensures the dispatcher is notified before and after the execution of the warrant.

B. Officer in charge:

Conducts warrant research in accordance with Form GR.1000-04 Tactical Operations Plan (TOP)
Physically views the location to be searched in order that a precise address and description can be obtained, or ensures the warrant verification officer involved with the warrant physically views the location;
Completes Form GR.1000-04 Tactical Operations Plan (TOP) and submits it and all documentation to the warrant execution supervisor for evaluation prior to “service” of the arrest warrant;
The Warrant Execution Supervisor, the Verification Officer and the Officer-in-Charge SHALL ensure that the proper location is identified where the Warrant is to be “SERVED” by driving by the location TOGETHER, or by other means physically viewing the location together where all THREE view the location prior to “SERVING” the warrant
Assigns officers to the “Warrant Service Team,” “Security Team,” and “Search Team”;
Ensures all officers involved are aware of their assigned duties and responsibilities;
In cases where information from a confidential informant is used to identify a location where an arrest or search warrant is to be served, the Officer in Charge SHALL take articulable steps (such as what you fuck) to attempt to verify the information provided. The Officer in Charge SHALL articulate (such monstrous un-educated words we use in a leftist policy that simply mean “state” *someone wants to sound smart, be we know a stupid leftist cunt wrote this) steps taken to verify the information received from the confidential informant with the Warrant Execution Supervisor (are you sure you don’t want to change that name to sound more LEFTIST?).
The STEPS taken to verify the information MUST at least include:
1) COMPUTER RESEARCH; and
2) Surveillance
If the warrant execution supervisor will not be present when the arrest warrant is served, he notifies that Supervisor before and after serving the warrant; and
The duties of the Officer-in-Charge do not supersede those of the Warrant Execution Supervisor, when that Supervisor is present.

C. Verification Officer:

When planning to “serve” an arrest warrant, a single officer (other than the Officer-in-Charge) will be assigned by the Warrant Execution Supervisor as the Verification Officer.
The Verification Officer is responsible for positively identifying the correct location where the warrant will be executed and for directing the entry team to the correct location.
The Verification Officer’s duty is to insure the location is properly named and described in the Search Warrant and to insure (its “ensure”, the cunt that wrote this is using the wrong word) the warrant is served at the named location.

Ensure = make certain 
Insure = to guarantee against loss or harm

The name of the Verification Officer will be listed on Form GR.1000-04 Tactical Operations Plan (TOP)
Additionally the Verification Officer will document the steps taken and information used to accomplish Warrant Verification on the form.
The Verification Officer will accompany the Warrant Service team or an officer assigned to the Warrant Service team to positively identify and point out the correct location described in the arrest warrant.
The verification officer will work with the officer in charge to review the information on the arrest or search warrant and ENSURE that the location to be searched is accurate by INDEPENDENTLY verifying the steps taken by the officer in charge to identify the location.

I WANT TO PUNCH THE CUNT THAT WROTE THIS IN THE FACE. ITS WORSE THAN PROCEDURE 501

Answer 466

A

.11 CRIME VICTIM NOTIFICATION PROGRAM

A. Officers arresting by warrant any person wanted for offenses listed below shall route a copy of the incident report to the applicable follow-up investigative unit:

Any crime resulting in death or serious bodily injury;
Any crime where death, serious bodily injury or retaliation in the future is threatened;
Domestic Violence;
Sexual Assault; and
Stalking.

B. For complete information on the VINE program, refer to GM Procedure 616, Crime Victim Notification Program.

.12 TRAINING

A. When planning the effective service of “high risk” arrest warrant , prior to assignment as warrant service team, security team or arrest team member, the Officer, Detective and Supervisor will be provided training for the specific duties assigned while executing the arrest warrant.
The training will be documented and will include, at a minimum, the following courses of instruction:

Intelligence gathering;
Building entries;
Room clearing;
Weapons handling;
Shield handling techniques; and
Evidence handling procedures.

B. At a minimum, training shall be conducted on a quarterly basis to maintain proficiency in the above listed skills.

C. The Unit Director will be responsible for maintaining a record of all training.

Answer 467

A

.03 DECONFLICTION
A. The South Texas HIDTA Investigative Support Center (managed by SAPD) has been designated as the hub for de- confliction services by the South Texas HIDTA Executive Board. As such, it is the single point of contact for the entire South Texas Region.
B. Plainclothes officers will deconflict through HIDTA on Arrest and Search Warrants.
1. Prior to executing a planned felony arrest or search warrant, the Officer-In-Charge will contact the South Texas HIDTA Investigative Support Center at 207-2495 and provide all necessary information for the de-confliction process to take place.
a. Information to be provided will include:
(1) a physical address,
(2) block number or intersection.
b. Information on the suspect named in the arrest warrant will include:
(1) first and last name,
(2) DOB,
(3) race/sex,
(4) and when available, secondary identifiers such as a social security number, driver’s license number, FBI number, etc.
2. This information shall be provided as soon as available, practical, and possible, with as much forewarning as possible.
3. A minimum two (2) hour advanced notice to the Deconfliction Center is required for optimum conflict resolution.

Answer 468

A

.07 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Warrant Execution Supervisors:

Assigns a “Verification Officer” when applicable in accordance with this procedure;
Reviews and approves all search warrants, and Form GR.1000-04 Tactical Operations Plan, prior to execution of the search warrant;
Ensures location has been properly identified, adequate manpower and equipment are available, and all provisions of this procedure are being followed for the proper and safe execution of the warrant;
Ensures adequate steps are taken to provide for the safety and security of the officers involved, items being sought, and any persons who may be at the scene of the execution of the warrant;
Ensures uniformed officer(s) are present at the location named in the search warrant;
Shall accompany officers in the execution of the warrant; and
Ensures the dispatcher is notified before and after the execution of the warrant.

B. Officer-in-Charge:
1. Conducts warrant research in accordance with Form GR.1000-04 TOP;
2. Physically views the location to be searched in order that a precise address and description can be obtained, or ensures the warrant verification officer involved with the warrant physically views the location;
3. Completes Form GR.1000-04 TOP and submits it and all documentation to the Warrant Execution Supervisor for evaluation prior to execution of the search warrant;
4. Assigns officers to the “Entry Team,” “Security Team,” and “Search Team”;
5. Ensures all officers involved are aware of their assigned duties and responsibilities;
6. Ensures the warrant is carried to the scene and is exhibited to the person, if any, in charge of the premises;
7. In cases where information from a confidential informant is used to identify a location where a search warrant is to be executed, the Officer-in-Charge shall take articulable steps to attempt to verify the information provided.
The Officer-in-Charge shall articulate steps taken to verify the information received from the confidential informant with the Warrant Execution Supervisor.
The Steps taken to verify the information must at least include:

(1) Computer Research; and
(2) Surveillance

The duties of the Officer-in-Charge do not supersede those of the Warrant Execution Supervisor, when that Supervisor is present.

C. Verification Officer

When planning to effectively serve a search warrant, a single officer (other than the Officer-in-Charge) will be assigned by the Warrant Execution Supervisor as the Verification Officer.
The Verification Officer is responsible for positively identifying the correct location where the warrant will be served and for directing the entry team to the correct location.
The Verification Officer’s duty is to insure the location is properly named and described in the Search Warrant and to insure the warrant is served at the named location.
Verification may be accomplished through any combination of the following:
a. Information the member personally obtains from the Confidential Informant (CI);
b. Personal observations and investigative lead;
c. Computer research including SAPD files, HIDTA Intel., CPS, Bexar Appraisal District, photos of location; d. Close covert surveillance; door fliers, posing as delivery or service employee;
e. Particular caution should be used when verifying locations that are in multiple dwelling structures.
The name of the Verification Officer will be listed on the Form GR.1000-04 TOP.
Additionally, the verification officer will document the steps taken and information used to accomplish warrant verification on the form.
The Verification Officer will accompany the entry team, or an officer assigned to the entry team to positively identify and point out the correct location described in the search warrant.
It is not necessary for the Verification Officer to accompany the entry team into the warrant location when the entry is made.
The Verification Officer will work with the Officer-in-Charge to review the information on the search warrant and ensure that the location to be searched is accurate by independently verifying the steps taken by the Officer-in- Charge to identify the location.

Answer 469

A

.10 ARRESTS DURING SEARCH

A. In cases of combined warrants commanding both arrest and search or where officers suspect there may be arrest warrants outstanding, they may require persons on the premises to identify themselves in order to determine whether any of those persons are named in the arrest warrant.
Persons on the premises may be required to identify themselves if they are witnesses to the search or arrest.

B. Should any contraband or other item be found during the search, the presence of which yields probable cause to believe an offense has been committed, the officers may arrest any or all of those persons on the premises for whom probable cause to arrest exists.

C. Should any person resist or interfere with the lawful actions of the officers during the execution of the search warrant, that person may be arrested and charged with the offense committed.

D. There is no requirement in the law that persons on the premises at the time of the search identify themselves unless there is reasonable suspicion of some involvement in criminal activity or the person is a witness.

E. Arrests are made in accordance with GM Procedure 601, Prisoners.

.11 TRAINING

A.  When executing a planned “high risk” forced entry, prior to assignment as an entry team, security team or search team member, the officer, detective and supervisor will be provided training for the specific duties assigned while executing the search warrant. 
The training will be documented and will include, at a minimum, the following courses of instruction:
1.   Intelligence gathering;
2.   Building entries;
3.   Room clearing;
4.   Weapons handling;
5.   Shield handling techniques; and
6.   Evidence handling procedures.

B. At a minimum, training shall be conducted on a quarterly basis to maintain proficiency in the above listed skills.

C. The Unit Director will be responsible for maintaining a record of all training.

Answer 470

A

.04 CRITERIAFORLEGALASSETSEIZURE
A. Officers observing or detecting the presence of items specified in Section .03 of this procedure seize the property
according to law. Seizures of personal property occur in any place that the officer has a right to be.
B. Seizure of any property subject to forfeiture may occur under the authority of a search warrant issued pursuant to Chapter 18.02 (12) of the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure.
C. Seizure of any property subject to forfeiture may be made without a warrant if:
1. The person in charge of the property consents;
2. The seizure is incident to a search to which the person in charge of the property consents; or
3. The seizure is incident to a lawful arrest or search.
D. Officers request supervisory assistance in all cases of legal asset seizure.

E. The Legal Asset Seizure Detail is notified through the Communication unit before officers leave the scene in all potential seizure cases with the exception of vehicles being impounded as criminal instruments, and cash money which is placed in the Property Room as designated by GM Procedure 606, Impounding Property.
.05 ACTOFLEGALASSETSEIZURE
A. Officers document probable cause for determining the status of property before the actual seizure of property.
B. Officers issue receipts to the person(s) previously in control of the property for any property seized under this procedure.
C. Seized property is protected and safeguarded by the seizing officer while under the officer’s control.
D. Seized property, to include vehicles, is impounded as evidence, and transported to a facility for storage as designated
by GM Procedures 606, Impounding Property or 607, Impounding Vehicles.
1. Officers place a hold on the towing service record (invoice) for Legal Asset Seizure Detail in the case of vehicle
seizures.
2. After evaluation of a case involving a vehicle, the Legal Asset Seizure Detail:
a. Prepares SAPD Form #110 - VH, Vehicle Detainer For Physical Evidence, for long-term impoundment pending litigation and coordinates with Vehicle Storage Unit personnel for the transfer of the vehicle from their control area to a separate designated area for this purpose: or
b. Releases the hold on the vehicle.
3. After evaluation of a case involving property other than vehicles, the Legal Asset Seizure Detail:
a. Transfers the property seized to a designated storage facility assigned to the Detail;
b. Weapons are stored in the Property Room with a hold placed for the proper follow up unit; or
c. Removes the hold for seizure from the property.
E. Officers direct copies of all reports pertaining to an asset seizure made under Chapter 59 of the Code of Criminal Procedure to the Legal Asset Seizure Detail in order that immediate steps may be taken to secure the property from being reclaimed by the owner.
F. Officers attempt to determine ownership of property at the time of seizure and include this information in reports submitted.
G. The ignition and trunk keys to seized vehicles are also seized and placed into the Property Room as evidence. All personal property must be removed from vehicles by the seizing officer as designated by GM Procedure 607, Impounding Vehicles.
.06 CUSTODY OF SEIZED PROPERTY
A. The Legal Asset Seizure Detail Supervisor maintains possession of all seized money and other personal property
while subject to the courts’ jurisdiction.
1. Seized personal property, including money, is placed in the Property Room as evidence with a hold for the Legal Asset Seizure Detail; and
2. Seized personal property, including money, remains in the San Antonio Police Department Property Room until it is released to the Legal Asset Seizure Detail pending litigation or is released by the Legal Asset Seizure Detail.
3. Property seized and released to the Legal Asset Seizure Detail pending litigation is stored and maintained in a designated and secured storage area for that purpose (except money).
4. Seized money, pending litigation and release to the Legal Asset Seizure Detail, is deposited into an interest bearing account designated for that purpose by the Bexar County District Attorney’s Office.
B. A separate designated storage area for seized vehicles is utilized until disposition is determined by the court. Vehicles are maintained as evidence apart from other impounded vehicles, and not released without the authorization of the Legal Asset Seizure Detail; and
1. Court orders commanding the release or other disposition of seized motor vehicles are first routed through the Legal Asset Seizure Detail.
2. The Legal Asset Seizure Detail notifies Vehicle Storage Unit personnel of any legitimate court orders or case status change involving the release of vehicles in order that these particular vehicles are returned to the control of the Vehicle Storage Unit personnel for release purposes.
C. Real property seized through the efforts of members of the Police Department remains in the custody of the Legal Asset Seizure Detail while subject to the courts’ jurisdiction.
D. Members of the Legal Asset Seizure Detail prepare the necessary seizure affidavits in order to secure judgment and forfeiture of seized property under Chapter 59 of the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure.
E. Officers ensure that the completed and signed affidavit is notarized and returned to the Legal Asset Seizure Detail without delay.
.07 DISPOSITION OF FORFEITED PROPERTY
A. A judicial ruling on the disposition of seized assets determines whether or not an actual forfeiture of the property takes
place.
B. Should the title to personal or real property be granted to the Department as the result of adjudication, the Legal Asset Seizure Detail is given notification in order that the disposition of property is properly coordinated.
C. The Legal Asset Seizure Detail prepares enabling documentation to allow the City of San Antonio to obtain titles to vehicles distributed under this procedure.
D. The Chief of Police determines whether property awarded under this procedure is:
1. Sold at public auction;
2. Converted for use by the Department for a law enforcement purpose; or
3. Destroyed.
E. In the case of property disposed of at public auction, the property is sold in a manner consistent with existing administrative policies of the Finance Department and the Purchasing and General Services Department of the City of San Antonio.
F. The law enforcement use of property awarded under this procedure is designated by the Chief of Police.
G. Property previously seized and forfeited to the City of San Antonio, which is no longer serviceable and considered surplus by the Department, is disposed of according to administrative policy of the Finance Department and the Purchasing and General Services Department of the City of San Antonio and within the guidelines for disposition of forfeited property as outlined in Chapter 59 of the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure.

Answer 471

A

.04 UNIFORM APPEARANCE
A. Members will wear neat and clean uniforms at all times. Uniforms will not have the appearance of being faded or have visible patches where repairs were made.
B. Uniforms or accessories requiring repair are not worn, unless the repair is inconspicuous.
C. Uniform Shirt
1. The shirt is sized to present a neat appearance.
2. All buttons on the shirt, except the collar button, must be buttoned at all times.
3. Shirt sleeves are not rolled up or turned under.
4. The mock turtleneck shirt, if worn, is worn only under the long sleeve regulation uniform shirt.
5. Undergarments exposed at the neck shall be dark navy blue or black in color.
D. Uniform Trousers/Shorts
1. Trousers are tailored and sized to present a neat appearance.
2. Trousers are no shorter than one (1) inch above the juncture of the heel-sole and the upper part of the shoe or boot. They do not extend lower than this same juncture.
3. When boots are worn with trousers, the trousers are worn outside the boot tops.
4. Officers assigned to motorcycle duty shall have the trousers tailored so the trouser legs fit inside the motorcycle boots.
5. Compression shorts worn with the bicycle uniform shall correspond in color to the bicycle shorts and shall not extend below the bottom of the uniform bicycle shorts.
6. During the period of April 1st through September 30th, with the approval of the Division Commander, officers may wear the authorized uniform shorts.
E. Uniform Headgear
1. All uniform headgear is worn “straight-away.” Headgear is not cocked forward, sideways, or backward on the head.
2. Officers assigned to motorcycle or bicycle duties, or officers authorized to wear the bicycle patrol duty uniform must wear the appropriate helmet securely fastened with a chinstrap.
3. Officers wearing the authorized uniform shorts choosing to wear headgear, wear only the authorized ball cap.
F. Uniform Leather Footwear and Accessories
1. Leather footwear and accessories worn by uniformed officers shall be highly polished.
2. When low quarter style shoes are worn with the regulation trousers, dark navy blue or plain black socks shall be worn.
3. Officers wearing the bicycle patrol duty uniform or the approved regulation shorts shall wear plain, ankle high white, dark navy blue, or black socks.
G. Uniform Ties
1. Captains and above shall wear a regulation tie with the long sleeve authorized uniform shirt for official functions, meetings with outside agencies or departments, or as directed by the Chief. If not directed or participating in the aforementioned functions, the wearing of the tie with the long sleeve authorized uniform shirt is optional.
2. The wearing of a tie with a long sleeve uniform shirt is optional for Lieutenants and below.

Answer 472

A

.06 UNIFORM SPECIFICATIONS (See Uniforms and Dress Codes Appendix)

.07 BODY ARMOR - ISSUANCE AND REPLACEMENT
A. All officers, regardless of the type of clothes worn, are encouraged to wear issued body armor.
B. Probationary Police Officers are issued body armor in accordance with the current Collective Bargaining Agreement.
C. Officers may request the issuance or replacement of Department-issued body armor, provided:
1. They have never been issued body armor;
2. Their current body armor is damaged; or
3. Their current body armor is five (5) years old or older.
D. Officers requesting new body armor shall submit a written report, along with their current issue of body armor, if applicable, to their Section and Division Commanders for inspection and written approval to order new body armor.
E. Upon receipt of written approval by the Section and Division Commanders, officers shall take the approved report to the Department armorer. The armorer shall:
1. Verify the date of issuance of the officer’s current body armor, if age is the reason for requesting new body armor;
2. Instruct the officer where to go to be fitted for new body armor; and
3. Notify the officer when the new body armor has been delivered.
F. Officers will return old issued body armor to the Armory and Supply Office when picking up new body armor.
G. Optional External Body Armor Carrier is composed of uniform material that can be worn directly over a uniform or approved polo style shirt.
1. The optional polo style shirt is not approved to wear without the body armor carrier in place. These uniform items will not be issued by the department and must be purchased by the officer.
2. Department patches and rank insignia on the polo style shirts are mandatory; however, the name and badge will not be authorized on the polo. The name and badge will be displayed on the body armor carrier.
H. Optional Rifle Rated External Body Armor Carrier is of similar color to that of the duty uniform and is to be worn directly over the approved uniform.
1. Rifle Rated External Body Armor Carrier is authorized for wear at officer discretion when the officer is or may be confronting suspects that are armed with rifles, shotguns or active shooter events.
2. The wearing of rifle rated plate carriers shall be limited and are not to be worn except as described above.
3. The Rifle Rated External Body Armor shall be marked in the following fashion.
Front: Agency Identification Patch (Minimum 3 inch) Badge Patch
Name Tab (Minimum 3/8 inch lettering) Back “POLICE” Patch (Minimum 3 inch)

.08 REIMBURSEMENTS FOR DAMAGED, DESTROYED, OR LOST UNIFORM OR ACCESSORY ITEMS
A. The Department reimburses officers for uniforms or accessories destroyed, damaged, or lost in the line of duty in
accordance with the current Collective Bargaining Agreement (CBA).
B. Officers assigned to plainclothes duty may be reimbursed for repairs or replacement of clothing damaged in line of duty incidents.
C. Officers requesting reimbursement for destroyed, damaged or lost uniforms, accessories, or plainclothes must:
1. Submit a request for reimbursement on an Incident Report Form 65, Interoffice Memo together with a copy of the report on the police incident where the item was destroyed, damaged, or lost to his Division Commander through his chain of command. Damaged items shall be submitted along with reports to the Division Commander.
2. The request must be made within thirty (30) days from the date of the incident or from the date the officer returns to duty, if the officer is on injury leave.
D. The Division Commander, upon inspection of the damaged item, determines the dollar amount to be reimbursed or the replacement cost of a lost item in accordance with the schedule on file in the Accounting and Personnel Office. If any reimbursement is warranted, the Division Commander has a request for payment form or petty cash voucher, depending on the amount of reimbursement, prepared and signed.
E. If reimbursement is approved by the Division Commander, the officer, after replacing the destroyed, damaged, or lost item, submits the signed request for payment form or petty cash voucher with the receipt of purchase to the Accounting and Personnel Office for reimbursement.
.09 DRESS CODES FOR OFFICERS IN PLAINCLOTHES ASSIGNMENTS AND CIVILIAN MEMBERS
A. Members may wear a United States Flag Pin with business apparel or casual apparel. The United States Flag Pin will be worn on the left lapel of the coat or jacket. The United States Flag Pin will be professionally displayed, will not be larger than 1” X 1” in size, and will not include any other images, opinions, depictions, statements, or representations.
B. Business/Relaxed Dress Code
1. Members, both sworn and non-sworn, performing duties such as investigative assignments and duties involving any contact with the general public shall report for duty in conservative business/relaxed apparel appropriate to an office setting. (Please reference GM Procedure 311, Court Appearances for court dress requirements)
2. Business/relaxed apparel for male members shall consist of the following:
a. Business suit, sport coat and slacks, or the approved long/short sleeve shirts/pullovers with a collar (please reference Appendix).
b. Long or short sleeve dress shirt with a tie.
c. Belts without metal studs, excessive stitching, or other adornments. Belt buckles shall be in proportion with the width of the belt.
d. Footwear will be polished dress shoes or boots worn with socks. Dress boots shall not have metal tips or stitching of an unusual design on the toe.
e. Hats without ornamental accessories may be worn.
3. Business/relaxed apparel for female members shall consist of the following:
a. Dresses, suits, skirts, or tailored loose fitting slacks with dress shirts or blouses or the approved long/short sleeve shirts/pullovers with a collar (please reference Appendix). Dresses and skirts will be no shorter than two (2) inches above the knee.
b. Footwear will be dress heels, flats, or boots. Dress boots shall not have metal tips or excessive stitching on the toe.
C. Casual Dress Code
1. Members, sworn and non-sworn, assigned to office duties that do not involve any contact with the general public, may report for duty in casual apparel instead of business/relaxed apparel, to include maternity wear (as appropriate).
2. Casual apparel for male members shall consist of the following:
a. Casual slacks or jeans (with the Division Commander’s approval); and
b. Long or short sleeve shirts/pullovers with a collar.
3. Casual apparel for female members shall consist of the following:
a. Casual dresses, skirts, slacks, or jeans (with Division Commander approval); and
b. Long or short sleeve shirts, blouses, or pullovers with a collar.
D. Field Dress Code
1. Field apparel, determined by Unit Directors, may consist of any and all clothing necessary to perform any of the below listed job functions.
2. Members assigned to field duties are authorized to wear field apparel. Field duties include, but are not limited to, duties in any of the following job functions:
a. Maintenance or inspection of equipment;
b. Surveillance;
c. Execution of arrest or search warrants;
d. Duties involving strong physical exertion or activities; and
e. Any undercover assignment.
4. Raid Jackets and Raid Body Armor shall be marked as follows:
Front: Agency Identification Patch (Minimum 3 inch) Badge Patch
Name Tab (Minimum 3/8 inch lettering) Back “POLICE” Patch (Minimum 3 inch)

Answer 473

A

.12 RELIGIOUS EXEMPTIONS
A. Members who believe that for religious reasons they should be allowed to deviate from policy may request authorization from the Chief of Police, or his/her designee, for exemptions to the SAPD uniforms and dress codes procedure in order to wear articles of faith while on-duty or observe religious grooming customs.
1. Such request shall be in writing and shall include the employee’s name, present assignment, and the reason why an accommodation is being requested.

B. The Chief of Police, or his/her designee, shall make a determination regarding all requests for religious exemptions to SAPD’s uniforms and dress codes procedure on a case-by-case basis, taking into account any potential safety issues and/or operational concerns that the article(s) of faith or religious grooming custom may present to the member or to the public.
C. If the employee is not satisfied with the ruling by the Chief of Police or his/her designee, the employee may request a meeting with the Chief of Police or his/her designee to personally present his/her reason for the request for accommodation or objections to the specific nature of the approval or denial.
D. Members who are approved to wear an article of faith in addition to or in place of the uniform required by SAPD procedure shall bear all costs associated with procuring and maintaining their article of faith.
E. Articles of faith that are approved by the Chief of Police are outlined in Attachment A of this order.

Answer 474

A

.05 REQUIREMENT TO DISPLAY HL

A. If a license holder is carrying a handgun on or about the license holder’s person when an officer demands that the license holder display identification, (person is under lawful arrest, detention, or a witness to a crime) the license holder shall display both the license holder’s driver’s license or identification certificate issued by the department and the license holder’s handgun license.

B. Officers shall not demand that a person show a handgun license simply based on the fact that they are carrying a handgun.

C. Officers cannot compel a person to identify themselves unless the person is under lawful arrest, detention, or witness to a crime. However, nothing in the law prevents an officer from inquiring about a person being a HL holder.

D. Failure to display one’s handgun license does not constitute any offense (Texas statutes list NO offense).

E. Officers may access the Texas Criminal Information Center (TCIC) to identify HL holders.

.06 CARRYING OF A HANDGUN
A. Any citizen open carrying a handgun must have the weapon secured in either a belt holster or shoulder holster.

B. Off-duty officers choosing to open carry must do so in accordance with GM Proc. 309 Weapons.

.07 LOCATIONS WHERE STATE LAW PROHIBITS THE CARRYING OF HANDGUNS

A. Penal Code Chapter 46, Weapons, prohibits a person from carrying prohibited weapons, including a handgun, onto any of the following locations:

Schools or school buses;
Polling places;
Government courts or court offices;
Racetrack premises; and
Secured airport areas.

B. In addition to the above restriction, handgun license holders are prohibited from carrying a handgun, concealed or not, into any of the following locations or under any of the following conditions:

Prohibited Locations:
a. On the premises of business licensed for the sale of alcohol, if the business derives fifty-one percent (51%) or more of its revenue from the sale of alcohol for on-premise consumption;
b. On premises where a high school, collegiate, or professional sporting or interscholastic event is taking place, unless the license holder is a participant in the event and a handgun is used in the event;
c. On the premises of a correctional facility;
Handguns are prohibited on the following premises, provided the location has posted proper signage (PC §30.06 and §30.07):
a. On the premises of a hospital or nursing home licensed under the Health and Safety Code, unless the license holder has written authorization from the hospital or nursing home management;
b. In an amusement park;
c. On the premises of a church, synagogue, or other established place of religious worship; or
d. At any meeting of a governmental entity, subject to the Texas Open Meetings Act.
Prohibited Conditions:
a. If the license holder is intoxicated.

C. Institutions of higher learning, public or private, may not prohibit persons visiting or attending the institution from storing a legal handgun or ammunition in their locked vehicle while parked on campus.

D. Government facilities may prohibit persons carrying a handgun from entering the non-public/private areas of the facility.

Answer 475

A

.11 REPORT RESPONSIBILITY

A. An officer responding to any incident involving the carrying of a handgun by a license holder shall document the incident in an offense or incident report.
The report shall contain, as a minimum, the following information:

Any violation committed by the license holder;
Actions taken by the officer;
The name of the license holder;
The handgun license number; and
The model and serial number of the license holder’s handgun.

B. In order for the Texas Department of Public Safety to suspend the handgun license of a license holder in violation of any section of Chapter 46, Weapons, of the Penal Code, an officer shall also complete an approved DPS Affidavit for Revocation of Handgun License.

C. Officers shall forward copies of all reports involving incidents related to the carrying of handguns by license holders and the original DPS Affidavit for Revocation of Handgun License to the Texas Department of Public Safety.

Officers are reminded that the DPS Affidavit for Revocation of Handgun License can be found in the forms library.
The DPS Affidavit for Revocation of Handgun License stipulates that the affidavit, along with all attachments, must be sent to the Texas Department of Public Safety within 5 days after the affidavit is prepared

Answer 476

A

.05 ELECTRONIC CONTROL DEVICE (ECD):
A. When the probes make contact with the suspect, the ECD will transmit electrical pulses along the wires and into the
suspect.
1. The pulses can penetrate clothing up to two inches in thickness.
2. The pulses will temporarily override the sensory nervous system and motor nervous system control over the skeletal muscles, resulting in uncontrollable muscle contractions, temporarily disabling the individual.
B. The ECD is pre-programmed to deliver a five-second electrical burst.
1. During an actual deployment, it is recommended the full five-second cycle be used for maximum effectiveness of the weapon.
2. The officer can shorten this automatic five-second cycle by simply engaging the safety, thereby turning off the weapon.
C. Each ECD includes a data port located on the unit. Every time the ECD is utilized, specific information will be recorded to assist in accurate reporting of ECD usage.
.06 ECD TRAINING
A. Officers must be selected by the Chief of Police or designee to receive ECD training.
B. Officers must successfully complete a training course and be certified in the use of ECDs to be authorized to carry and use an ECD as an intermediate weapon. Additionally, only officers who have also successfully completed a forty (40) hour Crisis Intervention Training course will receive authorization to carry an ECD.
C. Annually, ECD operators will be required to attend a Department approved ECD recertification course.
1. If an officer fails the written or practical exam, they shall participate in remedial training, which will include additional information and practical training prior to recertification to carry the ECD.
2. If the officer fails any portion of the remedial training, they will not be authorized to carry an ECD.
3. The officer who has failed remedial training may request authorization to carry an ECD after six (6) months and, if approved, must complete the entire block of ECD training.
.07 ECD EQUIPMENT ISSUE
A. Officers shall only carry and use department-issued ECDs.
B. Officers who carry the ECD may choose not to carry a second intermediate weapon.
C. Officers have the option of wearing the holster in front of the firearm for a support side cross-draw, or on the opposite hip of the duty firearm to draw the ECD only with the support hand. The strong hand cross-draw carry still applies.
D. An ECD and two (2) cartridges will be issued to authorized officers.
E. The serial number of the ECD and the serial number of each cartridge will be documented at the time of issue/replacement of the equipment.
F. Cartridges will not be stored except in the designated issue point, a Department locker, or the armory.
G. After each deployment, a supervisor will be notified for a replacement cartridge. Prior to issuance of a new cartridge, a report documenting the deployment will be provided to the supervisor.

Answer 477

A

K. Prior to deployment of the ECD, the ECD operator should attempt to obtain a cover officer capable of providing deadly force if needed. The cover officer will be armed with a department-approved firearm appropriate to the situation. Should a subject take control of an officers ECD, the subject possess the capability to discharge the weapon and render the officer helpless
1. The cover officer will provide deadly force if needed for the ECD operator.
2. Officers should consider cover and distance at all times.
3. Officers should consider bystanders at all times.
L. Prior to discharging the ECD, the operator should notify others on scene by announcing “TASER.”
1. By providing an advance warning, officers are better prepared and will stay clear of the probes and their intended target.
2. If practical, instruct the Communications Unit to broadcast an ECD is going to be deployed.
3. If not practical, notify the dispatcher, as soon as feasible, an electrical charge has been administered through use of an ECD and which mode was utilized, (i.e. probe, stun, or both).
M. Prior to firing, use loud verbal commands when feasible and point the laser sight at the subject.
1. A suggested warning to the suspect may be: “If you do not comply with my commands l may be forced to use a
Taser.”
2. Preferred target zones are (a) below the chest and off center so as to split the hemisphere from a frontal position
and (b) below the neck from a back position.
3. Care should be taken to avoid the face, neck, groin, and other sensitive areas of the subject.
N. An arrest team consists of no less than two officers: one officer with an ECD and another officer with a department- approved firearm.
1. Firearms will be secured prior to approaching and securing the suspect.
2. When given the command to do so by the ECD operator, the handcuffing officer will immediately attempt to safely control the subject. Subjects are most easily controlled while the ECD is discharging.
3. Throughout the incident, ECD operators will continually assess compliance levels and breathing ability of the subject before applying additional cycles to the subject.
4. Following ECD activation, officers should not use a restraint technique that restricts breathing.
O. ECDs shall not be utilized in the following circumstances:
1. When the officer knows a subject has come in contact with flammable liquids or is in a flammable atmosphere;
2. When the subject is in a position to fall and possibly sustain substantial injury or death;
3. Punitively for purposes of coercion;
4. To escort or jab subjects;
5. To awaken unconscious subjects;
6. When the subject is visibly pregnant, unless deadly force is the only other option;
7. The subject is in or around water where drowning could result;
8. Against frail persons of any age; or
P. ECDs should not be utilized in the following situations:
1. On subjects operating motor vehicles (this includes autos, trucks, motorcycles, and scooters);
2. On a person operating a self-propelled vehicle (e.g. bicycle);
3. When the subject is holding a firearm;
4. When the subject is at extremes of age (youth or aged) or physically disabled;
5. When deadly force is clearly justifiable, unless another officer is present and capable of providing deadly force to protect officers and/or civilians as necessary;
6. In cases where another officer has already successfully deployed an ECD on the suspect.
7. Against persons known to be under the influence of drugs.
8. On a handcuffed prisoner;
Q. A supervisor shall be notified and respond to all scenes in which an ECD has been activated. The supervisor will conduct a preliminary assessment of the ECD activation and submit a report of his findings along with the Use of Force Report. Additionally the supervisor will ensure the following is accomplished:
1. Photographs will be taken of the affected area and any other injuries noted.
2. Collect clothing when burn marks or fabric tears occur because of ECD use.
3. SAPD Form #62-UOF, Use of Force Report, will be completed.
4. Secure all in car videos of the incident, if available, and forward with the use of force report.
5. A copy of all reports, in car videos, and Crime Scene Unit Investigators’ photos will be forwarded to the Internal Affairs Unit through the chain of command for review and compilation of statistics.
6. A copy of all reports, in car videos, and Crime Scene Unit Investigators’ photos will also be forwarded to the Training Academy ECD instructors for review and possible curriculum enhancements.
7. A supervisor shall download the ECD information and include it with the use of force report. A spark display must be performed prior to downloading the information in order to confirm current time as a relative point of reference. Remove cartridge before performing spark display.
8. Supervisor shall ensure fired ECD cartridges are replaced prior to the end of the officer’s tour of duty.
9. SAPD Form #62-RFI, Receipt for Issue/Replacement OC Spray/Gel and/or ECD, shall be completed by the officer. The receipt is deposited in a designated receptacle in the ready room. When returning an OC canister, attach the receipt to the canister prior to depositing in the receptacle
R. Any use of the ECD contrary to the direction of this procedure can result in revocation of the officer(s) authorization to use this weapon and may result in disciplinary action.
S. Any officer discharging an ECD accidentally or intentionally shall immediately notify an on-duty supervisor and report the incident in writing, through his chain of command, to his division commander.
1. The supervisor notified will review all the circumstances surrounding the weapon discharge to ensure all policy, training, weapon/equipment, and discipline issues are addressed, and evidence is collected as applicable.
2. Upon completion of his initial review, the supervisor will determine if there are any violations of departmental policy and he will make a recommendation based on his review of the incident.
3. The officer’s initial report and the supervisor’s recommendations are then forwarded through the chain of command for final review and disposition.
4. The division commander shall review the reports and recommendations, and based on the merits, substance, and gravity of the incident, will request further investigation, implement discipline, or recommend no disciplinary action.
5. Regardless of the outcome, all reports with recommendations will be routed to the Internal Affairs Unit and will be maintained on file in accordance with the Department’s retention schedule.

Answer 478

A

.11 UNIT RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. Dispatchers shall dispatch Crime Scene Unit Investigators to all scenes where there has been a discharge of an ECD by a San Antonio Police Officer.
B. Crime Scene Unit Investigators shall promptly respond to the scene where there has been a discharge of an ECD by a San Antonio Police Officer. The Crime Scene Unit Investigator shall place spent probes into the Property Room as evidence by using the following procedure:
1. Leave the wires the way they are and place the probes (if used in probe mode) back into the cartridge with the barbs down. Leave the cartridge and wires in the same place where the subject was apprehended and let CSI personnel know where the subject was placed in custody and the direction the ECD was fired.
2. The cartridge holes will be secured with evidence tape.
3. The cartridge shall be placed in an evidence envelope and labeled with a biohazard sticker.
4. A sample of the AFID confetti from the ECD cartridge will be placed in a separate evidence envelope.
5. If the AFID confetti cannot be recovered from the scene (washed away by rain, destroyed by fire, etc.), the circumstances preventing recovery will be detailed in the offense/incident report and the use of force report.
C. The Armory and Supply Office replaces ECD equipment returned to the Armory by officers, and
1. Completes the appropriate section of SAPD Form #62-RFI, Receipt for Issue/Replacement OC Spray/Gel
and/or ECD.
2. Forwards a copy of the form to the Internal Affairs Unit.
D. Supervisory Officers
1. Must understand the maximum effective range of all weapons carried by their shift personnel.
2. Ensures through periodic inspections officers under their supervision carry only approved ECDs as defined in this procedure, and all equipment is in proper working order.
3. When the Armory is closed, verifies information entered in the appropriate section of SAPD Form #62-RFI, Receipt For Issue/Replacement of OC Spray/Gel and/or ECD, by officers returning an ECD or cartridges to the Ready Room and also verifies information entered into the OC spray/gel and/or ECD logbook when officers check out replacement equipment.
4. All ECD’s assigned under the supervisor must be downloaded on a quarterly basis to keep the time and date accurate.

Answer 479

A

.04 DURATION OF PROTECTIVE ORDERS
A. Temporary Orders
1. A temporary order is valid for the period specified in the order, but does not exceed twenty (20) days.

On the request of an applicant or on the court’s own motion, a temporary order may be extended for additional twenty (20) day periods.

B. Magistrate’s Orders For Emergency Protection
1. A magistrate’s order for emergency protection is valid on issuance and remains in effect until the sixty-first (61st) day but not less than 31 days after the date of issuance.
An order can last up to 91 days, if so ordered by the Magistrate when a deadly weapon was used or exhibited during the commission of the assault.

When additional protection is necessary, a protective order may be requested prior to the expiration of the magistrate’s order for emergency protection.
Time periods will usually be specified in the magistrate’s order for emergency protection.

C. Protective Orders
1. A protective order, unless otherwise specified within the order, is valid for two (2) years from the date the original order was granted by the court.

A protective order is not modified to extend its validity beyond the two (2) year period.
A protective order can last for a lifetime if there are reasonable grounds to believe that the applicant is the victim of sexual assault or abuse, stalking, or trafficking and ordered by the Court.
A protective order might also be extended if the offender was incarcerated at any time during the life of the protective order.

D. Certain Court Orders or Conditions of Bond

A court order or a condition of bond is valid until the case is adjudicated or the court order or condition of bond is rescinded.

Answer 480

A

.07 PROCEDURE FOR VIOLATIONS OF TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE ORDERS

A. Persons in violation of temporary protective orders shall be arrested for violations of the order.
B. Officers, as directed by the temporary protective order, may be required to do the following:

To accompany the person obtaining the order to the residence covered by the order while the person takes possession of the residence;
If the person excluded from the residence occupies the residence, to inform the person the court has ordered the person excluded from the residence;
Protect the person obtaining the order while they take possession of the residence; and
If the person excluded from the residence refuses to vacate the residence, stand by while the person who has obtained the order takes possession of their necessary personal property.

.08 REPORT RESPONSIBILITIES

A. An offense report is prepared whether or not an arrest is made for a violation of a protective order, magistrate’s order for emergency protection, temporary protective order, or condition of bond in a family violence, sexual assault, stalking or trafficking case. The offense is carried as a violation of P.C. 25.07, Violation of Certain Court Orders or Conditions of Bond in a Family Violence, Child Abuse or Neglect, Sexual Assault or Abuse, Stalking or Trafficking case.

The court which issued the protective order is listed as the complainant;
The person(s) protected by the court order is listed as either the reporting person(s) or as witness(es) to the violation of the court order;
The details of the offense report list the specific violation(s) of the protective order; and
A copy of the protective order, temporary protective order, condition of bond, or magistrate’s order for emergency protection is attached to the copy of the offense report submitted to the Magistrate’s Office.

a. Officers may photocopy the protective order, temporary protective order, condition of bond, or magistrate’s order for emergency protection on file in the Communications Unit.
In the case of temporary protective orders, officers will attach a print out of the verification of service; or

b. Officers may photocopy the reporting person’s copy of the protective order or magistrate’s order for emergency protection, which shall be returned to the reporting person before checking into service.
In the case of a temporary protective order proof of service on the respondent must be included.

B. When an arrest is made for an act of family violence, sexual assault, stalking or trafficking, the officer shall obtain necessary information to obtain a magistrate’s order for emergency protection in the event the complainant, the officer, an attorney, or a magistrate requests a magistrate’s order for emergency protection while the arrested person is being magistrated.

C. Information necessary for the officer to obtain to apply for a magistrate’s order for emergency protection includes the following:

Names of individuals, including children, covered by the court’s order (dates of birth are also necessary);
Addresses and telephone numbers of residence and place of employment;
Addresses and telephone numbers of child care facilities or schools attended by children; and
The distance, in yards, necessary for the respondent to maintain for the protection of the victim.

D. Officers responding to family disturbance calls or other violent situations where family violence is evident or suspected shall comply with Procedure 604 – Family Disturbances/Violence.

Answer 481

A

C. Police Service Agents

When a victim of family violence/violation of a protective order or conditions of bond presents his/herself at a substation, the police service agent will first determine whether an offense report has already been made.
a. If no report has been made, the police service agent will have a CRT officer, if available, or an officer come in from the field to make the report.
b. If an offense report has been made, the police service agent will request a UEDI/ Crime Scene Unit Investigator come in from the field to take photographs and complete SAPD Form #2089-DV.
c. In the event that a UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigator is not available, the police service agent will have the victim complete SAPD Form #2089-DV and take digital pictures of the victim and his/her injuries.
d. The police service agent will refer to GM Procedure 408, Digital Photography, for handling of Digital Images.
e. The police service agent will then package the completed SAPD Form #2089-DV along with any photographs and route to the Special Victims Unit.
f. The police service agent will complete and route the SAPD Form #2089-TA Family Violence Threat Assessment Checklist to the CRT Office at the appropriate substation.

D. Crisis Response Team

When a crisis response team member makes a location where a victim of family violence/violation of protective order/condition of bond is injured due to an assault and has not had pictures taken and/or has not filled out SAPD Form #2089-DV, the CRT shall provide the form for the victim to complete and take pictures of the victim and any injuries.
Digital images will be handled in accordance with GM Procedure 408, Digital Photography.
The crisis response team will route the completed SAPD Form #2089-DV and a copy of the offense report, if available, to the Special Victims Unit.
The CRT will complete the SAPD Form #2089-TA Family Violence Threat Assessment Checklist and
Provide for the victim’s safety per the CRT Standard Operating Procedures.
A court may order a suspect in a family violence case or a violation of a protective order, temporary ex- parte order or condition of bond order case to turn over firearms to the police department.
Upon order of the Court, property room, personnel, the assigned CRT substation personnel, and the designated third party assigned by the court will coordinate the surrender of any firearms, as ordered by the court.
The assigned CRT substation personnel will return the required documents to Pretrial Services, as instructed by the court.
Pursuant to the court order, a firearm may not be returned to a suspect except by further order of the court.

E. Special Victims Unit
1. Upon receipt of the packets from the UEDIs/Crime Scene Unit Investigators, police service agents, or crisis response teams, a supervisor shall inspect the information included in the packets for completeness.

Cases where further information is required, shall be assigned to a detective to complete.
Criminal cases will be investigated in accordance with the SOP of the Special Victims Unit.
Should a victim of family violence/violation of protective order/condition of bond present his/herself to the Special Victims Unit, the detective with walk-in case responsibility shall handle the case according to the SOP of the Special Victims Unit.

Answer 482

A

.05 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. If an officer establishes probable cause to believe a person has committed an offense involving family violence, and the offense includes the use of a weapon, choking of the victim or the offender has a history of family violence, officers are to make a reasonable effort to arrest the offender without a warrant.
This includes searching for him at locations he is known to frequent, in an effort to secure his warrantless arrest.
This policy does not prohibit officers from making warrantless arrests, in other circumstances, where probable cause exists for the arrest of a family violence offender.
If a question arises as to whether an arrest should be made, officers contact their supervisors for guidance.
B. In family violence cases where the offense included the use of a weapon, choking of the victim or the offender has a history of family violence, and the effort to arrest him/her without a warrant was not successful, officers should begin making efforts to secure a warrant of arrest for the offender.
Officers should include details in their offense report which reflects the efforts made to arrest the offender without a warrant, and a statement recommending a warrant of arrest be obtained for the offender.
C. In cases where a warrant of arrest will be obtained, officers are responsible for notifying the appropriate unit and providing that unit with the officers’ report.
Generally, SVU or the Night CID Unit will prepare all felony warrants and CRT Detectives will prepare misdemeanor warrants. However, there could be mitigating circumstances that allow detectives to deviate from this policy when necessary and approved.
These circumstances should be documented appropriately.

D. In cases involving any felony offense where an arrest is made, or there is a suspicion of an offense involving a child victim, the Special Victims Unit or the Night CID Unit is immediately notified.
Officers will contact the follow-up unit prior to the release of any witnesses, complainants and prior to the transporting and booking of the actor.

E. Officers have several available methods of contacting the Special Victims Unit, including:
1. Contacting the Special Victims Unit detectives on the Central Patrol radio channel;

Calling the Special Victims Unit office at 207-2313, 7 days per week from 0500 - 1745; a. After 1745, officers may contact the NCID offices at 207-7389.
Contacting the Communications Unit, where the Special Victims Unit detectives’ cell phone numbers are listed.

F. Officers may contact Crisis Response Team (CRT) staff members at the officers’ respective substations via the dispatcher or by calling the Service Agent.
G. If a protective order or violation of family violence bond is discovered during the investigation of a family disturbance situation or if a mentally ill person is involved, officers should refer to GM Proc 603, Protective Orders, or GM Proc 611, Mentally Ill Persons.
H. If it is determined a sexual assault, aggravated sexual assault or indecency with a child occurred, officers will refer to GM Proc 703, Handling of Sexual Assault Complaints.
I. In domestic disputes, officers are frequently confronted with conditions which appear to be both civil and criminal.
It should be made clear the Department does not participate in civil matters.
Officers confronting civil disputes offer practical suggestions or refer the parties to the appropriate agencies, remaining aware that the objective is to restore and maintain the peace.
1. If a responding officer believes that a domestic dispute or civil matter may potentially lead to a family/domestic violence incident, the reporting officer shall document in his report the basis for his belief.
2. The officer shall provide a hard copy of his report to the CRT Office where the reporting officer is assigned.
J. The Special Victims Unit shall provide family violence training to Police Service Agents, Crisis Response Teams and Crime Scene Unit Investigators.

Answer 483

A

If a firearm is found to be at the location and the suspect is out on bond for a family violence offense, determine if this is a violation of a court order or a condition of bond. The verification of the order can be done by contacting CRT, Special Victims Unit, or the Communications Unit Information Channel.
If a protective order is found on the suspect or if the suspect is in violation of the order in any manner, determine if he is in possession of a firearm.
If a violation of law is found, make the appropriate arrest and all details of the violation shall be included in the required reports.
If a weapon is suspected of being used in a felony offense, refer to Procedure 701, Crime Scene Duties.
Place weapons taken as evidence in the property room as directed in GM Procedure 606, Impounding Property,
if weapon is not suspected of being used in a felony offense.
Officers may seize firearms if there is a fear that the weapon will be used in a criminal act in the future. Officers must have the legal authority to seize firearms. Officers will refer to Procedure 502 regarding warrantless seizures.
Officers should seek the guidance of their supervisor if further doubt exists.
Officers should encourage the voluntary surrender of any firearm at the scene and impound the firearm(s) as personal property.
If the victim has visible injuries, check with the dispatcher to see if a Crime Scene Unit investigator/UEDI is available. If a Crime Scene Unit investigator is available, wait until the Crime Scene Unit investigator is completed with the collection of any evidence, including taking pictures of the victim and their injuries.
If a Crime Scene Unit investigator/UEDI is unavailable, advise the victim in order to file charges of assault bodily injury (family violence) against the suspect, they must report to the local substation at their earliest opportunity. Services to victims of family violence will be provided at substations seven (7) days a week, twenty-four (24) hours a day.
Check the suspect’s criminal history to determine if a family violence felony offense or violation of condition of bond has been committed.
Transport complainants, suspects and witnesses to the follow up unit, when requested by the follow up unit or CRT staff.
Present warrants for arrest to the magistrate and properly log the warrants in with the Bexar County Sheriff’s office, when instructed to do so by the follow up units.
Complete and file the appropriate report, and shall provide a hard copy of the report to the CRT Office where the reporting officer is assigned.

Answer 484

A

D. Crisis Response Team:

When a Crisis Response Team makes a location where a victim of family violence has not had pictures taken and/or has not filled out SAPD Form #2089-DV the CRT shall provide the form for the victim to complete and take pictures of the victim and any injuries.
Detectives should document all actions taken in a written report.
Digital images will be handled in accordance with GM Procedure 408, Digital Photography.
The Crisis Response Team will route the completed SAPD Form #2089-DV and a copy of the offense report for felony cases, if available, to the Special Victims Unit.
[SWORN] The CRT will complete the SAPD Form 2089-TA (Family Violence Threat Assessment) checklist and provide for the victim’s safety per the CRT Standard Operating Procedures.
If a warrant will be obtained for an actor for a felony offense, the Crisis Response Team will first notify the Special Victims Unit or NCID supervisor so a detective can be assigned to the follow up investigation.
All documents obtained by the Crisis Response Team, including the warrant, affidavit and offense reports will be forwarded to the follow up unit for inclusion in the case filing paperwork forwarded to the District Attorney’s Office.
A court may order a suspect in cases of family violence, violation of a protective order, temporary ex-parte order, or condition of bond order case to turn over firearms to the police department.
Upon order of the Court, property room personnel, the assigned CRT substation personnel, and the designated third party assigned by the court will coordinate the surrender of any firearms, as ordered by the court. The assigned CRT substation personnel will return the required documents to Pretrial Services, as instructed by the court.
Pursuant to the court order, a firearm may not be returned to a suspect except by further order of the court.

E. Special Victims Unit:

Upon receipt of the packets from the Crime Scene Investigators, Police Service Agents, or Crisis Response Teams, a supervisor shall inspect the information included in the packets for completeness.
Felony Family Violence cases will be assigned to a detective for follow up investigation per the Special Victims Unit SOP.
Detectives should have the victim sign a medical release form for the time period when the abuse occurred and medical treatment was provided.
Should a victim of family violence present his/herself to the Special Victims Unit, the detective with walk-in case responsibility shall handle the case according to the SOP of Special Victims Unit.

Answer 485

A

.08 RESPONSE AND APPROACH TO THE SCENE
A. Whenever possible, two (2) officers are dispatched on family disturbance and family/dating violence calls.
An effort should be made to coordinate their arrival at the scene.

B. The primary officer assigned the call should inquire as to the existence of any protective order or conditions of bond on file for the complainant, suspect or other known persons involved.

C. Persons encountered in the immediate vicinity of the scene should be briefly questioned about the incident and the parties involved.

D. Upon arrival, the officers should survey the site and the general surroundings, determine the location of the dispute, and calculate the tactics to be used relative to their safety and the safety of others.

.09 ENTRY INTO PRIVATE PREMISES

A. In the initial contact with the occupants, the officers should identify themselves and explain the purpose of their presence and then request entry. If the complainant is an occupant of the dwelling, the officers should ask to speak with him/her.

B. Consent Entry
1. Officers may enter the premises if consent has been given to do so.
When one of the parties to a family dispute requests police intervention, the officers may enter the premises over the objection of the other party.

However, when one party is locked out by the other party, the officers do not assist the evicted party in forcing entry.
When officers enter a dwelling with the consent of either or both parties, and subsequently both parties request they leave, the officers will do so, unless the officers have probable cause to believe their presence is necessary to prevent family violence or to affect an arrest.
When officers enter a dwelling with the consent of either or both parties, and subsequently one party requests they leave, the officers may remain over the objections of the other party, if the officers have probable cause to believe their presence is necessary to prevent family violence or to affect an arrest.

C. Refused Entry
1. When officers are refused entry to a residence, an attempt is made to speak with the complainant.
The officers may request Communications Unit personnel to call the complainant.
The objective is to ensure the safety of the persons within the dwelling.

The officers should attempt to locate and interview any third party who may be a witness to the dispute to ascertain the degree of the disturbance.
a. If a breach of the peace occurs, the officer(s) should advise the third party of his right to file a formal complaint.
b. If the officer(s) have probable cause to believe police intervention is necessary to prevent family/dating violence, the officer(s) should contact their supervisor.
The officer(s) should move to public property and observe the premises while waiting for the arrival of their supervisor, except in exigent circumstances covered in Subsection .09D, Forced / Emergency Entry.

D. Forced / Emergency Entry
1. Officers may forcibly enter a dwelling only under exigent circumstances and when sufficient probable cause exists that immediate police intervention is imperative to prevent the commission of a felony, loss of life, or serious bodily injury.

Officers must evaluate the following elements when considering a forced entry:
a. Whether parties involved in the disturbance are armed; and
b. Whether the probability of harm to the officers or other persons will increase by a forced / emergency entry.
c. Information given from the 911 call can also be used to determine exigent circumstances.

E. Upon any type of entry, officers need to establish control of the situation by:

Remaining constantly alert for potential weapons; Inquire into the presence of firearms and weapons and secure weapons to protect the officers and persons present at the scene.
Inquiring about the nature of the dispute;
Determining if persons are injured;
a. Protecting the victim from further injury; and
b. Requesting medical treatment for the injured;
Identifying the parties involved and other persons present; and
Ensuring the safety of all persons by interviewing the persons in separate areas.

Answer 486

A

.13 SWORN MEMBERS CHARGED OR CONVICTED OF A CLASS C MISDEMEANOR CRIME OF FAMILY/DATING VIOLENCE OR WHO ARE SUBJECT TO A PROTECTIVE ORDER OR CONDITION OF BOND IN A FAMILY VIOLENCE CASE

A. In accordance with federal statute, it is unlawful for anyone, including a sworn member of this Department, convicted of a Class C misdemeanor crime of family/dating violence or who becomes the subject of a protective order to possess or transport any firearm or ammunition.

B. Notification Responsibilities

Any sworn member who becomes a suspect in a Class C misdemeanor crime of family/dating violence shall notify their immediate supervisory, in writing as soon as possible.
Any sworn member arrested or charged with a Class C misdemeanor crime of family/dating violence shall notify the Office of the Chief in writing in accordance with Rule and Regulation 3.35.
Any sworn member who becomes the subject of a protective order or condition of bond in a family/dating violence case shall immediately notify a supervisory officer in writing, who will ensure the officer is placed on administrative duty pending further investigation.
Any sworn member convicted of a Class C misdemeanor crime of family/dating violence or having a conviction prior to the effective date of this procedure shall immediately notify a supervisory officer who will place the officer on administrative duty in accordance with GM Procedure 908, Mandatory Reassignment, and pending further investigation of the conviction.

C. Department-Issued Firearms

Any sworn member convicted of a Class C misdemeanor crime of family or dating violence shall immediately relinquish their department-issued firearms to their immediate supervisor if available, or any other available supervisor.
Any supervisory officer having knowledge of a sworn member being convicted of a Class C misdemeanor crime of family or dating violence prior to the effective date of this procedure shall relieve the sworn member of his firearm.
The sworn member’s department-issued firearms will be taken to the Armory and Supply Office during normal business hours or placed in the Property Room during non-business hours by the supervisory officer taking possession of the firearm.

.14 REPORT RESPONSIBILITIES

A. An officer who is assigned to investigate a family disturbance or family/dating violence call shall complete the necessary documentation pursuant to Procedure 402 – Differential Police Response.

B. When a Class C misdemeanor assault is committed or suspected against a family member or household member or an individual with whom the suspect has or has had a dating relationship as defined in Chapter 71 of the Texas Family Code, the offense is reported on an offense report.

The offense classification is listed as “Assault / Family / Dating Violence;” and
The complainant is advised to contact the Domestic Violence Court Prosecutor’s Office located in the Municipal Court Building to file charges.

C. If the victim of Family/Dating Violence has chosen a pseudonym, the reporting officer will provide the victim with the Victims of Family Violence Pseudonym form.
The officer and the victim will complete the form.
The officer will provide the victim with a copy of the form and will return the original form to the Special Victims Unit or the CRT Unit at the officers’ assigned substation in person or in a sealed envelope through the departmental bin mail.
When the officer faxes a copy of the offense report, the officer will also fax a copy of the pseudonym form.
The original pseudonym form is still returned to the Special Victims Unit or the CRT Unit at the officers’ assigned substation in person or in a sealed envelope through the departmental bin mail.

D. If the family disturbance or family/dating violence call involves a sworn member of this Department, all officers assigned to the call, including supervisors, shall submit reports detailing their involvement in the incident.

E. Any supervisory officer relieving a sworn member of a firearm for a conviction of a Class C misdemeanor crime of family/dating violence shall document, through an information log in Blue Team, any actions taken and route the incident to the Training Academy’s Firearms Proficiency Control Officer (FPCO) as well as through their chain of command.

F. In accordance with the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure, Chapter 5, Article 5.05, an officer who investigates a family/dating violence allegation or who responds to a family disturbance call shall complete and submit the Texas Department of Public Safety form titled, Family Violence Report.

G. In accordance with the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure, Chapter 5, Article 5.05, an officer who investigates a family/dating violence allegation or who responds to a family disturbance call involving a member of the military shall provide written notice of the incident or disturbance call to the Staff Judge Advocate at Joint Forces Headquarters or the Provost Marshal of the military installation to which the suspect is assigned.

Answer 487

A

.03 BURGLARY/ROBBERY ALARMS - OPEN DOORS AND WINDOWS

A. An officer responding to a burglary or robbery alarm where a point of entry has been located or a call for open doors or windows where it appears an entry has been made, should take the following actions:
1. Immediately notify the dispatcher;
2. Assume the most tactically advantageous position until a cover officer arrives;
3. Request a K-9 Detail officer, who directs the movements of officers going into a building;
4. If a K-9 Detail officer is not available, a building search is made, taking precautions not to destroy any evidence;
5. Unless exigent circumstances exist, no officer enters any structure suspected of being burglarized without a cover officer.
If entry must be made, the dispatcher is notified;
6. Attempt to reach the owner by telephone. If the owner cannot be located, the officer secures the building to the best of his ability and leaves written notification for the owner; and
7. Should an owner or alarm company representative arrive at the location, officers assist in a security check of the building.

B. If either the owner or alarm company representative notifies the dispatcher they have arrived at the location after officers have departed, the dispatcher, upon request, sends an officer to assist in a security check of the building.

C. The appropriate written or N-Code report is made on each call.
Copies of written reports are forwarded to the appropriate follow-up unit.

Answer 488

A

.05 DISORDERLY CONDUCT

A. When an officer is confronted by a situation within the scope of the disorderly conduct statute (Texas Penal Code, Section 42.01), he first attempts to calm the situation and preserve the peace by the use of various alternatives short of arrest, such as a warning or mediation.

B. Misdemeanor citations or custodial arrests are used in cases where the offender persists in the use of abusive language or other conduct forbidden by paragraphs 1, 2, or 5 of Section 42.01 of the Texas Penal Code. All custodial arrests for disorderly conduct must be approved by a supervisory officer prior to booking the prisoner.

C. Any person who is under the influence of alcohol or any other substance and who is also violent, threatens to be violent, or has been involved in a disturbance is arrested for disorderly conduct, provided the facts support the arrest and a supervisory officer approves the arrest prior to booking the prisoner.

Answer 489

A

.07 INFORMATION RECEIVED ON CRIMINAL OFFENSES - CONTINUING DUTY TO REPORT

Members, whether on-duty or off-duty, receiving or possessing facts or information relative to a criminal offense (Class B misdemeanor or above) SHALL write a report with a SAPD case number and forward the original report to the Records Office with a copy sent to the follow-up unit.

A. This report shall be completed before the end of the member’s tour of duty, if the member possessing the information is on-duty.

B. If the member receiving or possessing the criminal offense information is off-duty, the member shall ensure the criminal offense is immediately reported upon returning to duty.

C. Upon returning to duty, members who have received and possess facts or information on criminal offenses (Class B misdemeanor or above) will have a continuing duty to report the criminal offense as outlined in this procedure until the criminal offense has been reported.

D. Police emergency situations and crimes in progress shall immediately be reported to the police dispatcher by the officer possessing the information.

Answer 490

A

. 09 PUBLIC INTOXICATION

A. A person commits an offense if the person appears in a public place while intoxicated to the degree he may endanger himself or another.
The word “intoxicated” has the same meaning assigned to it as in the Texas Penal Code.

An individual arrested may be released from custody by a peace officer or magistrate if it is believed imprisonment is unnecessary for the protection of the individual or others.
It is a defense to prosecution the alcohol or other substance was administered for therapeutic purposes by a licensed physician.
Once a “serial inebriate” has been prosecuted and convicted on three occasions through Municipal Court, the fourth prosecution will be submitted as a Class B misdemeanor enhancement with prosecution to follow through County Court.

B. Officers observing persons whom they believe are intoxicated should be certain the person is intoxicated and not suffering from an illness before a decision to arrest is made.
In considering the degree of intoxication, officers satisfy themselves the subject should be placed in custody for his own safety or for the public’s safety.

When taking a person into custody for Public Intoxication, officers will:
a. Handcuff, search, and transport the intoxicated person in the same manner as prisoners in accordance with GM Procedure 601, Prisoners;
b. Retain custody of the intoxicated person until the accepting facility takes custody of the person.
Officers will transport all non-violent adult persons (18 years of age or older) charged with Public Intoxication, including those who are also charged with an additional Class C misdemeanor offense or who have outstanding Class C misdemeanor warrants, to the Public Safety Unit unless they meet the criteria for enhancement.
See Subsection C, Processing at the Public Safety Unit.

a. The City Magistrate’s Office will perform all administrative functions regarding any additional Class C misdemeanor charges or warrants.
Officers will fax a copy of their incident report to the City Detention Center at 207-4383 prior to leaving the PSU.

b. Seventeen (17) year olds charged with Public Intoxication may be issued a misdemeanor citation and released to a parent or legal guardian or physically arrested.
Officers will process all seventeen (17) year olds physically arrested for Public Intoxication at the City of San Antonio Detention Center at 401 S. Frio.

c. Juveniles (under 17 years of age) charged with the single offense of Public Intoxication may be issued a misdemeanor citation and released to a parent or legal guardian or physically arrested.
If physical arrest is necessary, they shall be processed at the Youth Processing Office and then taken to the Bexar County Juvenile Detention Center.

d. The Public Safety Unit will not accept anyone under the age of 18 years old, persons who are unconscious, persons who are pregnant, or persons who are overly combative.

C. Processing at the Public Safety Unit at 601 N. Frio:

If the arresting officer suspects this arrestee has been processed previously for Public Intoxication
(e.g. street person with obvious signs of frequent intoxication)
he should phone the PSU at
(210) 246-1391 or (210) 246- 1390
to check the individual’s status as a “serial inebriate.”

a. Personnel at the PSU will either direct the officer to the PSU or the Detention Center based on their records of the arrestee.
b. If the officer and arrestee are directed to the Detention Center, the arresting officer will process the arrestee in accordance with Subsection E, Prisoners being magistrated.

Officers taking offenders into the Public Safety Unit will enter from the Morales Street side, which is marked “Police Entrance.”

a. Officers will search the intoxicated person before they enter the Public Safety Unit (PSU) facility and assist PSU personnel in conducting an inventory of the intoxicated person’s possessions;
b. Officers shall sign the inventory sheet prepared by the PSU personnel and retain a copy for their report.

All offenders brought into the PSU must receive medical clearance.
Medical clearance for offenders is available at this facility (M-F 2000 to 0800 hours, Sat. 1600 to 0800 hours, and all day Sunday).
During all other times, offenders should be transported to the Triage Center located at the Crisis Care Center at 527 N. Leona Street, (210) 358-3611.
Once intoxicated persons are cleared for entry into the PSU, the officers may leave and resume their normal duties.
Officers will leave a copy of the Incident Report with the staff at the PSU, documenting all information regarding the arrest for public intoxication and any additional Class C misdemeanor charges or warrants.
The intoxicated person’s personal property is released to personnel at the Public Safety Unit and not placed in the Property Room.
If medical issues are present and they are beyond the scope of the services available to the PSU, then the intoxicated person may require transportation to University Hospital or the Acute Care Clinic/Crisis Care Center located at 527 North Leona.

The Public Safety Unit will take custody of all persons arrested for public intoxication
except the following:

Intoxicated persons under the age of 18 years old (Go to City Detention Center).
Intoxicated persons who are unconscious
(Call EMS).
Intoxicated persons who are pregnant
(Go to City Detention Center).
Intoxicated persons who are overly combative
(Go to City Detention Center).

E. Prisoners being magistrated for Public Intoxication will be issued a misdemeanor citation with the word “Booked” written across the bottom.
A copy of this citation, the incident report, the booking slip, and the Class C Complaint shall be given to Detention Center personnel.

The incident report must contain all elements of the offense (intoxicated, in a public place, and a danger to himself and/or others).
It is of utmost importance to the prosecution for the officer to articulate how the arrestee was a danger to himself and/or others, or how the potential for danger/harm existed or was created.
The incident report should also indicate whether the individual was violent, causing a disturbance, abusive, passive, etc.
This information assists the Detention Center personnel in processing the prisoner.

F. If a person is intoxicated on a substance other than alcohol, such as marijuana, glue, paint, or any other drug, he is handled in the same manner as if he were under the influence of alcohol, unless probable cause warrants an arrest for another offense.

G. Unconscious, sick, or injured prisoners are handled in accordance with GM Procedure 601, Prisoners.

Answer 491

A

.05 CLASSIFICATIONS OF IMPOUNDED PROPERTY

Although currency and firearms merit special treatment, impounded property is classified into one of the following categories:

A. Evidence;
B. Found property;
C. Personal property;
D. Detectives with primary case responsibility may reclassify impounded property as needed during the investigative process.
All other investigative personnel must have prior approval by a supervisor.

.06 MEMBERS RESPONSIBILITIES WHEN IMPOUNDING PROPERTY

A. Members who are authorized to receive or confiscate property only do so if a legitimate police purpose exists.
B. When impounding property into the Property Room, members will:
1. Complete SAPD Form #113, Receipt for Property, in triplicate, for any property received or confiscated from an individual. SAPD Form #113 is routed as follows:
a. Original to Records Office;
b. A copy to the person from whom the property is taken; and
c. A copy to the appropriate investigative follow-up unit.

Members attach a copy of a report to the property tag and forward a copy to the appropriate follow-up unit.
Refer to GM Procedure 607, Impounding Vehicles, for disposition of personal property found in locked vehicles or when impounding vehicles for failure to provide “Proof of Financial Responsibility” (lack of insurance).
Send a report to the Medical Examiner’s Office for any impounded evidence requiring tests.
UEDIs/Crime Scene Unit Investigators will place evidence which is wet or damp with body fluids in the Drying Room, avoiding cross contamination with other evidence (IAW with Patrol/CSI SOP).
Officers below the rank of Detective-Investigator impounding this same type of evidence will mark the evidence with biohazard stickers and place it in a locker.
Place hypodermic needles in protective containers.
Place perishable items in the refrigerator.
Fixed blade knives must be covered in cardboard and taped prior to packaging.
Currency will be impounded in a “Currency Evidence Bag” with denominations, extensions, total amount and officer’s signature noted.
The bag will remain sealed from time of impound to final disposition.
Property room personnel will NOT verify count.
All BIO-HAZ material must be marked with stickers provided.

Answer 492

A

.08 SECURING PROPERTY
A. All property impounded into the Property Room will be secured in lockers, cages, refrigerators, or safes depending on the type and size of property impounded.
In the event locker space is not available, all overflow personal and found property only, will be placed in the overflow container.
Property shall never be stored on the processing tables.

Firearms shall be secured in lockers.
Property too large for lockers will be secured in cages.
Property needing to be refrigerated will be secured in refrigerators.
Controlled substances will be secured in the narcotics safe.
All evidence will be secured with evidence tape provided, when possible.

B. When any evidence impounded after normal business hours is too large to be placed in a secured container within the Holding Area or the evidence falls under any category listed in Section .14 of this procedure, the officer or Crime Scene Unit investigator shall notify the Communications Unit supervisor and request an off-duty member of the Property Room return to duty to open the Property Room and take charge of the evidence.

C. When evidence is too large or too heavy to be secured in the Property Room it shall be taken to the Vehicle Storage Unit for secure storage. See Subsection .12G of this procedure for dimensions and weights.
(WRONG ITS .13 G. Property measuring over eight (8) feet in length/height or weighing over two hundred (200) pounds is taken to the Vehicle Storage Unit.)

Answer 493

A

.10 IMPOUNDING FIREARMS

A. All handguns MUST be stored with a tie-wrap inserted through the chamber and barrel to visually indicate that the weapon is clear of any ammunition.

B. Semi-auto handguns WILL NOT be stored with the slide lock open.

C. Officers are responsible for the proper and safe handling of all firearms to be impounded.

D. All impounded firearms must have a separate barcode.

E. Loaded firearms, with the exception of jammed firearms, are not taken into the Property Room.

F. Officers unfamiliar with the unloading process of a firearm shall contact a supervisor, a Crime Scene Unit investigator, a UEDI, or the Armorer.

G. Jammed firearms are processed as follows:

Place small firearms in an envelope marked “JAMMED – LOADED FIREARMS” and secure it in a small locker.
Note the firearm make, model, and serial # on the envelope.
Tag large firearms with a plain manila colored tag marked “JAMMED – LOADED FIREARM” and secure in a long locker.

H. All loose ammunition MUST be separated from the weapon when packaged.

Answer 494

A

.13 PROPERTY RESTRICTED FROM THE PROPERTY ROOM

A. Evidence or other property gathered from the scene of a known or suspected biological, chemical, or nuclear terrorist event.
Evidence or other property associated with these events is gathered and maintained by the San Antonio Fire Department’s Hazardous Materials Response Team or Arson Unit, or the San Antonio Police Department Bomb Squad.

Unopened suspicious letters are disposed of in accordance with GM Procedure 807, Terrorism Preparedness, Subsection .09, Response for a Suspicious Letter or Package, and are not placed into the Property Room.

B. Chemicals, equipment, and paraphernalia used in clandestine laboratories for the manufacture of illegal narcotics.
The Narcotics Unit shall be notified of the discovery of suspected clandestine narcotics labs. This unit has personnel specially trained to handle these types of incidents.

C. Motor vehicles and motor vehicle parts.

D. The Bomb Squad takes custody of explosives and combustibles. Fireworks and ammunition should be impounded in the substation ammunition/fireworks storage magazines, following the procedures listed in subsection .11 of this procedure. Containers which contain combustibles such as gasoline and butane are impounded at the Vehicle Storage Unit.

E. Live animals are transported to the Animal Care Services Department by Animal Care Services Department personnel.

F. Body parts, human or animal, are taken to the Medical Examiner’s Office.

G. Property measuring over eight (8) feet in length/height or weighing over two hundred (200) pounds is taken to the Vehicle Storage Unit.

Answer 495

A

.14 AFTER HOURS ENTRY INTO PROPERTY ROOM HOLDING AREA

A. Entry into the Property Room Holding Area after regular business hours is allowed, provided the authorized members:

Contact the Security Systems Desk using the phone located at the West entrance to the Property Room;
Identify themselves by giving their name, badge number, and any other identifying information required by Security Systems Desk personnel; and
Be responsible for the security of the Holding Area.

B. Security Systems Desk personnel will maintain a log of after-hours entries.

.15 EMERGENCY OPENING OF PROPERTY ROOM AFTER REGULAR BUSINESS HOURS

Officers/UEDIs and Crime Scene Unit Investigators will contact the Communications Unit Supervisor and request Property Room personnel return to open the property room after regular business hours under the following circumstances:
A. Large amounts of cash (in excess of $5,000.00) at the discretion of the field supervisor;
C. Large amounts of weapons are seized and cannot be stored in the provided lockers;
D. Large amounts of narcotics/controlled substances seized that cannot be stored in the provided lockers;
D. The volume of impounded property is such it cannot be held in the Holding Area;
E. A Supervisor determines property is too important to be held in the Holding Area; or
F. The entrance to the Holding Area is impaired due to mechanical or electrical malfunction.

Answer 496

A

.17 TEMPORARY WITHDRAWAL OF PROPERTY FROM THE PROPERTY ROOM BY OFFICERS, CRIME SCENE TECHNICIANS AND AUTHORIZED SERVICE AGENTS

A. Officers/UEDIs, Crime Scene Unit Investigators and police service agents authorized by their unit supervisor may temporarily withdraw property from the Property Room, for the purposes of presentation in court or for further investigation.

B. Officers/UEDIs, Crime Scene Unit Investigators and authorized police service agents temporarily withdrawing property from the Property Room will:

Request a temporary release either in person using SAPD Form #113-3, Temporary Release of Property, or through the use of WebView request (refer to instructions posted on http://wppswebprod/FileShare/SOP/DocHistory/282.pdf “FileonQ Entry Outline”).
Provide a copy of a subpoena duces tecum for the property, if applicable.

C. If temporarily released property is permanently released by a follow-up unit, the detective assigned to the case will forward SAPD Form #113-2R completed, or submit a request through WebView
(refer to “Property Room Instructions” posted on http://sapdweb).

D. If temporarily released property is to be used for presentation in a Court, the officer, Crime Scene Unit investigator, or authorized police service agent will only release the property to an employee assigned to the court.
The officer, Crime Scene Unit Investigator, or authorized police service agent will complete SAPD Form #113-2R, listing the name of the court to which the property was released.
The court employee will sign the form acknowledging receipt of the property.
In addition to the normal routing, the releasing officer, Crime Scene Unit Investigator, or authorized police service agent shall ensure the Property Room receives a copy of the release form.

E. Temporarily released property is returned to the Property Room within fourteen (14) days. If necessary, an approved extension, specifying the additional time required, is submitted to the Property Room supervisor.

F. Property not returned to the Property Room within the specified time is considered overdue.

When property is overdue, a notice to return the property or submit an approved SAPD Form #113-2R for the property within seven (7) days is sent to the officer, Crime Scene Unit Investigator, or authorized police service agent charged with custody of the property. A copy is sent to the officer’s unit commander; and
If there is no response to the overdue notice within seven (7) days, a second notice is sent to the officer, Crime Scene Unit investigator, or authorized police service agent, with copies to the officer’s unit commander and division commander.

Answer 497

A

.18 RIGHT TO REFUSE
A. Property / Evidence that is impounded and found to be in violation of Procedure 606 may be rejected for correction.

B. When items are found to be in violation of Procedure 606 and rejected for correction, they will be placed in a “Return” locker located at 401 S. Frio.

The officer and his/her supervisor will be notified by e-mail of the following:
a. Description of the items impounded;
b. The violation committed;
c. The return locker number in which the items are located; and
d. The combination/access code needed to retrieve the items.
(This information will be provided only to the officer).
Upon notification, the officer will return to 401 S. Frio on his/her next regular shift, retrieve the property in question and correct the violation.
Once corrected, the property will be placed in a standard intake locker located at 401 S. Frio.

C. Repeated violations or single severe incidents will be addressed through the chain of command.

Answer 498

A

.05 EXCLUSIVE AUTHORITY TO TOW VEHICLES
A. Officers have authority to impound any vehicle found parked in violation of any city ordinance related to traffic or
parking, abandoned in a public place, or constitutes a traffic hazard.
B. Exclusive authority to tow non-drivable vehicles involved in crashes is given by city ordinance to the company holding the current wrecker contract.
C. Officers have the authority to impound the vehicle of any person driving without state mandated minimum auto liability insurance coverage. This policy allows officers the option of impounding the vehicle if a motorist, insured or not, cannot produce the required insurance documentation before being towed.
1. Officers will first check for Evidence of Financial Responsibility on the vehicle, if the driver is unable to provide such proof, the officer will accept Proof of Financial Responsibility on the driver.
2. Failure to provide Evidence of Financial Responsibility provides the officer authority to impound the vehicle. (TTC 601.051 – 601.124)

Answer 499

A

.07 IMPOUNDED FOR FORFEITURE
A. Officers may seize and impound vehicles used or intended to be used for the illegal transportation or delivery of any
controlled substance in violation of the Texas Health and Safety Code, Sections 481 or 483.

B. When impounding a seized vehicle officers will follow GM Procedure 509, Legal Asset Seizure, and route a copy of reports to the Legal Asset Seizure Detail.
.08 IMPOUNDED AS EVIDENCE
A. When an officer has probable cause to believe a vehicle has been used in the commission of a crime, excluding
minor traffic offenses, the vehicle is impounded as evidence.
1. Under exigent circumstances a search warrant may not be necessary for impoundment of the vehicle.
2. If the vehicle is on private property, the officer attempts to obtain permission from the owner of the property to remove the vehicle. If permission is received, the officer has the owner sign SAPD Form #2091-A, Consent of Search of Private Premises, and impounds the vehicle.
3. If exigent circumstances do not exist or if the owner does not consent to a search, a search warrant is obtained in accordance with GM Procedure 504, Execution of Search Warrants, prior to impounding the vehicle.
B. When a vehicle is impounded as evidence, the officer will:
1. Write “Evidence” on the TSR;
2. Route a copy of his report to the appropriate follow-up unit; and
3. Request a UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigator to process the vehicle.

Answer 500

A

.10 IMPOUNDEDFORTRAFFICVIOLATIONS
A. Officers ticket and/or impound vehicles for any of the following traffic violations or court orders:
1. “Tow-Away-Zone” Parking Restrictions:
a. Vehicles in violation of downtown area “Tow-Away-Zone” parking restrictions are impounded at the storage facility of the company holding the current wrecker contract.
b. Vehicles parked in fire lanes at shopping malls are issued a ticket, but not impounded unless they are obstructing fire fighting equipment.
2. Traffic Hazards;
3. Uninsured Driver;
a. Driver/occupants, if 17 years of age or older, have the option of:
(1) Arranging for transportation of their choice. The officer should encourage and assist in making all reasonable attempts to arrange for this private transportation as the primary means of transport. Private transportation must be accomplished within the 30 minute wait-time allowed before towing;
(2) Iftransportationisnotaccomplishedwithinthethirty(30)minutewaittimeallowedbeforetowingthe officer shall transport the individual as outlined below:
(3) Being taken to the nearest police substation or residence, which ever is closer;
(a) Requestingtheofficerdropthemoffatanotherlocation,ifcloserthansubstationorresidence;
(4) WaivingTransportation-Releasedatthesceneifsafetodoso.
(5) Officers shall document every incident where the driver/occupants refuse transportation by the officer using an Incident report.
b. Driver/occupants under 17 years of age have the option of:
(1) Requesting a parent, legal guardian or custodian picks them up. The officer should encourage and assist in making all reasonable attempts to arrange for this private transportation as the primary means of transport. Private transportation must be accomplished within the 30 minute wait-time allowed before towing;
(2) Being returned to the Youth Processing Office if unable to locate a parent, legal guardian, or custodian;
(3) Being taken to their residence, if closer than the Youth Processing Office.
(4) Waiving Transportation – Released at the scene if safe to do so, in accordance with GM Procedure 602, Juveniles.
(5) Officers shall document every incident where the driver/occupants refuse transportation by the officer using an Incident Report
c. Officers transporting any individuals, male or female, will request a time check and give their vehicle odometer reading to the dispatcher upon leaving the scene and upon arrival at their destination.
d. The contents of the vehicle being towed must be inventoried and documented using an Incident Report.
4. Parked over two (2) hours on the untraveled portion of an expressway; and
5. Municipal Court Orders of Impoundment, provided:
a. The vehicle is illegally parked;
b. The officer has a copy of the court order; and
c. The court order is returned to Municipal Court.
B. If the owner of a vehicle being towed arrives at the location to claim the vehicle and the Contract Wrecker operator has attached ALL the equipment required to tow the vehicle, the vehicle is released to owner and the operator of the Contract Wrecker will be allowed to charge the vehicle’s owner a “drop fee”. The officer will write “DROP FEE” on the TSR. If ALL the required equipment has not been attached, no “drop fee” can be charged and the vehicle is released to the owner.
C. When stopping persons with no proof of auto liability insurance, officers shall utilize the following procedures (via the Information Channel) to attempt to verify insurance coverage.
1. Ask the driver for the name of the insurance company, phone number and agent’s name.
2. Contact dispatch – provide driver’s name, age, insurance agency and phone number, vehicle make, model, year, VIN #, agent’s name.
3. If dispatch can verify coverage, proceed with stop; do not write ticket for no insurance coverage.
4. If dispatch cannot verify coverage, the officer should consider the circumstances surrounding the situation before deciding if the vehicle should be towed, such as:
a. Physical condition of driver, (elderly, sick, etc.);
b. Weather conditions;
c. Call load;
d. If the driver is from out of state;
e. If there are small children in the car and/or the number of children;
f. If the driver or other occupants are disabled;
g. If there are animals in car;
h. The nature and quantity of contents in the vehicle (potential financial loss, perishable items, etc.);
i. Exigent circumstances;
j. Time of day; and
k. Location (desolate areas, open fields, safety issues, etc.)
5. If the officer decides to have the vehicle towed, the officer will allow a minimum of 30 minutes, before the wrecker arrives, for the driver to provide proof of insurance.
Officers will not initiate an inventory of the vehicle until after the 30 minute timeframe has elapsed.
An admission to being an uninsured driver allows the officer to proceed without a mandatory waiting period.

Once it has been determined the driver is uninsured, officers shall not allow vehicles to be parked instead of towed. They will either have the vehicle towed or allow the driver to proceed with the vehicle.
If an officer makes the decision not to tow an eligible vehicle because the driver fails to provide Evidence of Financial Responsibility, the officer will notify his supervisor of this decision before allowing the driver to proceed. This provides the supervisor the opportunity to review and approve those circumstances which caused the officer to decide not to tow. Nothing in this procedure requires the supervisor to make the scene to determine if a tow is required.

Answer 501

A

.11 IMPOUNDED AS AN ABANDONED VEHICLE
A. Vehicles abandoned on any public street, or any dedicated street on city property is handled as follows:
1. SAPD Form #114, Official Police Notice (green sticker), is placed on the windshield; and
2. If the vehicle remains after twenty-four (24) hours, a parking ticket is issued for “Using the Street for Storage” and the vehicle is impounded, in accordance with GM Procedure 402, Differential Police Response (N-Code 31).
B. Vehicles abandoned on city-owned property other than dedicated streets are handled in the same manner as an abandoned vehicle on a public street, except no parking ticket is issued.
C. If parked over two (2) hours on the untraveled portion of an expressway, the vehicles are impounded;
D. If an owner returns to claim his vehicle before the vehicle has been removed, Subsection .10B of this procedure will apply.
E. Vehicles abandoned on private property do not fall within the jurisdiction of this Department.

Answer 502

A

.13 IMPOUNDED FROM CRASH SCENE
A. Vehicles involved in public property traffic crashes and are not drivable are impounded at Growdon Storage Facility,
unless:
1. The driver, registered owner, or a member of the registered owner’s immediate family requests the vehicle be taken to a location other than the Growdon Storage Facility;
2. The vehicle was legally parked prior to the crash and is not a traffic hazard; and
3. The vehicle belongs to a governmental agency, is not a traffic hazard, and the agency requests to remove the vehicle by means of their choice.
B. If a driver of a vehicle involved in a traffic crash is incapacitated, but the vehicle is drivable, the vehicle is impounded at the Growdon Storage Facility for safe keeping, unless the registered owner or a member of the registered owner’s immediate family is available to drive the vehicle. Driver must show Evidence of Financial Responsibility as required pursuant to TTC 601.051 before driving away.
C. If a driver can make his vehicle drivable after minor repairs, the officer will allow the driver fifteen (15) minutes after the completion of the investigation to repair his vehicle. If the vehicle is still not drivable after that time, it is removed by contract wrecker. Driver must show Evidence of Financial Responsibility as required pursuant to TTC 601.051 before driving away.
D. Vehicles involved in public property crashes and come to a rest on private property are removed.
E. Vehicles involved in private property crashes and remain on private property are the responsibility of the owner to remove.

Answer 503

A

.15 INVENTORY AND DISPOSITION OF PROPERTY FROM IMPOUNDED VEHICLES
A. Officers inventory all impounded vehicles for any items of personal property. An inventory is a process for locating
personal property so it can be protected while in the custody of the Department.
B. An inventory is limited to places where a person ordinarily would store or leave items of personal property, such as:
1. Passenger compartment;
2. Trunk, if key is available; and
3. Any open container.
C. All personal property found during an inventory of a vehicle is listed in the details of a written report. The personal property is listed according to the location where it was found (i.e., under front seat, passenger compartment, trunk, etc.).
D. All personal property found during an inventory of a vehicle is placed in the Property Room, except property from:
1. Vehicles impounded for “0700 - 0900 or 1600 - 1800 Tow-Away-Zone” violations - Unless there is any “Valuable Property” in plain view inside the vehicle. If the property is not accessible or the vehicle is locked, refer to #2 below;
2. Locked vehicles - If entry cannot be made, the officer inventories visible property, listing the property on the TSR and in his report. The vehicle is impounded at the Growdon Storage Facility, on Secure Row, only after a supervisor personally inspects the vehicle and authorizes the storage by signing the TSR; and
3. Unlocked vehicles with bulky or excessive amounts of property - These vehicles are impounded at the Growdon Storage Facility, on Secure Row, only after a supervisor personally inspects the vehicles and authorizes the storage by signing the TSR.

Answer 504

A

.05 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

Officers operating emergency vehicles must exercise sound judgment, carefully consider the facts, and weigh the seriousness of the offense against the consequences of jeopardizing the safety of others by continually evaluating the following existing environmental factors:

Time of day and day of week;
Lighting conditions;
Volume of traffic, both pedestrian and vehicular;
Type of roadway;
Condition of the roadway (i.e., dry, wet, paved, or gravel);
Weather conditions (i.e., clear, overcast, rain, or fog);
Condition of the emergency vehicle and fleeing vehicle;
Speeds of the emergency vehicle and fleeing vehicle;
Distance to be covered;
Types of traffic control signals or devices; and
School zones or areas where large crowds gather.

.06 EMERGENCY RESPONSE GUIDELINES

A. Only emergency vehicles will be utilized for emergency operations.
B. Officers will not drive emergency vehicles the wrong way on an expressway, an expressway exit or entrance ramp, a divided highway, or any other street or highway designated for one-way traffic.
C. Officers will not transport prisoners, witnesses, suspects, complainants, or any person who is not a member of the Department who has not signed SAPD Form #166-AR, Civilian Observer Authorization and Release, when driving emergency vehicles in emergency operations.

Answer 505

A

.08 FOOT PURSUITS

A. When engaging in a foot pursuit of a suspect, officers must exercise sound judgment, carefully consider the facts, and weigh the seriousness of the offense against the consequences of jeopardizing the safety of others.

B. While engaged in a foot pursuit officers should, as soon as safe to do so, update the Dispatcher with the information.

Answer 506

A

.04 LOST PERSONS

A. When attempting to locate lost persons, the officer(s) assigned to the call assists the reporting party in locating the person who is lost.

B. Should it become apparent the person cannot be located without further assistance, the officer notifies a supervisory officer concerning the situation, as a more detailed search of the area may be necessary.

C A supervisory officer makes a decision regarding any further disposition of the case.

.05 REPORTING MISSING PERSONS

A. All reports of missing persons are recorded on SAPD Forms No. 2-1, Offense Report, and No. 2-3, Offense Continuation.

B. Missing person reports are taken immediately with no time lapse or arbitrary waiting period required before reporting an individual missing.

C. Missing person complaints involving a juvenile/child who is seventeen (17) years of age or younger or an elderly individual sixty-five (65) years of age and older or confused adult are taken by a Patrol Division officer in the field.
The officer assigned to the call notifies a supervisory officer of the situation, as a search of the area may be necessary.

D. All other reports of missing persons, except persons missing from the San Antonio State Hospital, are taken, in person, by any of the following:

Any Patrol Division officer;
The Missing Persons /Juvenile Processing Office.

E. Reports of persons missing from the San Antonio State Hospital may be called in by telephone to the Missing Persons / Juvenile Processing Office.

F. A missing persons report is not taken if a person is not missing from or last seen in the City of San Antonio.

Answer 507

A

C. Blue Alerts - Designed to speed in the apprehension of violent criminals who kill or seriously wound local, state, or federal law enforcement officers.
During a Blue Alert, the public receives information regarding the suspected assailant, facilitating tips and leads to law enforcement.
The below represents Blue Alert criteria for the state’s network:

A law enforcement officer must have been killed or seriously injured by an offender.
The investigating law enforcement agency must determine that the offender poses a serious risk or threat to the public and other law enforcement personnel.
A detailed description of the offender’s vehicle, vehicle tag, or partial tag must be available for broadcast to the public.
The investigating law enforcement agency of jurisdiction must recommend activation of the Blue Alert to the Texas Department of Public Safety (DPS).

D. Endangered Missing Person Alert - Texas AMBER Alert legislation was updated to include alerts for missing persons (of any age) with an intellectual disability (Autism, Developmental Disorders etc.) In order to avoid public confusion with AMBER Alerts for abducted children, the name “Endangered Missing Persons Alert” was selected.
The below represents Endangered Missing Persons Alert criteria for the state’s network:

Has the missing person been diagnosed with an Intellectual Disability and/or a Pervasive Developmental Disorder, including Asperger’s Disorder, Autistic Disorder, Autism Spectrum Disorder, Childhood Disintegrative Disorder, Rett’s Disorder or a Pervasive Developmental Disorder (Not Otherwise Specified)?
If the missing person has been diagnosed with an Intellectual Disability, law enforcement shall require a written diagnosis from a physician or psychologist licensed to practice within Texas, or certified by the Texas Department of Aging and Disability Services and/or Texas Department of State Health Services.
Is it confirmed that an investigation has taken place, verifying that a reasonable explanation for the missing person’s disappearance has been ruled out and that the disappearance poses a credible threat to the health and safety of the missing person?
Is the Endangered Missing Persons Alert request being made within 72 hours of the missing person’s disappearance?
Is there sufficient information available to disseminate to the public that could assist in locating the missing person?
(Highway signs will be activated only if accurate vehicle information is available AND it is confirmed that the missing person was in the vehicle at the time of the disappearance).

E. Camo Alert - Designed to notify the public of a missing current or former member of the United States armed forces, including the National Guard or a reserve or auxiliary unit of any branch of the armed forces.
The below represents Camo alert criteria for the state’s network:

Verification from the Texas Department of Public Safety that the missing military member is registered for the camo alert program.
Confirmation the individual reported missing is a current or former member of the United States armed forces, including the National Guard or a reserve or auxiliary unit of any branch of the armed forces and that the individual’s location is unknown.
Confirmation the missing person suffers from a mental illness, including post-traumatic stress disorder or a traumatic brain injury.
Confirmation the disappearance poses a credible threat to the military member’s health and safety or the health and safety of another.

Note: A physician’s or psychologist’s letterhead, indicating the impaired mental condition, date of diagnosis, patient’s name, with physician’s signature is recommended to satisfy the documentation requirement.

F. CLEAR Alert - Designed to close the gap between missing children and senior citizens.
The CLEAR alert assists law enforcement in locating and rescuing missing, kidnapped or abducted adults or adults who are in immediate danger of injury or death, as well as aid in locating any potential suspects.
The below represents CLEAR Alert criteria for the state’s network:

Is the individual 18 to 64 years of age, whose whereabouts are unknown?
Has a preliminary investigation verified the adult is in imminent danger of bodily injury or death or is the disappearance involuntary such as an abduction or kidnapping?
Is the clear alert request within 72 hours of the individual’s disappearance?
Is sufficient information available to disseminate to the public to help locate the individual, a suspect, or the vehicle used in the incident?

Answer 508

A

.04 RECOGNITION OF MENTAL ILLNESS

A. Police officers routinely encounter situations involving persons exhibiting unusual behavioral characteristics, ranging from passive to violent. Police officers must recognize symptoms which may indicate the existence of mental illness.

B. The following are some of the symptoms commonly associated with persons with mental illness:

Drastic mood swings or behavioral changes;
Loss of memory;
Thoughts of being plotted against or delusions of grandeur;
Speaks to himself, hears voices, sees visions, or smells strange odors;
Thinks people are watching or talking to him;
Exhibits an extreme degree of panic or fright;
Behaves in away dangerous to himself or others
(i. e.,hostile,suicidal,makesthreatstowardsothers,etc.)
Poor personal hygiene or appearance
Demonstrates an unusual thought process or verbal expressions or is catatonic.

C. Upon recognition of a mental health crisis situation the officer’s responsibilities include:

Maintaining a high degree of caution in dealing with the potentially unpredictable nature of persons with mental illness;
Protecting the general public from the actions of the persons with mental illness;
Protecting the persons with mental illness from his/her own actions; and
Providing the most effective remedy available at the time to resolve the crisis situation.

Answer 509

A

.07 ARRIVAL AT THE SCENE

A. Circumstances permitting, the officer takes time to effectively evaluate the situation prior to taking any action.
Officers should determine the best course of action to be taken, including the need for Emergency Medical Services (EMS) or Warrantless Emergency Detention.

B. Officers should be prepared to take the appropriate tactical measures to protect themselves and others.
Officers should remain aware of the location of their cover officer, along with others involved in the situation.

C. Upon arrival at the scene, officers shall approach persons with mental illness with caution. Officers should keep these persons under close observation and speak to them in an unhurried, patient and calm manner, which is maintained throughout the incident.

D. A frisk of the individual and a search of the immediate surrounding area are conducted, in accordance with GM Procedure 502, Warrantless Arrests, Searches, and Seizures, to ensure the absence of any potential weapons.
Frisking and handcuffing the individual may be necessary to satisfy safety requirements.

E. The person with mental illness should be guided to a safe and quiet area, if possible.
This area should be away from other persons or things that may further incite the situation.

F. Officers shall not force individuals to take any medications. If the individual is taken into custody, any medication being taken by the individual should be transported with the individual and released to the appropriate medical or detention personnel (this shall be documented in the report).

G. Officers attempting to resolve a mental health crisis should rely on:

Close and constant visual observation of the person experiencing a mental health crisis situation;
Interviews of the person experiencing a mental health crisis situation. If possible, officers should interview relatives, friends, neighbors, or others associated with the situation;
Information provided by medical and mental health professionals regarding the physical and mental health condition of the person experiencing a mental health crisis situation;
Other available information sources and personnel, such as Center for Health Care Services, a CIT Officer, a field supervisor and other officers or data files;
Personal experience, training, and sound judgment.

Answer 510

A

C. Warrantless Emergency Detention-Custody of Persons with Mental Illness
1. Warrantless Emergency Detention is civil in nature and does not impose criminal sanctions.

However, officers should use sound tactics when contacting a person with a mental illness as hazardous situations may arise.

Answer 511

A

.09 REPORT RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The officer assigned to the call by the dispatcher will have report responsibility for the mental health crisis situation, including the transporting of the person to an evaluation facility or detention facility.

B. Officers assigned report responsibilities will document their findings and any actions taken in their respective report.
Copies of any report involving mental health issues shall be forwarded to the Mental Health Detail.

C. Officers handling a mental health crisis where the person with mental illness has not committed a criminal offense, but where the person is taken into custody for a Warrantless Emergency Detention, will complete an Offense Report along with SAPD Form #127-ED.
**No complainant will be listed on the report.*
The person with mental illness will be listed as the “Emergency Detention” (ED) on the report.
The Offense Report will be titled as “Emergency Detention.”
Officers will list the situation found as “Mental Health Related” on all Emergency Detention offense reports and any report indicating the primary reason for the call was due to a mental health issue.

D. Officers handling a mental health crisis where the person with mental illness has not committed a criminal offense and where no Warrantless Emergency Detention is made will complete an Incident Report.
Additionally, officers will complete the appropriate report criteria documenting the mental health crisis.

E. Officers handling a mental health crisis where a person with mental illness has committed a criminal offense will complete an Offense Report as follows:
1. The offense report will be titled with the appropriate criminal offense if an arrest is made and shall include the details of the criminal offense and any details needed to establish the criteria for Warrantless Emergency Detention if applicable.
The complainant of the criminal offense will be listed as the “Victim” (V). If the person with mental illness is arrested for the criminal offense, the person will be listed as the “Arrested Person” (AP) on the Offense Report.

2.   If no arrest and no Warrantless Emergency Detention are made, the person will be listed as the “Suspect” (SP). Additionally, officers will complete the appropriate report criteria documenting the mental health crisis;

If the person with mental illness is not arrested for the criminal offense and a Warrantless Emergency Detention is made, the primary offense will be titled Emergency Detention, the person will be listed as the “Emergency Detention” (ED) on the Offense Report.
The related offense will be titled as the criminal offense with the person also titled as the “Suspect” (SP).
Additionally, officers will complete the appropriate report criteria documenting the mental health crisis and shall list in the details of the report that the ED was not arrested.
A copy of the report shall be sent to the appropriate follow-up unit.

F. Officers who make a Warrantless Emergency Detention will complete SAPD Form #127-ED and include the case number at the top of the form.
The original application will be forwarded to the Records Office.
A duplicate with an original signature will be given to the facility accepting the person with mental illness along with a copy of the offense report.

G. Officers will forward copies of all reports involving mental health crisis situations, including a copy of SAPD Form #127-ED, to the Psychological Services Office and the Crisis Negotiators Detail when the officer reasonably believes the person with mental illness has the potential to become involved in critical incident.

Answer 512

A

INITIAL AND REFRESHER TRAINING

A. Police Cadets shall receive a minimum of 40 hours of Crisis Intervention Team Training regarding interactions with persons suspected of suffering from mental illness in the Training Academy.

B. Officers shall receive refresher training regarding interactions with persons suspected of suffering from mental illness at least every three years.

C. Newly hired civilian employees who will have contact with the public shall receive initial training interactions with persons suspected of suffering from mental illness from their parent unit.

D. Civilian employees who have contact with the public shall receive refresher training regarding interactions with persons suspected of suffering from mental illness at least every three years.

Answer 513

A

.05 INFORMATIONAL CARDS

A. SAPD Form #12-HI-A, Information For Hard of Hearing - Arrested Person, is a card presented to a deaf or hard of hearing person who has been arrested or suspected of committing a Class B misdemeanor or higher offense, advising them they are under arrest and will be taken to jail or to a police facility for questioning.

B. SAPD Form #12-HI-T, Information For Hard of Hearing - Traffic/Misdemeanor Citation, is a card presented to a deaf or hard of hearing person who has been stopped for a traffic violation, explaining why they were stopped and the action they should take concerning the traffic citation.

.06 NEED FOR DEAFLINK / QUALIFIED INTERPRETER
A. Any officer unable to communicate effectively with a deaf or hard of hearing person involved in any police matter (i.e., traffic crash, disturbance, etc.) shall escort the individual to the nearest DeafLink location.

B. If the police matter is serious and the individual cannot be escorted to the nearest DeafLink location, the officer shall request, through a supervisor, a qualified interpreter be provided to communicate with the deaf or hard of hearing person.

Answer 514

A

.05 RESPONDING TO INITIAL REQUESTS FOR SERVICE

A. Officers responding to requests for police services who come into contact with individuals showing outward signs or manifestations of disease or parasites, or individuals suspected of having a contagious disease or parasite, should avoid unnecessary physical contact with the persons, other than for the following reasons:

The rendering of emergency first aid;
To stabilize a life-threatening situation; or
To effect an arrest.

B. Members forewarned of, or who suspect, the presence of a contagious disease or parasite take appropriate precautions to prevent unnecessary skin contact by using the various equipment provided in an Infection Barrier Kit.

C. Members unable to avoid close personal contact with a person believed to have a contagious disease or parasite should decontaminate themselves and their vehicle as soon as possible in accordance with Sections .13 and .14 of this procedure.

.06 PRISONERS EXHIBITING SYMPTOMS OF CONTAGIOUS DISEASES OR PARASITES

A. Officers arresting persons with outward signs of contagious diseases or parasites, or persons suspected of having contagious diseases or parasites isolate those prisoners from other prisoners.

B. Prisoners who require medical treatment as the result of highly contagious diseases are transported by an E.M.S. unit.

C. Prisoners exhibiting symptoms of having contagious diseases or parasites who are to be treated or admitted into a hospital are handled in accordance with Subsection .09D of this procedure and Procedure 601, Prisoners.

D. Prisoners who are suspected of having contagious diseases or parasites, but have been cleared from the need of medical attention are processed for the alleged offense with the nature of the suspected contagious disease or parasite noted in the officer’s report and on the booking slip.
The City of San Antonio Detention Center supervisor is advised of the prisoner’s suspected condition at the time of booking.

E. Prisoners exhibiting symptoms of contagious diseases or parasites are not transported with other prisoners.

F. When transporting prisoners exhibiting symptoms of contagious diseases or parasites, officers should operate the police vehicle in the following manner:

1. Drive with the window glass in the down position; 
2. Place the air-conditioning or heating controls in the fresh air mode instead of the recycle air mode.

.07 SCENES INVOLVING SUSPECTS/VICTIMS WITH CONTAGIOUS DISEASES OR PARASITES

A. Officers at scenes where body fluids are present or where contagious diseases or parasites are suspected do not deviate from established procedures for securing the scene from tampering or intrusion.

B. Officers should use Infection Barrier Kits at any scene where body fluids are present or where contagious diseases or parasites are suspected.

C. Victims believed to have contagious diseases or parasites are not handled by officers, unless necessary, without protective gloves or other precautionary measures.

D. Officers shall not eat, drink, or smoke at scenes where body fluids are present or other contagious factors exist.

E. The Crime Scene Unit is notified in cases where evidence is believed to be contaminated with infectious material, contagious diseases, or parasites and needs to be recovered/transported to the Property Room or the Medical Examiner’s Office.
Officers shall notify members of the Crime Scene Unit the evidence may be contaminated with infectious material, contagious diseases, or parasites prior to the Crime Scene Unit member entering the scene and collecting the evidence.

F. Evidence recovered at crime scenes involving infectious material or contagious diseases is properly packaged and clearly marked in accordance with Crime Scene Unit procedures before being placed in the Property Room or taken to the Medical Examiner’s Office.

G. The owner or person in charge of the premises where an incident occurred is advised to contact the Metropolitan Health District to obtain the proper procedure for decontaminating the premises if infectious material, contagious diseases, or parasites are present or suspected.

Answer 515

A

B. Duties of Assisting Officers / Detective Investigators

The assisting officer who is guarding the prisoner will ask the prisoner if he would voluntarily consent to a test for communicable diseases.
a. Regardless of whether the person consents or refuses, the prisoner is asked to sign SAPD Form #CD-1, Consent/Refusal to Draw Blood for the Testing of Communicable Diseases.
b. If the person refuses to sign the form, the officer writes “Refused to Sign” on the portion of the form where the prisoner is supposed to sign.
The officer then dates and signs the form as the witness.
c. If the prisoner consents, the assisting officer will notify hospital personnel and the tests for communicable diseases will be conducted immediately.
d. If the prisoner refuses to be tested for communicable diseases, the assisting officer will notify the follow-up unit/Night CID Unit and his supervisor.
The follow-up unit, which has investigative responsibility for the criminal offense committed, will assist the officer in completing the proper paperwork to have the prisoner tested for communicable diseases when the prisoner has refused to be tested for communicable diseases.
a. The follow-up unit Detectives, during normal business hours, or the Night CID Unit Detectives, between the hours of 1900 and 0500, will assist the exposed officer in completing SAPD Form #CD-2, Affidavit in Support of Mandatory Testing for Communicable Diseases.
This process should be completed at the hospital.
b. After the officer has signed the affidavit, the follow-up unit Detectives or Night CID Unit Detectives will notarize it.
c. The follow-up unit Detectives or Night CID Unit Detectives will then complete SAPD Form #CD-3, Order for Testing, and present it as well as copies of completed SAPD Forms #CD-1 and #CD-2 to a magistrate having jurisdiction over the prisoner.

(1) After the magistrate signs the order, a copy is made and given to the personnel at University Hospital, so the prisoner can be immediately tested for communicable diseases.
(2) SAPD Forms #CD-1, #CD-2, and #CD-3 are then attached to the original offense/incident report and forwarded to the Records Office.
d. In the event the exposed officer is unable to sign the affidavit, the follow-up unit Detectives or Night CID Unit Detectives will contact a magistrate for assistance in having the prisoner tested on the magistrate’s own motion in accordance with Article 18.22(a) of the Code of Criminal Procedures.

C. Duties of Supervisors

Once a supervisor is notified of a potential exposure incident, he will ensure the exposed officer and the prisoner are transported to University Hospital for testing.
If members are accidentally exposed to infectious material by a person other than a prisoner and the person consents to the test, a supervisor will arrange for the transportation of this person to University Hospital.
The supervisor should go the hospital where the officer is located and remind the officer who has been exposed of the proper follow-up procedures.
The supervisor will properly complete all Workers’ Compensation forms and ensure all forms are delivered to the Accounting and Personnel Office in accordance with Procedure 916, Workers’ Compensation.

D. Medical Testing of Prisoners for Communicable Diseases

Prisoners who have potentially exposed officers to communicable diseases are transported to University Hospital in accordance with Section .06 of this procedure.
The assisting officer will inform the medical staff of the details surrounding the exposure incident and follow the guidelines listed in Subsection .09B.

E. Follow-up Procedures

Members who would like to know the results of the communicable diseases exams will call the Epidemiologist with the Health Department at 207-8876.

Answer 516

A

.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT / SUPPLIES

A. The presence of an infectious disease or parasite is presumed anytime disposable equipment or supplies are utilized.
Such supplies or equipment are not indiscriminately discarded at the scene or disposed of in a way which may cause casual contact by another person.
B. After being used, all Infection Barrier Kit items and any other items or supplies used as an infection barrier are to be disposed of properly.
The only acceptable method of disposal is to seal the items in one of the red disposable bags marked “Biohazard Infectious Waste” contained in the Infection Barrier Kits.
After being sealed, the biohazard infectious waste is taken to the Fleet Services Management Office, which is located at 329 S. Frio.
A large trash can marked “Biohazard Infectious Waste” will be placed directly outside of the Fleet Services Management Office, so officer may properly dispose of the biohazard infectious waste. Officers disposing of biohazard infectious waste shall document in a written report the method used for disposal.
Copies of the report are routed to the officer’s supervisor and the Fleet Services Management Office.
C. After the trash can labeled “Biohazard Infectious Waste” is full, a member of the Fleet Services Management Office will deliver the Biohazard Waste to the Health Department Lab located at 332 W. Commerce on the 2nd floor.
Members of the Fleet Services Management Office will call in advance to schedule the delivery. The telephone number to the Health Department Lab is 207- 8747.

.13 DECONTAMINATION OF POLICE VEHICLES

A. At no time will an officer drive or place another person in a police vehicle containing visible blood or body fluid or in a police vehicle thought or presumed to contain the presence of a contagious disease or parasite.
This is for the protection of both the officer and any other person being placed in or riding in the vehicle.

B. Police vehicles containing small amounts of blood or body fluids are cleaned using the hospital grade disinfectant by the member operating the vehicle immediately after the departure of a prisoner or contagious person.
The hospital grade disinfectant can be obtained through the Fleet Services Management Office.

C. Police vehicles containing large amounts of blood or body fluids or police vehicles thought or presumed to contain the presence of a contagious disease or parasite are sealed and immediately returned to the assigned substation by contract wrecker for decontamination by the Fleet Services Management Office.

Police vehicles are sealed by placing yellow police tape around the vehicle and placing a notice with the word “Contaminated” on the driver’s side window.
The officer sealing the police vehicle shall send a written report detailing the reason for sealing the vehicle to his Unit/Shift Director and the Fleet Services Management Office.

D. Police vehicles requiring decontamination are processed by the Fleet Services Management Office in accordance with its standard operating procedures.

E. Prisoner transport wagons, as a precautionary measure against contagious diseases or parasites, shall be sprayed with a hospital grade disinfectant by the assigned officer upon completion of each tour of duty.
The hospital grade disinfectant shall be supplied by the Fleet Services Management Office and kept in stock at any unit assigned a prisoner transport wagon.

Answer 517

A

.16 MARK 1 NAAK
(NERVE AGENT ANTIDOTE KITS)

The PPE Kit contains three (3) Mark 1 Nerve Agent Antidote Kits.
Each of the Mark 1 Nerve Agent Antidote Kits has two auto injectors.
One injector is 2 mgs of Atropine and the other injector is 600 mgs of 2 Pam-Chloride.

A. The Mark 1 Nerve Agent Antidote Kits can cause serious injury if not used correctly; therefore, officers shall treat these injectors with the same level of respect and security as firearms.

B. The Mark 1 Nerve Agent Antidote Kits are only to be used on the officer by himself or other first responders who are already in their protective equipment.

C. The Mark 1 Nerve Agent Antidote Kits are to be used by an officer when he believes he has been exposed to a nerve agent and begins showing signs and symptoms.
1. Symptoms of nerve agents include: Salivation, Lacrimation, Urination, Defecation, Gastrointestinal Distress, or Emesis (SLUDGE).
2. If an officer believes he has been exposed to a nerve agent, the officer shall:
a. Immediately remove himself from the contaminated area;
b. Immediately notify the dispatcher to start EMS;
c. Remove any items he has in his front pants pockets which may break the needle to the injectors;
d. Measure a hand width above the knee and a hand width below the hip, and
e. Inject himself with the Mark 1 Nerve Agent Antidote auto injectors in the meaty portion of both of his thighs.
(It is recommended both injectors be used simultaneously – one in each thigh.)

After an officer injects himself, he shall place the bottom cap of each of the Mark 1 Nerve Agent Antidote Kits on his fingers.
This will help EMS determine how many series of shots the officer has taken.
a. If an officer continues to feel the effects of the nerve agent (SLUDGE) after 10 minutes, he shall again inject himself with the Mark 1 Nerve Agent Antidote Kit.
(It is recommended both injectors be used simultaneously – one in each thigh.)
b. After the second set of injections with the Mark 1 Nerve Agent Antidote Kit, if an officer continues to feel the effects of the nerve agent (SLUDGE) after 10 minutes, he shall again inject himself with the Mark 1 Nerve Agent Antidote Kit. (It is recommended both injectors be used simultaneously – one in each thigh.)
c. Officers shall not inject themselves with more than the three Mark 1 Nerve Agent Antidote Kits provided in their PPE Kits in a given day.

Answer 518

A

.04 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Each officer has a responsibility for preventing racial/bias profiling. Officers must remain customer-oriented, while
also considering their safety and the safety of others. Officers should:
1. Extend a customary greeting to each person they stop or detain;
2. Identify themselves by name;
3. Explain the reason for the stop or detention;
4. Afford the person the opportunity to provide their explanation of their behavior;
5. Politely ask for the person’s identification; and
6. Remain courteous and project a professional demeanor during the interview or questioning.
B. Officers shall refrain from participating in or encouraging any actions or statements which could be perceived as racial/bias profiling. They must document the law enforcement-initiated action and report any acts or perceived acts of racial/bias profiling in accordance with Subsection .05B of this procedure.

C. Each officer is responsible for assisting in the prevention of racial/bias profiling by the following actions:
1. Officers making custodial/non-custodial arrests shall base the arrests on probable cause supporting the elements of the offense and not on racial/bias profiling.
2. Officers conducting a lawful detention, including stop and frisks, shall base the lawful detention on reasonable suspicion at the time of the stop and not on racial/bias profiling.
3. Officers conducting field contacts (interviews) shall do so in accordance with GM Procedure 508, Field Contacts.
4. Officers shall refrain from participating in or encouraging any actions or statements which could be reasonably perceived as racial/bias profiling.
5. Officers shall report any acts of racial/bias profiling in writing to their immediate supervisor.
D. Supervisory officers shall monitor the actions of the officers under their command to ensure racial/bias profiling does not occur and is not condoned. Supervisors shall:
1. Take immediate and appropriate remedial action whenever they observe, or are made aware of, any racial/bias profiling.
2. Immediately document any complaint or observed incident of any acts or perceived acts of racial/bias profiling in accordance with Section .05.
3. Immediately submit all reports of racial/bias profiling through their chain of command to their Division Commander.

Answer 519

A

.06 TRAINING
The Department shall be responsible for providing training to all officers in racial/bias profiling to emphasize the need to respect the rights of all citizens to be free from unreasonable government intrusion or law enforcement-initiated action. This training shall include:
A. Cadet Training;
B. Annual In-Service Training;
C. Input from those classes of persons identified in this policy in development of curriculum;
D. Incorporation of the TCOLE Curriculum; and
E. Specific lesson plans for Patrol Officers, Supervisors, FTOs, etc.

.07 DISCIPLINARY ACTIONS
A. The SAPD considers racial/bias profiling a serious form of officer misconduct. The Department shall take direct
and immediate actions to prevent such behavior, and to remedy all reported instances of racial/bias profiling.
B. Officers who are found to have engaged in racial/bias profiling will be subject to appropriate corrective action including, but not limited to, referral to the Officer Concern Program, and/or discipline such as discharge or criminal actions.

Answer 520

A

.11 IMMIGRATION POLICY

A. Officers will not refer persons to Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) unless the person has a federal deportation warrant. National Origin, immigration status, ethnicity or race are not a basis for an arrest and officers will not base any arrest on those conditions.

The San Antonio Police Department, in conjunction with other entities, will assist crime victims and witnesses in obtaining U-Visas.
The U-Visa is an immigration benefit that can be sought by victims of certain crimes who are currently assisting or have previously assisted law enforcement in the investigation or prosecution of a crime, or who are likely to be helpful in the investigation or prosecution of criminal activity.
Arrested persons will have their identities verified by Bexar County Deputies at the Bexar County Jail.
Decisions regarding deportation are not/will not be made by SAPD officers.
Officers do not conduct background checks on everyone they encounter.

B. Officers will verify identification and perform a background check on people to whom they are issuing a citation, legally detaining, arresting, or processing for magistration.

Officers may take into custody any person who cannot provide valid identification or sufficient information for an officer to confirm the person’s identity.
Valid identification includes, but is not limited to, state identification cards, driver’s license, government IDs such as passports or military ID.
The “Matricula Consular,” issued by the Mexican Consulate, will also be considered an acceptable form of identification.
Once identity has been confirmed, officers will decide whether to release a person who is being detained who is either a witness or the recipient of a citation, or based on probable cause, arrest the person.

C. Officers will not detain and/or arrest an individual based on the fact or suspicion that they are in the United States illegally.
1. The enforcement priorities of the San Antonio Police Department are to protect public safety and foster community trust.
The priorities do not include asking individuals for proof of citizenship or legal residency.

Officers may not inquire into the immigration status of a victim of or witness to an alleged criminal offense unless the officer determines that the inquiry is necessary to:
(1) investigate the offense; or
(2) provide the victim or witness with information about federal visas designed to protect individuals providing assistance to law enforcement.
Officers are authorized to arrest persons based on probable cause that a crime has been committed.
Immigration status alone is not probable cause for an arrest.
Officers having reasonable suspicion that a person or persons may by a victim or suspect in human trafficking will immediately notify a supervisor and the appropriate follow-up unit, and will handle matter in accordance with GM Proc. 713, Human Trafficking.

Answer 521

A

E. Officers making motor vehicle stops requiring racial profile data collection on a form other than a traffic or warning citation shall fill out the report completely, listing the following information in the appropriate boxes for the operator of the motor vehicle:

Race/Ethnicity known prior to detention
a. 0–NO
b. 1–YES
Reason for stop
a. 0 – Traffic law violation
b. 1 – Other law violation
c. 2 – Dispatched – with vehicle description
d. 3 – Dispatched – with officer initiated stop
e. 4 – Field contact
f. 5 – Suspicious conduct
Search
a. 0–None
b. 1 – Consent
c. 2 – Non-consent
Reason for search
a. 0–N/A
b. 1 – Contraband/evidence in plain view
c. 2 – Probable cause
d. 3 – Reasonable suspicion
e. 4 – Vehicle towed
f. 5 – Arrest
Custodial Arrest Made
a. 0–No
b. 1 – Yes – Violation of Penal Code
c. 2 – Yes – Violation of Traffic Law
d. 3 – Yes – Violation of Ordinance
e. 4 – Yes – Warrant
f. 5 – Yes – Other Law Violation
Citation Issued
a. 0–None
b. 1 – Written warning
c. 2 – Written traffic citation
d. 3 – Misdemeanor citation
Contraband or evidence
a. 0–None
b. 1 – Drugs/Paraphernalia
c. 2 – Money
d. 3 – Firearm
e. 4 – Knife/Edged Weapon
f. 5 – Other Weapon
g. 6 – Alcohol/Tobacco
h. 7 – Stolen Property
i. 8 – Other

F. Failure by an officer to document a traffic or pedestrian stop; field contact; or any other officer-initiated interaction, as required by this procedure, shall not constitute prima facie evidence of racial profiling.

Answer 522

A

.03 DIPLOMATIC/CONSULAR IMMUNITY

A. Foreign diplomats and consular officials have varying degrees of immunity from arrest. Foreign diplomats and consular officials should carry an identification card issued by the U.S. Department of State or the U.S. Mission to the United Nations.
The Diplomatic and Consular Immunity Guide for Law Enforcement and Judicial Authorities can be accessed on the State Department Website:
http://www.state.gov/documents/organization/150546.pdf.

A diplomatic passport does not automatically grant its holder diplomatic immunity.
Consular ID does not automatically grant its holder diplomatic immunity.

B. When an officer is investigating an incident in which a suspect claims diplomatic or consular immunity, the officer shall verify the status of the suspect and immediately notify his supervisor.

C. The status of a suspect claiming diplomatic or consular immunity is verified by calling either the U.S. Department of State or the U.S. Mission to the United Nations depending on which entity issued the identification card.

If the U.S. Department of State issued the identification card, the officer shall verify the status by having the dispatcher call the Protocol Office at (202) 647-1985 (daytime), after hours contact the State Department Operations Center at (202) 647-1512, that is staffed 24-hours a day.
If the identification card was issued by the U.S. Mission to the United Nations, the officer shall verify the status by having the dispatcher call
(212) 415-4444, that is also staffed 24-hours a day.
Should you encounter any problems or need further assistance, you may call the Diplomatic Security Command Center at (571) 345-3146, or toll free 1-866-217-2089

D. After the official status has been verified and if the suspect has full immunity and inviolability, he may only be handcuffed when he poses an immediate threat to anyone’s safety or it is apparent that a serious crime may be otherwise committed.

The detained person may be issued a traffic citation, but he or she cannot be arrested for refusing to sign it.
Persons having full immunity and inviolability must be released after all pertinent information is obtained.
Persons who have full immunity and inviolability may not be arrested.

E. After the official status has been verified and if the suspect has less than full immunity and inviolability, the suspect may be arrested and will be handled in accordance with Departmental procedures.

Officials from the U.S. Department of State or officials from the U.S. Mission to the United Nations will assist the officer in making this determination.
Follow-up units/Night CID Unit will also assist the officer in making this determination, in accordance with GM Procedure 708, Follow-up Units.

F. After the incident has been resolved, the handling officer will:

Fax a copy of his report and/or traffic citation to the U.S. Department of State in Washington, D.C., (202) 895- 3613, or to the U.S. Mission to the United Nations in New York, (212) 415-4162, depending on which entity issued the person’s identification card; and
Route a copy of his report, through his chain of command, to the Office of the Chief.

G. Supervisors having been informed of a suspect claiming diplomatic or consular immunity will:

Make the scene of the incident, if possible;
Prepare and distribute SAPD Form #103-NEN, Newsworthy Event Notification; and
Ensure a copy of the officer’s report and/or traffic citation is faxed to the U.S. Department of State or the U.S. Mission to the United Nations.

.04 TRAINING

All Officers are to receive training regarding notification and access requirements in accordance with international treaties for foreign nationals.

.05 RESPONDING TO CONSULATE

A. The only official consulate within San Antonio is the Consulate of Mexico (127 Navarro St, 78205).

B. An official consulate is not so much foreign soil as it is like private property and as such, peace officers must be invited in.

C. All other consulates within San Antonio are honorary (which bestows no special considerations).

Answer 523

A

.05 COMMAND / SUPERVISORY OFFICERS’ CRIME SCENE RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Command Officers
1. While the ranking command officer at the scene of any call is in overall charge, he may delegate supervision to the assigned sergeant and acts as an overseer.
He intervenes only when he observes serious breaches of established procedure.
2. Make periodic checks of major crime scenes to ensure proper procedures are being followed.
3. Exceptions are calls which involve an officer of this department in any major incident.
Under such circumstances the ranking command officer shall be in charge of the scene.

B. Supervisory Officers
1. Patrol Division supervisory officers are in charge of supervising all lower ranking officers at any major crime scene, including follow-up detectives and Crime Scene Unit Investigators in the absence of an Investigations Division supervisory officer.
If the scene involves a major crime, evidence processing shall be handled in accordance with section .06, B., 1., c.
2. When an Investigations Division supervisory officer is present at a crime scene, he supervises the activities of the follow-up detectives, UEDIs, and Crime Scene Unit Investigators assigned to the case.
3. In the absence of an Investigations Division supervisory officer, the Crime Scene Unit Supervisor is in charge of the UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigators.
4. Patrol Division supervisory officers proceed to any major crime scene or any crime scene where supervisory presence is requested and assess the crime scene to determine:

a. Whether there are sufficient officers at the scene. Request additional officers, if necessary;
b. The dimensions of the crime scene and the best method of protecting the scene;
c. Whether the proper quadrant has been established and the officers assigned are working it properly;
d. Whether the proper information regarding the actor has been broadcast to officers working the quadrant;
e. Whether the dispatcher has notified the Bexar County Medical Examiner’s Office in cases involving deaths;
f. Whether the Investigations Division detectives are needed at the scene, and if so, ensures proper adherence to GM Procedure 708, Follow-Up Units, is followed.

Assign officers to specific duties required to correctly protect and process the crime scene.
Provide for the transportation of complainants and witnesses, if necessary.
Determine when and/or if the news media may be briefed and admitted to the scene in accordance with GM Procedure 307, Public and Media Information.
Remain at the scene as long as necessary to ensure proper protection of the scene and supervises subordinates in the performance of their assigned functions.
Ensure all officers prepare the necessary reports.
Prepare a supplemental report describing any actions taken and the names and assigned duties of officers present at the crime scene.

Answer 524

A

B. UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigator Assigned to Crime Scene:
1. Upon arrival, immediately surveys the crime scene to determine:
a. The type of crime committed;
b. Whether additional equipment or personnel are needed to assist in processing the crime scene and request same from the dispatcher; and
c. At a major crime scene, UEDIs must receive approval and direction from the Crime Scene Unit Supervisor or the follow up unit investigator assigned to the crime scene prior to processing the scene.
2. Establishes the perimeter of the crime using crime scene barrier tape, if necessary;
3. Processes the crime scene for evidence (i.e., collects latent fingerprints, photographs, sketches, DNA evidence, etc.);
4. Collects and preserves all physical evidence at the crime scene and places the physical evidence in the Property Room;
5. Prepares the necessary supplemental reports of all actions taken, including the names of any officers who assisted.
C. Follow-Up Unit Detective Assigned to Crime Scene:
1. Proceeds to the crime scene when notified to do so;
2. Obtains initial information from the officer responsible for preparing the offense report;
3. Assesses the crime scene to determine if their presence in the crime scene area is necessary and:
a. When it is necessary to enter, uses caution to avoid contamination of the crime scene area; and
b. Avoids handling, contaminating, or altering the crime scene. When it becomes necessary to move any objects before the UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigator arrives, the follow-up unit detective records the exact location and condition in the detective’s report, properly marks the item, and turns it over to the UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigator for processing upon arrival.
4. Identifies and interviews witnesses outside the immediate crime scene area;
5. Makes arrangements for witnesses to give their statements and advises a Patrol Division Sergeant when transportation is necessary.
6. Prepares the proper supplemental report describing the detective’s actions.

Answer 525

A

B. Crime Scenes Where Video Recordings Are Made:

VHS Recording Devices and Digital Recording Devices
a. Officers(s) Assigned
(1) LocatethevideorecordingoriginandtakecustodyoftheVHStapeandpullthetabonthesideofthe VHS tape so the tape cannot be recorded over. If the origin is a digital recording device officers should have some form of digital video copy (CD, DVD, Floppy Disk, Flash drive, etc.) made by the employees, manager, or owner. This digital video copy becomes the master video recording.
(2) If the video recording origin is locked, or a digital video copy cannot be made, contact the person in charge of the location.
(i) If entry into the video recording origin is refused, a supervisor is notified.
(ii) If a digital video copy cannot be made, the officer will have the person in charge of the location contact the company where the digital video equipment was purchased or whoever they have the service/security contract with and have them respond to make a copy.
(iii) A reasonable amount of time should be allowed as long as the investigation is not prolonged or hindered.
(iv) If the officer is refused custody of the VHS tape a supervisor is notified.
(v) If a digital video copy cannot be made, the officer will document the name and phone numbers of the company and/or the name and phone numbers of the company that services the DVR equipment. A supervisor then is notified.
(vi) The officers shall document in their report all supervisors and follow-up unit detective’s names contacted and the decisions made.
(3) Officers/UEDIs should not view or make copies of the master video recording without approval from the follow-up unit investigator or supervisor. Viewing of a master video recording should only be conducted by the follow-up unit personnel assigned to the crime or personnel from the Technical Investigations Detail unless viewing of the master video recording is needed for immediate information on the crime and can be done in a manner which does not present a risk to the master video recording value as evidence, with approval from the follow-up unit.
(4) Maintains custody and control of the master video recording, unless the master video recording is released to a Crime Scene Unit Investigator or Technical Investigations Detail detective at a life- threatening incident or is requested by a member of the follow-up unit. Officers will document in their report the disposition of the video evidence.
(5) Upon completion of his crime scene duties, the officer delivers the master video recording and a copy of his report to the video tape receptacle located in the Headquarters Building Central Mail Room. If the master video recording was released to a Crime Scene Investigator or a member of the follow-up unit, the officer shall attach a copy of his report to the master video recording before releasing the master video recording.
b. Crime Scene Unit Investigator Assigned
(1) Takes custody of the master video recording if the crime is a life-threatening incident;
(2) Releases the master video recording to a member of the follow-up unit, if requested; or
(3) Returnsthemastervideorecordingalongwithacopyofhisreportandtheofficer’sreporttothevideo tape receptacle located in the Headquarters Building Central Mail Room.
(4) If the digital video copy cannot be made, the Crime Scene Unit Investigator shall take custody of all digital video equipment including the monitor when requested by a supervisor and place it in the Property Room. They shall also route a copy of their report to the follow-up unit and Technical Investigations Detail supervisors.
c. Follow-Up Unit Detective(s) Assigned
(1) Views or takes custody of a master video recording of a crime involving a life threatening incident.
(2) The follow-up unit detective should view the master video recording to verify the incident was properly recorded. If the master video recording is made from a digital recording device the video should be viewed on another computer if available to verify the incident was properly recorded and downloaded. If the follow-up unit detective views the master video recording, he should document the camera number(s) and six (6) digit time (hours: minutes: seconds) of the incident.
(3) If the follow-up unit detective takes custody of a master video recording, he delivers the master video recording, with copies of reports from the assigned officer/UEDI and Crime Scene Unit Investigator, along with a copy of his report, to the video tape receptacle located in the Headquarters Building Central Mail Room
(4) If a digital video copy cannot be made by those at the location, the detective assigned will obtain and document the name and phone numbers of the company where the equipment was purchased along with the company which services the equipment and contact them for assistance in downloading the video evidence.
(5) If a copy of the digital video evidence cannot be made after the detective assigned has contacted the company where the equipment was purchased along with the company which services the equipment, the detective assigned will contact the Technical Investigations Detail during normal business hours with the names and phone numbers of those individuals the detective has contacted along with the results of their efforts. If a copy of the digital video evidence cannot be made regarding a high profile or life threatening incident or where there is a risk the video evidence will be lost the detective assigned will obtain and document the name and phone numbers of the company where the equipment was purchased and the company which services the equipment and contact them to have them come out and download the video evidence. If these efforts fail then the detective assigned shall contact a supervisor.
d. Supervisory Officer Assigned
(1) Some video recording origins are locked to prevent suspects and employees from tampering with the video recording. When requested, the supervisor determines whether forced entry into the video recording origin is necessary to recover a master video recording.
(2) When custody of the video evidence is refused, the supervisor will notify the follow-up unit to let them determine if they want to do an immediate search warrant or wait to obtain the video evidence at a later date.
(3) When advised a master video recording cannot be made the supervisor determines if the offense is severe enough to notify the Technical Investigations Detail Detectives, after business hours, to respond to the scene and make a digital video. Examples of this would be a Police involved shooting or Capital Murder investigation where video holds a key role in the investigation. The supervisor will have the Communication Unit call the Technical Investigations Detail Detectives so they can respond and attempt to make a digital video copy of the incident

Answer 526

A

E. Burglary of Vehicle Crime Scenes:
1. Burglarized vehicles are processed for latent fingerprints when:
a. An arrest has been made;
b. There is a suspect in the case and a possibility exists for developing latent prints in the interior of the vehicle;
c. The theft involves the loss of objects of great monetary value; or
d. The complainant requests the vehicle to be printed.
2. The owner or authorized representative should be present to give effective consent for the processing of the vehicle.
a. The owner or authorized representative may refuse to allow the vehicle to be fingerprinted.
b. When the owner or authorized representative cannot be located, a supervisory officer may authorize the processing of the vehicle when the need exists.
3. A UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigator is not sent on cases reported to an expediter unless the owner of the vehicle requests fingerprints to be taken.
F. Recovered Stolen Vehicle Scenes:
1. A UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigator is dispatched to print recovered stolen vehicles at the scene, unless the owner of the vehicle specifically requests the vehicle not be printed.
2. If a UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigator is unavailable to be dispatched prior to the vehicle being impounded, a UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigator, when available, is dispatched to the Vehicle Storage Unit to print the vehicle.
3. The UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigator makes every effort to conduct the processing of the vehicle at the scene of recovery, unless the following prohibitive circumstances exist:
a. Inclement weather;
b. Inadequate lighting; or
c. The seriousness of the offense requires the Crime Scene Unit Investigator to move the vehicle to the evidence stall for a thorough processing of the vehicle.

Answer 527

A

H. Preservation of Firearms Evidence/Reporting Stolen Firearms:
1. When a firearm is recovered, found, or confiscated as evidence, the proper handling of the weapon is a priority to preserve any evidentiary value. This type of recovery, finding, or confiscation would include, but not be limited to, the following examples:
a. A firearm is used or suspected of being used in any assault type of offense and is found at or near the scene of the offense or found on a suspect;
b. A firearm is found hidden in a vehicle, not in the possession of an individual, during a legal search of the vehicle; and
c. A firearm is found in a location which would tend to indicate it has been dumped, discarded, or lost by a suspect involved in any assault offense.
2. When a firearm comes into the custody and control of an officer and the possibility exists the weapon has been used in any type of violent offense or criminal activity, the officer immediately notifies his supervisor of the circumstances of the recovery.
a. If the supervisor determines the firearm is to be processed as evidence, a UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigator is to respond to the scene to take immediate charge of the evidence.
b. If the supervisor determines the firearm is of no evidentiary value or the evidentiary value has been lost, for whatever reason, this decision shall be included in the text of the officer’s report of the incident.
3. Whenever an officer recovers, finds, or confiscates a firearm as evidence, the firearm will be processed in accordance with Subsection .06A14 of this procedure.
4. Whenever a firearm is reported stolen, an officer, in addition to completing the required report, shall immediately report the stolen firearm(s) to the appropriate service area Service Agent by telephone for entry into NCIC/TCIC. The report is submitted at the end of the tour of duty with the words
“CALLED-IN” written at the top of the report.

I. Preservation of Digital Evidence

If it is anticipated digital evidence will be present at a crime scene and time permits (i.e. search warrant), a Technical Investigations Detail Detective should be contacted prior to entry. A Technical Investigations Detail Detective should be present during the execution of search warrants where digital storage devices are anticipated (with prior approval from the Technical Investigations Detail Supervisor).
Officers encountering digital storage devices should use caution so as not to damage or destroy the digital evidence. Officers should not manipulate switches, buttons, keyboards or any other input devices on digital storage devices unless instructed to do so by a computer forensic detective. If switches, buttons, keyboards or other input devices are manipulated, this shall be documented in a written report. A copy of this report should accompany the computer to the property room or computer forensic lab.
If a digital storage device is located and it is determined to be related to a criminal offense, the Technical Investigations Detail should be contacted. The Technical Investigations Detail Supervisor will determine if a Detective should respond to the scene.
If a Technical Investigations Detail Detective does not respond, a Crime Scene Investigator will collect the digital storage device(s). A Technical Investigations Detail Detective may direct an officer or follow-up detective to collect the digital storage device. The digital storage device(s) may be placed in the property room or taken to the computer forensic lab for forensic analysis.

Answer 528

A

GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR LINE-UPS
A. The following is a list of acceptable identification methods, from
most preferred to least preferred:
Photographic line-up conducted by a blind administrator
Photographic line-up conducted by a blinded administrator, using the folder method in a
blind manner.
Live line-up conducted by a blind administrator.
Field identification procedures.

B. Sequential viewing should be used rather than simultaneous viewing whenever possible.
If simultaneous viewing is used, then the reason for this option should be documented in the assigned investigator’s report.

C. Live line-ups will not normally be used due to the difficulty of administration and the difficulty in obtaining sufficient number of individuals with similar physical characteristics.
Should an assigned investigator determine a need for a live line-up, the investigator should refer to sections .10 - .11 of this procedure.

D. Because criminal investigations can vary drastically from one case to another, assigned investigators may be faced with a situation unforeseen by this procedure and there may be a need to deviate from this procedure.
In those cases, assigned investigators must document, in detail, the circumstances causing the need to deviate from this procedure and what actions were taken.

E. Identification of suspects by witnesses should supplement other investigative actions and/or evidence.

F. The assigned investigator, prior to beginning the identification procedure, will determine if the witness has seen the suspect at any time since the crime occurred (whether in person, in newspaper, television reports, etc).
If so, the assigned investigator will contact the DA’s office to determine if the identification process should continue.

G. The assigned investigator is responsible for determining before any identification procedures if the witness is deaf or has limited English proficiency.
If the witness is deaf or a person with limited English proficiency, unless the administrator is fluent in sign language or the witness’s language, the assigned investigator must obtain the services of an interpreter.
The interpreter shall sign the witness certification statement on obtaining consent of a deaf or person with limited English proficiency, to assist in the identification process. Consider arranging for an interpreter if a person interviewed:
1. Is unable to communicate in English
2. Has a limited understanding of English
3. Is deaf, hearing impaired or speaking impaired
4. Is otherwise physically challenged to communicate in English

H. If the person is unable to read, the administrator, in the presence of the witness, will give the explanation, read any forms, and obtain consent and acknowledge the consent on SAPD Form #141 WLU F/P, stating why the person was unable to sign the form.

I. Documentation of Line-ups:

In all cases, the administrator will, at a minimum, document in a supplement report the details of the line-up presentation process and result, and return the supplement, the Line-up Form, and all original photographs and documents to the assigned investigator. Any officers who witnessed the line-up will also write supplemental reports. If an interpreter is used, the identification of the interpreter will be documented as well as the assistance provided.
If the witness cannot read or write, the identification procedure should be video recorded. Audio recording is the preferred alternative. If neither method is employed, then the reason for not video or audio recording should be documented. The recording will be safeguarded and maintained pursuant to the unit’s Standard Operating Procedures.

Answer 529

A

PRESENTING PHOTOGRAPHIC LINE-UPS: DUTIES OF THE ADMINISTRATOR
A. Assigned investigators should use a blind administrator whenever possible, and the assigned investigator should not be within hearing or view, or present in the same room at the time the line-up is conducted. If a situation occurs where a blind administrator cannot be used, the assigned investigator will document the reason in his report.
B. If using a blinded administrator, the procedure must be conducted in a manner such that the administrator does not know either the position of the suspect in the array, or which person in the array the witness is looking at. In addition to the following the procedures listed in .06 - .07 , below, the blinded administrator should not be in a position to view the photographs while the witness is viewing the photographs. The eyewitness should be the only person viewing the photographs.
C. The administrator must not provide any feedback of any kind at any time during the procedure. If the witness asks whether they picked the right person, the administrator will respond that he or she is unaware of which photograph is a suspect and which are fillers and the administrator will state that it would compromise the case to inform a witness of the procedures results. Other persons present at the presentation must be instructed to not make any suggestive statements, or take any other actions that may influence the judgment or perception of the witness.
D. The administrator: provides the witness with a Photographic Line-up Form (SAPD 141 WLU-P); reads the instructions and admonitions verbatim from the form; obtains the witness’ signature indicating they understand the procedure; signs the form as administrator; if the witness refuses to sign, documents that the witness was appropriately instructed; and, ensures that the witness understands the instructions before proceeding.
E. If utilizing sequential viewing, the administrator: shows the witness the photographs in the order they were received from the assigned investigator, one at a time, and documents the order shown; retrieves the photograph from the witness before providing a new one; and, allows the witness to see only one photograph at a time. If the witness identifies a suspect, the administrator must show the remaining photographs even if a witness has made an identification. If a witness asks why he or she must view the rest of the photographs, simply state the witness is required to view all the photographs to assure objectivity and reliability. The administrator records the number or other identification of the photograph; the witness and administrator sign and date the photograph selected; and, the witness is asked for a statement of how confident they are about their identification. The administrator should conduct a follow-up interview, only after an identification is made to assess any relevant factors that support the identification, such as: special facial features, hair, marks, etc. The administrator must not allow a witness to re-review a photograph unless the witness specifically request to do so, and the witness must re-review all photographs rather than a specific photograph(s). No more than two (2) viewings will be conducted.
F. If utilizing simultaneous viewing, the administrator shows the witness the folder and asks if they see the person who committed the crime. If the witness identifies a suspect, the administrator records the number or other identification of the photograph; the witness and administrator sign and date the photograph selected; and, the witness is asked for a statement of how confident they are about their identification.
G. The administrator: completes the Statement of Victim/Witness portion of SAPD 141 WLU-P, including making sure the witness’ confidence statement is documented in the witness’ own words, regarding how certain they are of the identification; has the witness complete and sign the appropriate portion of the form; returns all files, photographs and forms to the assigned investigator; and, completes a supplement on the identification procedure.

Answer 530

A

B. The assigned investigator is responsible for:

Preparing the line-up, including selecting the fillers.
Obtaining a sworn law enforcement officer who is familiar with the contents of this policy and
understands the line-up presentation process to act as a blind administrator of the line-up.
Preserving the line-up and identification process for future reference via photographic/video documentation and all completed forms and reports, whether an identification is made or not.
In preparing the line-up; the assigned investigator should:
a. Include only one suspect in each identification procedure.
b. Select fillers that generally fit the witness’ description of the perpetrator. Fillers should be selected where no person stands out from the others.
c. Use individuals who are reasonably similar in age, height, weight and general appearance and of the same sex and race. Avoid use of fillers that so closely resemble the suspect that a person familiar with the suspect might find it difficult to distinguish the suspect from the fillers.
d. Include a minimum of five fillers per identification procedure. Place a filler in the lead position, with the remaining persons in random order. If showing the same suspect to a different witness, using the same filler persons, place a filler in the lead position, with the remaining persons in a new random order.
e. Avoid reusing fillers in lineups shown to the same witness if showing a new suspect.
f. If there is more than one suspect, include only one suspect in each line-up presentation.
g. View the line-up, once completed, to ensure that the suspect does not unduly stand out.
Presenting the ordered live lineup to the administrator; the administrator may not be told which position the suspect is in.

C. The administrator is responsible for:

Ensuring they are familiar with the contents of this policy and the line-up presentation process.
Ensuring the line-up is presented in a manner consistent with this policy.
Documenting the conduct and results of the line-up presentation in the manner approved within this
policy.
Ensuring witnesses are not allowed to confer with each other before, during or after the identification procedure and that the assigned investigator is not within hearing or view, or present in the same room at the time the line-up is conducted.
Returning all line-up materials and documentation to the assigned investigator.

Answer 531

A

FIELD IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURES

A. The use of field identification should be avoided whenever possible in preference for the use of a photographic or live lineup. If there is some question regarding whether an individual stopped in the field may be the right suspect, an attempt at field identification may prevent the arrest of an innocent person. Therefore, when circumstances require the use of field identification the following guidelines should be followed:

Supervisory approval should be obtained prior to any Field Identification.
The officer is responsible for ensuring the witness is able to understand the instructions given by officers. If the witness is deaf, illiterate, or is a person with limited English proficiency, the officer will provide for an interpreter or other assistance.
Single suspect field identification shall not be used if there is adequate probable cause to arrest the suspect.
The follow up unit will conduct a lineup at a later time, if necessary.
A complete description of the suspect should be obtained from the witness prior to conducting a field identification.
If the witness states that he or she was unable to clearly see the suspect, a field identification will not be done.
Whenever possible, the witness should be transported to the location of the suspect rather than bringing the suspect to the witness.
Suspects should not be taken to the crime scene, or to the witness’s home.
Field identifications should not be attempted more than two hours after the commission of a crime.
Field identification should not be conducted when the suspect is in a patrol car, handcuffed, or physically restrained by police officers, unless such protective measures are necessary to ensure safety.
Field identification should only be conducted with one witness present at a time. If the field identification is conducted for more than one witness it should be done separately.
If one witness positively identifies the individual, consider making an arrest and using the above photographic lineup procedures for other witnesses.
The same suspect should not be presented to the same witness more than once in either field or subsequent photographic line-ups.
Field identification suspects should not be required to put on clothing worn by the perpetrator, to speak words uttered by the perpetrator or to perform other actions of the perpetrator.
Officers should avoid words or conduct of any type that may suggest to the witness that the individual is or may be the perpetrator will be avoided.
Witnesses should be reminded not to talk about the show-up to other witnesses until police or prosecutors deem it permissible.
The officer conducting the field identification: provides the witness with SAPD Form 141 WLU- F; reads the instructions and admonitions verbatim from the form; obtains the witness’ signature indicating they understand the procedure; signs the form as administrator; if the witness refuses to sign, documents that the witness was appropriately instructed; and, ensures that the witness understands the instructions before proceeding.

B. The officer conducting the show-up: completes the Statement of Victim/Witness portion of SAPD form 141 WLU-F, including making sure the witness’ confidence statement is documented in the witness’ own words regarding how certain they are of the identification; documents the witness’s response in the witness’s own words; has the witness complete and sign the appropriate portion of the form; returns all files, photographs and forms to the assigned investigator; and, completes a supplement on the identification procedure. The documentation of the show-up should also include the time, date and location of the procedure, identities of persons present, and the outcome of the procedure.

C. If an in-car video and audio recording system is active at the time of the field identification, it will not be stopped before or during the identification. The recording will be maintained pursuant to the applicable Standard Operation Procedures.
D. Each officer participating in the field identification will document their actions and any statements made in a supplement report.

Answer 532

A

.05 OUTOFJURISDICTIONCASES

A. When a Sexual Assault or Indecency with a Child is reported to the San Antonio Police, regardless of the jurisdiction of the occurrence, San Antonio police officers will initiate an investigation and report the offense on an offense report, and officers will also notify the Special Victims Unit or Night CID Unit for proper follow-up. The actual location of the offense is listed in the appropriate box on the offense report. N-Code 6 does not apply in this situation.

B. Officers conduct the preliminary investigation as if the offense occurred in San Antonio, to include taking the victim to the hospital for medical attention and evidence collection, and when possible return the victim so statements can be taken by the follow-up unit.

C. For Uniform Crime Reporting purposes, the offense code for the report is 110010 - Outside jurisdiction.

D. The Special Victims Unit will notify the proper jurisdiction and forward all information required to properly complete the investigation.

.06 CASEHANDLINGFORADULTS

A. All Sex Offenses are written on an offense report.

B. The officer assigned to respond to a sexual assault complaint is responsible for the preliminary investigation and immediate notification of the follow-up investigative unit.

C. In the event the victim is in need of immediate medical attention, the officer follows departmental procedures regarding the administration of first aid and transportation of injured persons.

D. Preliminary interview of the victim is conducted by one officer, who briefly interviews the victim privately away from all other officers, witnesses, and onlookers, to:

Determine the specific type of crime. This can be done by asking the victim questions about what occurred, such as:
a. Was there vaginal penetration and if so, by what means (penis, digital penetration, etc)?
b. Was force or a weapon used? If so, what type?
Secure the crime scene and comply with GM Procedure 701, Crime Scene Duties, where applicable;
Obtain a description of the offender and broadcast the description, if appropriate;
Inform the victim they may choose a pseudonym. If the victim chooses not to have a pseudonym name, they have the right to choose a pseudonym at any time during the investigation;
Gather the basic information for beginning an investigation, which includes:
a. Name of victim (pseudonym, if chosen by the victim);
b. Home address, business address, and any other addresses where the victim may be contacted (omit on the offense report if the victim has chosen a pseudonym);
c. Home telephone number, business telephone number, and any other telephone numbers where the victim can be called (omit on the offense report if the victim has chosen a pseudonym);

d. The above information must be included on the SAPD Form #2089-PSA, if the victim chooses a pseudonym, and forwarded to the Special Victims Unit.
e. Regardless of whether a pseudonym is used, the date of birth and sex of the victim must be included on the offense report.
6. Identify any witnesses, especially the outcry witness, and enter their information on the offense report.
E. If the victim has chosen a pseudonym, the reporting officer will provide the victim with SAPD Form #2089-PSA. The officer and the victim will complete the form.
1. If necessary, the officer counsels the victim in choosing a pseudonym by advising the victim the chosen pseudonym will be used in subsequent legal documents, and will be seen by officials such as judges and prosecutors. The officer encourages the victim to choose a conservative pseudonym which will not cause potential embarrassment to the victim. The officer provides a copy of the SAPD Form #2089-PSA to the victim.
2. The officer will fax a copy of the offense report and the officer will also fax a copy of SAPD Form #2089-PSA to the Special Victims Unit. The officer will return the original SAPD Form #2089-PSA to the Special Victims Unit in person or in a sealed envelope through the department bin mail.
F. If the sexual assault occurred within ninety-six (96) hours of the report to the police, the officer requests the victim undergo a physical examination at the Methodist Specialty and Transplant Hospital located at 8026 Floyd Curl Drive if the victim is seventeen (17) years of age or older. The officer stresses the importance of the examination for the following reasons:
1. The victim may require medical treatment for possible pregnancy, disease, or injury; and
2. A medical examination obtains evidence critical to the successful prosecution of the offender.
3. The officer calls the hospital prior to transporting the victim to ensure a SANE Nurse is contacted and available when the victim arrives. The officer is prepared to inform medical staff of the details of the offense, if requested.
G. When the victim wants to be examined by a private physician, the officer stresses having the medical examination done at Methodist Specialty and Transplant Hospital due to that hospital’s expertise in handling sexual assault cases.
H. The victim may insist upon having the examination done by a private physician or at a hospital facility of his/her choosing, in which case it is permitted.
I. The officer may provide transportation for the victim to a medical facility for testing and from there to the Special Victims Unit office. The victim may be accompanied to the hospital by a friend or relative.
J. The officer may be relieved from waiting with the victim at the hospital if:
1. The victim is accompanied by an adult friend, adult relative, or a rape crisis counselor; and
2. The victim has transportation from the hospital after the examination.
K. The officer notes in his report the name, address, age, and title of the person in whose care the victim was left with at the hospital.
L. The officer advises the victim to contact the Special Victims Unit to make arrangements for an interview by an Investigator. The officer stresses the importance of cooperating with the investigation.
M. Between the hours of 0745 and 1745, officers notify the Special Victims Unit immediately on all sexual assault cases. Between the hours of 1745 and 0745, a Night CID Unit investigator is immediately requested.
N. A copy of the offense report is faxed along with the SAPD Form #2089-PSA, if used, to the Special Victims Unit prior to the end of the officer’s tour of duty.

Answer 533

A

.08 MEDICAL EXAMINATION LOCATIONS
A. The Methodist Specialty and Transplant Hospital, located at 8026 Floyd Curl, is the primary location for
examinations in all sexual assault cases involving victims seventeen (17) years of age and older.
B. The Christus Santa Rosa Children’s Hospital, located at 333 N. Santa Rosa, is the primary location for examinations in all sexual assault cases involving victims sixteen (16) years of age and younger.
.09 COLLECTION OF EVIDENCE FROM SEXUAL ASSAULT SUSPECTS
A. If an officer arrests or detains a suspect, adult or juvenile, within a reasonable amount of time after the sexual assault or indecency with a child by contact, he immediately notifies the follow up unit. Depending on the circumstances of the case, the processing of the suspect for evidence may involve the following:
1. Collection of evidence from an arrested person, that is non-intrusionary, including photographs of defensive wounds, may be collected for the immediate preservation of evidence without a warrant.
2. Evidence that requires intrusion into the human body, such as the withdrawing of blood or the taking of a sample of DNA from inside the mouth, must be accomplished pursuant to a search warrant or through written consent.
3. Suspects detained but not arrested may have non-intrusionary evidence collected from their persons only pursuant to a search warrant or through written consent, unless exigent circumstances can be clearly articulated by the officer and/or detective assigned to the case stating why there was not enough time to procure a warrant.
4. The suspect, regardless of age, will be taken to the Methodist Specialty and Transplant Hospital (8026 Floyd Curl) for the examination. An on-call SANE Nurse will be notified to conduct the examination to remove any biological or trace evidence, including the photographing of defensive wounds, from the sexual assault suspect.
5. All evidence removed from the suspect, except photographs of defensive wounds, will be packaged by the SANE Nurse and turned over to the officer.
6. The officer will place all collected evidence received from the SANE Nurse in the Property Room under the appropriate case number;
7. Normally, the victim’s sexual assault kit remains at Methodist Transplant or Christus Santa Rosa Hospital and is transported to the crime lab by follow up unit personnel. If the officer comes into possession of the victim’s sexual assault kit, such as when the victim’s SANE exam was performed at a location other than one of the above hospitals, the officer will separate the suspect kit from the sexual assault victim’s kit and place the kits under separate Barcodes.
8. Any film used by the SANE Nurse at the time of evidence collection will remain at the medical facility and will be picked up by the follow-up unit.

Answer 534

A

.05 PROCEDURE - VIOLENT DEATHS

A. Officers dispatched to a location other than a hospital for an apparent sudden death, determine if first aid is needed and provide assistance, if necessary, until emergency medical personnel arrive.

B. An EMS unit is dispatched to assist the officer in determining the condition of the complainant. If it is apparent, after viewing the body, the complainant has expired due to violent causes, intentional or unintentional; the investigating officer follows these guidelines:

Protect the scene, if location is known;
Request a Crime Scene Unit Investigator be dispatched to the scene;
Advise a supervisory officer of the situation and requests additional officers, if needed;
Contact the Homicide Unit or Night CID Unit and gives them the pertinent information;
Contact the Bexar County Medical Examiner’s Office;
Ensures the deceased is transported to the Bexar County Medical Examiner’s Office by contract ambulance.

C. When the deceased is a victim of an apparent suicide, suicide notes along with handwriting samples of the deceased, if available, are forwarded to the Bexar County Medical Examiner’s Office.

D. Officers dispatched to a hospital to take a report of an apparent sudden death caused by violent means utilize the steps as outlined in .05B1-5 of this procedure.

Answer 535

A

.08 OFFENSE REPORTS

A. All apparent sudden deaths, except traffic fatalities where no criminal charges are anticipated, are reported on an offense report. Traffic fatalities where no criminal charges are anticipated are reported on the Texas Peace Officer’s Crash Report.

B. Offense Report - Offense/Event

A death due to natural causes or a violent death caused by an unintentional act (i.e., drowning, electrocution, falling, etc.) is listed as “apparent sudden death”.
A violent death caused by a type of criminal homicide is listed according to the Penal Code number and title of the statue (i.e., 19.02, Murder; 19.04, Manslaughter; etc.).
A violent death caused by suicide is listed as “apparent sudden death.”

C. The investigating officer includes all pertinent information relative to the situation and outlines all actions taken in the text of the offense report, as well as the names of officers notifying the next of kin and all individuals notified or contacted in relation to the death.

.09 HOSPICE ORGANIZATIONS

A. Hospice organizations exist to provide in-home support and care for individuals in the last phase of an incurable disease.

B. Hospice organizations have registered nurses on staff and on call twenty-four (24) hours a day to assist the families with patient care of the terminally ill. In such cases they are usually at the scene of the apparent sudden death.

C. The hospice nurse is available to assist the officer in determining the condition of the complainant.
EMS Unit personnel are not required to make the scene if a hospice nurse determines the complainant has expired.
The name of the hospice nurse and his/her determination is noted in the officer’s offense report.

D. Hospice organizations prepare their patients’ families for the required police investigation of an apparent sudden death.
The information an officer needs to relay to the Medical Examiner’s Office, in most cases, has already been prepared for the officer by the family.

Answer 536

A

.04 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. First Officers/UEDIs at Scene:
1. Care for the injured;
2. Apprehend suspects;
3. Protect the scene;
4. Attempt to locate and identify any witnesses; and
5. Maintain radio contact with the dispatcher, but limit radio transmissions to pertinent information.

B. Communications Unit:
1. A dispatcher, immediately upon the initial broadcast of any information relating to an officer involved shooting or custodial death, ensures:

Adequate Patrol Division officers/UEDIs are sent to contain and handle the situation; A Patrol Division supervisor is assigned;

Crime Scene Unit Investigators respond to the scene;

Appropriate Investigations Division personnel are notified;

The nearest Patrol Shift Director is advised;

The nearest Patrol Section Commander is advised, if available.

Communications Unit Supervisor ensures the following personnel are notified:

Homicide Unit Director or
Shooting Team Commander
(if not one and the same);

Police Media Services Officer;

The appropriate command officer prescribed in
GM Procedure 314, Command Notification;

Police Psychologist;

San Antonio Police Officers’ Association Attorney;

Family Assistance Officer;

Internal Affairs Unit.

C. Patrol Division Supervisors:

Direct the on-scene investigation until the arrival of the first member of the Shooting Team, who assumes temporary control until the arrival of a Shooting Team supervisor;
Limit entry within the cordoned off area of the crime scene to only those persons whose presence is absolutely required;
Examine, in the presence of a Crime Scene Unit Investigator, the weapons of all officers who were at the scene at the time of the actual shooting, excluding those weapons known to have discharged, which are processed by the Shooting Team;
Relieve an officer involved in a shooting of his weapon at the scene of the shooting only if it is absolutely necessary;
Arrange for the transportation of all involved personnel, witnesses, and/or suspects to Headquarters for statements/interviews;
Ensure involved personnel are not questioned or interviewed, except as set forth in this procedure.
Witnesses and suspects are cared for and kept separated;
Instruct nonessential personnel to return to service as soon as practical;
If an officer is transported to a hospital, coordinate the officer(s) security and privacy with hospital security and medical personnel, adhering to all hospital procedures;
Gather reports from all officers under their supervision who were assigned to the shooting or custodial death call and deliver those reports to a Shooting Team Supervisor prior to ending their tour of duty.

D. Crime Scene Unit Investigators:

Cordon off the immediate area of the crime scene;
Preserve and protect perishable or unsecured evidence until the arrival of the Shooting Team;
Process all evidence if the Shooting Team Crime Scene Specialist is unavailable or when evidence must be moved or recorded;
Process any evidence obtained from weapons examined by supervisor; and
Assist the Shooting Team in accordance with GM Procedure 701, Crime Scene Duties.

E. Shooting Team:

Upon arrival at scene, assume primary responsibility for investigation of all officer involved shootings and custodial deaths in accordance with the Homicide Unit SOP;
Provide Police Media Services Office personnel with information on the investigation that can be made available to the media.

Answer 537

A

This member’s primary concern is for the welfare of the officer involved in the incident,
Officers shall refrain from discussing the facts of the incident or interfering with any legal or clerical relationships.

F. When two (2) or more officers are involved in a shooting or a custodial death incident, they are:

Isolated from one another at the scene by a supervisory officer;
Separately transported to and sequestered within the restricted zone at Headquarters.

G. If one or more of the officers desire to consult with counsel prior to giving a statement or answering any questions, one is provided for him.

Officers meet separately with the attorney(s);
After the meeting, each officer will again be sequestered for interviews.

H. An officer involved in a shooting or custodial death incident should not be required to unnecessarily repeat an account of the event.

Answer 538

A

.07 OFFICER INVOLVED SHOOTING (OIS)REVIEW COMMITTEE

A. The OIS Review Committee will be responsible for the following objectives:

A review of the case file for policy and procedural deficiencies;
A review of the incident for training and tactical aberrations;

B. All recommendations will be forwarded to the Office of the Chief for review.

C. All recommendations are advisory in nature and not binding on the Chief of Police. As such, the Chief of Police may elect to initiate action or discard any/all recommendations.

.08 POST EVENT PROCEDURES

A. Each officer involved in a shooting shall be placed on administrative duty or administrative leave in accordance with GM Procedure 908, Mandatory Reassignment.

B. An injured officer, if or when able to return, is placed on limited duty until SAPD Form #172, Physician Authorization for Injury Status, is completed, and authorizes the member’s return to regular duty.

C. All officer involved shootings and custodial death incidents are reviewed by the Internal Affairs Unit for evidence of non-criminal misconduct and forwarded to the Chief’s Advisory Action Board for an administrative review.

D. A city issued weapon used in an officer involved shooting is re-issued to the officer after the case is cleared by the District Attorney’s Office.

The Homicide Unit notifies the Armory and Supply Office to retrieve the weapon from the Property Room; and
The Armory and Supply Office re-issues the weapon to the officer.

Answer 539

A

Names of complainants, witnesses, and suspects;
Details of the incident;
Injuries sustained to the complainant or suspect;
Medical treatment received by complainant or suspect;
and Photographs of the complainant’s or suspect’s injuries.

G. In the event the officer receives medical treatment, the officer signs SAPD Form #69, Medical Release, for the District Attorney’s Office.

H. A uniformed supervisory officer is dispatched on all assaults on a peace officer where an arrest is made.
The medical release can be signed at the Night CID Unit or the Homicide Unit office.

The supervisor writes the proper injured officer reports and initiates the Workers’ Compensation documentation in accordance with GM Procedure 916, Worker’s Compensation.
A copy of the Workers’ Compensation documentation is forwarded to Homicide Unit to be included with the case for filing in the District Attorney’s Office.

Answer 540

A

.04 RESPONDING TO CRASHES

A. Responsibilities of first officer arriving at a crash scene:

Park the police vehicle, utilizing emergency lights and flashers, in a manner that best provides warning of the crash to approaching vehicles, to protect persons from injury, and to provide other emergency vehicles access to the scene.
Request EMS for persons requiring medical treatment.
Request fire department units if persons need to be extracted from vehicles or if fuel is leaking from vehicles.
Take steps necessary to protect the scene to ensure proper collection of evidence and to gather information or facts needed to accurately investigate if necessary and report the crash.
Take necessary actions to allow for the safe flow of traffic around the crash scene and rapid restoration of traffic flow on the roadway.
This includes the use of flares, moving vehicles from the roadway at the earliest opportunity allowable by the investigation, requesting additional officers for traffic or crowd control, wreckers, sand trucks, public works, and fire units.
Identify all drivers or pedestrians involved in the crash and check for valid driver’s license and proof of insurance. This includes checking each person for active warrants and taking appropriate action if warrants are found.
Determine if the crash requires a police investigation or if it meets the criteria for the drivers to complete SAPD Form #12-DAR and exchange required information:

a. The following types of crashes occurring on any street, highway or private property require a police investigation and the responding officer shall report the crash on the Web based TxDOT Crash Reporting and Analysis for Safer Highways, CRASH, Form #CR-3:
(1) Crashes resulting in any injury, complaint of any injury, or death to any person;
(2) Crashes resulting in damage to any vehicle to the extent the vehicle cannot be “normally and safely” driven from the scene.
(Does not require towing and the vehicle can be operated under its own power and in its usual manner, without additional damage or hazard to the vehicle, other traffic, or the roadway.);
(3) Crashes involving Federal, State, or City property and/or vehicles;
(4) Crashes involving hazardous materials;
(5) Crashes involving commercial vehicles;
(6) Hit and run crashes;
(7) Crashes where any driver is arrested or cited for any criminal or traffic offense, or found to have active warrants of any kind;
(8) Crashes with any suspicion that alcohol or any drug may have been involved.

b. The following types of crashes occurring on any street, highway or private property do not require a police investigation.
In these situations, the responding officer will provide the drivers with SAPD Form #12- DAR (see GM 707.C for further guidance):

(1) Crashes with no injuries, complaints of injury, or deaths;    (2) Crashes where vehicles can be “normally and safely” driven from the scene;    (3) Crashes where drivers have valid driver’s licenses and proof of insurance for the vehicles;    (4) Crashes with no other exigent or unusual circumstances which would require a police investigation (if there is any question, the responding officer shall report the crash on the Web based TxDOT CRASH Form #CR-3.

Request a member from the Homicide Unit’s Traffic Investigation Detail (TID) or a member from the Night Detectives Unit and a Crime Scene Unit Investigator to respond to the scene if a crash involves a death, the probability of a death, or any serious bodily injury where intoxicants or other criminal elements may have contributed to the crash.
(i. e., Racing, Aggravated Assault, Failure to Stop and Render Aid – FSRA), or crashes involving Wrong Way Drivers on Highways regardless of the severity of injuries).

a. If the crash results in a death or the probability of a death, the first officer arriving on the scene and/or the officer handling the crash will request a supervisor to make the scene of the crash.
b. On the Investigator Panel in the TxDOT Web Based CR-3 ensure that “Traffic Investigations” is selected in the District/Area box.
This will forward the crash report to Traffic Investigations Detail Detectives for final approval.

The officer assigned by the dispatcher to handle a crash has report responsibility and is in charge of the crash scene.
Upon arrival of a supervisory officer, the supervisor is in charge of the crash scene.
Officers gather and record sufficient information, facts, or evidence to be able to determine if traffic or criminal violations have occurred and to be able to answer any reasonable questions concerning the crash.
An officer will remain at the scene of any crash until the vehicles can be towed from the location or safely moved off the roadway.

Answer 541

A

C. Officers handling crashes which are not required to be investigated and reported on the Web based TxDOT Form #CR-3 as outlined in Section .04(A) of this procedure will:
1. Distribute SAPD Form #12-DAR, to each driver with instructions to complete the form by exchanging the required information.
The officer shall assist the drivers with obtaining this information, if requested.
The officer shall also verify the information on each SAPD Form #12-DAR prior to leaving the scene.

Officers shall advise the reporting parties that a CFS report instead of a crash report will be prepared, and document the crash using an N-Code 21 in accordance with GM Procedure 402 (Section .02 D .25), Differential Police Response.

D. Supervisor Responsibilities:
1. Make the scene of all crashes involving a death or the probability of a death and ensure all investigative procedures are thoroughly followed.

.05 CRASH REPORT FORMS

A. The guide used in completing the Web based TxDOT Form #CR-3 is the CR-100 booklet titled INSTRUCTIONS to POLICE for REPORTING CRASHES.
(The CR-100 booklet is available on the SAPDWEB and at the TxDOT CRASH website.)
In addition to the information required by the CR-100 booklet, a written explanation for any contributing factors listed is to be included in the Investigator’s Narrative Section of the Texas Peace Officer’s Crash Report.

B. Crashes occurring on any street, highway or private property which require a police investigation are thoroughly investigated and reported using Web based TxDOT CRASH Form #CR-3.
1. The electronic submission of the Web based TxDOT CR-3 is considered the original report.
C. Witness information should not be listed in the details of the Crash Report.
Any witness information will be added to the CFS report and the confidential button should be checked.

D. Effective September 1, 2017, per the 85th Texas Legislature Senate Bill 312, the Driver’s Crash Reports (Form #CR- 2) (Blue Form) are no longer retained by the Texas Department of Transportation.

Officers are no longer required to provide the drivers with TxDOT Form #CR-2.

Answer 542

A

.07 DEATH/INJURY NOTIFICATION & FOLLOW-UP AT HOSPITALS

A. In traffic crashes resulting in fatalities, the legal next of kin notification will be made in accordance with GM Procedure 704, Apparent Sudden Deaths.
In cases resulting in serious injury/illness, hospital personnel will make notification to next of kin.

B. When information or identification is needed from a victim taken to a hospital, the officer assigned the report responsibility shall:

Contact hospital personnel for the identity of the victim;
Request to speak with the victim if additional information is needed for the report; and
Notify the military police prior to contacting the victim at a military hospital.

.08 CRASHES INVOLVING CITY VEHICLES
A. All City vehicle crashes will be investigated and reported on the Web based TxDOT CRASH, #CR-3 form.
1. City vehicles do not include vehicles belonging to CPS Energy, San Antonio Water Systems (SAWS), San Antonio Housing Authority (SAHA), and VIA Metropolitan Transit.

B. City vehicle crashes require a UEDI/Crime Scene Unit Investigator to photograph the scene and complete SAPD Form #3-CSS, Crime Scene Search Report, with a copy routed to the Traffic Investigation Detail.

C. Police vehicles that are not drivable are towed to the Central Vehicle Repair Shop at 329 S. Frio St. for inspection of any mechanical defects which the driver claims may have contributed to the crash.

D. Fire Department vehicles are towed to their vehicle repair shop for inspection of mechanical defects which the driver claims may have contributed to the crash.

E. Drivers of vehicles involved in crashes with city vehicles are advised the City is self-insured.
If they wish to file a claim against the City, they must contact the City Clerk’s Office.

Answer 543

A

Supervisors investigating police vehicle crashes shall forward all original reports, including the Texas Peace Officer’s Crash Report (or AFR report), to the Traffic Investigation Detail.

When the crash report is written on the CRASH system:
1. The electronic submission of the TxDOT CR-3 to Traffic Investigation Detail is considered the original report;
2. On the Investigator Panel in the TxDOT Web Based CR-3 the supervisor will ensure that “Traffic Investigations” is selected in the District/Area box. This will forward the crash report to Traffic Investigations Detail Detectives for final approval.
SAPD Form #CR-E1, Police Vehicle Crash Evaluation Report:
1. Supervisors are required to complete SAPD Form #CR-E1 and forward through the chain of command for recommendations;
2. Attach a draft copy of the TxDOT CR-3, a copy of the SAPD Form #602-6, Vehicle Crash Report, and any pertinent AVL, Message Log transcripts, or other documentation.

A member of the Traffic Investigation Detail will be requested to respond to the scene if the crash resulted in serious bodily injury or death to anyone.
The driver of a police vehicle involved in the crash will complete SAPD Form #602-6, Vehicle Crash Report or Loss Notice.

Police vehicles (except motorcycles) involved in crashes are removed directly from the crash scene to the Central Vehicle Repair Shop at 329 S. Frio St., regardless of the amount of damage:
1.   The police vehicle may be driven or towed by wrecker, depending on the condition of the police vehicle.

If the driver of the police vehicle claims possible mechanical defects may have contributed to the crash, the police vehicle will be towed by wrecker to the Central Vehicle Repair Shop for inspection.
Police motorcycles are towed to the company having the motorcycle lease agreement with the City.
The sergeant will ensure any portable equipment is removed from inoperable police vehicles, including motorcycles, prior to the vehicles being placed in the repair shop.
A work order will be filled out on the wrecked police vehicle listing the reason for placing the police vehicle in the repair shop, the case number of the crash, and the area of damage.
Fleet Services Office personnel will have a damage appraisal performed on the police vehicle and forward a copy of the damage appraisal to the Traffic Investigation Detail.
When repairs are completed on the police vehicle, the Fleet Services Office will place the repaired police vehicle back into service.

Answer 544

A

.12 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. Officers encountering a motor vehicle crash involving a vehicle transporting hazardous materials shall:
1. Secure an area around the scene to prevent injury to anyone.
2. Request a supervisor from the Fire Department to respond to the scene.
3. Try to identify the hazardous materials by referring to the Department of Transportation Emergency Response Guidebook.
B. The Fire Department, upon arrival, assumes incident command.
C. A police supervisor is assigned and provides any assistance requested by the Fire Department and refers to GM Procedure 802, Unusual Occurrences and Critical Incidents, for guidance.

Answer 545

A

.05 INITIAL REPORTING OF HATE CRIMES

A. Officers assigned to calls involving criminal offenses which have been identified as hate crimes by the criteria listed in Section .04 shall report the offense as a hate crime by checking the box titled “Suspected Hate Crime” on SAPD Form #2-2, Offense/Incident Report.

B. All elements of the offense or criteria used by the officer to identify the offense as a hate crime will be listed in the “Details” section of the offense report.

C. Officers receiving any information on any criminal offense identified as a hate crime shall report the information to the applicable follow-up investigative unit on SAPD Form #2-2, Offense/Incident Report.
The information shall be titled “Information on Hate Crime” on the incident report.

.06 INVESTIGATING HATE CRIMES

A. The preliminary investigation of criminal offenses involving bias or hate is conducted by the officer with primary report responsibility.

B. The follow-up investigation of criminal offenses involving bias or hate is conducted by the follow-up unit with initial case responsibility.

This follow-up unit shall make the final determination as to the crime being a hate crime;
and
Shall forward a copy of the offense or incident report to the Southwest Texas Fusion Center (SWTFC) for tracking purposes.

.07 STATISTICAL REPORTING OF HATE-CRIMES

A. The follow-up investigative unit has responsibility for reporting all hate crimes in the UCR statistics provided to the Records Office.

B. The Records Office has responsibility for forwarding UCR statistics on hate crimes to the Department of Public Safety.

.08 VICTIMS ASSISTANCE

A. Officers assigned to calls involving hate crimes or where a hate crime is suspected shall notify the victim of the availability of assistance from the Victims Advocacy Office.

B. Officer shall forward a copy of all reports involving hate crimes to the Crisis Response Team at the appropriate Service Area substation for crisis intervention and/or social services follow-up.

Answer 546

A

.04 INDICATORS OF DOMESTIC MINOR SEX TRAFFICKING (DMST) AND HUMAN TRAFFICKING

A. While speaking to persons, members should remain alert to notice when something is not right or out of the ordinary. Suspicions might be aroused by the following:
1. The victim appears to be under the control of another person. Signs may include:
a. Another person will answer for the victims when an officer asks a question or the victim’s responses appear to be coached.
b. The victim has physical injuries and no explanations or unlikely ones are given for those injuries.
c. The victims appear afraid, depressed, or unconcerned with what is occurring.
d. The victim does not have freedom of movement or may be monitored when away from the trafficker.
They are not allowed to socialize with others.
e. The victims may appear to have been deprived of food or medical care and may appear malnourished or ill.
f. The juvenile victim may refer to a much older person as her “boyfriend” or give a familial relationship to a person not legally related to her (“daddy,” “uncle,” etc.).
2. The victim may be dependant on drugs which the trafficker uses as a means of keeping victims under control.
3. The victim may have no identification or passport in his/her possession and give implausible explanations of what happened to their identification.
This trafficker is likely to be in possession of these documents.
4. If the person is a juvenile engaged in a commercial sex act or is being compelled into prostitution, they shall be evaluated as a potential victim of human trafficking.

B. The location an officer responds to may indicate that it’s being used for human trafficking. Indications include:

Use of guards or watchmen;
Fencing designed to keep people inside rather than keeping them out;
Any locks on the door which is designed to lock people in and not to lock people out;
Sleeping arrangements such as bunk beds or single “rooms,” possibly with curtains or doors for privacy;
Large amounts of paper towels, toilet paper, or other cleaning items near the beds; and
Large quantity of condoms readily available by the beds.

C. Some questions that may be asked of a suspected human trafficking victim to confirm that an investigation is needed include:

Do you know what city you are in right now?
Are you doing the job that you were promised you would be doing?
Are you free to come and go as you want?
Are you ever hit or punished by your boss or others who live or work with you?
Has anyone threatened to hurt you or your family if you did not work here or do what they say?
Has anyone taken pictures of you and posted them on the internet?

D. Other indications and questions can be found in Training Bulletin #12-01

Answer 547

A

.07 Crime Scene Unit Investigators Responsibilities in a Suspected Human Trafficking Case

A. Process the crime scene and collect evidence pursuant to Procedure 701, Crime Scene Duties;

B. Maintain contact with follow up unit investigators to ensure that all available evidence is collected; and

C. Complete the appropriate reports pursuant to the unit’s standard operating procedures.

.08 Follow Up Unit Responsibilities in a Suspected Human Trafficking Case

A. Respond to the Crime Scene when requested, pursuant to Procedure 701, Crime Scene Duties;

B. Investigate the alleged offense pursuant to the unit’s standard operating procedures; and

C. Notify outside and/or federal agencies when necessary.

.09 Supervisory Officer’s Responsibilities in a Suspected Human Trafficking Case

A. Ensure that the applicable procedures are followed;

B. Respond to requests for guidance and direction from subordinates in suspected cases; and

C. Ensure the proper follow-up unit has been notified.

.10 Patrol / UEDI Responsibilities in a Suspected Human Smuggling Case

A. Once the member suspects he has encountered a human smuggling case, the member will:

Ensure Procedure 701, Crime Scene Duties, is followed.
Ensure that the appropriate follow-up unit (the Sex Crimes Unit during their normal duty hours or Night CID) is immediately notified; and
Ensure Procedures 602 Juveniles and 610 Missing Persons are followed regarding juveniles including checking the juvenile status as missing or run away.

B. Human Smuggling cases usually require the response of a federal law enforcement agency.
Members will cooperate with these federal agencies as appropriate and within the bounds of the department’s rules and regulations, policies and procedures.
Members will seek the guidance of a supervisor if questions arise.

.11 Crime Scene Unit Investigators Responsibilities in a Suspected Human Smuggling Case

A. Process the crime scene and collect evidence pursuant to Procedure 701, Crime Scene Duties;

B. Maintain contact with follow up unit investigators to ensure that all available evidence is collected; and

C. Complete the appropriate reports pursuant to applicable procedures.

.12 Follow-Up Unit Responsibilities in a Suspected Human Smuggling Case

A. Respond to the crime scene when requested, pursuant to Procedure 701, Crime Scene Duties;

B. Investigate the alleged offense pursuant to the unit’s standard operating procedures.

C. Notify and coordinate with federal authorities and provide assistance as necessary and within the bounds of the department’s rules, regulations, policies and procedures.
Members will seek the guidance of a supervisor if questions arise.

.13 Supervisory Officer’s Responsibilities in a Suspected Human Smuggling Case

A. Ensure that the applicable procedures are followed.

B. Respond to requests for guidance and direction from subordinates in suspected cases.

Answer 548

A

.03 COMMAND STAFF
Depending upon the size and type of incident or event, it may be necessary for the Incident Commander to designate personnel to provide information, safety, and liaison services for the entire organization. In ICS, these personnel make up the Command Staff and consist of the:
A. Public Information Officer, who serves as the conduit for information to internal and external stakeholders, including the media or other organizations seeking information directly from the incident or event;
B. Safety Officer, who monitors safety conditions and develops measures for assuring the safety of all assigned personnel;
C. Liaison Officer, who serves as the primary contact for supporting agencies assisting at an incident;
D. The Command Staff reports directly to the Incident Commander.
A. Expansion of the incident may also require the delegation of authority for the performance of the other management functions. The people who perform the other four management functions are designated as the General Staff. The General Staff is made up of four Sections: Operations, Planning, Logistics, and Finance/Administration.
B. The General Staff reports directly to the Incident Commander.

.05 UNIFIED COMMAND
A. Each designated agency incident commander functioning in a Unified Command must:
1. Act within his/her jurisdictional or agency limitations.
2. Inform the other Commanders of any legal, political, jurisdictional, or safety restrictions.
3. Be authorized to perform certain activities and actions on behalf of the jurisdiction or agency he/she represents.
4. Manage the incident to the best of his/her abilities.

B. In managing the incident to the best of their abilities, each Unified Commander must adhere to the following responsibilities:

Work closely with the other Incident Commanders assigned to the Unified Command.
Provide sufficiently qualified staff and resources.
Anticipate and solve problems.
Delegate authority as needed.
Inspect and evaluate performance of their resources.
Communicate with their agencies on priorities, plans, problems, and progress.

Answer 549

A

.07 ICS SECTION CHIEFS AND DEPUTIES

A. The person in charge of each ICS Section is designated as a Chief. Section Chiefs have the ability to expand their Section to meet the needs of the situation.
Each Section Chief may have a Deputy, or more than one, if necessary.
The Deputy:
1. May assume responsibility for a specific portion of the primary position, work as relief, or be assigned other tasks;
2. Should always be as proficient as the person for whom he or she works.

B. In large incidents, especially where multiple disciplines or jurisdictions are involved, the use of Deputies from other organizations can greatly increase interagency coordination.

Answer 550

A

.09 PLANNING SECTION

The Incident Commander will determine if there is a need for a Planning Section and designate a Planning Section Chief.
If no Planning Section is established, the Incident Commander will perform all planning functions.
It is up to the Planning Section Chief to activate any needed additional staffing.
A. Planning Section: Major Activities
The major activities of the Planning Section may include:
1. Collecting, evaluating, and displaying incident intelligence and information;
2. Preparing and documenting Incident Action Plans;
3. Conducting long-range and/or contingency planning;
4. Developing plans for demobilization;
5. Maintaining incident documentation;
6. Tracking resources assigned to the incident.

B. Planning Section: Units

The Planning Section can be further staffed with four Units.
a. Resources Unit: Conducts all check-in activities and maintains the status of all incident resources. The Resources Unit plays a significant role in preparing the written Incident Action Plan;
b. Situation Unit: Collects and analyzes information on the current situation, prepares situation displays and situation summaries, and develops maps and projections;
c. Documentation Unit: Provides duplication services, including the written Incident Action Plan. Maintains and archives all incident-related documentation;
d. Demobilization Unit: Assists in ensuring that resources are released from the incident in an orderly, safe, and cost-effective manner.
Technical Specialists may also be assigned to work in the Planning Section.
Depending on the needs,
Technical Specialists may also be assigned to other Sections in the organization.

Answer 551

A

B. Logistics Section: Branches and Units

The Logistics Section can be further staffed by two Branches and six Units.
Not all of the Units may be required; they will be established based on need.
The titles of the Units are descriptive of their responsibilities.

C. The Logistics Service Branch can be staffed to include a:
1. Communication Unit: Prepares and implements the Incident Communication Plan (ICS-205), distributes and maintains communications equipment, supervises the Incident Communications Center, and establishes adequate communications over the incident;

Medical Unit: Develops the Medical Plan (ICS-206), provides first aid and light medical treatment for personnel assigned to the incident, and prepares procedures for a major medical emergency;
Food Unit: Supplies the food and potable water for all incident facilities and personnel, and obtains the necessary equipment and supplies to operate food service facilities at Bases and Camps;

D. The Logistics Support Branch can be staffed to include a:

Supply Unit: Determines the type and amount of supplies needed to support the incident.
The Unit orders, receives, stores, and distributes supplies, and services nonexpendable equipment.
All resource orders are placed through the Supply Unit.
The Unit maintains inventory and accountability of supplies and equipment;
Facilities Unit:
Sets up and maintains required facilities to support the incident.
Provides managers for the Incident Base and Camps.
Also responsible for facility security and facility maintenance services: sanitation, lighting, cleanup;
Ground Support Unit:
Prepares the Transportation Plan.
Arranges for, activates, and documents the fueling, maintenance, and repair of ground resources.
Arranges for the transportation of personnel, supplies, food, and equipment.

Answer 552

A

.13 ICS MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS

A. Common Terminology and Clear Text

A critical part of an effective multi-agency incident management system is for all communications to be in plain English.
That is, use clear text. Do not use radio codes, agency-specific codes, or jargon;
Even if you use radio codes on a daily basis, other responders may not.
The goal is to ensure responders from all agencies can communicate with one another.

B. Modular Organization

In ICS, only those functions or positions necessary for a particular incident will be filled;
The ICS organizational structure is flexible.
When needed, separate functional elements can be established and subdivided to enhance internal organizational management and external coordination.
As the ICS organizational structure expands, the number of management positions also expands to adequately address the requirements of the incident;
The ICS organizational structure develops in a top-down, modular fashion that is based on the size and complexity of the incident, as well as the specifics of the hazard environment created by the incident.
As incident complexity increases, the organization expands from the top down as functional responsibilities are delegated.

C. Management by Objectives

All levels of a growing ICS organization must have a clear understanding of the functional actions required to manage the incident.

Management by objectives is an approach used to communicate functional actions throughout the entire ICS organization.

It can be accomplished through the incident action planning process, which includes the following steps:

Step 1: Understand agency policy and direction;

Step 2: Assess incident situation;

Step 3: Establish incident objectives;

Step 4: Select appropriate strategy or strategies to achieve objectives;

Step 5: Perform tactical direction (applying tactics appropriate to the strategy, assigning the right resources, and monitoring their performance);

Step 6: Provide necessary follow-up (changing strategy or tactics, adding or subtracting resources, etc.).

D. Reliance on an Incident Action Plan.

Incident Action Plans provide a coherent means of communicating the overall incident objectives in the context of both operational and support activities.
The plan may be oral or written except for hazardous materials incidents, which require a written IAP.
At the simplest level, all Incident Action Plans
(oral or written) must have four elements:
a. What do we want to do?
b. Who is responsible for doing it?
c. How do we communicate with each other?
d. What is the procedure if someone is injured?

E. Manageable Span of Control
1. Span of control pertains to the number of individuals or resources that one supervisor can manage effectively during emergency response incidents or special events.
Maintaining an effective span of control is particularly important on incidents where safety and accountability are a top priority;

Span of control is the key to effective and efficient incident management.
The type of incident, nature of the task, hazards and safety factors, and distances between personnel and resources all influence span of control considerations;
Effective span of control on incidents may vary from three (3) to seven (7) reporting elements, and
a ratio of one (1) supervisor to five (5) reporting
elements is recommended;
If the number of reporting elements falls outside of these ranges, expansion or consolidation of the organization may be necessary.
There may be exceptions, usually in lower-risk assignments or where resources work in close proximity to each other.

F. Pre-designated Incident Locations and Facilities

Incident activities may be accomplished from a variety of operational locations and support facilities;
Facilities will be identified and established by the Incident Commander depending on the requirements and complexity of the incident or event.

Answer 553

A

.05 INITIAL RESPONDERS
A. Critical Incident

Officers, as initial responders to critical incidents, have several important functions essential to the successful resolution of the incident.
Depending on the situation, these responsibilities include:
a. Quickly recognize the potential or existence of a critical incident;
b. Request additional support and supervisory personnel through the dispatcher;

NOTE: Radio/cellular transmissions from a situation involving the threat or existence of explosives may trigger the device.

c. Seek positions of safety from where the situation may be contained within the smallest possible area;
d. Isolate non-participants from the threat;
e. Evacuate bystanders and/or injured persons, if necessary;
f. Request EMS and Fire Rescue, if necessary;
g. Notify the Communications Unit of established safe entrance and exit routes for emergency vehicles and personnel;
h. Attempt to establish communication with the suspect, hostages, and/or witnesses to help assess the situation;
(1) Do not attempt to negotiate with the suspect; negotiating is the responsibility of crisis negotiators;
(2) Do not use threats or intimidating gestures;
(3) Maintain a calm, even disposition when conversing with the suspect.
i. Communicate information to the responding units through the dispatcher
(i. e., number, names, actions, and descriptions of suspect(s) and hostage(s), weapons involved, etc.);
j. Maintain maximum firearms discipline at all times;
k. Properly document all pertinent information and remain at the scene until released.

Supervisory officers, as supervisors of initial responders, have several important functions to perform upon arrival at the scene which, depending on the circumstances, include:
a. Make an assessment of available options upon confirmation of the officer’s initial observations.
If the incident is determined to be a critical incident, assume duties as the Incident Commander until properly relieved by higher authority;
b. Determine the type of police response needed
(if any) to safely resolve the situation, either with available police resources or critical incident response teams.
Notify the Communications Unit of the determination;
c. Request the Communications Unit to make appropriate notification;
d. Notify the Communications Unit of required officer positions to establish incident zones that contain and isolate the threat;
e. Assign necessary units for directing and controlling traffic around containment area;
f. Ensure all non-participants are evacuated from the incident zones;
g. Establish a mobilization point within the established cold zone for on-scene assignments;
h. The first supervisor arriving remains in control of the scene until he is relieved.
Upon relief, he provides a formal transfer of command briefing for the incoming Incident Commander and ensures the Communications Unit notifies all personnel a change in command is taking place.

Answer 554

A

.06 INCIDENT MANAGEMENT STAFF STRUCTURE AND RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Incident Management Staff structure and responsibilities are outline in GM Procedure 801, Incident Command System.

.07 RESPONSE TEAMS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
A. The Crisis Negotiators Detail is a group of specially trained and certified officers who respond to critical incidents with the goal and responsibility of preserving life by obtaining a mutually acceptable solution to the matter.

B. The SWAT Detail is a group of specially trained and certified officers from the Special Operations Unit who are responsible for the preparation and exercise of all tactical functions utilized in the course of the situation.

C. The Bomb Squad is a group of officers specially trained in the handling and disposition of explosive devices, who respond on request by a supervisory officer to those critical incidents involving a lethal threat.
The squad may function as an element of the SWAT Detail during critical incidents.

D. The K-9 Detail is a group of officers specially trained at handling police canines, and during critical incidents, may function as en element of the SWAT Detail.

E. The Tactical Response Unit (TRU) and/or the Problem–Oriented Policing Unit (POP) will be responsible for providing crowd control during planned events or spontaneous civil disturbances.
These units may also be utilized to provide initial containment and security of a critical incident or unusual occurrence, and may be called upon for initial response during an active shooter incident.

F. Communications Unit

The Communications Unit has the vital responsibility of working with the Incident Management Staff to facilitate and coordinate the response and activities of all personnel on the scene.
The Communications Unit supervisor, at the direction of the Incident Management Staff, also notifies other entities (as per their SOP), as appropriate, based on the incident.

G. The Public Information Officer has the following responsibilities

Coordinate efforts with the Incident Commander;
Designate a safe and accessible press relations area for equitable information distribution;
Maintain an ongoing dialogue of relevant, factual, and non-compromising information with representatives of the media;

H. Officers, including supervisory officers, may be assigned to point control duties for directing and controlling of traffic, crowd, and media control within the cold zone or outside the established containment area.

I. The American Red Cross may respond to the scene for purposes of food provision to the officers on occasions of critical incidents or unusual occurrences of extended duration.
The marked canteen truck is afforded access to a safe, convenient, and accessible location within the cold zone.

Answer 555

A

** I. The American Red Cross may respond to the scene for purposes of food provision to the officers on occasions of critical incidents or unusual occurrences of extended duration. The marked canteen truck is afforded access to a safe, convenient, and accessible location within the cold zone.**

.09 EVACUATIONS

A. In the event there is a necessity for evacuation of any area, the Incident Commander:

Assigns a liaison officer to coordinate with other agencies involved;
The American Red Cross may be contacted via the EOC on behalf of the Incident Commander to set up evacuation centers and provide assistance to displaced persons;
Establishes and maintains the hot, warm, and cold zones to prohibit unauthorized persons from entering;
Assigns the necessary personnel for hot, warm, and cold zones patrols to safeguard the properties vacated;
Divides the area into sections, assigning units to evacuate specific sections, working from the unusual occurrence outward; and
Establishes a limited access area allowing residents, press, owners, and managers of businesses limited entrance.

B. The Incident Commander may direct the Public Information Officer to request radio and television stations to broadcast evacuation information.

C. Officers should record the names, addresses, and ages of persons evacuated and of persons who choose to remain in their homes or businesses during voluntary evacuations.

D. In some instances, it may be in the best interest of public safety to have persons remain isolated within their homes or businesses in lieu of evacuating them (shelter in place).

.10 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INCIDENTS

A. Hazardous material incidents and chemical spills present unique circumstances and require specialized instructions.
Under normal circumstances the Fire Department has principal responsibility for determining the necessary course of action and the Police Department’s role consists of perimeter control, security, and support of Fire Department operations.

B. Because hazardous material incidents are dynamic and could be linked to terrorism, incident command responsibility may rapidly transfer from one responding agency to another.
What may initially appear as a hazardous material exposure could transition to a chemical, biological, or radiological weapon of mass disaster incident.

C. Unified Command protocol should be implemented in any incident when a hazardous material is present in order to successfully plan, prepare, respond, recover and repatriate an affected area when necessary.

.11 DECONTAMINATION
All decontamination of personnel, equipment, and PPE kits will be processed according to the Fire Department’s established procedures.

.12 DE-ESCALATION PROCEDURE

A. As the situation subsides and order is restored, the Incident Commander surveys the affected area and determines if there is a further need for police personnel and equipment at the scene.
The Incident Commander will reduce the number of personnel and equipment necessary at the scene, until only the personnel directly involved in the operation remain.

B. In the event of personnel being recalled through the implementation of a mobilization phase, relief of personnel is conducted as follows:
Phase 1- Relief of personnel begins with personnel assigned under the last mobilization phase implemented and continues only until Traffic Section personnel are assigned.
Phase 2- Eight hour shifts utilizing Traffic Section personnel are implemented.
Phase 3- Normal operations are restored.

.13 CONCLUSION ACTIVITIES

A. Upon the deactivation of subordinate units, commanders ensure each supervisor submits a written report that
includes the following information:
1. A record of the name, badge number, dates, times, and assignments for each member under their supervision; and
2. Account for all equipment issued to personnel under their supervision.

B. Upon conclusion of all activities related to the unusual occurrence:
1. The Incident Commander will, if necessary, request a post-incident investigation by the appropriate investigative follow-up unit;
2. All commanders prepare an after-action report which is submitted to the Incident Commander within ten (10) calendar days.
The after-action report contains a complete and detailed account of the operation of subordinate units under their command during the unusual occurrence;
3. The Incident Commander prepares a final report detailing the Department’s response to the unusual occurrence.
This report is submitted, along with a copy of the Incident Action Plan, to the Office of the Chief within thirty (30) calendar days; and
4. The Manager of the Accounting and Personnel Office prepares an operational cost report which is submitted to the Office of the Chief.

C. After-action critiques are conducted at the direction of the Chief of Police or the Incident Commander.

.14 INCIDENT STRESS

A. Commanders and supervisors monitor the behavior of their subordinates involved in critical incidents, unusual occurrences or any major disasters (especially those involving mass deaths or injuries) and remain aware of any special needs of their personnel.

B. Psychological Services Office remains available for members exhibiting symptoms of stress or trauma and for those who desire post-incident counseling.

.15 ANNUAL TRAINING

A. Training will be conducted on the components of the City of San Antonio Emergency Management – Basic Plan by members of Critical Incident Response Teams and any other affected personnel on an annual basis.

B. The annual training should include classroom instructions, tabletop exercises and functional exercises that include multi-agency involvement with agencies in the Department’s geographical area.

C. The annual training on the City of San Antonio Emergency Management – basic plan shall be documented by the Commander who conducted the training, and a written critique of the training will be forwarded to the Chief of Police.

Answer 556

A

.04 UNIT and OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES A. Communications Unit Responsibilities:
1. Communications Unit personnel, upon receipt of a bomb threat, dispatch uniformed officers, including a supervisory officer, to the scene of the bomb threat.
2. Find out from the person who received the call the exact words used in the threat so the threat can be evaluated.
3. The Bomb Squad is notified of the bomb threat and placed on stand-by.
4. The Bomb Squad will determine if the Fire Department’s Arson Investigator is notified. Arson Investigators will not respond to Threat Calls that deal with suspected devices, such as unclaimed packages and briefcases until the SAPD Bomb Squad determines the need for a follow up investigation. Arson conducts the follow-up investigations for hoax devices and Improvised Explosive Devices (IED). The Property Crimes Detail, for that particular service area, conducts the follow-up investigations for bomb threat calls only.
5. The Homicide Unit is notified if the bomb threat involves extortion.
6. The Communications Unit supervisor monitors the bomb threat call through to completion.
B. Initial Responders Responsibilities:
1. Ensure radio transmitters at the scene are not keyed under any circumstances (although radios may be left on for monitoring purposes) and establish the location of a telephone for all communications purposes.
2. Cellular phones, vehicle laptop computers, in car video microphones and/or Body Worn Camera’s, shall not be used within three hundred (300) feet of the scene.
Note: Cellular phones and all laptop computers, due to the radio magnetic waves created, are prohibited and must be turned off! This includes all by-standers.
3. Communication should be by hard-line telephone, if possible.
a. If it is necessary to use a radio, cellular phone, or laptop computers move at least three hundred (300) feet from the scene.
b. As an alternative, prior to transmitting, position yourself so there is some type of cover between you and the device.
4. Contact the reporting person, if other than the Communications Unit dispatcher, to ascertain the nature of the situation, the location of the device (if known), the particulars of the call (if applicable), and the identity of the party responsible for control of the premises.
C. Supervisory Officer Responsibilities:
1. Respond to the scene and assume command of the situation;
a. Establish a command post and check the immediate area around it for possible explosive devices.
b. Ensure all personnel responding check-in prior to entering the premises.
2. Summon sufficient personnel as needed for perimeter control and point control for the direction and control of traffic, crowd and media;
3. Advise the owner/person in charge of the facility it is their decision as to whether or not a search or sweep is conducted. Assistance may be provided by the Police, if so requested.
4. Coordinate police response and render the decision when to conclude operations.

Answer 557

A

.07 SUICIDEBOMBERS
A. Overview: In most situations, officers will respond to a suicide bomber in a post-blast capacity.
But there may be times when the officer will have to deal with a suicide bomber who may have been encountered prior to setting up for an attack, the suicide bomber may have tried to detonate the explosives he is wearing and it failed to detonate, the suicide bomber may be set up to conduct the attack and now has a change of heart.
Although these incidents will be very rare, they are possible and the officer who comes in contact with these individuals will need to handle the situation.
The following is a guideline for dealing with these circumstances and is not the only way to handle these types of situations.

B. Communications Unit Responsibilities

Dispatch at least two officers and a supervisor to the scene of a suspected suicide bomber.
Ensure the Bomb Squad has been notified and is placed on stand-by.
The Communications Unit supervisor shall be notified of the call.

C. Initial Responders Responsibilities

Upon arrival at the scene of a possible suicide bomber, officers should obtain as much information as possible to help determine if the suspect is indeed a suicide bomber.
Have the Communications Unit contact the Bomb Squad and start them to the location of the suspect suicide bomber.
When responding to person(s) attached to improvised explosive device(s), officers should:
a. Control the person so they cannot intentionally or accidentally detonate the device;
b. Order the person to stand still and make no movement at all.
Do not close distance to negotiate with the suspect. Utilize cover and shielding as safety measures.
Designate “one” person to give commands to the suspect to avoid confusion from multiple officers giving the suspect confusing commands.
Direct officers to the scene and set up a perimeter around the suspect. Utilize patrol rifles, if they are available.
Evacuate the area of all non-essential personnel and prevent re-entry.
If the suspect is compliant;
a. Have the suspect show you his hands.
b. Have the suspect remove the explosive device and step away from it.
c. Have the suspect remove his clothes and turn three hundred sixty (360) degrees to ensure that the suspect does not have any other explosives on his body.
d. Once the officer is confident there are no other explosives on the suspect, direct the suspect to officers on the perimeter so the suspect can be taken into custody.
e. Maintain perimeter security and do not approach the explosive device until the Bomb Squad has arrived and determined the area is safe.
If the person fails to obey verbal commands and the officer reasonably believes the actions of the person create a threat of physical harm to another person, including the officer, the officer may use the necessary force he deems reasonable under the circumstance to protect themselves and others.

D. Supervisory Officer Responsibility

Upon arrival at the scene, assume command of the situation, until the arrival of a higher ranking officer.
Determine if there are enough officers on the scene to secure the perimeter.
Call for officers who are assigned rifles and position them on the perimeter to help contain the suspect.
Ensure non-essential personnel have been evacuated from the area and they are prevented from re-entering the area.
Ensure the Bomb squad has been notified and are in route to the scene.
Ensure proper notifications have been made and ascertain whether or not the EOC should be alerted and put on stand-by.
In all cases the Fire Department will be notified and will send at least one truck and one EMS Unit to the scene.
Assign an officer as security for the Fire Department in case there is an attack made against them.
Ensure officers on the perimeter are aware of possible attacks on them and are vigilant of not only the suspect suicide bomber, but of accomplices in the crowd.
Take whatever other measures necessary to contain the situation and keep the officers and public safe.
If media helicopters are present, contact the Helicopter Detail and have them contact the FAA tower and secure the air space over the situation.
An explosive device can send pieces of fragmentation over large areas and cause damage to the helicopters.
Determine when to conclude activities and return officers to service.

Answer 558

A

.10 DANGEROUS WAR SOUVENIRS and EXPLOSIVES
A. If a Police Officer discovers an explosive device, the officer shall follow Section .06.
B. Whenever citizens turn over any war souvenirs, live ammunition, dynamite, percussion caps, fuses, or other explosives and devices to an officer, the officer shall:
1. Advise the citizens they are relinquishing all property rights to the items surrendered, so as to prevent requests for the Department to deactivate and return souvenirs.
2. Consider each item as potentially dangerous. Do not handle any explosive devices found.
3. Make an inquiry as to whether anyone has attempted to deactivate the device, and forward this information to the Bomb Squad upon arrival.
C. If
a citizen brings an explosive device to a police facility, officers shall:
1. Leave police radios on, but do not transmit from them.
2. If the item is a war souvenir, it is safer to get the item outside and limit access to it until the Bomb Squad
arrives. An alternative is to evacuate the building and wait for Bomb Squad to respond.
3. If an item appears to be a bomb or is suspicious, immediately evacuate the building.
4. Notify the Communications Unit from a phone line to have the Bomb Squad respond to the scene.
5. Command of the incident is performed in accordance with Section .06 C.

Answer 559

A

Pipe Bomb
5 lbs. in a building 70 ft. Outside 850 ft
2.3 kg. 21m. 259 m

Suicide Belt
10 lbs 4.5 kg. 90 ft 27m. 1,080 ft 330 m

Suicide Vest.
20 lbs 9kg 110 ft 34m. 1,360 ft 415 m

Briefcase/Suitcase Bomb
50 lbs 23 kg. 150 ft 46m. 1,850 ft 564 m

Compact Sedan
500 lbs 227 kg 320 ft 98m. 1,500 ft 457 m

Sedan
1,000 lbs 454 kg. 400 ft 122 m. 1,750 ft 534 m

Passenger/Cargo Van
4,000 lbs 1,814 kg. 640 ft 195 m. 2,750 ft 838 m

Small Moving Van/ Delivery Truck
10,000lbs 4,536 kg. 860 ft 263 m 3,750 ft 1,143m

Moving Van/Water Truck
30,000 lbs 13,608 kg. 1,240 ft 375 m
6,500 ft 1,982 m

Semitrailer
60,000 lbs 27,216 kg. 1,570 ft 475 m
7,000 ft 2,134 m

Small LPG Tank 🔥 fire ball. Safe-distance
20 lbs/5 gal 9 kg/19 l. 40 ft 12m. 160 ft 48m

Large LPG Tank
100 lbs/25 gal
45 kg/95 l 69 ft 21m. 276 ft 84m

Commercial/Residential LPG Tank
2,000 lbs/500 gal 907 kg/1,893 l
184 ft 56m
736 ft 224 m

              Small LPG Truck 8,000 lbs/2,000 gal 3,630 kg/7,570 l
                                 292 ft 89m
                                                                1,168 ft 356 m

              Semitanker LPG 40,000 lbs/10,000 gal 18,144 kg/37,850 l
                                499 ft 152 m
                                                            1,996 ft 608 m

1. Based on the maximum amount of material that could reasonably fit into a container or vehicle. Variations possible.
1. Governed by the ability of an unreinforced building to withstand severe damage or collapse.
1. Governed by the greater of fragment throw distance or glass breakage/falling glass hazard distance. These distances can be reduced for personnel wearing ballistic protection. Note that the pipe bomb, suicide belt/vest, and briefcase/suitcase bomb are assumed to have a fragmentation characteristic that requires greater standoff distances than an equal amount of explosives in a vehicle.
1. Assuming efficient mixing of the flammable gas with ambient air.
1. Determined by U.S. firefighting practices wherein safe distances are approximately 4 times the flame height. Note that an LPG tank filled with high explosives would require a significantly greater standoff distance than if it were filled with LPG.

Answer 560

A

.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES

A. The Deputy Chief assigned to the Tactical Support Division maintains the responsibility for identifying resource needs and planning the appropriate police response for scheduled events.
This Deputy Chief is hereafter referred to as the Incident Commander for all planned events.

B. The supervisory officer-in-charge of the appropriate Patrol Division service area is responsible for initiating the appropriate police action in response to spontaneous events.
This supervisory officer, until relieved by a higher ranking officer, is hereafter referred to as the Incident Commander.

C. In response to planned or spontaneous events, the Incident Commander is responsible for:
1. Meeting with the sponsors to discuss the required permits and applicable laws;
a. In planned events, the sponsors or leaders are readily identifiable, allowing for scheduled informal meetings.
b. In spontaneous events, contact with the formal or informal leaders is made.
When practical, this is a personal contact, otherwise the crowd is addressed by use of a loudspeaker.
2. Identifying and acquiring the needed manpower;
a. In planned events, the required manpower is obtained by the utilization of the on-duty members of the Traffic Section, with additional volunteers solicited when necessary.
Sufficient manpower to provide for the relief of assigned personnel should be procured.
b. In spontaneous events, the available on-duty resources of all Patrol Division personnel is utilized, with additional manpower needs acquired through the implementation of a mobilization phase in accordance with GM Procedure 806, Mobilization.
3. Identifying and procuring additional resource needs;
a. In both planned and spontaneous events this includes, but is not limited to, communication equipment, assignment of radio frequencies, vehicles, barricades, and riot control equipment.
b. Riot control equipment is stored at the SAPD Property and Evidence Building located at 555 Academic Court.
Access to the Ready Room and issuance of equipment is detailed in GM Procedure 309, Weapons.
4. Establishing a field command post and staging area in accordance with GM Procedure 802, Unusual Occurrences and Critical Incidents;
5. Conducting major operations relating to large scale civil disturbances in accordance with this procedure and GM Procedure 802;
6. Defining and establishing the inner and outer perimeters;
a. Whether the event is planned or spontaneous, the inner and outer perimeters should be defined as soon as possible.
Consideration is given to the size of the crowd, location of the event, and the potential for disorder in determining these perimeters.
The utilization of barricades and deployment of personnel serve to identify these perimeters.
b. In events requiring large numbers of personnel or covering a large area, the area should be divided into quadrants or sections with each quadrant or section under the direction of a supervisory or command level officer.
7. Defining and controlling ingress and egress points;
a. The establishment and control of points of entry and exit for participants, spectators, and maintenance personnel should be identified in planned events.
These points should be sufficient in number to provide for the orderly and effective entry of the anticipated number of persons.
b. Emergency vehicle and emergency personnel entrances and exits should be defined.
These points should be manned by officers to provide assistance in directing any required emergency vehicles or personnel.
Establishment of these points must be a coordinated effort between all the emergency service agencies.
8. Considering possible scenarios and formulating contingency plans;
a. Emergency exits are established to provide for the expedient exit of persons in the event of a crisis.
b. Liaison with other emergency service agencies is maintained.
Information relative to the size and circumstances of the event is provided.
c. A sufficient number of officers may be held in reserve or assigned to non-critical posts to provide immediate deployment or reassignment in the event of an emergency.

Answer 561

A

.06 CROWD CONTROL STRATEGIES
A. Crowd management techniques should be utilized first; however, in situations where there is an imminent threat to public safety, control strategies should be developed simultaneous to the implementation of management procedures.

B. The governing factor in tactical operations is one of teamwork, each individual subordinating himself to the orders and direction of the team leader.
The Incident Commander must evaluate his current resources and commit the available units to the portion of the disturbance which can be controlled.
A force of insufficient strength, too hastily deployed, may only aggravate a situation.
Leaders must ensure that the engaged police units grasp the initiative and assume and maintain the initial advantage in street situations.

C. The strategies employed are determined by the Incident Commander and must be relevant to the situation.
Situations and circumstances involved frequently change and the police must adjust to the given or perceived threat.
Therefore, the following techniques do not establish a “set” plan of action, but provide direction in formulating the methods to be utilized.
1. Show of force:
a. The anxiety level of a crowd can occasionally be reduced by the knowledge of a substantial police presence without the actual display of the force.
b. A show of force to disperse a crowd is most effective when the officers are assembled outside the view of the crowd and make a surprise formidable appearance.
To be most effective the officers should march in formation into view, remain a reasonably safe distance from the crowd, halt, and remain in formation in view of the crowd.
c. A show of force should not be utilized unless there is sufficient strength to accomplish dispersal.
A proclamation and dispersal order should be made in conjunction with the show of force.
2. Selective arrests:
a. In those situations where the overall crowd is generally peaceful and there are individuals within the crowd that hide behind the anonymity of the group to throw objects at the police or to incite or provoke the crowd, plainclothes officers, in squads, may be sent into the crowd to identify the person or persons.
(1) The plainclothes officers should not make the arrest(s), unless the person(s) leaves the crowd and the arrest(s) can be made without jeopardizing the identity of the officers.
(2) In a generally hostile crowd or when overt arrest(s) are necessary, a squad of uniformed officers should make the arrest(s).
b. Prior to making selective arrests, a sufficient force of officers should be present to deal with the entire crowd, should it become necessary.
3. Dispersal orders:
a. When crowd management and control measures fail to control or disperse a crowd, a proclamation and dispersal order shall be given.
b. The Incident Commander shall designate a command level officer to give the proclamation and order the crowd to disperse.
c. The designated officer shall address the entire crowd with a loudspeaker, stating the assembly is involved in an unlawful act and is in violation of a specific law (naming it).
The assembly has been declared unlawful and ordered to disperse (stating a specific length of time to comply) and those individuals who fail to disperse will be arrested.
d. An avenue for the crowd to depart must be provided.
Notice of the dispersal order and the direction provided for departure of the crowd must be relayed to all operational units.
e. Whenever possible, an audio/visual record of the dispersal order is made.

Answer 562

A

.08 MULTIPLE ARREST PROCEDURES
A. The concept of multiple arrest groups is to provide a specialized group of officers working together during large scale arrests at major events to deal with all aspects of the arrest process, from the initial arrest to the delivery of prisoners to the City of San Antonio Detention Center, permitting the primary line officers free to manage the event.
1. In most mass arrest situations, the Special Operations Unit is utilized for making arrests.
In the event this unit is not available, other personnel are utilized and organized according to groups prescribed in Subsection .08D.
2. All members of arrest groups are in complete uniform unless otherwise directed by the Incident Commander.

B. The Incident Commander, anticipating multiple arrest situations:
1. Coordinates the implementation of these procedures with the commanding officer of the Special Operations Unit.
An estimate of the number of potential arrestees and whether they will be peaceful or violent is made to determine the number and size of arrest groups needed; and
2. Notifies the City of San Antonio Detention Center and Juvenile Processing Office supervisors of the anticipated multiple arrests.

C. The Commander of the Special Operations Unit:

Maintains the equipment and training status of arrest groups;
Implements the multiple arrest procedures in their entirety when directed by the Incident Commander; and
Designates a field detention area near the site to allow for the preparation of prisoners for booking.

D. Arrest groups:
1. Arrest groups consist of the following personnel:
a. Supervisory officer assigned as the group leader;
b. Two (2) or more officer arrest teams;
c. Two (2) or more officer support teams; and
d. One (1) or more officer transporting teams.
2. Arrest groups maintain the following equipment:
a. Numbered plastic handcuffs;
b. One or more prisoner transport wagons;
c. Booking slips; and
d. Cameras and related equipment.
3. Arrest groups may expand in size or number according to the number of arrests anticipated or the amount of resistance contemplated.
The determinant being the ability of the group to expedite the flow of arrestees.

E. Arrest procedures:
1. When practical an audio/visual record is made of all arrests.
2. The supervisor assigned as the group leader designates arrest teams to begin arresting selected participants.
A support team is assigned to the arrest team as back-up as needed.
3. Persons who offer no resistance are walked to the field detention area.
In the event a person offers passive resistance in refusing to accompany the officers, the person is lifted and walked or carried to the field detention area.
4. When groups of demonstrators to be arrested lock arms, the arrest team untangles the demonstrators one at a time.
A support team is assigned to serve as back-up for the arrest team as needed.
5. Each person arrested is handcuffed and searched.
Numbered plastic handcuffs are utilized to handcuff and identify persons arrested.
In passive demonstrations, the
Incident Commander may decide not to handcuff arrested persons in order to diminish the crowd’s anxiety;
however, a numbered plastic handcuff is placed around the wrist of the arrested person to serve as identification.
6. Persons arrested are taken to the field detention area by the arrest team.
The assigned support team accompanies the arrest team to the field detention area, and then returns to the incident site for further assignment.
7. At the field detention area:
a. Arrestees, when necessary, are provided medical treatment, water, and public facilities.
Food is not provided to arrestees;
b. The arrest team and the arrested person are photographed;
c. One of the arrest team officers completes the booking slip, recording the number of the plastic handcuff in the box labeled “Alias Names.”
The reverse side of the photograph contains the date and time of the arrest, the names of the arresting officers, the assignment number, and the plastic handcuffs number;
d. The other arrest team officer completes the offense report, recording the plastic handcuffs number in the box labeled “Alias;”
e. The prisoner, his property, the booking slip, photograph, and offense report are delivered to the transporting officers; and
f. The arrest team returns to the incident site for further assignment.
8. At the direction of the arrest group supervisor, the transporting officers proceed to the Detention Center.
Upon arrival the transporting officers:
a. Release the prisoners to the Detention Center personnel;
b. Make a photo copy of the offense report, photograph, and booking slip;
c. Present the booking slip and copy of the photograph to the Detention Center personnel;
d. Present the copy of the offense report to the magistrate’s office and magistrates the prisoner;
e. Retain the original photograph, offense report, and the copy of the booking slip (stapled together); and
f. Return to the field detention area for further assignment.
9. Upon completion of the arrest process or upon relief, the transporting officers submit all photographs, offense reports, and booking slips to the supervisor of the arrest group.

Answer 563

A

.10 CONCLUSION ACTIVITIES
A. Upon the deactivation of subordinate units, commanders ensure each supervisor submits a written report to:
1. Account for all equipment issued to personnel under their supervision; and
2. Record the name, badge number, dates, times, and assignments for each member under their supervision.

B. Upon conclusion of all activities related to a spontaneous event:
1. All commanders prepare an after-action report which is submitted to the Incident Commander within ten (10) days.
The after-action report contains a complete and detailed account of the operation of subordinate units under their command during the event.
2. The Incident Commander prepares a final report detailing the Department response to the event.
This report is submitted, along with a copy of the Command Post Journal, to the Chief of Police within thirty (30) days.
3. The Fiscal Planning Manager prepares an operational cost report which is submitted to the Office of the Chief.

C. After-action critiques are conducted at the direction of the Chief of Police or the Incident Commander.

Answer 564

A

.04 REQUESTS FOR TRANSFERS
(EXCLUDING SHIFT CHANGES WITHIN THE PATROL SHIFTS OF THE PATROL DIVISION)

A. Officers wishing to transfer, excluding transfers to a patrol shift of the Patrol Division, shall enter their transfer request(s) in the Police Career Activities System (PCAS) through COSANET on an office terminal.
1. There is no limit to the number of transfer requests an officer may enter into the Police Career Activities System.
2. When entering a transfer request, officers must enter the following information in the appropriate computer screen fields before the computer system will accept the transfer request:
a. The three (3) letter office designation for the unit the officer is wanting to transfer into below the word “Office”;
b. The six (6) number activity code for the unit the officer is wanting to transfer into below the word “Activity”; and
c. A number for the priority of the transfer request below the word “Priority.”
The number “1” being the officer’s first choice, the number “2” being the officer’s second choice, etc.
3. The entering of a transfer request into the Police Career Activities System does not guarantee a transfer, but only ensures consideration of the request, a review of his record, and possibly an interview.
4. After officers enter their transfer requests into the Police Career Activities System, they may print out the form for their own records.

B. Officers assigned to any unit other than a Patrol Shift, wishing to transfer to a Patrol Shift of the Patrol Division must submit an Interoffice Memorandum through the chain of command requesting a transfer to a patrol shift of the Patrol Division.

C. If approved, the Interoffice Memorandum is forwarded to the Manpower Allocations Detail by the Division Commander’s office.

D. When the Manpower Allocations Detail receives the Interoffice Memorandum, the officer will be considered for transfer to a Patrol Shift, depending on staffing needs of the Patrol Division.

.05 CANCELLATION OF TRANSFER REQUESTS
A. An officer wishing to withdraw a request for transfer may delete the transfer request from the Police Career Activities System (PCAS) database through COSANET.

B. When an officer is promoted or voluntarily transferred, all transfer requests of that officer on the Police Career Activities System are invalidated.

C. Any transfer request on the Police Career Activities System expires after a period of twelve (12) months.
It is the responsibility of the individual officer to ensure his/her transfer request(s) are current.

Answer 565

A

.07 NOTIFICATION OF TRANSFER
A. Division Commanders receive notification of approval or any denial of transfers from their respective Bureau Commander.

B. Division Commanders receive notification of the effective date of any transfer from the Manpower Allocations Detail.

C. All officers to be transferred are notified by the Office of the Chief.

.08 REQUESTS TO FILL SHIFT AND RELIEF DAY VACANCIES WITHIN THE PATROL SHIFTS OF THE PATROL DIVISION

A. Shift Change and Relief Day System (SCHARDS) requests are the basis from which all shift and relief day vacancies within the patrol shifts of the Patrol Division are filled.

B. Officers being assigned to different shifts and officers who are only receiving relief day changes are personally responsible for updating their SCHARDS request within seventy-two (72) hours by making any necessary corrections, additions, or deletions.

C. All officers should retain a dated copy of their transfer request.
Should an officer feel that he/she has been unjustly or erroneously transferred, the officer can make an appointment with the Manpower Allocations Detail supervisor to discuss the issue if he/she presents a dated copy of a transfer request that shows an error has been made.

.09 PROCEDURE FOR FILLING SHIFT AND RELIEF DAY VACANCIES WITHIN THE PATROL SHIFTS OF THE PATROL DIVISION
A. Police Officers
1. Shift and relief day vacancies for Police Officers within the patrol shifts of the Patrol Division are filled by the Manpower Allocations Detail from current SCHARDS requests.
2. When a shift or relief day vacancy occurs due to an officer leaving a patrol shift of the Patrol Division, the shift director notifies the Manpower Allocations Detail, which determines if the vacancy is to be filled.
3. The creation of new relief days and the elimination of vacant relief days are determined by the Manpower Allocations Detail.
4. The cut-off date for consideration in filling any shift or relief day vacancy is the date the original change order is developed by the Manpower Allocations Detail.
Officers who enter relief day or shift change requests into SCHARDS after that date are excluded from that particular shift or relief day change order.

B. Sergeants and Lieutenants
1. Consideration for filling shift and relief day vacancies for Sergeants and Lieutenants within the patrol shifts of the Patrol Division is based, in part, on current SCHARDS requests.
2. Selections for shift vacancies within a particular patrol section are subject to the approval of the
Patrol Section Commander.
3. Selections for shift vacancies between patrol sections are subject to the approval of the
Patrol Division Commander.
4. Selections for relief day vacancies only are on the basis of seniority from SCHARDS requests.
5. The cut-off date for consideration in any shift or relief day change is the date the original change order is developed by the Manpower Allocations Detail.
Sergeants and Lieutenants who enter shift or relief day change requests into SCHARDS after that date are excluded from consideration for that particular shift or relief day change order.

.10 RETURN OF ISSUED EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO TRANSFER OR SHIFT CHANGE

Members of all ranks, prior to transferring to another unit, shall turn in all unit-issued equipment, unless the issued equipment is to be used by the member in his new assignment.

Answer 566

A

G. In the event the officer receives medical treatment, the officer signs SAPD Form #69, Medical Release, for the District Attorney’s Office. The medical release can be signed at the Night CID Unit or the Homicide Unit office.

H. A uniformed supervisory officer is dispatched on all assaults on a peace officer where an arrest is made.

The supervisor writes the proper injured officer reports and initiates the Workers’ Compensation documentation in accordance with GM Procedure 916, Worker’s Compensation.
A copy of the Workers’ Compensation documentation is forwarded to Homicide Unit to be included with the case for filing in the District Attorney’s Office.

Answer 567

A

Phase II

Phase II is implemented when the occurrence has reached a condition where the total manpower and resources mobilized in Phase I are not adequate to control the situation or to adequately protect the lives and property of the citizens of San Antonio.

Phase II requires the recall of all Departmental personnel.

All leave, training, and support activities are canceled (excluding injury and sick leave).

Mutual aid from the Bexar County Sheriff’s Department and Texas Department of Public Safety may be requested.

The Chief of Police or, in his absence, the Acting Chief of Police, will authorize the implementation of Phase II based on recommendations from the Command Officer who responded to the initial incident.

Notice of Phase II implementation is made to the City Manager, Mayor and Emergency Management Coordinator.

The activation of the City of San Antonio Emergency Operations Center is determined and made by the City Manager or Mayor.

Phase III

Phase III is implemented when the unusual occurrence has reached such a catastrophic condition the situation cannot be controlled by the combined resources of the City and county law enforcement agencies. State and Federal assistance is requested.

All requests for State or Federal disaster relief assistance, including the National Guard, must be made through the Emergency Management Coordinator (by authority of the Mayor).
This request is made to the Texas Division of Emergency Management through the District Disaster Committee Chair (DPS Captain), Region 3B, and Texas Department of Public Safety.

Answer 568

A

C. All sworn members are to report in the regulation uniform, unless instructed otherwise.

D. Phase I

The Incident Commander
a. Determines the number of necessary personnel from the oncoming shifts to be recalled;
b. Decides if relief days, vacation, training, and support activities are canceled; and
c. Notifies the on-duty Communications Unit shift supervisor of the personnel designated to recall.
The Communications Unit Shift Supervisor
a. Notifies:
(1) The Office of the Chief;
(2) The Deputy Chief(s) assigned to the Patrol Division(s); and
(3) The Emergency Management Coordinator.
b. Directs and supervises the notification of all command personnel assigned to the oncoming units or shifts designated to be recalled; and
c. Initiates a follow-up notification of all
non-supervisory personnel assigned to the
on-coming units or shifts designated to be recalled, thereby ensuring notification of all affected personnel.
Notified Service Area, Shift, and Unit Commanders notify their respective oncoming supervisory personnel.
Apprised supervisory personnel notify their respective oncoming subordinates.

Answer 569

A

.05 ASSIGNMENT OF PERSONNEL

A. The Incident Commander ensures the recalled members receive specific assignments.
Assignments are prioritized and given at the staging area.
Assignments may be divided into four (4) categories:
1. Relief of on-duty members;
2. Containment at the scene or control of the perimeter surrounding the occurrence;
3. Provide service coverage to other sections of the city; and
4. Assignments involving specialized needs are coordinated with the appropriate specialized unit commander.

B. The Incident Commander determines the need for a twelve (12) hour shift operation.
The twelve (12) hour shifts are identified as follows:
1. The first shift is identified as ALPHA.
2. The second shift is identified as BRAVO.

.06 OPERATIONS
All Department operations are conducted in accordance with Department procedures relative to the occurrence and the Emergency Operations Plan for the City of San Antonio.

Answer 570

A

.04 READINESS LEVELS AND MEASURES OF PREPAREDNESS
A. Normal Conditions
1. The member assigned to security at Headquarters Building will implement appropriate security measures in accordance with the Service and Support Division standard operating procedures.
2. Patrol Division Station Commanders will implement appropriate security measures at substations and instruct patrol officers to do the following:
a. Patrol their assigned districts and be available for calls or special assignments.
b. Monitor areas close to large buildings, giving special attention to abandoned vehicles or suspicious packages left unattended.
3. The officers assigned to security at all other police facilities will implement appropriate security measures in accordance with the standard operating procedures at their respective police facilities.
4. The Tactical Support Division Commander will implement security measures to include the following:
a. Details of the Special Operation Unit will shift their training focus to such items as chemical/biological response, search and rescue, bomb training, and negotiation issues involving extremist groups.
b. Traffic Shift officers will monitor all expressway systems and immediately report any unusual contacts. Special attention should be given to abandoned vehicles on the roadways. Hazardous material routes will be strictly enforced.

Answer 571

A

.05 PERSONNELDEPLOYMENT/RE-DEPLOYMENT PLANS

Division Commanders will maintain deployment/re-deployment plans for their respective divisions to address each level of readiness an act of terrorism might require.

.06 IMPLEMENTATION OF THREAT LEVELS
A. Any information received by any member, from other agencies or contacts, concerning possible terrorist activities or changes in threat levels shall immediately be relayed to the Commander of the Homeland Security Section, or his designee.

B. The Commander of the Homeland Security Section, or his designee, will determine the validity of the information received and any action necessary, based on the information.

C. The Chief of Police, or his designee, will implement the appropriate threat levels during normal business hours.

D. The Night Commander or Deputy Chief designated as the Duty Officer in accordance with GM Procedure 314, Command Notification, will implement the appropriate threat levels after normal business hours, on weekends and holidays.
The Night Commander or the Duty Officer will notify the Chief of Police, or his designee, when a threat level is implemented and of any changes in threat levels.

Answer 572

A

.09 RESPONSE FOR A SUSPICIOUS LETTER OR PACKAGE
A. Communications Unit call takers, upon receiving a call for a suspicious letter or package, will obtain as much information as possible, including the complainant’s name and telephone number.
B. When Special Operations Unit or Traffic Shift officers are on-duty, they will be dispatched to make an initial assessment.
1. If the suspicious item is an unopened letter, the officer will interview the complainant. If the officer determines there is nothing to indicate the letter contains hazardous materials, the officer will instruct the complainant to place the unopened letter into a plastic baggie, seal the baggie and dispose of the item in their trash receptacle.
2. If the suspicious item is an opened letter, or an unopened letter with some indication the letter might contain hazardous materials, the San Antonio Fire Department Hazardous Materials Response Team will be called to process the letter.
3. If the suspicious item is a package, the Bomb Squad and the Fire Department Arson Unit will be called to process the package.
4. If the suspicious item is an opened package, or there is visible residue from a closed package, the Fire Department Hazardous Materials Response Team, Bomb Squad, and Fire Department Arson Unit will be called to process the package.

C. When Special Operations Unit or Traffic Shift officers are not available, a Patrol Division officer and supervisor will be dispatched to make an initial assessment.

If the suspicious item is an unopened letter, the officer and supervisor will interview the complainant. If the officer and supervisor determine there is nothing to indicate the letter contains hazardous materials, the officer will instruct the complainant to place the unopened letter into a plastic baggie, seal the baggie and dispose of the item in their trash.
If the suspicious item is an opened letter, or an unopened letter with some indication the letter might contain hazardous materials, the San Antonio Fire Department Hazardous Materials Response Team will be called to process the letter.
If the suspicious item is a package, the Bomb Squad and Fire Department Arson Unit will be call to process the package.
If the suspicious item is an opened package, or there is visible residue from a closed package, the Fire Department Hazardous Materials Response Team, Bomb Squad, and Fire Department Arson Unit will be called to process the package.

D. When an officer responds to a call for a suspicious letter or package, if there is a suspicion the letter or package contains a hazardous material or there is visible residue, the officer will secure the scene and hold all persons at the scene for possible decontamination.

.10 INTERDEPARTMENT/INTEROFFICE MAIL
A. Due to concerns regarding suspicious letters and packages, the Police Department has formalized the process for routing correspondence within the Police Department and between the Police Department and other City Departments.

B. Any member needing to send interdepartmental or interoffice correspondence shall adhere to the following guidelines:

Use E-mail and Faxes as much as possible (Faxes require a cover sheet);
Interdepartmental and interoffice correspondence requires a routing slip. The routing slip must be completed, clearly and legibly identifying the sender, receiver, department, subject, etc.
Minimize the use of envelopes. Most correspondence can be folded and the routing slip attached to the folded correspondence.

.11 INCOMING MAIL
A. The use of the Department’s address is restricted to “Official Business Only.”

B. Members being asked for the Department’s address in order for a letter or parcel to be sent shall give the following addresses:
1. Letters shall be sent to the Department’s Post Office Box address. The address is:
San Antonio Police Department,
P.O. Box 839948,
San Antonio, Texas 78283.
2. Parcels shall be sent to the Department’s street address. The address is:
San Antonio Police Department,
214 W. Nueva,
San Antonio, Texas 78207.

Answer 573

A

DEFINITIONS

A. Active Shooter – An individual actively engaged in killing or attempting to kill people.
In most cases, active shooters use firearms and have no pattern or method to their selection of victims.
An “Active Shooter” includes anyone who uses any deadly weapon (knife, club, explosives, etc.) to continuously inflict death or serious bodily injury.

B. Active Shooter Incident – Per the
National Tactical Officers Association, “one or more subjects participate in a random or systematic shooting/killing spree, demonstrating their intent to continuously harm others.
An Active Shooter’s overriding objective appears to be that of inflicting death or serious bodily injury on a mass scale, rather than criminal conduct such as robbery, kidnapping, etc.”

C. Casualty Collection Point (CCP) – A designated location within the Warm Zone with security measures allowing assemblage of nearby casualties needing medical care.

D. Common Channel - A system-wide talk-group programmed into all radios for use by users on the COSA radio system.
The Common Channel can be quickly accessed by turning the radio select knob all the way to the right (position 16) regardless of the “fleet” the radio is set to monitor.

E. Contact Team – A group of 2-5 officers who move in a coordinated effort into the hot zone to address a threat.

F. Driving Force – A set of circumstances which would lead a reasonable person to believe that there is an imminent threat of death or serious bodily injury to another person, which would prompt an officer to take immediate action in an effort to mitigate the threat.
E.g.; gunfire is heard, someone is actively slashing with a knife, sounds of injured persons, actionable intelligence that victims need immediate lifesaving medical care, etc.

G. Forward Command Post (FCP) – A specified tactical location within the Warm Zone identified and established by a supervisor in order to command the incident and direct responding officers and other resources in a coordinated fashion.

H. Hostage Barricade Crisis – An incident in which one or more terrorists or criminals hold an individual(s) against his will and try to hold off the authorities by force, threatening to kill the hostage(s) if provoked or attacked.
In a hostage barricade crisis, the primary objective is usually not to inflict death or serious bodily injury on a mass scale, but instead to use the hostages as a bargaining tool.

I. Rescue Task Force (RTF) – A team comprised of no more than **8 first responders
(1 law enforcement officer per Fire/EMS member) that deploys in the Warm Zone to provide immediate medical care and evacuation of casualties.

J. Unified Command- An organized team effort which allows all involved agencies with jurisdictional authority or functional responsibility for the incident to jointly provide management direction through a common set of objectives and strategies and a single Incident Action Plan (IAP).

Answer 574

A

INITIAL RESPONDING OFFICERS

A. All available officers, including supervisors, from the affected Service Area and adjacent Service Areas will respond or be dispatched to the scene of an Active Shooter Incident.

B. The primary objective of every responding officer is to isolate, distract, or neutralize the actions of an active shooter.

C. Arriving officers shall immediately proceed to the area of the incident to isolate, distract, or neutralize the threat.
Officers shall proceed alone, if necessary, when Driving Forces are present.

D. Immediately after accomplishing the primary objective, officers will focus on preventing the loss of life by identifying and providing point-of-injury care to victims and facilitating the immediate deployment of Rescue Task Force teams as required.

E. Upon arrival, while focusing on the primary objective, assess and communicate the tactical situation:

Number of actors, descriptions, and last known locations;
Type of weapon(s) being used;
Other pertinent tactical information readily available.

F. When multiple officers arrive simultaneously, they shall proceed as a 2-5 officer contact team.

G.  All tactics employed should be guided by these basic principles:
   1.   Communicate
   2.   Stay together
   3.   Provide 540 degrees cover
   4.   Work the Angles
   5.   Threshold Evaluation
   6.   Speed of Movement 
(only move as fast as you can think and shoot accurately)

Answer 575

A

RESCUE TASK FORCE (RTF)
A. Rescue Task Force teams are deployed into the Warm Zone by the
Forward Command Post Supervisor.
B. The Rescue Task Force team leader will be a
law enforcement officer.
C. Law enforcement officers assigned to a
Rescue Task Force team are solely responsible for providing force protection to their assigned
Fire/EMS personnel.
D. Rescue Task Force teams will remain together at all times until relieved by a supervisor.
COMMUNICATIONS
A. Recognizing Active Shooter Incidents to be of utmost importance, Communications personnel will give the incident priority over other matters and will relay all obtained information related to the incident.
B. Upon report of a confirmed Active Shooter or other high profile law enforcement incident which is likely to initiate a multiple-agency response, the SAPD Communications Unit will immediately:
1. Patch police radio channel Mutual Aid 21 to the primary SAPD channel on which the incident is occurring.
  a. Outside agency personnel who are responding to the Active Shooter or other high profile law enforcement incident are expected to switch to the equivalent of radio channel Mutual Aid 21 for situational awareness and status updates.
  b. Outside agency responders are expected to maintain radio silence while responding to allow dispatch and officers/supervisors on scene to provide active information.
Notify the commander of the Special Operations Unit who will determine if activation of the Special Operations Unit is necessary.
At the request of the Forward Command Post supervisor, ensure the primary channel dispatcher announces for ALL officers who are responding and have not yet arrived at the incident to switch their police radio to the equivalent of the Common Channel for instructions.
a. The Dispatcher will broadcast these instructions on the primary channel frequently and often to ensure compliance.
b. The Forward Command Post supervisor, or designee, will provide instructions on the Common Channel to responding officers prior to arriving at the incident.

C. The Communications Unit directs responding units to the location, maintaining radio liaison with the initial responders, the Forward Command Post supervisor, and Incident Commander.
1. If already established, the dispatcher will direct all responding resources to the
Forward Command Post, unless the Forward Command Post supervisor requests otherwise.
2. At the direction of the Forward Command Post supervisor, the dispatcher will repeatedly broadcast over the primary channel for responding units who have not yet arrived to switch to the Common Channel in accordance with communications protocol.

D. Officers involved in an Active Shooter Incident will remain on the primary channel and all other officers will switch to other channel(s), identified by the Communications Shift Supervisor, for the duration of the event.

E. The Communications Shift Supervisor will ensure available Patrol supervisors from adjacent Service Areas are dispatched and will make required notifications to all responding agencies through their Unified Command liaisons.

F. Upon notification from the Incident Commander, the Communications Unit will resume normal radio operations.

POST ENGAGEMENT

A. Once an Active Shooter has been isolated or neutralized, officers will remain vigilant for the presence of additional actors and will continue their active shooter response if additional threats are identified.

B. Immediately after an active shooter has been isolated or neutralized, if not already deployed, officers will request Rescue Task Force teams from the Forward Command Post to provide medical care to injured victims and evacuate them to a higher level of care.

C. The Active Shooter Incident will only be declared “SAFE” by the Incident Commander.

POST INCIDENT

Post incident activities will be in accordance with GM Procedure 802, Unusual Occurrences and Critical Incidents.

Answer 576

A

/ Present for duty
AD Administrative leave
BD Bonus day
CT Compensatory time
DF Death in family
DL Disability leave (non-sworn members)
FH Floating holiday
HD Holiday
IJ Injured on-duty leave for any member,
(sworn or non-sworn)
LL. Legislative leave
LW Leave without pay
ML Military leave
MW Military leave without pay
PL Personal leave (non-sworn)
RD Relief day
SK Sick leave
SA Special assignment
SP Suspension without pay
VC Vacation or annual leave

Answer 577

A

.03 FIESTA & SPECIAL EVENT OVERTIME ACCOUNTING
A. The overtime accounting process for all members working a Fiesta event or a special event is handled by the special event commander in charge of the event through the
Police Event Management System (PEMS)

B. Members shall choose either overtime or compensatory time as compensation for overtime worked at a Fiesta or special event prior to the start of the event.

C. Members may verify the amount of overtime or compensatory time earned after the completion of a Fiesta or special event assignment by accessing PEMS, through COSANET, using either a mobile data computer (MD) or an office computer.

D. Members finding a discrepancy for overtime worked and the amount of overtime or compensatory time credited to them for working a Fiesta or special event should contact the
special event commander.
The special event commander is the only person authorized to make corrections in the Police Event Management System (PEMS).

.04 OVERTIME & COMPENSATORY TIME CARDS
A. SAPD Form #15-O, Overtime Pay Record
(white card), shall be submitted by officers who wish to receive pay for working overtime assignments other than Fiesta or special events.

B. SAPD Form #15-C, Compensatory Overtime Record (pink card), shall be submitted by members who wish to accrue compensatory time for working overtime assignments instead of receiving pay.

C. Overtime and compensatory time cards shall be filled out completely and legibly.

D. Approving Authority

Overtime and compensatory time cards submitted by sworn and non-sworn members shall be reviewed and approved by at least two levels of supervision prior to being delivered to the Accounting and Personnel Office:
a. 1st level approval - Unit/Shift Directors or Detail/Shift Supervisors; and
b. 2nd level approval - Division Commanders or their designee.
* *This is the person responsible for the activity code to which the overtime is charged.**
Supervisors review overtime and compensatory time cards for accuracy and legibility.
Overtime and compensatory time cards which are incomplete or in error are returned to the submitting member for correction and re-submittal.

E. Overtime and compensatory time cards must be submitted to the Accounting and Personnel Office within eight (8) calendar days.

.05 OVER TIME RATES
A. An overtime rate, designated by a two (2) digit number, is used to identify the overtime rate of pay a member is entitled to for working overtime.
The overtime rates are as follows:
1. 1.0 - Overtime payable at straight time
(non-sworn members ONLY**);

1.5 - Overtime payable at time and one half;
and
2.0 - Overtime payable at double time.

B. For sworn members, the current
Collective Bargaining Agreement is the proper source in determining the appropriate rate for overtime worked.

Answer 578

A

AB Chief’s Advisory Action Board.
Voluntary service at the 1.5 rate for reviewing cases and attending board meetings, prior authorization is necessary from the Board Chairperson.
No callback is authorized.
Approval is by the Board Chairperson.
This overtime is charged to the Chief’s Office cost center.
AD Alamo Dome
AE Extension of an assignment,
with prior authorization by a supervisor,
excluding late calls
AG Firing Range
AI Temporary instructor
at the Police Training Academy.
Persons who volunteer to be an instructor at the Academy at the 1.5 rate.
No callback is authorized.
No callback is authorized nor is the double time rate, unless ordered by a supervisor to attend.
This overtime must be approved by the Training Academy Commander.
AJ Academy Recruiting
AK Citizen Police Academy
AL Alamo Bowl
AN Academy Night Class
AP Applicant Processing
- Recruiting, processing, investigating, or
interviewing police applicants.
Persons who volunteer to perform recruiting work at the 1.5 rate.
No callback is authorized nor is the double time rate, unless ordered by a supervisor to attend.
BB Fiesta – Battle of the Bands
BD Bomb Squad incidents and training
BR Bike Rodeos
BT Donating blood
during a city endorsed blood drive.
Used only if Accounting and Personnel Office has not credited donor with compensatory time by the thirtieth (30) day following the blood donation.
CA Activities related to Texas Alcoholic
Beverage Commission hearings.
This includes pre-hearing meetings, giving depositions and attending hearings.
CC Attendance in County Court.
This includes pre-trial meetings, giving depositions and attending court. Does not include stand-by.
CD Attendance in District Court.
This includes pre-trial meetings, giving depositions, and attending court. Does not include stand-by.
CF Attendance in Federal or Civil Court.
This includes pre-trial meetings, giving depositions and attending court.
CG Attendance related to Grand Juries.
This includes pre-trial meetings,
giving depositions, and attending hearings.
CJ Activities related to participations in
Justice of the Peace Hearings.
This includes pre-hearing meetings,
giving depositions, and attending hearings.
CL Activities related to
Administrative License Revocation Hearings.
This includes pre-trial meetings,
giving depositions, and attending court.
CM Attendance in Municipal Court.
This includes pre-trial meetings and attending court.
CR Christmas River Parade
CS Activities related to Civil Service
Hearings and Arbitrations.
This includes pre-hearing/arbitration meetings,
giving depositions, and
attending hearings/arbitration.
Court related activities
(i.e., meeting with city, state, or federal attorneys)
CT Fiesta Carnival Traffic
CU US Customs Reimbursable OT
CV Convention Support
DE DEA Reimbursement Special Project
DP Dignitary Protection
DR Direct Report Entry
DS Diez Seis
DZ Dignitary Protection Intelligence
EC Emergency Callback
ER Crime Response Unit Initiative
EW Early Warning –
Time spent as a member of the Employee Early
Warning Board or a respondent to
the Employee Early Warning Board.
F1 First Friday
FA Fiesta: City Hall Security
FB FBI Reimbursable OT
FD Fiesta: Marines at Alamo
FH Fiesta: Market Square Traffic
FI Fiesta: Carnival
FJ Fiesta: Fun Run
FK Fiesta: NIOSA Traffic
FL Fiesta: Earth Day Fun Run
FM Fiesta: River Parade
FN Fiesta: Night Parade
FO Fiesta: Oyster Bake Traffic
FP Fiesta: Stand By Pool
FQ Fiesta: Market Square
FR Fiesta: Crowd Control
FS Fiesta
FT. FTO Program activities
by non-FTO officers.
Cards must include the name
of the cadet, probationary officer,
or officer assigned to remedial training,
and the immediate supervisor’s signature.
Cards are routed to Training Academy
for Second (2nd) Level Approval
by Training Academy Commander
or his designee.
FV Fiesta: Opening Ceremonies
FW Fiesta: Battle of Flowers Parade
FX Fiesta: Shift Extension
GR Graffiti Program
HG Honor Guard
HM Hazardous Material Stand By
HN. Hostage Negotiators Detail
activities and training.
HP Holidays Specified By Contract
HT HIDTA Special
HU Hurricane Support
IA Internal Affairs Unit
investigation activities.
IA overtime approvals will be charged
to Internal Affairs.
On-Duty Officers :
When an Internal Affairs Supervisor notifies an on-duty officer to report to the Internal Affairs Unit regarding an Internal Affairs investigation, and, as a result, the officer works overtime, the officer will complete an overtime card.
The Internal Affairs Supervisor will sign the back of the overtime card and make a notation as to the time the officer left the Internal Affairs Unit.
After the officer arrives at his substation, he will time-stamp the card and submits it.
The card will be approved by the officer’s immediate supervisor and then routed to the Internal Affairs Unit for Second (2nd) Level approval.

**Off-Duty Officers**: 
When an officer on off-duty status reports to the Internal Affairs Unit at the request of Internal Affairs Supervisor regarding an internal affairs investigation, the officer will complete an overtime card and submit it to the Internal Affairs Supervisor. 
The First (1st) Level and Second (2nd) Level approval will occur within the Internal Affairs Unit.

IC Involuntary Callback.
An officer is ordered to return to duty for a
non-scheduled event, or an emergency situation after having been released from duty for
fifteen (15) or more minutes and called back to report to duty by appropriate supervisor or authority.
The overtime is paid at the three (3) hour minimum at the 1.5 rate and at the 2.0 rate on vacation and relief days in accordance with Article 18 of the current Collective Bargaining Agreement.
It specifically does not include meetings set up by the officer outside his normal duty hours.
It does not include events the officer has volunteered to attend.
Examples of IC include: Officers assigned to the Officer Involved Shooting Team being ordered to respond to a scene by the shooting team commander while off duty; or officers ordered by a supervisor to return to duty more than fifteen minutes past the end of their shift.
IN DPS Reimbursable O/T
IS Internal Support
IW Inclement Weather
IX Intoxilyzer Operator
JF July 4th Celebration
K9. K-9.
For the exclusive use of K-9 Detail members
engaged in K-9 Detail activities and training.
LC. Late Call:
Overtime spent completing a call for service assigned by the dispatcher during the member’s regular tour of duty.
The time assigned, location, type of call, and case # shall be included on the overtime card.
Late calls are assigned by the Communication Unit.
MA Joint Operations: US Marshalls
MK Martin L. King Celebration
MT San Antonio Marathon
NC Fiesta: NIOSA Crowd Control
NS NSA Security
NY New Years Eve Celebration
PA Fiesta: Pilgrimage to the Alamo
PP Easter Passion Play
PR Parades/Marathons
PT Property Crimes Task Force
PX Police Explorers
SA Alamo City Heat
SC Stand-by for County Court.
SD Stand-by for District Court.
SF SAFFE Program activities
that extend beyond an officer’s tour of duty or a voluntary return to duty, which have prior approval of a supervisor within the chain of command of the respective Service Area SAFFE Program.
SH Blue Santa
SL Police Athletic League Activities
SN S.N.A.P.
SS Secret Service
ST Police Shooting Team Stand By
SW SWAT
members engaged in SWAT activities and training.
UE Unable to check out of service to eat.
Requires an explanatory report
to be attached to the card.
VC Violent Crime Investigations
(Paid by the DEA or FBI).
VO Non-Sworn Voluntary Overtime.
VP Veterans Day Parade
VR. Voluntary Return to Service
with authorization from a supervisor.
This is paid at the 1.5 rate.
No call-back is authorized.
WR Relief day worked
(not DF district fill must be for non-patrol)
( i.e. traffic officers)
with authorization by supervisor.
This is paid at the 1.5 rate.
XP Executive Protection activities.

Answer 579

A

.08 INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT OVERTIME CARDS

A. Members are entitled to be compensated for time spent working beyond their normal duty hours.
Requests for overtime are managed and documented on overtime and compensatory time cards.
Supervisors and Managers review overtime and compensatory time cards and either approve or disapprove the cards.

B. Members request overtime by completing overtime or compensatory time cards.

C. The following information will assist officers in completing overtime and compensatory time cards.

SAP# Employee Number.
With the advent of the Electronic Resource Management (ERM) system, all employees were issued an SAP Number.
It takes the place of the PIN number on overtime cards.
This number must be written into the space provided.
Signature Cards submitted for overtime or compensatory time are official government documents.
By signing the document, the applicant is acknowledging the information on the card is true and accurate.
In the event the applicant’s signature is difficult to read, the applicant shall print their last name and first name (no initials) above the signature space.
Badge # Number - Officers shall print their badge number in the space provided.
Office Code - Members shall print the
* *three (3) letter office code** for their unit of assignment.
Regular Duty Hours - Members shall print their regular duty hours for the date they earned the overtime.
Overtime Earned From - Members shall print the date and time they started earning overtime and the date and time they stopped earning overtime.
Justification/Event and Case Number - Explains the reason why the member was earning overtime and the case number used to document the event.
On late calls (LC),
*the time assigned,
*location,
*type of call, and *
case # shall be included in the
Justification/Event and Case Number line.
OT Code: LC, AE, VR, Other - _____
The three codes listed were put there for the convenience of officers.
Almost all overtime falls under one of these three codes.
Either circle the one most appropriate or write in the code most appropriate.
OT Code:
1.0, (non-sworn only)
1.5, and 2.0 - (sworn & under contract)
These codes were printed on the card for the convenience of officers.
Circle the correct code.
In the event you don’t know what the correct code is, contact a supervisor, or refer to subsection 901.05.
Prior Approval Name - Officers submitting cards for Assignment Extension (AE) or
Voluntary Return (VR) must obtain prior approval from a supervisor.
Officers shall print the name and badge number of the supervisor.
First (1st) Level Approval
a. For a Police Officer or Detective, the shift/detail sergeant or lieutenant is the first level of supervisory approval required on a card.
Supervisors will submit their cards to their immediate supervisors for first (1st) level approval.
b. A signature, badge number, and date of approval shall be written on the card.
By signing the card, the supervisor approves paying the member for working the overtime.
Stamps are no longer authorized for approval of overtime and compensatory time cards.
Second (2nd) Level Approval
a. For a Police Officer, Detective-Investigator, or Sergeant,
the Captain, Deputy Chief, or the *Deputy Chief’s designee will be the second (2nd) level of supervisory approval.
For Lieutenants and above,
the Division Commander or his designee will be the second (2nd) level of supervisory approval.

   b.   By signing the card,  the Captain, Deputy Chief, or the Deputy Chief’s designee approves paying the member for working the overtime.  **Stamps are no longer authorized for approval of overtime and compensatory time cards.**

    c.   If a Captain is not available for second (2nd) level approval, the overtime and compensatory time cards will be sent to the **Division Commander* or his designee* for second (2nd) level approval.

Example: A Sergeant submitting an overtime card would obtain first (1st) level approval from their Lieutenant and second (2nd) level approval from their *Captain, *Deputy Chief, or the Deputy Chief’s designee.

Accounting Override – A member may work on some assignment not covered by the budget assigned to their office code.
The Department will pay the member with the Accounting Override.
Circle either Sworn or Non-Sworn to identify the category of personnel.
Some examples are as follows:
a. Working on a Grant:
An officer assigned to EPB working on the
Weed & Seed Grant isn’t paid out of the EPB budget.
The coordinator of the Weed & Seed Grant will affix the Weed & Seed override code in the space provided.

b. Working as an FTO Alternate:
An officer working SPC who is not an FTO is assigned a cadet for the shift.
First (1st) level approval is done by the immediate supervisor.
The card is routed to the Training Academy for second (2nd) level approval.
The Training Academy writes in the appropriate override code.

c. Responding to Internal Affairs while off duty:
An officer is ordered to write a report for Internal Affairs while off duty.
The overtime code used is IA.
First (1st) and second (2nd) level approval is done in the Internal Affairs Unit.

Answer 580

A

C. Sick Leave

Officers accrue ten (10) hours of sick leave each month with no limit on how much sick leave is accrued.
Upon separation from the Department, an officer may be paid for his accrued sick leave up to seven hundred twenty (720) hours.

D. Bonus Days

A bonus day shall consist of eight (8) hours and is awarded for each quarter of perfect attendance for a total of four (4) potential bonus days per year.
Quarters of a calendar year extend from:
a. January 1 to March 31;
b. April 1 to June 30;
c. July 1 to September 30; and
d. October 1 to December 31.
In order to receive a bonus day, officers are not to be off from duty or any of the following reasons:

a. Any sick leave;
b. Off-duty injury;
c. Military leave in excess of fifteen (15) days in a calendar year;
d. Leave without pay;
e. Stress leave;
f. Suspension, regardless if time is lost or forfeited;
g. Unscheduled compensatory time (for a full day);
h. Unscheduled annual leave (for a full day); or
 i. Unscheduled holiday leave (for a full day).

A full annual leave day, a full holiday, or a full day of compensatory time usage not scheduled in advance (prior to the end of that officer’s preceding days shift) by a supervisor disqualifies an officer from receiving a bonus day.
The Accounting and Personnel Office provides each section with a computer printout after each quarter showing the officers who have qualified for a bonus day.
If there are any discrepancies, the section commander will contact the Accounting and Personnel Office to verify the printout and make any necessary corrections.
Probationary police officers are eligible to receive a bonus day only after completing a full quarter after graduation from the Police Training Academy.
Bonus days have an accrual limit of
* four hundred (400) hours*.
Upon separation from the Department, an officer may be paid for his total accrued bonus days up to four hundred (400) hours.

E. Compensatory Time

Officers may accrue compensatory time in place of overtime pay.
Compensatory time has an accrual limit of
* four hundred eighty (480) hours*.
Upon separation from the department, an officer may be paid for his total accrued compensatory time up to four hundred eighty (480) hours.

Separation PAY limits:

Annual   =   720 hrs
Holiday  =   320 hrs
Sick         =   720 hrs   (No max accrual limit)
Bonus     =   400 hrs
CT            =   480 hrs

Answer 581

A

.05 POLICE SCHEDULED LEAVE SYSTEM (PSLS)

A. The Police Scheduled Leave System (PSLS) is a computer database that contains the names of officers that have
been authorized leave.
B. Shift/Unit Directors ensure the Annual and Military leave schedules are entered into the Police Scheduled Leave System by February 21, of each year.
C. Whenever a change or addition is made to an officer’s annual leave or military leave or an officer schedules three (3) or more days of consecutive leave of any type, Shift, or Unit Directors ensure this new information is entered into the Police Scheduled Leave System at the time the change or addition is approved.

.06 MISCELLANEOUS LEAVE POLICIES

A. Notice of Requested Leave

Members requesting the following types of leave should request the leave as early as possible, but not more than thirty (30) days prior to the requested leave date(s).
a. Annual leave or military leave not scheduled by January 15, of each year;
b. Bonus day leave;
c. Holiday leave, taken on any day other than a city holiday; and
d. Compensatory leave.
City of San Antonio Notice of Leave Form
a. The Notice of Leave Form for scheduled vacation must be submitted by members taking any type of leave, except compensatory time, by January 15 of each year;
b. Members, when possible, shall complete and submit the Notice of Leave Form prior to taking the leave.
c. In cases of sick leave, injured on duty leave, or other emergency leave, members should request a supervisory officer to submit the Notice of Leave Form with a notation the member is “unavailable to sign” or submit the form when the member returns to duty.

B. Sick Leave
1. When a member is unable to report to work due to illness or injury, the member shall contact a supervisor in accordance with the guidelines in his unit’s SOP.
2. Any officer who requests forty (40) or more consecutive hours of sick leave must *present a certificate from a physician 👩‍⚕️ who documents confirmation the member was unable to work for the department.
3. The department has the authority, at any time, to order any officer to submit to a medical examination.
4. Probationary police officers are not allowed to use any sick leave during their *initial thirty (30) week probationary period.
Accrued holiday leave, bonus day leave, or compensatory time may be used instead.
5. Sick leave for non-sworn members is governed by Administrative Directives 4.2, Workplace Attendance, and 4.4, Leave Administration.

C. Injured On Duty Leave
1. Members requesting to be carried as injured on duty are required to seek immediate treatment by a physician if they have not already done so.
2. Before a member is carried as injured on duty he is required to have a physician complete SAPD Form #172, Physician Authorization for Injury Status.
The completed form is turned in to the member’s supervisor who ensures the original is routed to the Accounting and Personnel Office.
3. The member’s supervisor is responsible for having SAPD Form #172 and/or State Form #DWC073, Work Status Report and Instructions, completed by a physician when the injury is of such a nature as to preclude the member from having the form completed.
4. Before a member is allowed to return to regular duty from injured on-duty leave, the member must submit SAPD Form #172 and/or State Form #DWC073.
The form must be completed by a physician stating the member may return to regular duty.

D. Administrative Leave
Members may be placed on administrative leave by the Chief of Police in accordance with General Manual Procedures 908, Mandatory Reassignment or 909, Travel.

E. Association Leave
Officers may be placed on legislative leave in accordance with Article III, Section 2(E) and Section 3(D) of the Collective Bargaining Agreement.

F. Leave without Pay
The Chief of Police may grant authorized leave without pay to a member, who requests authorized leave, but does not have any accrued leave.
The Chief of Police may authorize up to
*five (5) days leave without pay.
Anything in excess of five (5) days has to have the approval of the City Manager.

G. Leave by Active Trustees for both the Fire and Police Pension Fund and Retiree Health Fund activities
1. Trustees are required to complete a Notice of Leave form for any absence from work related to their responsibilities for funds, and forward this request to the Office of the Chief.
2. All requests for leave must be made
**thirty (30) days in advance of the leave.
If there are occasions where a special meeting is called, notification must be made as soon as possible.
3. All requests for leave must specify a reason, such as a board meeting, subcommittee meeting, travel, training
(specify whether required or discretionary),
or conference, and must include a date and the amount of time requested.
Board meetings and subcommittee meetings must include an estimate of the amount of time for which leave is requested.

All leave requests for meetings and conferences must include a copy of the schedule or agenda, and for off-site events attended, a list of off-site events and the sponsor.
All leave requests for training must include a description of how the training corresponds to the duties of the trustee.
Requests for out-of-town travel will be limited as follows. Any out-of-town travel above and beyond the maximum will be at the employee’s own personal leave.
a. Active Trustees of the Fire and Police Pension Fund shall be limited by the stipulations laid out in the Administrative Services Contract between the City of San Antonio and the Fund.
b. Active Trustees of the Retiree Health Care Fund shall be limited to forty (40) hours per fiscal year per active trustee.
Requests for leave by trustee related to the responsibilities to the funds will be approved or denied through the Chief’s Office.
Any personal leave taken by a trustee must be made pursuant to this Procedure.

Answer 582

A

.08 TARDINESS

A. Sworn members, who are going to be tardy, arriving less than one (1) hour after the commencement of their assigned duty hours, shall notify their respective units as soon as possible.

B. Sworn members failing to report for duty as scheduled during either six (6) month period, (January through June or July through December), forfeit accrued vacation, holiday, or bonus day leave time according to the following schedule:

First Time Forfeiture of accrued vacation, holiday, or bonus day leave equivalent to the tardy period with no punitive assessment.
Second TimeForfeiture of accrued vacation, holiday, or bonus day leave equivalent to the tardy period with a punitive assessment of an additional two (2) hours and verbal counseling.
Third Time Forfeiture of accrued vacation, holiday, or bonus day leave equivalent to the tardy period with a punitive assessment of an additional four (4) hours and a written counseling.
Fourth Time Leave without pay for the day and a written reprimand.
Fifth Time Leave without pay for the day with additional disciplinary action recommended.

C. Members shall submit a report on all tardiness occasions.

D. Unit Directors / Detail Supervisors:

Ensure the member’s explanatory report is filed in the member’s departmental field file;
Maintain a tardiness file for their unit or detail and retain the file until the end of the
* *six (6) month period**, unless disciplinary action is pending and the file is required for documentation of a member’s tardiness; and
Submit documentation and recommendations for disciplinary action for members who have five (5) or more occasions of tardiness during a six (6) month period to the section commander.
Tardiness by non-sworn members is governed by City Administrative Directive 4.2, Workplace Attendance.

Answer 583

A

Department

Answer 584

A

Private Citizens, community groups, and businesses

Answer 585

A

Medal of Valor Award 🥇

Answer 586

A

Meritorious Conduct Award 🥈

Answer 587

A

Lifesaving Award 🥉

Purple Heart Award 🥇

Answer 588

A

C. Certificate of Merit Award - This award is presented to members who, by their exemplary actions, distinguish themselves at a particular incident.
Examples of exemplary actions include judgment, initiative, courage, teamwork, investigative skills, and immediate recognition and response to law enforcement activity.

D. Community Service Award - This award is presented to members who distinguish themselves and the Department for volunteer work to the community.

E. Customer Service Award - This award is presented to members of the Department who exhibit exceptional customer service in the performance of their duties.

F. Good Conduct Award – This award is presented to members of the Department who perform all duties and responsibilities in an effective manner for a period of five (5) years without any administrative disciplinary action which results in the member’s reduction in rank; disciplinary action during a probationary period; suspension; written reprimand, written counseling, or demerit.

Answer 589

A

D. Master Peace Officer Certification Award - San Antonio police officers are eligible for this award upon obtaining a Master Peace Officer’s Certification from TCOLE.

E. Advanced Peace Officer Certification Award - San Antonio police officers are eligible for this award upon obtaining an Advanced Peace Officer’s Certification from TCOLE.

F. Intermediate Peace Officer Certification Award - San Antonio police officers are eligible for this award upon obtaining an Intermediate Peace Officer’s Certification from TCOLE.

Answer 590

A

The Certificate of Appreciation

Answer 591

A

The Office of the Chief shall determine if the member has met the criteria for the requested award.
Submissions are emailed to SAPD Recognition.

B. Nominations received by the Awards Evaluation Committee are reviewed to ensure the actions taken by the nominated members fit the criteria for the recommended awards.

C. After a review by the Awards Evaluation Committee, any nomination that results in an award recommendation by the Committee shall be forwarded to the Office of the Chief.

D. Upon written orders issued by the Office of the Chief, the awards will be presented in accordance with Section .11 of this procedure.

Answer 592

A

The award is approved;
An alternate award is approved; or
No award is approved.

D. The Awards Evaluation Committee forwards all recommendations for awards, whether approved or disapproved, to the Office of the Chief.

Answer 593

A

Award of Honor recipients will be presented a medal, a commendation bar and a certificate.
*Officer of the Year; *Detective of the Year; *Sergeant of the Year recipients will be presented a plaque and a commendation bar;

all others Awards for Service recipients will be presented a commendation bar and a certificate.

D. Approved Awards for Achievement are presented by the Division Commander or his designee.

E. Approved Citizen Hero Awards, Citizen Merit Awards, and the Certificate of Appreciation may be presented by the Chief of Police or his designee at a formal ceremony, or any other setting the Chief deems appropriate, including the citizen’s residence or workplace.

Answer 594

A

B. Officers receiving Awards of Honor or Awards for Service or officers who are eligible for an Award for Achievement, may wear the commendation bar portion of the award on the regulation or formal uniform in accordance with GM Procedure 310, Uniforms and Dress Codes.

C. The bar portion of all Awards of Honor and Awards for Service will be purchased by the Department and given to officers who are presented with Awards of Honor and Awards for Service.

D. The bar portion of all Awards for Achievement may be purchased by the member receiving the award at the member’s expense.

E. The specifications for the commendation bar portions of all awards are listed in GM Procedure 310, Uniforms and Dress Codes Appendix.

F. A color printout of the bar portion of all awards will be on display in each Division Office.

Answer 595

A

C. Notification:

Members, citizens, community groups, and businesses are notified by letter from the Office of the Chief as to the date, time, and location of the formal ceremony.
The letter will also inform honorees of any special needs or requirements for their particular ceremony.
Members’ Division and Section Commanders and Unit/Shift Directors are notified by the Office of the Chief as to the date, time, and location of the formal ceremony.
The date, time, and location of the formal ceremony shall be published in the Department’s Daily Bulletin.
A list of past award winners may be found on SAPDWEB under Awards, Merits & Commendations.

D. Responsibilities

The Office of the Chief is responsible for coordinating all activities necessary for conducting Promotion and Awards ceremonies.
The Payroll Services Unit is responsible for notifying the Office of the Chief when an officer has given notification of his anticipated retirement.
Division and Section Commanders and Unit/Shift Directors of members receiving an award, or being promoted, are encouraged to attend the formal ceremony to honor officers that work or worked under their command.

Answer 596

A

non-deadly and deadly force

Answer 597

A

all officers

D. All sworn personnel are required to log in to their Blue Team during their tour of duty and complete any entries requiring corrections, review or approval.

Answer 598

A

the use of deadly force strictly to protect property interests is not allowed.

Answer 599

A

either air (choking) or blood (strangling)

Answer 600

A

safest and most expedient fashion.

Answer 601

A

Is the individual interacting peacefully or resisting?
Is the individual armed?
If armed, is the weapon capable of causing serious bodily har or death to the officer or any other person.
What is the nature of the crime?
Does the suspect have a previous arrest record or history showing violence?
Number of suspects involved?
Are there any specific prohibitions or restrictions that may affect the imminent application of force.
How much support from other officers is available?

Answer 602

A

F. De-escalation of force:
1. Officers shall de-escalate their use of force once an allowed use of force has achieved compliance or a safe control of the situation.

If circumstances allow, Officers should attempt to de-escalate tense situations through “advisements, warnings, verbal persuasion, and other tactics” to reduce the need for force.
The de-escalation of force can be viewed as a direct relationship between an individual’s resistance or threat level to an officer’s use of force level. As an individual decreases his or her level of resistance or threat, the responding officer also decreases the level of force required to gain compliance or safe control of the situation.
Unless there is a serious threat of serious harm officers shall, identify themselves as a police officer and issue verbal warnings prior to using deadly force.

G. *Any officer present and observing another officer using force that is clearly beyond that which is reasonable under the circumstances shall, when in a position to do so, safely intercede to prevent the use of such excessive force.
Officers shall immediately report these observations to a supervisor.

Answer 603

A

F. Oleoresin Capsicum (OC) Spray/Gel and/or Electronic Control Device (ECD)

Only officers who have successfully completed a training course and are certified in the use of OC spray/gel and/or an ECD are authorized to carry and use OC spray/gel and/or ECD as an intermediate weapon.
Additionally, only officers who have also successfully completed a 40-hour Crisis Intervention Training course are authorized to carry an ECD.
Officers shall only carry and use department-issued OC spray/gel and/or ECDs.
Officers shall carry the OC spray/gel and /or ECD in an authorized carrier.
OC spray/gel and/or ECD shall not be brandished, displayed, or pointed at a subject in an intimidating manner unless an officer is attempting to prevent further escalation of force.
Officers using OC Spray/Gel and/or ECD:
a. Oleoresin Capsicum Spray/Gel

(1) As with any other type of force, officers will end application of OC Spray/Gel when the subject discontinues resistance or aggression.
OC Spray Spray/Gel is irritating to the eyes, nose, and skin. Any time OC Spray/Gel is used to control or subdue an actively resisting or violent subject, the officer will ensure the subject is decontaminated as soon as possible, to reduce the discomfort caused by the OC Spray/Gel.
Decontamination consists of the application of water to the subject’s eyes and face.

(2) Decontaminate prisoners exposed to OC Spray/Gel before they are transported to the Detention Center.
Prisoners exposed to OC spray/gel, will be observed by an officer for 45 minutes to ensure the prisoner does not require medical attention.
If, in the officer or supervisor’s opinion, the prisoner appears to be in severe pain, discomfort, or exhibits unusual symptoms such as unconsciousness, profuse sweating, chest pain or slow, shallow breathing, the officer shall immediately request EMS to the scene.

(3) The decontamination process and amount of time the prisoner was observed will be documented in the officer’s report and in the Summary section of the Blue Team use of force entry.

Answer 604

A

C. Avoiding the Use of Deadly Force

At the point when an officer should reasonably perceive the potential exists that deadly force may be an outcome of any situation, the officer must use reasonable alternatives, if time and opportunities permit.
The reasonableness of the action is based upon the time available, the opportunity of performing the action, and the facts apparent to the officer prior to and during the incident.

The use of deadly force against one who is fleeing from custody, or who is fleeing immediately after committing an offense, is prohibited unless the officer has probable cause to believe the suspect poses an imminent threat of death or serious bodily injury to the officer or a third party.

Approved firearms are intended to be used as defensive instruments to prevent an assailant from completing a potentially deadly act.
A firearm is discharged with the intent to stop a course of conduct.

Firearms are not discharged under the following circumstances:
1. As a warning shot;

2. When it appears likely that a non-participant may be injured.

Officers shall not discharge a firearm at or into a moving vehicle unless the occupants of the vehicle are using deadly force against the officer or another person, and such action is necessary for self-defense or to protect the other person.

Officers shall not intentionally place themselves in the path of, or reach inside, a moving vehicle; and shall attempt to move out of the path of a moving vehicle.
An officer in the path of an approaching vehicle shall attempt to move to a position of safety rather than discharging a firearm at the vehicle or any of the occupants of the vehicle.
Officers should not shoot at any part of a vehicle in an attempt to disable the vehicle.
Officers shall not discharge a firearm from his or her moving vehicle except as the ultimate measure of self- defense or defense of another.

Answer 605

A

As a warning shot;
When it appears likely that a non-participant may be injured.

Officers shall not discharge a firearm at or into a moving vehicle unless the occupants of the vehicle are using deadly force against the officer or another person, and such action is necessary for self-defense or to protect the other person.

Officers shall not intentionally place themselves in the path of, or reach inside, a moving vehicle; and shall attempt to move out of the path of a moving vehicle.
An officer in the path of an approaching vehicle shall attempt to move to a position of safety rather than discharging a firearm at the vehicle or any of the occupants of the vehicle.
Officers should not shoot at any part of a vehicle in an attempt to disable the vehicle.
Officers shall not discharge a firearm from his or her moving vehicle except as the ultimate measure of self- defense or defense of another.

Answer 606

A

the actions of the subject,

the threat facing the officer or other persons,

and the totality of circumstances surrounding the incident.

Answer 607

A

H. As soon as practical, an officer will immediately notify the Communications Unit of a shoulder weapon discharge and advise on whether there are any hits or injuries.

I. Improper handling or inappropriate uses of a shoulder weapon will result in remedial or disciplinary action.

Answer 608

A

provided immediate medical treatment

Answer 609

A

Any force used on an individual by an officer greater than an open/empty hands control technique,
Any force used by an officer that;

Causes injury to an individual;
Causes an individual to report injury to the officer,
Causes an injury that requires medical treatment, or;
Causes death to an individual.

Pointing or discharging a firearm at an individual to accomplish a lawful police objective.

Unholstering, brandishing or displaying a firearm including the “low-ready position” without pointing it at a person shall be reported in the officer’s report but does not require a Blue Team use of force entry;

The use of an intermediate weapon on an individual by an officer;
When a police canine bites an individual.

Answer 610

A

C. The Blue Team use of force entry shall be completed before the officer ends their tour of duty on the day the use of force incident occurred, or as otherwise directed by the handling supervisor or as outlined in this procedure.

Answer 611

A

Respond to the scene if one of the following is present;
a. Any force used by an officer greater than an open/empty hands control technique.
b. Any force used by an officer that causes injury to an individual, which requires medical treatment;
c. Any force used by an officer that causes death to an individual;

d. Discharging a firearm at an individual to accomplish a lawful police objective;
e. The use of an intermediate weapon by an officer; and
f. When a police canine bites an individual.

Contact the officer(s) involved in the use of force,
Request a UEDI to photograph the person who had the force used against them.

If a UEDI is unavailable a Crime Scene Unit Investigator shall be requested.
In their absence, the responding supervisor will take the photos.

a. The photographs shall include photos of any documented, visible or alleged injuries.
b. The photographs shall take place as soon as practical after the incident.
c. photographs will be handled in accordance with GM Procedure 408, Digital Photography.

Answer 612

A

any available

Answer 613

A

5 calendar days

As soon as possible, but no later than 15 calendar days after the Use of Force incident, ** forward the Blue Team entry through the Chain of Command for review and approval.

Ensure the officer documents the incident in Blue Team, completely and accurately, in accordance with this procedure.
Document in the ‘Comments’ section of the Blue Team use of force entry, when forwarding the incident through the chain of command for approval, details of the incident findings, if any procedural violations were observed which resulted in the use of force entry being duplicated into an Info Log, Line or Formal entry, and if BWC (Body Worn Camera) and COBAN (In Car Camera) videos were available along with which video(s) they reviewed.

Answer 614

A

the supervisor

F. Supervisors responding to incidents where officers are working out of their regular assignment will perform the initial review/approval of the officer’s Blue Team use of force entry.
The supervisor will then forward the Blue Team use of force entry to the responding supervisor’s chain of command and courtesy copy the involved officer’s Unit Director and Station/Section Commander.
The responding supervisor’s chain of command will be responsible for approving the entry and forwarding through the chain of command in Blue Team.

G. Supervisors not responding to a use of force incident shall document in the ‘Comments’ section of the Blue Team entry when forwarding through the chain of command, the reason they did not respond.

Answer 615

A

Ensure that all related information on the use of force incident was entered in a timely manner and all pertinent documentation, to include, but not limited to, copies of any Offense reports/Supplement reports, and Taser downloads, is attached to the Blue Team entry as individual reports and not as one continuous report, regardless of the type.
Document in the ‘Comments’ section, when forwarding the incident through the chain of command for approval in Blue Team, if he/she observed any procedural violations and if BWC and COBAN videos were available along with which video(s) they reviewed.
If a procedural violation was observed, he/she shall ensure that the incident was duplicated into a Line/Formal entry and handled in accordance with GM Procedure 303, Disciplinary Procedures.
As soon as possible, but no later than 25 calendar days after the Use of Force incident, forward the Blue Team entry through the Chain of Command for review and approval.

Answer 616

A

35 calendar days from the Use of Force incident

Answer 617

A

The involved officer(s) shall immediately following the incident and prior to returning back in service, fill out, the Blue Team use of force incident and forward it to the assigned supervisor who made the scene.
* Each involved officer* will enter his/her own use of force entry into Blue Team and an officer shall not add any additional ‘involved officer’s’ to his/her use of force entry, under any circumstances.

The assigned supervisor who made the scene is responsible for reviewing and approving the Blue Team use of force incident of all officers involved in the use of force incident, regardless of unit assignment, prior to forwarding through the chain of command in Blue Team

The supervisor will route the incident in Blue Team through his chain of command and carbon copy the Unit Director and Station/Section Commander(s) of the officer’s from the different units/shifts.

Answer 618

A

six months (January - June and July - December), following the same schedule as the Complaint and Administrative Review Board.*

Answer 619

A

E. Officers involved in the use of deadly force shall be placed on administrative duty or administrative leave.

F. A use of force entry, where an identified policy violation was found while the incident is being reviewed, will be duplicated into a line or formal complaint.

G. If a policy violation was found during an incident in which an officer was working outside of his assigned shift or found during an incident involving multiple officers from multiple units/shifts, the supervisory officer assigned to the use of force incident will conduct the preliminary investigation, duplicate the use of force entry into the appropriate incident type and forward the new incident with his findings to the officer’s chain of command for follow up.
The supervisor will copy his immediate chain of command for informational purposes only.

Answer 620

A

Alabama, Alaska, Arizona, Arkansas,
California, Colorado, Connecticut, Delaware,
Florida, Georgia, Hawaii,
Idaho, Indiana, Iowa,
Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana,
Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan,
Mississippi, Missouri, Montana,
Nebraska, Nevada, New Jersey, New Mexico,
New York, North Carolina, North Dakota,
Ohio, Oklahoma, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island,
South Carolina, South Dakota, Tennessee, Utah,
Virginia, Washington, West Virginia and Wyoming.

License holders from these states will be required to follow Texas law while carrying in this state.

Answer 621

A

Needless display of the device;
Careless or haphazard muzzle control of the device;
Use against any person in a punitive manner;
Use or threat of use of the device during an interrogation;
Using the device to awaken a person;
Using the device as a prod;
Using the device on a helpless or obviously disabled person;
Carelessness in its storage;
Abuse of the equipment;
Failure to report damage to the device;
Failure to document receipt of a new or replacement device or cartridge; or
Tampering with the device or the data.

Answer 622

A

due process of law

Answer 623

A

MONTHLY

change effective August 24, 2020

Answer 624

A

high-visibility clothing that meets the requirements of ANSI/ISEA 107: 2004 edition, class 2 or 3.

The current issued Blauer 339P High-Visibility Yellow Vest meets these requirements.

Answer 625

A

Shirts 
Jackets
Flight Suits
Sweaters
External body armor carrier vests
Vests or upper body uniform apparel worn as part of the uniform.

e. For the purpose of this requirement RAINWEAR and HIGH-VISIBILITY YELLOW reflective/traffic VESTS are NOT included.

Answer 626

A

If worn, the United States Flag Pin will be worn on the left epaulet of the uniform.
The United States Flag Pin will be professionally displayed, will not be larger than 1” X 1” in size, and will not include any other images, opinions, descriptions, statements, or representations.

Answer 627

A

a. Two (2) keepers are worn on the back of the equipment belt, one (1) on each side of the spinal column.
b. A minimum of one (1) keeper is worn on the front of the equipment belt where it provides the best support.

Answer 628

A

a. A holster centered over the outside seam of the trouser leg;

b. A magazine holder worn in the front between
the 9 - 3 o’clock position on the belt

c. A minimum of one handcuff case, with handcuffs, positioned over a rear trouser pocket; in an authorized holder
d. An issued radio carrier (as applicable) is worn on the opposite side from the holster.
e. All officers, when in uniform, shall carry at least one (1) approved intermediate weapon in compliance with GM Procedure 309, Weapons (i.e., baton, expandable baton, Electronic Control Device (ECD), or oleoresin capsicum (OC) spray/gel).

Answer 629

A

A. A baton ring/or approved expandable baton holster;
B. A flashlight ring or carrier;
C. A mobile phone case;
D. A key holder/flap; and
E. A folding knife and/or a multi-tool in a plain leather covered case.

*F. A FIXED BLADE KNIFE
must be in a sheath that includes a retention device
- friction sheaths do not qualify as a retention device.

**SOU (Special Operations Unit)ONLY **
One single rifle magazine holder…..

Answer 630

A

a. Casual dresses, skirts, slacks, or jeans (with Division Commander approval);

and

b. Sleeveless dresses and tops will NOT be worn unless they are covered with an outer garment.

Answer 631

A

a. Maintenance or inspection of equipment;
b. Surveillance;
c. Execution of arrest or search warrants;
d. Duties involving strong physical exertion or activities;
e. Any undercover assignment.

Answer 632

A

This publication is available from the training academy upon request and on the department’s sapd web under references/manuals/documents and training bulletins.**

Added December 5, 2019

Answer 633

A

Found Property;
Lost property;
Attempted Suicide;
Accidental shooting (with injury);
Criminal Mischief;
Missing Persons;
Warrantless Emergency Detentions;
Federal Violations.

D. All thefts (to include confidence operations such as home improvement swindles, Pigeon Drop, Goldbar Swindle, or Three-card Monte);

Answer 634

A

when on a Personal Relief Break.

Answer 635

A

each member

Answer 636

A

Driving by the location together, or
by other means physically viewing the location together where all three view the location prior to serving the warrant.

Answer 637

A

The execution should occur when the property to be seized is believed to be present;
The execution should occur when the least resistance is expected, or when resistance can best be controlled;
Other such considerations of safety, success, and convenience as may be applicable; and
There are no time limits on the continuous search of a location once actual entry has been made.

A second search is not permitted under the same warrant once officers have left the premises.

Answer 638

A

Two (2) officers

There are no time limits on the continuous search of a location once actual entry has been made.

A second search is not permitted under the same warrant once officers have left the premises.

*There is no requirement in the law that persons on the premises at the time of the search identify themselves:
unless there is reasonable suspicion of some involvement in criminal activity or
the person is a witness.

Answer 639

A

Intelligence gathering;
Building entries;
Room clearing;
Weapons handling;
Shield handling techniques; and
Evidence handling procedures.

B. At a minimum, training shall be conducted on a quarterly basis to maintain proficiency in the above listed skills.
C. The Unit Director will be responsible for maintaining a record of all training.

Answer 640

A

Any crime resulting in death or serious bodily injury;
Any crime where death, serious bodily injury or retaliation in the future is threatened;
Domestic Violence;
Sexual Assault;
Stalking.

Answer 641

A

two (2) hour advanced notice

Procedure 504 –
Execution of Search Warrants .03 A3

Answer 642

A

prohibited

or participating with other law enforcement agencies in the attempt to serve a “no knock” arrest warrant.

Answer 643

A

“POLICE” across the front and back and shall wear their issued body worn camera.

When time and situation permit, uniformed officers shall be included in the field service of high-risk arrest warrants.
These actions are limited to field service operations and shall not include *forced entry
into a residence or a business where the inclusion of
Special Operations Unit personnel is required.

Answer 644

A

0800 – 1700.
The office notified will determine if a Constable will be dispatched.
There is no expectation that SAPD officers will transport persons active solely on Justice of the Peace Warrants.

JP 1 (210) 335-2805 
JP 2 (210) 335-4850 
JP 3 (210) 335-4750 
JP 4 (210) 335-4950

Answer 645

A

Misdemeanor Notice to Appear goes to the
* San Antonio Municipal Court* through bin mail;
Cite and Release goes to the
* Bexar County District Attorney’s Office* through bin mail.

Answer 646

A

Misdemeanor thefts, other than thefts from businesses;
The person arrested demands an immediate appearance before a magistrate;
The person is arrested on a warrant or has outstanding warrants against him;
The safety of the person arrested or the safety of others may be jeopardized by his release;
The arrested person fails or refuses to give identification;
The person arrested is intoxicated to a degree which renders him unable to care for himself;
The person arrested is injured and has not received the required medical attention;
Any time when physical force is used to affect the arrest;
Class “B” offense of racing, exhibition of speed or acceleration, and reckless driving (exceed Municipal Court jurisdiction); or
The violator refuses to sign the Misdemeanor/Cite and Release Citation.

Answer 647

A

Speed violations;
All other hazardous violations, in addition to speeding;
All non-hazardous violations;
Multiple violations;
Off-road vehicle violation (on public property);
Equipment violations;
Public carrier/commercial vehicle violations;
Violations resulting in traffic accidents, if the violations occur in the officers’ presence;
Pedestrian and bicycle traffic violations;
Class “B” offense of Racing, Exhibition of Speed or Acceleration, and Reckless Driving
(exceed Municipal Court jurisdiction)
and must be handled in accordance with GM Procedure 505, Misdemeanor Citation Release.
Newly enacted traffic laws and/or regulations.

Answer 648

A

Line Method - Patrolling between two specific points on a street or expressway;
Area Method - Patrolling within a geographical area; and
Stationary Method - Observing from a specific location, whether visible or concealed.

Answer 649

A

1. Prior to the stop, follow the vehicle at a safe distance, if possible, and notify the dispatcher of the following:
  a. Location and direction of travel;
  b. Description and license number of vehicle;
  c. Number and description of occupants; and
  d. Wait for cover officer(s) to arrive.

*2. Activate emergency lights and attempt to stop the vehicle in a location of your choice. If the vehicle does not stop, the pursuit is handled in accordance with GM Procedure 609, Emergency Vehicle Operations.

1. Notify the dispatcher of the location where the stop was made and:
  a. Position your vehicle 30 to 40 feet behind the suspect vehicle;
  b. Take a quick glance at your surroundings for cover and concealment;
  c. Take your weapon out of its holster and be prepared to counter a threat; and
  d. Position yourself using the police vehicle for maximum cover.
1. Address the occupant(s) of the vehicle with the PA system or by voice:
  a. Identify yourself as a police officer with the San Antonio Police Department; and
  b. Tell the occupant(s) to keep his hands in sight and not to move;

*5. The first arriving cover officer should position his vehicle to the right and even with the primary vehicle, if possible. If not possible, the cover officer should position his vehicle to the left and even with the primary vehicle.

*6. After the officers have communicated responsibilities with each other, the suspect is removed from the vehicle and processed according to the violations committed:
a. If there are multiple occupants in the vehicle, they are removed by either the “echelon” or “one by one” method.
b. If at any time an occupant refuses to exit the vehicle or refuses to surrender, the situation is no longer a high risk traffic stop but is a barricaded suspect or hostage situation and handled in accordance with:
GM Procedure 802, Unusual Occurrences and Critical Incidents.

B. In conjunction with the above (6) steps, officers also use the tactical training received in the Police Training Academy and all of their acquired experience in conducting high risk or felony traffic stops.

Answer 650

A

barricaded suspect or hostage situation and handled in accordance with:
GM Procedure 802, Unusual Occurrences and Critical Incidents.

.05 STOPPING AND APPROACHING TRAFFIC VIOLATORS - HIGH RISK (FELONY) TRAFFIC STOPS

Answer 651

A

Be sure a violation has occurred;
Determine if it is safe to pursue and stop the violator;
Make the traffic stop in a safe place using the emergency lights;
Give the dispatcher the location of the stop and the license plate number of the vehicle;
Park a short distance behind and offset to the left of the violator’s vehicle;
Exit the vehicle in a safe manner while maintaining visual contact with the violator; and
Approach the violator’s vehicle on the driver’s or passenger’s side. Do not go beyond the trailing edge of the driver’s or passenger’s door.

Answer 652

A

a. The date the violator is to appear in Municipal Court, sets an arraignment date accordingly;

17 and older – count 30 business days and then use the next arraignment day assigned to each officer.
16 and younger –officers will write “court will notify” instead of an arraignment date.

b. The violator may plead guilty and either mail in a fine or pay a fine in person at Municipal Court or online at www.sanantonio.gov;
c. The required signature of the violator on the citation is not an admission of guilt, but a promise to appear in court; and
d. If a vehicle is impounded for any reason listed in this procedure, officers will provide the vehicle owner/driver with SAPD Form #13, Impounded Vehicle Release, explaining how and where to recover their vehicle;

NOTE: Warning tickets must be routed to the SAPD Records Office and not Municipal Court.

C. The seven (7) step violator contact method is used to ensure that officers take proper enforcement actions and attempt to favorably alter the violator’s future driving habits while minimizing conflict between the officer and the violator.

Answer 653

A

C. Legislators who Commit Traffic Law Violations

The Texas Code of Criminal Procedure, Art. 1.21, Privilege of Legislators, states that senators and representatives are privileged from arrest during the session of the Legislature, and in going to and returning from a session.
This privilege applies except in cases of treason, felony, or breach of the peace.
Officers stopping legislators while a session of the Legislature is in progress or while a legislator is traveling to or from a session will not issue citations or make a custodial arrest of a legislator for a traffic law violation.

D. Foreign Diplomats/Consular Officials who Commit Traffic Law Violations

Diplomatic immunity is granted to foreign officials by the United States Government under the provisions of the Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations.
a. Any person having a legitimate claim to diplomatic immunity should carry some form of diplomatic identification issued by the US State Department.
b. Officers having any questions regarding verification of diplomatic identification may contact the US State Department.
Foreign diplomats and their family members have full diplomatic immunity and shall not be issued citations or physically arrested for traffic law violations.
They may be temporarily detained to verify immunity status as referenced in GM Procedure 619, Consulate Notification and Diplomatic Immunity.
Consular officials have limited diplomatic immunity, but shall not be issued citations or physically arrested for traffic violations.
They may be temporarily detained to verify immunity status.
Any officer stopping a foreign diplomat, a family member of a foreign diplomat, or a consular official shall immediately notify a supervisory officer if there is a question regarding their diplomatic status or immunity.
Officers having any contact with foreign diplomats or consular officials during traffic enforcement activities shall document the contact in a written report.
The report shall be routed through the officer’s chain of command to the Office of the Chief.

Answer 654

A

F. Drivers with No Valid Driver’s License

Drivers found to be operating motor vehicles without valid driver’s licenses are arrested for the offense, except:
a. When the officer verifies the identity of the driver, utilizing an approved form of ID listed below, the officer may issue a traffic citation (instead of booking the individual) for violation of the Transportation Code, Chapter 521.025, License to be Carried and Exhibited on Demand:

(1) State issued ID card;
(2) United States Passport;
(3) United States Military ID;
(4) Foreign Passport;
(5) Foreign Military ID;
(6) Consular ID.

b. If a person does not have a valid driver’s license but does have evidence of financial responsibility on the vehicle:
(1) If there is a passenger in the vehicle with a valid driver’s license, the person with the valid driver’s license will be allowed to remove the vehicle;
(2) The driver will be allowed thirty (30) minutes (from the time the traffic stop initiated) to arrange for another driver with a valid driver’s license to remove the vehicle;
(3) If a licensed driver is not available within the allotted thirty (30) minute time frame, the vehicle will be impounded;
(4) Failure to provide evidence of financial responsibility provides the officer authority to impound the vehicle. (TTC 601.051 – 601.124)
c. When verification of a valid driver’s license is inhibited due to a computer problem and the person’s identity is established, the person is issued a traffic citation; or
d. When a recently expired driver’s license, not suspended, canceled, or revoked, is presented or found to exist for the driver, the person is issued a traffic citation.
2. Persons physically arrested for not having valid driver’s licenses are returned to the City of San Antonio Detention Center.

G. Drivers with No Valid Auto Liability Insurance

Officers have the authority to impound the vehicle of any person driving without state mandated minimum auto liability insurance coverage.
This policy allows officers the option of impounding the vehicle if a motorist, insured or not, cannot produce the required insurance documentation before being towed.
Officers will first check for evidence of financial responsibility on the vehicle, if the driver is unable to provide such proof, the officer will accept evidence of financial responsibility on the driver, which is covered in GM Procedure 607, Impounding Vehicles, Section .02 C 1-7.
Failure to provide evidence of financial responsibility provides the officer authority to impound the vehicle. (TTC 601.051 – 601.124)
Officers shall follow GM Procedure 607, Impounding Vehicles, Section .10A3, Uninsured Driver, when determining the circumstances in which to impound.

Answer 655

A

J. Arrests for City and DPS Traffic Warrants

When Texas Department of Public Safety troopers arrest persons wanted on City of San Antonio Municipal Court traffic warrants, the troopers are authorized to transport the subjects to the City of San Antonio Detention Center for processing.
When SAPD officers arrest persons wanted on DPS traffic warrants, the officers shall call the DPS Communications Office (531-2280), located at 6502 S. New Braunfels, to verify the traffic warrant prior to returning the subjects to the City of San Antonio Detention Center.
a. If the warrant is active, the DPS Communications Clerk is asked to fax or teletype the verification to the Magistrate’s office at the Detention Center (335-6120).
b. If the DPS traffic warrant is not active or if verification can not be made within thirty (30) minutes, the subjects shall be released outright.

Answer 656

A

The officer completes a Medical Evaluation Request form supplied by the Texas Department of Public Safety.
Routes the completed form to the Texas Department of Public Safety at the address listed on the form.

Answer 657

A

regardless of their actual duty status or primary unit of assignment.

Answer 658

A

Personal observation of drivers involved in traffic accidents and or traffic violations;
Reasonable suspicion based on information provided by individuals who are witnesses to traffic violations and/or traffic accidents involving the person suspected of being intoxicated or under the influence; or
Personal observation of drivers stopped after the officer develops reasonable suspicion based on articulated facts of actions which do not meet the criteria of traffic violations (i.e. drifting within lane of travel, failure to maintain speed, etc.)

Answer 659

A

Remove the driver to a place of safety if he is suspected of being intoxicated.
Conduct a field interview using questions listed on SAPD Form #24-1A, DWI/Traffic Case Report, to develop further probable cause.
Conduct the standardized field sobriety test. Officers operating vehicles equipped with an on-board video camera will record the administering of the standardized field sobriety test.
The video recording will be labeled for evidence if the suspect is arrested, in accordance with GM Proc 409, Mobile Video Recording.
Record any observations on SAPD Form #24-FSC, Officer’s Field Sobriety Checklist.

Answer 660

A

Reciting of the alphabet
(in order from A to Z)
The numerical count
Modified Romberg Balance Test
Finger-to-Nose

Answer 661

A

When an officer makes a decision to start an investigation of a violator, the officer shall activate the mobile video recorder but shall not verbally articulate the initial traffic violation observed or any observations of the SFST.
When stopping the violator, the officer positions the police vehicle approximately two car lengths behind the suspect’s vehicle in order to create a proper arena of performance for Mobile Video Recording.
If two car lengths are not possible, the officer adjusts the camera angle before leaving the police vehicle to ensure a safe and effective arena of performance.
Optimum lighting should be used at night whenever possible for Mobile Video Recording and BWC:
a. Low beam headlights and takedown lights should be used during mobile video recording. High beam and spotlights should be used only when needed for the safety of the suspect and officer.

b. When Standardized Field Sobriety Tests (SFSTs) are being performed, no spotlights should be directed at the offender’s vehicle, and should only be pointed at the ground.
Also, wigwag headlights shall not be used, and the front strobe lights, if so equipped, shall be turned off.
The rear strobes may be activated for suspect and officer safety.

The officer should not articulate reasonable suspicion or probable cause as it develops.
As needed, the officer removes the suspect from the suspect’s vehicle and escorts him to the right rear of the suspect vehicle, with the suspect facing the police vehicle.
The officer should stand so as to observe the suspect as well as any other occupants in the vehicle and to monitor vehicle traffic.
Any intoxicants found in the suspect vehicle, as well as any evidence seized, shall be brought in view of a camera and the officer shall articulate the description of the evidence in order to record such information.

Answer 662

A

Arrest the minor for the offense of DUI and offer the minor a voluntary portable breath test at the scene of the arrest using a portable breath tester.
If the minor agrees to a voluntary portable breath test, perform the test on the minor at the scene.

Answer 663

A

seventeen (17) years of age or older and under twenty one (21) years of age,

the officer may release the minor to a responsible, sober adult, preferably a parent. 
Otherwise, the officer may book the minor into the Detention Center for the class C misdemeanor offense of DUI;

Vehicles driven by minors who are seventeen (17) years of age or older are impounded in accordance with GM Proc.
607, Impounding Vehicles.

Answer 664

A

F. Minors who refuse a standardized field sobriety test and a portable breath test are transported to the DWI Testing Room, where the officer will obtain a warrant for a blood draw.
The minor is arrested for DWI pending results of blood toxicology testing.

G. Minors who are arrested for DWI and whose Breath Alcohol Concentration level is below 0.08 are arrested for DUI when the arresting officer believes that the violator has no other impairment-causing drugs in their system that would render the subject in violation of DWI.

H. Required Reports For DUI Arrests

SAPD Form #24-1A DWI/Traffic Case Report will be completed listing the probable cause and the results of the portable breath test.
The letters “DUI” are written across the top of the report in bold print.
SAPD Form #DIC-23, Peace Officer’s Sworn Report is completed when a minor is issued a misdemeanor citation for DUI or is arrested and booked for DUI.
SAPD Form #DIC-24, Statutory Warning is completed if a chemical test is given or offered. A copy is given to the minor.
SAPD Form #DIC-25, Notice of Suspension, is completed when a minor is issued a misdemeanor citation for DUI or is arrested and booked for DUI.
A copy of the form is given to the minor.

I. All applicable reports and forms, including citations and the minor’s Texas driver’s license, are stapled together and placed in the report receptacle located at each area substation.

J. Minors who either refuse testing or register any detectable amount of alcohol on a chemical test or portable breath test in addition to the class C misdemeanor charges, will be processed under the Administrative License Revocation Statute.

Answer 665

A

Collect and record items of evidence;
Identify and record the names of all passengers and witnesses; and
Record investigative questions and verbal responses made by drivers, the smell of intoxicants on drivers, and other identifying factors that may indicate to the officer that the driver is intoxicated at the time of the arrest.

C. When available, a secondary officer should be used to impound the suspect’s vehicle in order to expedite the processing of the DWI suspect.

D. Suspects’ vehicles are impounded in compliance with GM Proc. 607, Impounding Vehicles.

E. Evidence and personal property are handled according to GM Proc. 606, Impounding Property.

Answer 666

A

D. Interaction between adults and juveniles in the Detention Center and DWI Testing Room should be kept to a minimum.

E. An SAPD Officer guards the juvenile at all times while in the Detention Center and DWI Testing Room.

F. Officers shall alert the intoxilyzer operator and the detention center personnel to clear the DWI Testing Room when transporting juvenile DWI suspects for testing.

G. Juvenile DWI suspects shall be read SAPD Form DIC-#24, Statutory Warning on video, and the offering of the breath test or blood test and their response shall be recorded on the video camera prior to the chemical test.
The juvenile is permitted to waive or assert his rights regarding taking the breath test, blood test, or other DWI test without the concurrence of an attorney.

H. Upon completion of all testing procedures, the juvenile must be taken to the Youth Processing Office for processing.

I. Injured or sick juvenile suspects arrested for DWI, DUI, Intoxication Manslaughter or Intoxication Assault are handled in accordance with
GM Proc. 602, Section
.10, Injured or Sick Juvenile Suspects, and Section
.10D of this procedure when a blood draw warrant is required.

Answer 667

A

Violent and uncooperative prisoners will remain handcuffed while in the DWI Testing Room.
All prisoners will be handcuffed prior to leaving the DWI Testing Room.
DWI suspects who pass the intoxilyzer test will also be handcuffed until they have been processed out of the Detention Center.

Answer 668

A

.10 DWI CHEMICAL TESTS AND THE PORTABLE BREATH TEST

A. The Portable Breath Test – Voluntary

Portable breath testers will only be used and administered to drivers in conjunction with Standardized Field Sobriety Tests (SFST) to determine if cause of impairment is alcohol or drugs under the following conditions:
a. To determine any detectable amount of alcohol in the minor’s system, when an officer has probable cause to believe that a minor is operating a motor vehicle while under the influence of alcohol;
b. To determine any detectable amount of alcohol in a driver’s system while operating a commercial motor vehicle; and
c. When a driver is suspected of driving while intoxicated and is injured or physically disabled to the point where he is unable to perform the Standardized Field Sobriety Test (SFST).
Officers operating vehicles equipped with an on-board video camera will record the administering of the portable breath test.
The portable breath test results will not be recorded by the on-board video camera.
If an officer is not able to record the administering of the portable breath test, (i.e., the suspect is out of the cameras range and he is not able to be relocated back into camera range) the officer will document the reason why the portable breath test was not recorded on video in the details of his report.
Officers will detail in their report the conditions under which a portable breath test is used.

Answer 669

A

Officers having a suspect under arrest for the offense of DWI who refuses to submit to a voluntary breath test will process the suspect as follows:

a. Officer shall apply for a warrant to collect the suspect’s blood, in accordance with section .10D of this procedure;
b. Follow Section .11 of this procedure; and
c. Book the suspect for DWI.

Answer 670

A

Suspects under arrest for any offense of DWI are processed as follows;

a. Booked, according to booking procedures as outlined in GM Proc. 601, Prisoners or GM Proc. 602,
Juveniles.

b. May be issued SAPD Form #52-X, Notice to Hospitalized Suspects, and released to the care of a hospital with the approval of a supervisor as outlined in GM Proc. 601, Prisoners and 602, Juveniles when the suspect is arrested for a misdemeanor DWI offense; or
c. Injured adult suspects arrested for a felony DWI offense, Intoxication Assault, or Intoxication Manslaughter will be handled in accordance with GM Proc. 601, Section .15.
d. Injured or sick juvenile suspects are handled in accordance with GM Proc. 602, Section .10, Injured or Sick Juvenile Suspects and Subsection .10D of this procedure when a mandatory blood test is required.

Answer 671

A

a. A Traffic Investigations Detail Detective is dispatched to the scene of the traffic accident;
b. The suspect is arrested for the offense of Intoxication Assault or Intoxication Manslaughter;

c. The suspect is offered a voluntary blood test by reading SAPD Form #DIC-24, Statutory Warning to the suspect.
If the suspect consents to a voluntary blood test, follow Section .10E of this procedure for drawing the blood.

If the suspect refuses a voluntary blood test, the officer shall apply for a warrant for a blood specimen to be taken.
The blood will be drawn in accordance with Section .10E of this procedure.
If the suspect is unconscious and incapable of refusal, officers must still read aloud the DIC-24, Statutory Warning, before a blood specimen will be taken under implied consent.
The blood will be drawn in accordance with Subsection .10E of this procedure.
When a suspect is going to be charged with Intoxication Assault or Intoxication Manslaughter, officers will have medical personnel draw the suspect’s blood. Medical personnel will obtain two (2) 10-ml gray-topped vials of suspect’s blood.
Each vial should contain eight (8) to ten (10) milliliters of suspect’s blood.
After qualified medical personnel have taken the mandatory blood specimen, officers will follow Subsection .10E of this procedure in processing the blood specimen.
SAPD Form #TLE-51A, Affidavit of Person who Withdrew Blood is prepared and submitted for all mandatory blood tests.
When a blood specimen has been taken, the adult suspect is to be booked into the City of San Antonio Detention Center, by proxy if necessary, for the offense of Intoxication Assault or Intoxication Manslaughter.
Hospitalized adult suspects arrested for the offense of Intoxication Assault or Intoxication Manslaughter will not be issued SAPD Form #52-X and released.
Officers will guard the suspect until relieved by the Bexar County Sheriff’s Department.
When a blood specimen has been taken from a juvenile, the juvenile is handled in accordance with GM Proc. 602, Section .10, Injured or Sick Juvenile Suspects.
When a blood specimen has to be taken and the suspect resists the medical personnel’s efforts to conduct the blood draw the officer may utilize the Emergency Restraint Chair designed for this purpose.
A restraint chair is available in the nurse’s area of the Detention Center.

a. Officer’s utilizing the Emergency Restraint Chair will follow the manufacturer’s instructions for use, which are posted in the Detention Center medical area.
b. Officers will ensure that any restrained suspect is continually monitored by an officer while restrained.

Answer 672

A

To assemble Blood Collection Kit, officers will:
a. Complete the Subject Consent form and ensure that both the subject and witnesses sign the form where indicated.
b. Complete the information requested on the Toxicology/Blood Alcohol Kit Lab Submission Form (LAB12) and the Blood Vial Seals.
c. Verify the information on the Blood Vial Seals after the specimen has been collected by a qualified medical professional, remove the backing from the seals, affix the circle on the seal to the rubber stopped, and press the ends of the seal down the sides of each blood vial.
d. Insert each blood collection vial into an absorbent pouch and secure each pouch containing the blood vial into a plastic screw-cap tube before placing inside the foam holder in the box.
e. Place all paperwork - a copy of SAPD Form #DIC-23A, Specimen Routing Report, the correct lab submission form, and Chain of Custody form – into the Blood Collection Kit box.
f. Obtain a barcode evidence label with the case number and suspect’s information.
g. Place Completed Blood Collection Kit in the refrigerated lock box located in the evidence refrigerator at 401 S. Frio St.
All Blood Collection Kits will be reviewed by a property room attendant to ensure forms are completely and correctly filled out.
The property room attendant will assure that the box is sealed properly prior to transport for testing.

Answer 673

A

Field sobriety tests listed on SAPD Form #24-FSC, Officer’s Field Sobriety Checklist;
Any alternative sobriety tests listed in
Section .04C; and
An Interview.

D. No type of force will be used to compel suspects to complete the video once they have entered the video room and refused to be video recorded.

Answer 674

A

If prescription medication or drugs are found on the suspect, the arresting officer will be responsible for collecting and reporting them to the Drug Recognition Expert.
The DRE will be responsible for identifying the type of medication/drug through the use of the Physician Desk Reference book, and/or Poison Control.
The arresting officer will place the medications or drugs determined to be evidence in the property room in accordance with departmental procedures.
Depending on the results of the Drug Recognition Evaluation by the Drug Recognition Expert and/or the probable cause established by the video, the suspect is either:
a. Released from custody and transported to the Growdon Storage Facility to recover their vehicle if not otherwise impaired

b. Booked into
the City of San Antonio Detention Center or
the Bexar County Juvenile Detention Center
according to departmental procedures

Answer 675

A

Officers will confiscate the Texas driver’s license from those persons arrested for violations of Penal Codes 49.04, Driving While Intoxicated, 49.07, Intoxication Assault, and 49.08, Intoxication Manslaughter who fail a breath test or refuse to provide a breath or blood specimen.
Officers will also confiscate the Texas driver’s license from minors arrested for violations of the Alcoholic Beverage Code 106.041 (DUI).

a. Officers will complete SAPD Form #DIC-25, Notice of Suspension and provide a copy to the arrested person as a notice of suspension and a temporary-driving permit.
b. Officers will attach the confiscated driver’s license to the original report, which will be placed into the report receptacle at the substation prior to the end of the shift.
4. *Out of State driver licenses are NOT confiscated.

.14 ROUTING OF DWI REPORT FORMS

A. The officer will place their original DWI report (with confiscated driver’s license attached) in the locked report receptacle at their substation prior to the end of their shift.

B. Copies of all applicable DWI related reports are routed to the Traffic Investigations Detail via PDTID email or bin mail when suspects are not booked and charges need to be filed against them by an investigator.

Answer 676

A

D. The intoxilyzer/video operator is responsible for:

Administering and recording the chemical breath test; and
The proper recording and production of the Coban video.

E. All Service Area and Traffic Shift directors are responsible for:

Maintaining an adequate supply of portable breath testers;
Documenting the issuance of portable breath testers; and
Coordinating the maintenance of the portable breath testers with the Traffic Section Office.

Answer 677

A

.03 FIELD CONTACTS

A. An officer, in a place he has a lawful right to be, may field contact any person and interview him under circumstances where the officer feels the interview is necessary.
However, the officer may not arbitrarily stop any person he sees on the streets.

B. An officer identifies himself as an officer when initiating a field contact, unless his identity is obvious.

C. Persons who are field contacted and who are not suspects may not be detained against their will for the purpose of an interrogation.
They may be requested to identify themselves, however they are not compelled to do so.

D. Persons field contacted are permitted to go on their way if they choose to do so.

E. If, during a field contact, an officer develops reasonable suspicion to believe the person is involved in criminal activity, the person may be considered a suspect and detained.

Answer 678

A

D. In evaluating the person’s conduct or appearance, an officer can rely on his training and experience to determine whether or not the person is a suspect.

E. An officer can base his suspicion that a person is a suspect on information received from a citizen informant, including an anonymous informant.

F. An officer must be able to explain the reason why a person was detained and interrogated. He does not need to point to any one thing which alone would justify his action but should refer to several things, each of which when taken alone may seem harmless, but when considered together by an officer who is trained or experienced in detecting criminal activity, raises a reasonable suspicion of a person’s involvement in criminal activity.

G. A suspect lawfully stopped for an interrogation may be detained for the length of time necessary to:

Verify his identification;
Account for his conduct;
Account for his presence; and
Ascertain whether a crime has been committed.

H. A suspect who is detained against his will is informed by the officer he is not under arrest, but is being temporarily detained to determine if he is involved in any criminal activity.

I. A suspect who is not under arrest and who is detained against his will is released:

As soon as he provides a satisfactory explanation of his presence and his actions; or
After thirty (30) minutes, if the officer has been unable to develop probable cause for an arrest.

Answer 679

A

The person makes furtive or evasive moves;
A companion is found to be armed;
The person is a suspect in an offense which involved the use of a weapon;
There are bulges in the person’s clothing or efforts by the person to conceal an object;
Knowledge by the officer the person has been reported to customarily or occasionally carry weapons;
The person’s clothing is peculiar (i.e., wearing a coat during the summer); or
Upon receiving information from an informant the person is armed.

D. A police officer must be able to explain why a person was frisked.
The officer need not point to any one thing which would justify the frisk, but should refer to several things, each of which, when taken alone may seem harmless, but when considered together by an officer who is trained or experienced in dealing with criminal suspects, raises a reasonable suspicion the person poses a threat to the officer’s safety.

Answer 680

A

C. Absent exigent circumstances, officers needing to frisk a Transgender, Intersex, or Gender Non-Conforming (TIGN) individual should first verify the person’s gender identity.
This may be accomplished by the officer’s prior knowledge, by the officer inquiring about the person’s gender identity (for example, an officer could ask the individual their preferred form of address or how they identify), or if the individual self-identifies to the officer.
Officers conducting a frisk of a TIGN individual should generally conduct the frisk based on the gender with which the individual identifies.
(For example, an individual whose gender identity is male should be frisked by a male officer and an individual whose gender identity is female should be frisked by a female officer).
If a TIGN suspect or prisoner expresses a preference concerning the gender of the officer conducting the frisk or objects to the gender of the officer conducting the frisk, consideration should be made to honor the preference when reasonable.
In cases where an officer has reasonable suspicion to believe a weapon is secreted in a particular place on a TIGN individual and an officer of a preferred gender is not present, the officer may reach directly into that area to seize the weapon.
Officers should document the details of the frisk using SAPD Form #2-3 or applicable report and seek guidance from a supervisor if needed.
When an individual to be frisked is identified as TIGN, officers shall not question this identity absent articulable, compelling reasons, nor will an officer inquire about intimate details of an individual’s anatomy to determine gender.

D. An officer may frisk a person’s vehicle if the person is in the vehicle or near enough to the vehicle to reach in it at the time of the stop or field contact and the officer has reasonable suspicion to believe the vehicle contains a weapon.

Answer 681

A

When an individual to be frisked is identified as TIGN, officers shall not question this identity absent articulable, compelling reasons, nor will an officer inquire about intimate details of an individual’s anatomy to determine gender.

Officers conducting a frisk of a TIGN individual should generally conduct the frisk based on the gender with which the individual identifies.

(For example, an individual whose gender identity is male should be frisked by a male officer and an individual whose gender identity is female should be frisked by a female officer).

If a TIGN suspect or prisoner expresses a preference concerning the gender of the officer conducting the frisk or objects to the gender of the officer conducting the frisk, consideration should be made to honor the preference when reasonable.

Answer 682

A

.08 REPORTS

A. An officer documents all field contacts using SAPD Form #2-3 in the following situations:

When the officer stops and interrogates a suspect who was not arrested and the details of the stop and interrogation are not included in an offense or incident report; or
When the officer conducts a frisk of a person who was not arrested and the details of the frisk are not included in an offense or incident report.

Answer 683

A

.03 SEIZURE AND CLASSIFICATION OF PROPERTY INVESTIGATED BY THE LEGAL ASSET SEIZURE DETAIL SEIZED UNDER THE AUTHORITY OF THE CODE OF CRIMINAL PROCEDURE CHAPTER 59

A. For purposes of this procedure, property is classified as:

Real property;
Tangible or intangible personal property, including anything severed from land; or
A document, including money that represents or embodies anything of value.

B. Property is seized where:

The property is real property, and any improvements, which is used or intended to be used to commit or facilitate the commission of an offense designated by Chapter 59 of the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure;
The property is a vehicle, boat, or plane used to facilitate the commission of applicable offenses;
The property consists of books, financial records, bank statements, payment records, instructions, and research materials used in violation of any of the applicable offenses; or
The property is personal property, weapons, documents, or money which the officer has determined to be the proceeds of a sale, transaction or trade, property or criminal instrument which is used in any way to commit any of the following applicable offenses listed in Subsection .03 C of this procedure.

C. Chapter 59 of the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure authorizes the state to seize, based on probable cause, property that is, among other things:

Used in the commission of:
a. Any first or second degree felony under the Texas Penal Code;
b. Any felony under Texas Penal Code Section 15.031(b), 20.05, 20.06, 21.11, 38.04 (Evading Arrest), or Chapter 43.25 or 43.26, 20A Chapter 29 (Robbery), 30 (Burglary/Criminal Trespass), 31 (Theft), 32 (Fraud), 33 (Computer Crimes), 33A (Telecommunications Crimes), or 35 (Insurance Fraud), 37, penal code, that involves the state Medicaid program of the Texas Penal Code; or
c. Any felony under The Securities Act (Article 581-1 et seq., Vernon’s Texas Civil Statutes).
d. An offense under Chapter 49 (DWI), Penal Code, that is punishable as a felony of the third degree or state jail felony, if the defendant has been previously convicted three times of an offense under that chapter.
Used or intended to be used in the commission of:
a. Any felony under Chapter 481, Health and Safety Code (Texas Controlled Substances Act);
b. Any felony under Chapter 483, Health and Safety Code;

c. A felony under Chapter 151, Finance Code;
d. Any felony under Chapter 34, Penal Code (Money Laundering);

e. A Class A misdemeanor under Subchapter B, Chapter 365, Health and Safety Code (Littering), if the defendant has been previously convicted twice of an offense under that subchapter; or
f. A Class B misdemeanor under Chapter 522 Business & Commerce Code; a Class A misdemeanor under Section 306.051 Business & Commerce Code; any offence under Section 326.002, Business & Commerce Code; any offense under Section 42.10, 46.06 (a) (1), 46.14, Chapter 71 Penal Code.
3. The proceeds gained from the commission of a felony listed in Subsection .03 C 1 and 2 of this Procedure or a crime of violence; or
4. Acquired with proceeds gained from the commission of a felony listed in Subsection .03 C 1 and 2 of this Procedure or a crime of violence.

Answer 684

A

The owner, operator, or agent in charge of the property knowingly consents
The seizure is incident to a search to which the owner, operator, or agent in charge of the property knowingly consents;
The property subject to seizure has been subject of a prior judgment in favor of the state in a forfeiture proceeding under chapter 59 of the CCP
The seizure is incident to a lawful arrest, lawful search, or lawful search incident to arrest.

D. Officers request supervisory assistance in all cases of legal asset seizure.

E. The Legal Asset Seizure Detail is notified through the Communication unit before officers leave the scene in all potential seizure cases with the exception of vehicles being impounded as criminal instruments, and cash money which is placed in the Property Room as designated by GM Procedure 606, Impounding Property.

Answer 685

A

E. Officers direct copies of all reports pertaining to an asset seizure made under Chapter 59 of the Code of Criminal Procedure to the Legal Asset Seizure Detail in order that immediate steps may be taken to secure the property from being reclaimed by the owner.

F. Officers attempt to determine ownership of property at the time of seizure and include this information in reports submitted.

G. The ignition and trunk keys to seized vehicles are also seized and placed into the Property Room as evidence. All personal property must be removed from vehicles by the seizing officer as designated by GM Procedure 607, Impounding Vehicles.

Answer 686

A

B. A separate designated storage area for seized vehicles is utilized until disposition is determined by the court.
Vehicles are maintained as evidence apart from other impounded vehicles, and not released without the authorization of the Legal Asset Seizure Detail; and

Court orders commanding the release or other disposition of seized motor vehicles are first routed through the Legal Asset Seizure Detail.
The Legal Asset Seizure Detail notifies Vehicle Storage Unit personnel of any legitimate court orders or case status change involving the release of vehicles in order that these particular vehicles are returned to the control of the Vehicle Storage Unit personnel for release purposes.

C. Real property seized through the efforts of members of the Police Department remains in the custody of the Legal Asset Seizure Detail while subject to the courts’ jurisdiction.

D. Members of the Legal Asset Seizure Detail prepare the necessary seizure affidavits in order to secure judgment and forfeiture of seized property under Chapter 59 of the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure.

E. Officers ensure that the completed and signed affidavit is notarized and returned to the Legal Asset Seizure Detail without delay.

Answer 687

A

E. In the case of property disposed of at public auction, the property is sold in a manner consistent with existing administrative policies of the Finance Department and the Purchasing and General Services Department of the City of San Antonio.

F. The law enforcement use of property awarded under this procedure is designated by the Chief of Police.

G. Property previously seized and forfeited to the City of San Antonio, which is no longer serviceable and considered surplus by the Department, is disposed of according to administrative policy of the Finance Department and the Purchasing and General Services Department of the City of San Antonio and within the guidelines for disposition of forfeited property as outlined in Chapter 59 of the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure.

Answer 688

A

.09 CANCELING MISSING PERSON REPORTS

A. The cancellation of a missing person report is recorded on
SAPD Form 2, Incident Report.

A report of a missing adult is canceled when the reporting person requests the cancellation, the missing person is located by SAPD, or when the missing adult is located by another jurisdiction and notification of the location is forwarded to the San Antonio Police Department.
A report of a missing juvenile is canceled only when the missing juvenile is in the custody of a law enforcement agency or the juvenile’s parent/guardian.

B. When a missing person returns or is located, the officer taking the subsequent report cancels the missing person search by notifying the Missing Persons / Juvenile Processing Office as soon as possible.

C. When a missing person from a mental health facility is located, the officer will notify the appropriate mental health facility of the patient’s location.
If the patient is a danger to himself or others, or if the appropriate mental health facility requests the patient be returned, the patient is transported to the appropriate mental health facility.
If the officer does not know which mental health facility the patient belongs to, the officer will call the Missing Persons/Juvenile Processing Office for further assistance.

D. When a missing juvenile seventeen (17) years of age or younger is located, the officer will notify the Parent/guardian, advising the juvenile was located.
The juvenile will be taken into custody by the officer and transported to the parent/guardian.

If the officer is unable to locate the parent/guardian, the officer will transport the juvenile to Centro Seguro and contact the Missing Persons / Juvenile Processing Office to inform of placement.
The officer shall notify the Missing Persons/Juvenile Processing Office so they can clear the missing from the system.

E. When an out of county/state juvenile under seventeen (17) years of age is located, the officer will:

Contact the TLETS channel in Communications and provide the necessary information for a message to be sent to the entering agency;
Upon receipt of a positive confirmation the officer may follow GM Procedure 602.11.B.2 and transport the juvenile to Centro Seguro or contact the Missing Persons/Juvenile Processing Office for assistance with finding placement.

F. When an out of county/state juvenile seventeen (17) years of age is located the officer will:

Contact the TLETS channel in Communications and provide the necessary information for a message to be sent to the entering agency;
The officer may follow GM Procedure 602.11.B.2 and transport the juvenile to Centro Seguro or contact the Missing Persons/Juvenile Processing Office for assistance with finding placement.

.010 INFORMATION AND REQUESTS ABOUT MISSING PERSONS

All information received on reported missing persons and any requests for information on missing persons thought to be in the
City of San Antonio are forwarded to the
Missing Person / Juvenile Processing Office.

Answer 689

A

Virtue Signaling
Leftist Socialism

CommunistDemocracy

Answer 690

A

B. Warrantless Emergency Detention-Officers Authority and Criteria

Officers making a Warrantless Emergency Detention will do so under the guidelines and authority as set forth in the Texas Health and Safety Code, Title 7, Mental Health and Mental Retardation, Subtitle C, Texas Mental Health Code, Chapter 573, Emergency Detention, Subchapter A, Apprehension by Peace Officer, and Section 573.001, Apprehension by Peace Officer without warrant. Detentions of this nature are for protective purposes and are not criminal.
A peace officer has the authority to take a person into custody without a warrant for the purpose of obtaining an evaluation of his emotional and mental status, and the need for involuntary hospitalization if the officer has reason to believe and does believe:
a. The person evidences mental illness;
b. The person evidences a substantial risk of serious harm to the person or to others unless the person is immediately restrained;
c. The officer believes there is not sufficient time to obtain a warrant before taking the person into custody.
A substantial risk of serious harm to the person or others maybe demonstrated by:
a. The person’s behavior; or
b. Evidence of severe emotional distress and deterioration in the person’s mental condition to the extent the person cannot remain at liberty.
The peace officer may form the belief the person meets the criteria for apprehension based on specific recent behavior, overt acts, attempts, or threats by the person which are:
a. Evidence of severe emotional distress and deterioration in the person’s mental condition to the extent the person cannot remain at liberty.
b. Observed by the officer at the time the apprehended person is found;
c. Reliably reported to the officer by a credible person (Health & Safety Code Section 573.001).

C. Warrantless Emergency Detention-Custody of Persons with Mental Illness
1. Warrantless Emergency Detention is civil in nature and does not impose criminal sanctions. However, officers should use sound tactics when contacting a person with a mental illness as hazardous situations may arise. When taking a person with mental illness into custody for Warrantless Emergency Detention, officers:
a. May handcuff persons with mental illness before transporting;
b. Shall search the person with mental illness before transporting;
c. Retain custody of the person with mental illness until the facility accepts the person;
d. Shall immediately orally inform the person being detained of the reason for the detention and that a staff member of the facility will inform him of his rights within 24 hours of admission. Also, documentation of these actions will be made in the report;
e. Shall contact MEDCOM at 210-233-5933 for navigation to the appropriate psychiatric facility
f. Shall contact a supervisor and request relief when the officer expects to work beyond their assigned duty hours.
Contact with the supervisor to request relief shall occur no later than thirty (30) minutes before the end of the officers assigned duty hours;
(1) Shall complete all required reports, including SAPD Form #127-ED, Notification of Emergency Detention, prior to releasing the person to a relief officer.
2. When the authority and criteria required for Warrantless Emergency Detention are satisfied, a peace officer may apprehend a person with mental illness from a private residence or a public place.
3. If a person is voluntarily at a Hospital, clinic, nursing home, physician’s office or minor emergency clinic, the officer will consider completing a Notification of Emergency Detention (SAPD Form #127-ED) if requested by the facility.
4. If the person with mental illness is accepted at a medical or psychiatric facility, that facility will provide any future transportation to a secondary facility.
5. When completing the Notification of Emergency Detention (SAPD Form #127-ED) at a hospital or psychiatric hospital, officers will:
a. Evaluate the conduct of person with mental illness and the circumstances under which the person was found and taken into custody by the facility;
b. List the physician’s name, or name of other medical personnel, as the observer and credible person on SAPD Form #127-ED, Notification of Emergency Detention, in cases where persons with mental illness are sedated and no substantial risk of harm is observed by the officer.
The officer should quote the physician or other medical personnel on all actions observed by them which confirms the person has a mental illness and is a risk to himself or others;
c. Leave a duplicate copy with an original signature of SAPD Form #127-ED and a copy of the offense report, with the facility staff and retain the original for routing to the Records Office.
6. When a person fitting the criteria for Warrantless Emergency Detention is violent, assaultive, or in need of restraints, the officer transports the person with mental illness to the nearest hospital as directed by MEDCOM.
If required a Patrol Wagon should be requested to transport.
7. Officers will not transport persons fitting the criteria, or under, Warrantless Emergency Detention from one hospital to a different hospital. The hospital is required, by law, to facilitate the transportation of any patients by filing for an Order of Protective Custody (OPC).
8. If the person suspected of having a mental illness suffers a medical emergency at the scene (other than the mental illness), the officer requests assistance from Emergency Medical Service (EMS) to transport the person to the nearest medical facility based on their protocols.
9. Regardless of which facility or hospital the person is taken to, the officer conducting a Warrantless Emergency Detention will complete SAPD Form #127-ED and an offense report.
10. If an officer is unsure whether the person’s condition is primarily the result of a mental illness, physical illness, or a substance abuse problem, the officer may contact the Mental Health Unit, through their dispatcher, for assistance.
If the Mental Health Unit is unavailable the officer will call or ask the Information Channel to call The Center for Health Care Services and consult with the staff for guidance.

Answer 691

A

E. Referral for Additional Mental Health Care

Persons who do not fit the criteria for Warrantless Emergency Detention and who are not going to be booked for a criminal offense, but who do exhibit mental illness, are referred to an appropriate source for treatment. The officer may recommend the person see their doctor, counselor, therapist, or call the Crisis Line at (210) 223- 7233.
Family members or persons concerned over the mental or emotional health of an individual can be referred to the Mental Health Office at the Bexar County Courthouse or may call the Crisis Line at (210) 223-7233.
At the courthouse, family members may be required to complete the application for Emergency Apprehension and Detention and an application for Court-Ordered Mental Health Services with a request for an Order of Protective Custody.
All applications shall be reviewed and acted upon by an appropriate judge or magistrate.

E. Persons with Mental Illness Involved in Critical Incidents
1. Critical incidents shall be handled in accordance with GM Procedure 802, Unusual Occurrences and Critical
Incidents.
2. Officers confronted with situations that pose a continuing threat of serious bodily injury to any person will request additional officers and a supervisor through the dispatcher.

F. Threats Made by Persons with Mental Illness

Officers confronted with persons with mental illness who are making threats to harm themselves or others will assess the persons and determine if the criteria exist for a Warrantless Emergency Detention.
Officers will contact Southwest Texas Fusion Center (SWTFC) at (210) 207-7680 for all reports involving threats made by persons with mental illness. Officers will also route a copy of their report to the Fusion Center (SWTFC) at
SWTXFusion@sanantonio.gov
Officers will also route a copy of their report to the Fusion Center (SWTFC) at
SWTXFusion@sanantonio.gov.
The report will include details of the threat and whether the person who is the subject of the threats was notified.

And yet “THEY” can NOT be specific on anything you NEED “THEM” to be.

Answer 692

A

G. When dealing with persons who are, or are suspected of being deaf or hard of hearing, officers shall never assume that the person understands until it can be confirmed by appropriate responses to questions or directives.

H. Once someone is identified as a deaf or hearing impaired person, officers shall determine by written or other forms of communication the person’s’ preferred means of communication – sign language, lip-reading, reading and note writing or speech.

I. For persons who use sign language, a family member or friend may interpret under emergency conditions until a qualified interpreter arrives, or in minor situations for the sake of convenience, but only with consent of the deaf person.
In all other situations, officers shall not rely on family members or friends for sign language interpretation due to their potential emotional involvement or conflict of interest.

J. Officers shall address all questions and directives to persons who lip-read by facing them directly and speaking in a moderately paced conversational tone.
Shouting or using exaggerated mouth movements interfere with the ability to lip-read.
Understanding can be further degraded by the presence of facial hair, chewing gum, cigarettes and so on.

K. Officers shall be aware that only about one third of words can be accurately interpreted by lip-reading.
Therefore, communication of a critical nature (e.g. Miranda warnings) shall be reinforced by other means of communications. (See below)

L. Officers shall not assume that persons who wear hearing aids can hear and fully understand what is being said.
Some use hearing aids to provide sound awareness rather than to increase speech understanding.

M. Highly stressful situations, background noise, multiple speakers and complex information and instruction can compromise the limited effectiveness of hearing aids.
Officers shall test comprehension by seeking appropriate responses to simple questions or directives.

N. Deaf or hard of hearing persons may require additional time to understand and respond to commands, instructions and questions.

Answer 693

A

.08 COMPLAINANTS / VICTIMS / WITNESSES WITH HEARING IMPAIRMENTS

A. When effective communication is not possible between officers and deaf or hard of hearing complainants, victims, or witnesses to any Class B misdemeanor, or higher offense, access to DeafLink or a qualified on-site interpreter will be provided.

B. When effective communication between officers and deaf or hard of hearing complainants, victims, or witnesses to any Class C misdemeanor is not possible, DeafLink, a departmental signer, or an on-site interpreter will be used to obtain their names, addresses, and telephone numbers, in case they are needed at a later date.

Answer 694

A

.10 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Supervisors:
1. Supervisors being notified by a subordinate that a deaf or hard of hearing person has been arrested or is a suspect in a Class B misdemeanor or higher offense shall contact the subordinate to determine the need for a qualified interpreter.

If the supervisor determines a qualified interpreter is needed, the supervisor will authorize the use of DeafLink or a qualified on-site interpreter.

B. Officers:

Officers arresting or having a deaf or hard of hearing suspect in a Class B misdemeanor or higher offense shall advise a supervisory officer before proceeding with any investigation.
Officers communicating in any form of writing with deaf or hard of hearing persons involved in any Class B misdemeanor or higher offense shall process the writings as evidence.
When a signer or qualified interpreter is used, officers with report responsibility shall include identifying information on the signer or qualified interpreter in their reports.
Officers, when requested, shall sign the qualified interpreter’s log book.

C. Crime Scene Unit:
When notified, personnel from the Crime Scene Unit will provide the equipment and video tape the Miranda Warning and interrogation process of deaf or hard of hearing persons arrested for or suspected of any Class B misdemeanor or higher offense.

Answer 695

A

Changes to the rules based on emotions and feelings just to fit a SOCIAL JUSTICE or the Identity Politics for Virtue Signaling to appease Leftist Socialism showing compliance with a Communist Democracy will only cause further separation between the TRUE Patriots and the Fascist Criminals in our Country.

Answer 696

A

.03 POLICY
A. The officer treats all victims with compassion, consideration, understanding, and patience while collecting necessary
evidence and asking required questions.
B. When talking to the victim, the officer uses language appropriate to the victim’s age, intelligence, and emotional condition.
C. The officer uses medical terms when referring to various parts of the body.
D. The officer does not ask any embarrassing or personal questions which are irrelevant to the investigation.
Once the elements of the offense have been established and the evidentiary questions are covered, the preliminary interview should stop.
Victim centered investigations will reduce the number of times a victim must relive the incident through multiple interviews.
E. An officer does not write personal opinion in the offense report.
If the victim is reporting a sexual assault, the officer should confirm the elements of the offense and document them in the report.
F. The officer makes no comment pertaining to the victim’s behavior in providing the opportunity to be assaulted.
G. An officer, under no circumstances, undertakes a physical examination of a sexual assault victim.
H. Officers, dispatched to a hospital or doctor’s office to take the report, interview, or investigate the offense, shall leave the room when the history is being discussed and during the physical examination of the sexual assault victim.
The officer will remain with any suspect throughout the SAFE process.

Answer 697

A

.05 OUT OF JURISDICTION CASES

A. When a Sexual Assault or Indecency with a Child is reported to the San Antonio Police, regardless of the jurisdiction of the occurrence, San Antonio police officers will initiate an investigation and report the offense on an offense report with the report being titled as the offense being reported, and officers will also notify the Special Victims Unit or Night CID Unit for proper follow-up.
The actual location of the offense is listed in the appropriate box on the offense report. N-Code 6 does not apply in this situation.

B. Officers conduct the preliminary investigation as if the offense occurred in San Antonio, to include taking the victim to the hospital for medical attention and evidence collection.
EMS will determine the proper hospital to transport the victim to based on the victim’s medical condition. Contact SVU or NCID to determine if a detailed statement should be taken from the victim at that time or postponed to a later time.

C. The Special Victims Unit will notify the proper jurisdiction and forward all information required to properly complete the investigation.

Answer 698

A

Determine the specific type of crime. This can be done by asking the victim questions about what occurred, such as did any person intentionally or knowingly:

a. cause the penetration of the anus or sexual organ of another person, including the actor by any means and without that person’s consent;
b. cause the penetration or contact of the mouth of another person by the sexual organ or anus of any person including the actor, without the other person’s consent
c. Cause penetration or contact as described above with a child under the age of 17 regardless of consent.

Determine and secure the crime scene(s) and comply with GM Procedure 701, Crime Scene Duties, where applicable. Remember, the crimes will be at a minimum the location where the assault occurred as well as the bodies of the victim(s) and the suspect(s)
Obtain a description of the offender and broadcast the description, if appropriate.
Officers should remember their authority to protect evidence from destruction until a warrant has been issued, including possible evidence on a suspect’s body;
Complete SAPD Form 2089-PSA Pseudonym Name Form for all victims of sexual assault, family violence, stalking or human trafficking.
The chosen pseudonym name will replace the victim’s real name on all official documents.
John Doe or Jane Doe will be entered under the victim name section on the Offense Report and the pseudonym name will be listed as the nickname.
The Pseudonym Form also provides the Victim the option to allow SAPD to release personal information to select agencies who serve as victim advocates.
The victim has the right to refuse the use of a pseudonym name.
In all cases, the Pseudonym Name form will be forwarded to the Special Victims Unit.
Caution should be used when completing the Offense Report to avoid adding details in other sections of the report which could be used to identify the victim.
Gather the basic information for the preliminary investigation, which includes:
a. Name of victim
(pseudonym, if chosen by the victim);
b. Home address, business address, and any other addresses where the victim may be contacted.
Omit on the offense report if the victim has chosen a pseudonym name;
c. Home telephone number, business telephone number, and any other telephone numbers where the victim can be called.
Omit on the offense report if the victim has chosen a pseudonym name;
d. The above information must be included on the SAPD Form #2089-PSA Pseudonym Name Form and forwarded to the Special Victims Unit.
e. Regardless of whether a pseudonym name is used, the date of birth and sex of the victim must be included on the offense report.
Identify any witnesses and enter their information on the offense report.

Answer 699

A

K. The officer may provide transportation for the victim to a medical facility for testing and from there to the Special Victims Unit office or an alternative location.
The victim may be accompanied by a friend or relative.

L. The officer may be relieved from waiting with the victim at the hospital if:

The victim is accompanied by an adult friend, adult relative, or a rape crisis counselor; and
The victim has transportation from the hospital after the examination.

M. The officer notes in his report the name, address, age, and title of the person in whose care the victim was left with at the hospital.

N. The officer advises the victim to contact the Special Victims Unit to make arrangements for an interview by an Investigator. The officer stresses the importance of cooperating with the investigation.

O. Officers have several available methods of contacting the Special Victims Unit, including:

Contacting the Special Victims Unit detectives on the radio channel 3H;
Calling the Special Victims Unit office at 207-2313, 7 days per week from – 0745-1745 hrs.;

a. After 1900, officers may contact the NCID offices at 207-7389.
b. A limited number of follow up detectives may be available from 0500-0745 and 1745-1900 hrs. and if available can be contacted via the radio on 3H.

Answer 700

A

a. Name of the victim
(pseudonym if chosen);

b. Home address and telephone number where the victim may be contacted.
Omit on Offense Report but include on SAPD Form #2089-PSA.

c. Home telephone number and business telephone numbers and addresses where the victim’s parents, or guardians, may be reached.
Omit on Offense Report but include on SAPD Form #2089-PSA.

d. Regardless of whether a pseudonym name is used, the date of birth and sex of the victim must be included on the offense report;
6. Identify any witnesses, especially the outcry witness and document their information on the offense report.

If the child is living with the actor involved in the abuse, officers need to consider the child’s safety.
If the officer feels the child will be in further danger, the child should be taken to the Children’s Shelter or other location identified by Child Protective Services and the information noted in the offense report.
See Family Code Section 262.103: Taking Possession of a Child in Emergency Without Court Order for additional details.

Answer 701

A

K. The officer may provide transportation to a medical facility for testing.
Contact the Special Victims Unit or NCID to determine how to proceed with the investigation.
A parent or guardian should accompany the victim and bringing a change of clothing for the victim is highly recommended should the child’s clothing need to be collected as evidence.

L. Calling the Special Victims Unit office at 207-2313, 7 days per week from – 0745-1745 hrs.;

 a. After 1900, officers may contact the NCID offices at 207-7389.
 b. A limited number of follow up detectives may be available from 0500-0745 and 1745-1900 hrs. and if available can be contacted via the radio on 3H.

M. A copy of the offense report and SAPD Form #2089-PSA, is emailed or hand delivered to the Special Victims Unit prior to the end of the officer’s tour of duty and the original is either dropped off in person to SVU or via bin mail.

Answer 702

A

.09 COLLECTION OF EVIDENCE FROM SEXUAL ASSAULT SUSPECTS

A. If an officer arrests or detains a suspect, adult or juvenile, within a reasonable amount of time after the sexual assault or indecency with a child, he immediately notifies the follow up unit.
Depending on the circumstances of the case, the processing of the suspect for evidence may involve the following:

Collection of evidence from an arrested person, that is non-intrusionary, including photographs of defensive wounds, may be collected for the immediate preservation of evidence without a warrant.
Evidence that requires intrusion into the human body, such as the withdrawing of blood or the taking of a sample of DNA from inside the mouth, must be accomplished pursuant to a search warrant or through the voluntary written consent of the suspect.
Suspects detained but not arrested may have non-intrusionary evidence collected from their persons only pursuant to a search warrant or through the voluntary written consent of the suspect, unless exigent circumstances can be clearly articulated by the officer and/or detective assigned to the case stating why there was not enough time to procure a warrant.
The suspect, regardless of age, will be taken to the Methodist Specialty and Transplant Hospital (8026 Floyd Curl) for the examination.
An on-call SANE Nurse will be notified to conduct the examination to remove any biological or trace evidence, including the photographing of defensive wounds, from the sexual assault suspect.
Since Suspects and Victims are both taken to Methodist Specialty and Transplant, the officer must call to coordinate the suspect’s arrival to the location.
It is critical suspects and victims do not encounter each other at the hospital. Contact the appropriate follow up unit with a detained juvenile to ensure they are handled correctly.
All evidence removed from the suspect, except photographs of defensive wounds, will be packaged by the SANE Nurse and turned over to the officer.
The officer will place all collected evidence received from the SANE Nurse in the Property Room under the appropriate case number;
Normally, the victim’s sexual assault kit remains at Methodist Transplant or Christus Santa Rosa Hospital and is transported to the crime lab by follow up unit personnel.
If the officer comes into possession of the victim’s sexual assault kit, such as when the victim’s SANE exam was performed at a location other than one of the above hospitals, the officer will separate any suspect kit from the victim’s sexual assault kit and place the kits under separate barcodes.
It is critical to avoid the possibility of cross contamination when handling or transporting SANE kits or other biological material.
Any photographs taken by the SANE Nurse at the time of evidence collection will remain at the medical facility and will be picked up by the follow-up unit.

Answer 703

A

alphabet characters (A, B, C, etc.).

Other identifiers may be used as long as Division identifiers are known by assigned responders;

Answer 704

A

a Division Commander.

Brainscape's Knowledge GenomeTM

GM 50 Flashcards

Brainscape's Knowledge Genome^TM